Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Editorial board
T. Muraoka
VOLUME 49
Kees Versteegh
Approaches to Arabic
Linguistics
Presented to Kees Versteegh on the Occasion
of his Sixtieth Birthday
Edited by
Everhard Ditters and Harald Motzki
LEIDEN BOSTON
2007
This book is printed on acid-free paper.
A C.I.P. record for this book is available from the Library of Congress.
ISBN 0081-8461
ISBN 978 90 04 16015 6
Preface .................................................................................................. xi
HISTORY
Arabic avant la lettre. Divine, Prophetic, and Heroic Arabic ....... 189
Stefan Wild
LINGUISTICS
DIALECTS
Several of his publications have been translated into Arabic, and others
will follow.
At Nijmegen University, where Kees Versteegh is working since
1972, first as lecturer and later as full professor, he organized several
workshops about the History of Arabic Grammar (1984 and 1987)
and the Model of Arabic Grammar in other Languages (1997). With
intense pleasure the participants of these conferences remember these
fruitful academic gatherings occurring in a very informal and convivial
atmosphere. These gatherings resulted in two collective volumes he
edited in cooperation with one of his many colleagues. Thanks to his
co-editorship, international publication projects such as the History of
Language Sciences and the Encyclopaedia of Arabic Language and Lin-
guistics, Arabic linguistics acquired a firm place in the field of linguistics
in general. Generations of Dutch students, translators and interpreters
of Arabic will know his name from the two volumes of the dictionary
Woordenboek Arabisch-Nederlands/Nederlands-Arabisch of which he is
one of the editors.
This Festschrift will be a monument for Kees Versteegh in Arabic
studies, as a homage to his scholarly oeuvre. Several contributions
camd from former students who wrote their Ph.D. theses under his
supervision. As a matter of fact, all contributors studied with him. We
divided the collected articles into three chapters reflecting the foci of
his scholarly oeuvre: history of Arabic grammar, Arabic linguistics, and
Arabic dialectology. We have put the history of Arabic grammar first,
since it is Kees Versteeghs true domain. He wrote his Ph.D. in this field,
dedicated most of his publications to it, and returns to it. He translated
and commented upon al-Zajjjs Kitb al-dh , a theoretical treatise on
Arabic grammar and one of the classical works on this issue. Since the
1980s, his research and publications also have been directed towards
other historical and thematical topics in linguistics, and he certainly
will recognize many of his own ideas in the contributions in all three
sections. His studies on pidginization and creolization in Arabic and his
interest in Arabic dialects express his feeling for the historical develop-
ment of the Arabic language.
Kees Versteegh is a polyglot. When invited to lecture outside the
Netherlands he enjoys lecturing in the language of is audience, in Eng-
lish, French, German and Arabic, as well as Spanish or Czech. From
the start of his academic careerhe first studied Greek and Latinhe
cherished a fondness for these languages. In his research this became
preface xiii
1977
Greek Elements in Arabic Linguistic Thinking. (= Studies in Semitic
Languages and Linguistics, 7). Leiden: E. J. Brill. Also published as
PhD thesis University of Nijmegen. [Arabic translation by Mahmud
Kankr, 2000: Ansir ynniyya f l-fikr al-luaw al-arab. Amman:
Jamiyyat umml al-mat bi at-tawuniyya].
1978
The Arabic Terminology of Syntactic Position. Arabica 25, 261281.
1979
Die Mission des Kyrillos im Lichte der arabo-byzantinischen Bezie-
hungen. Zeitschrift der deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft 129,
233262.
Reviews
Ephrem Hunayn Festival Baghdd 47/2/1974. 1974. Baghdad: Mat bt
Majma al-Lua al-Suryniyya, Bibliotheca Orientalis 36, 9697.
Rundgren, Frithiof. 1976. ber den griechischen Einflu auf die arabische
Nationalgrammatik. Uppsala: Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis. N.S. 2(5),
119144. Bibliotheca Orientalis 36, 235236.
1980
Hellenistic Education and the Origin of Arabic Grammar. Progress in
Linguistic Historiography: Papers from the International Conference
on the History of the Language Sciences, Ottawa, 2831 August 1978.
Edited by Konrad Koerner. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 333344.
Logique et grammaire au dixime sicle. Histoire, pistmologie, Lan-
gage 2. 3952.
Notice bibliographique. Histoire, pistmologie, Langage 2. 6775.
The International Project Onomasticon Arabicum. Bibliotheca Orientalis
37, 291294.
The Origin of the Term qiys in Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift fr ara-
bische Linguistik 4, 730.
The Stoic Verbal System. Hermes 108, 338357.
xvi bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Ambros, Edith. 1979. Sieben Kapitel des arh Kitb Sbawaih von ar-
Rummn in Edition und bersetzung. Wien: Verlag des Verbandes der
wissenschaftlichen Gesellschaften sterreichs. Bibliotheca Orientalis
37, 361362.
Malti Douglas, Fedwa and Genevive Fourcade. 1976. The Treatment
by Computer of Medieval Arabic Biographical Data: An introduction
and guide to the Onomasticum Arabicum. Paris: Centre national de
la recherche scientifique. Bibliotheca Orientalis 37, 362.
Traini, Renato. 1977. Sources biographiques des Zadites (annes 1221200
h.): Letters alif-ha. Paris: Centre national de la recherche scientifique.
Bibliotheca Orientalis 37, 362363.
1981
A Dissenting Grammarian: Qutrub on declension. Historiographia Lin-
guistica 8, 403429. [See also The History of Linguistics in the Near
East. Edited by Kees Versteegh, Konrad Koerner and Hans-Josef
Niederehe. 1983. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 167193].
De taalsituatie in de Arabische wereld. De taal van de Islam: Opstellen
over Arabische, Turkse en Afghaanse cultuur. Nijmegen: Nederlandse
Vereniging voor de Studie van het Midden-Oosten en de Islam.
1938.
La conception des temps du verbe chez les grammairiens arabes. Ana-
lyses, thorie 3, 4768.
Reviews
Klein-Franke, Felix. 1980. Die klassische Antike in der Tradition des
Islam. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft. Bibliotheca
Orientalis 38, 734737.
1982
Progress and Change in the History of Arabic Grammar. Linguistics
in the Netherlands 1982. Edited by Saskia Daalder and Marinel Ger-
ritsen. Amsterdam: North-Holland. 3950.
Structural Change and Pidginization in the History of the Arabic
Language. Papers from the 5th International Conference on Histori-
cal Linguistics, Galway, April 610 1981. Edited by Anders Ahlqvist.
Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 362373.
Vertalingen voor 1ste jaarsstudenten Arabisch (with Gert Borg). Nijmegen:
Katholieke Universiteit Nijmegen.
bibliography kees versteegh xvii
Reviews
Dagorn, Ren. 1981. La geste dIsmal daprs lonomastique et la tradi-
tion arabes, Genve: Droz; Paris: Champion. Bibliotheca Orientalis
39, 720726.
Rowson, Everett and Seeger Bonebakker. 1980. A Computerized Listing
of Biographical Data from the Yatmat al-Dahr by al-Thalib. Malibu:
Undena Publications. Bibliotheca Orientalis 39, 727729.
1983
A Dissenting Grammarian: Qutrub on declension. The History of Lin-
guistics in the Near East. Konrad Koerner, Hans-Josef Niederehe, and
Kees Versteegh (Eds.). Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 167193. [See also
Historiographia Linguistica 1981. 8, 403429].
Arabic Grammar and the Corruption of Speech. Arab Language and
Culture. Edited by Ramzi Baalbaki. Beirut: American University of
Beirut. [= al-Abhth 31]. 139160.
Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 10, 8689.
Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 11, 8486.
History of Eastern Linguistics in the Soviet Union. Historiographia
Linguistica 10, 289307.
The History of Linguistics in the Near East. (= Studies in the History of
Linguistics, 28). Editor (with Konrad Koerner and Hans-Josef Nie-
derehe). Amsterdam: J. Benjamins.
1984
Arab Grammatical Studies before Sbawayh. Matriaux pour une histoire
des thories linguistiques = Essays toward a history of linguistic theories
= Materialien zu einer Geschichte der sprachwissenschaftlichen Theo-
rien. Edited by Sylvain Auroux, Michel Glatigny, Andr Jolly, Anne
Nicolas and Irne Rosier. Lille: Universit de Lille III. 227238.
Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 12, 8689.
Piginigado, kreoligado kaj Esperanto. Hungara Vivo 4, 127129.
Pidginization and Creolization: The case of Arabic. (= Current Issues in
Linguistic Theory, 33). Amsterdam: J. Benjamins.
xviii bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Bakalla, Muhammad. 1983. Arabic linguistics. London: Mansell. Biblio-
theca Orientalis 41, 751754.
Carter, Michael. 1982. Arab Linguistics: An introductory classical text
with translation and notes. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Bibliotheca
Orientalis 41, 225230.
Nebes, Norbert. 1982. Funktionsanalyse von kna yafalu. Hildesheim:
Olms. Bibliotheca Orientalis 41, 754757.
1985
Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 14, 7981.
La Grande tymologie dIbn Jinn. La linguistique fantastique. Edited
by Sylvain Auroux, Jean-Claude Chevalier, Nicole Jacques-Chaquin
and Christiane Marchello-Nizia. Paris: Denol. 4450.
Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar. Papers Presented during a
Workshop held at the University of Nijmegen, April 1619, 1984. Editor
(with Hartmut Bobzin). Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz. (= Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 15).
Survey of Journals. Arab Journal of Language Studies / al-Majalla
al-arabiyya li-d-dirst al-luawiyya 2, 189197.
The Development of Argumentation in Arabic Grammar: The declen-
sion of the dual and the plural. Studies in the History of Arabic Gram-
mar. Edited by Hartmut Bobzin and Kees Versteegh. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz. 1985. 152173. [= Zeitschrift fr arabische Linguistik
15].
Translation
Salih, Tayyib. Seizoen van de trek naar het noorden. Uit het Arabisch
vertaald en van een nawoord voorzien. Amsterdam: Meulenhoff.
[Dutch translation of Mawsim al-hijra il -aml].
Reviews
Sezgin, Fuat. 1982, 1984. Geschichte des arabischen Schrifttums. VIII.
Lexikographie. IX. Grammatik. Leiden: E. J. Brill. Historiographia
Linguistica 12, 452461.
1986
History of Arabic Grammar. Nijmegen: Instituut voor Talen en Culturen
van het Midden Oosten, Katholieke Universiteit.
bibliography kees versteegh xix
1987
al-Arab f jibl al-Alp. al-Azmina 7, 2630.
Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. Zeitschrift
fr arabische Linguistik 16, 130133.
Die arabische Sprachwissenschaft. Grundri der arabischen Philologie,
II. Edited by Helmut Gtje, Wiesbaden: L. Reichert. 148176.
Het Arabisch: Norm en realiteit (with Arie Schippers). Muiderberg: D.
Coutinho.
Marginality in the Arab Grammatical Tradition. Papers in the History
of Linguistics: Proceedings of the Third International Conference on
the History of the Language Sciences (ICHoLS III), Princeton, 1923
August 1984. Edited by Hans Aarsleff, Louis G. Kelly and Hans-Josef
Niederehe. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 8796.
Nahwiyyna wa-luawiyyna wa-mawqif Dozy iz at-turt an-nahw
al-arab. F l-mujamiyya al-arabiyya al-musira. Edited by Ahmed
El-Ayed and Ibrahim Ben Mrad. Tunis: Dr al-arb al-Islm.
401413.
Reviews
Sublet, Jacqueline. 1985. Cahiers donomastique Arabe, 19821984. Paris:
Centre national de la recherche scientifique. Bibliotheca Orientalis
44, 130133.
1988
De ontwikkeling van de technische woordenschat in Modern Standaard
Arabisch: Naar aanleiding van een recente publicatie. Sharqiyyt 1,
8085.
xx bibliography kees versteegh
1989
A Sociological View of the Arab Grammatical Tradition: Grammarians
and their professions. Studia linguistica et orientalia memoriae Haim
Blanc dedicate. Edited by Paul Wexler, Alexander Borg and Sasson
Somekh. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. 289302.
Early and late Grammarians in the Arab Tradition: The morpho-
nology of the hollow verbs. Zeitschrift fr arabische Linguistik 20,
922.
La tradition arabe. I : Le langage, la religion et la raison. Histoire des
ides linguistiques, I : La naissance des mtalangages en Orient et en
Occident. Edited by Sylvain Auroux. Lige: P. Mardaga. 243259.
The Definition of Philosophy in a Tenth-century Grammarian. Jerusa-
lem Studies in Arabic and Islam 12, 6692.
Vulgair Latijn en Koine-Grieks: De verhouding tussen standaardtaal
en volkstaal. Lampas 22, 7491.
Reviews
Bergter, Annette. 1989. Das Kapitel inna wa-ahawtuh aus dem Man-
haj as-slik des Grammatikers Ab H ayyn al-arnt (12561344).
Hildesheim: G. Olms. Historiographia Linguistica 16, 180184.
1990
Are Linguists Ridiculous? Notes on a heavenly discussion between
grammarians in the 11th century. History and Historiography of
Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference on the
History of the Language Sciences (ICHoLS IV), Trier, 2428 August
1987, I: Antiquitity17th Century. Edited by Konrad Koerner and
Hans-Josef Niederehe. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. 147155.
Borrowing and Influence: Greek grammar as a model. Le langage dans
lantiquit. Edited by Pierre Swiggers and Alphons Wouters. Leuven:
Peeters. 197212.
bibliography kees versteegh xxi
Freedom of the Speaker? The term ittis and related notions in Arabic
grammar. Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II. Edited by
Michael G. Carter and Kees Versteegh. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins,
1990. 281293 [Arabic translation by Bouchaib Barramou: H urriyyat
al-mutakallim? Mussa lah al-ittis wa-l-mafhm al-murtabiha bihi f
n-nahw al-arab. Fikr wa-naqd 3:24 (1999). 99110].
Grammar and Exegesis: The origins of Kufan grammar and the Tafsr
Muqtil. Der Islam 67, 206242. [Reprint in The Early Islamic Gram-
matical Tradition. Edited by Ramzi Baalbaki. Aldershot [etc.]: Ash-
gate/Variorum. 2007. 3773].
Over taal en verandering. Nmegen: Katholieke Universiteit. Inaugural
lecture, University of Nmegen.
Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II. Proceedings of the 2nd Sym-
posium on the History of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 April1 May,
1987. Editor (with Michael G. Carter). Amsterdam: J. Benjamins.
The Arab Presence in France and Switzerland in the 10th Century.
Arabica 37, 359388.
The Earliest Commentary on the Qurn: Muqtils Tafsr. Makalah-
makalah yang disampaikan dalam rangka kunjungan menteri Agama
R.I.H. Munawir Sjadzali, M.A. ke Negeri Belanda (31 Oktober
7 November 1988). Edited by Wim Stokhof and Nico Kaptein. Jakarta:
INIS. 213219. [with Indonesian translation: Tafsir Quran paling
awal: Tafsir Muqatil].
Reviews
Owens, Jonathan. 1988. The Foundations of Grammar: An introduction
to medieval Arabic grammatical theory. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Die
Welt des Islams 30, 248250.
1991
Arabic Language Teaching and the Status of Standard Arabic. Proceed-
ings of the Symposium on Differentiation in LSP, Learning and Teach-
ing, Leuven, 710 November 1990. Edited by Serge Verlinde. Leuven:
Instituut voor levende talen. 95102.
Greek Translations of the Qurn in Christian Polemics (9th century
A.D.). Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft 141,
5268.
Man. 1. In grammar. The Encyclopaedia of Islam: New edition. Edited
by C. E. Bosworth, E. van Donzel, B. Lewis and Ch. Pellat, assisted
by F. Th. Dijkema and S. Nurit. Leiden: E. J. Brill. VI, 346.
xxii bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Holes, Clive. 1990. Gulf Arabic. London: Routledge. Bibliotheca Orien-
talis 48, 293296.
Wouters, Alfons. 1988. The Chester Beatty Codex Ac. 1499: A Graeco-
Latin lexicon on the Pauline Epistles and a Greek grammar. Leuven:
Peeters. Bibliotheca Orientalis 48, 523527.
1992
De val van de Barmakiden volgens Tabar. Elf wijzen van interpreteren:
Essays over het lezen van teksten uit het islamitisch cultuurgebied.
Edited by Ed de Moor. Nijmegen: Instituut voor Talen en Culturen
van het Midden-Oosten. 117126.
Grammar and Rhetoric: Jurjn on the verbs of admiration. Studies in
Semitic Linguistics in Honor of Joshua Blau. Edited by M. Bar-Asher
[et al.]. Jerusalem: Hebrew University of Jerusalem. 113133. [=
Jerusalem Studies in Arabic and Islam 15].
The Debate about Latin and Early Romance. Diachronica 9, 259285.
The History of Linguistics in the Low Countries. (= Studies in the His-
tory of the Language Sciences 64). Editor (with Jan Noordegraaf and
Konrad Koerner). Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. [Published in 1988 as
Historiographia Linguistica 15, 1+2].
Reviews
Malina, Renate. 1987. Zum schriftlichen Gebrauch des kairenischen
Dialekts anhand ausgewhlter Texte von Sadaddn Wahba. Berlin:
Schwarz. Bibliotheca Orientalis 49, 526528.
Mitchell, T. F. 1990. Pronouncing Arabic, I. Oxford: Clarendon. Biblio-
theca Orientalis 49, 523526.
Sluiter, Ineke. 1990. Ancient Grammar in Context, Amsterdam: VU
University Press. Historiographia Linguistica 19, 401408.
bibliography kees versteegh xxiii
1993
Arabic Grammar and Qurnic Exegesis in Early Islam. Leiden: E. J.
Brill.
Esperanto as a First Language: Language acquisition with a restricted
input. Linguistics 31, 539555.
Leveling in the Sudan: From Arabic creole to Arabic dialects. Interna-
tional Journal of the Sociology of Language 99, 6579.
Three is a Crowd: lawyers and linguists on Qurn 4/11. Wolfdietrich
Fischer zum 65. Geburtstag. Edited by Hartmut Bobzin and Otto Jas-
trow. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. 302315 [= Zeitschrift fr arabische
Linguistik 25].
Reviews
Jastrow, Otto. 1990. Der arabische Dialekt der Juden von Aqra und Arbl.
Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz. Bibliotheca Orientalis 50, 858862.
Johnstone, Barbara. 1991. Repetition in Arabic Discourse: Paradigms,
syntagms, and the ecology of Language. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins.
Bibliotheca Orientalis 50, 855858.
1994
Arabic Outside the Arab World. Editor. New Delhi: Bahri Publications.
[= Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics, 20].
The Arabic Linguistic Tradition in a Comparative Perspective. Arab
Journal of the Humanities 12 (no. 46), 282297.
The Notion of Underlying Levels in the Arabic Grammatical Tradi-
tion. Historiographia Linguistica 21, 271296. [Arabic translation by
Bouchab Barramou: Mafhm al-mustawayt at-tahtiyya f t-turt
an-nahw al-arab. Recherches Linguistiques 6:2 (2001), 81126].
Reviews
kesson, Joyce. 1990. Ahmad b. Al b. Masd on Arabic morphology =
Marh al-arwh, edited with translation, commentary and introduc-
tion. Part 1: The strong verb as-sahh. Leiden: E. J. Brill. Bibliotheca
Orientalis 51, 717719.
Broselow, Ellen, Mushira Eid and John McCarthy (Eds.). 1992. Perspec-
tives on Arabic Linguistics, IV. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Bibliotheca
Orientalis 51, 176179.
Comrie, Bernard and Mushira Eid (Eds.). 1991. Perspectives on Arabic
Linguistics, III. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Journal of the American
Oriental Society 114, 107109.
xxiv bibliography kees versteegh
1995
The Explanation of Linguistic Causes: Az-Zajjjs Theory of grammar,
introduction, translation, and commentary. Amsterdam: J. Benjamins.
(Translation of Ab l-Qsim Abd ar-Rahmn b. Ishq az-Zajjj, Kitb
al-dh f ilal an-nahw).
Arabic Outside the Arab World. (= Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics,
20). (Co-editor). New Delhi: Bahri Publications.
1996
Arab Grammarians: Ab l-Aswad ad-Dual, 3 i-ii; Ab H ayyn, 4
i-5 ii; Ab Ubayd, 5 ii; Ab Ubayda, 6 i; al-Axfa al-Asar, 11 ii;
al-Axfa al-Awsat, 11 ii-12, i; al-Asma, 49 ii-50 i; al-Astarbd, 50
i-51 i; al-Azhar, 59 i-ii; al-Batalys, 70 ii71 i; al-Frb, 288 ii-290
i; al-Fris, 290 i-ii; al-Farr, 291 i-292 i; al-Frzbd, 300 i-ii;
al-Jarm, 326 ii-327 i; al-Jawhar, 330 iii; al-Jurjn, 380 i-381 ii;
Xalaf al-Ahmar, 384 i-ii; Xall, 385 i386 i; Ibn Ab Ishq, 438 i; Ibn
jurrm, 438 i-ii; Ibn al-Anbr (Ab l-Bakr), 438 ii; Ibn al-Anbr
(Ab l-Barakt), 438 ii-439 ii; Ibn Aql, 439 i-440 i; Ibn Durayd, 441
i-ii; Ibn Fris, 442 ii-443 i; Ibn Jinn, 445 ii-447 ii; Ibn al-H jib, 447
i-ii; Ibn Xlawayh, 447 ii-448 i; Ibn Him, 448 i-ii; Ibn Kaysn, 448
ii-449 i; Ibn Mad, 449 ii-450 ii; Ibn Mlik, 450 ii-451 i; Ibn Manzr,
451 i-ii; Ibn Qutayba, 452 i-ii; Ibn as-Sarrj, 452 ii-453 i; Ibn Sdah,
453 ii-454 i; Ibn as-Sikkt, 454 i-ii; Ibn uqayr, 454 ii-455 i; Ibn Usfr,
455 ii-456 i; Ibn Walld, 456 i-ii; Ibn Ya, 456 i-ii; Ixwn as-Saf,
458 i-ii; s ibn Umar at-Taqaf, 461 ii-462 i; al-Kis, al-Mzin, 617
ii- 618 i; al-Mubarrad, 651 ii-657 ii; an-Nahhs, 666 ii- 667 i; al-Ql,
766 i-ii; Qutrub, 767 ii- 768 i; ar-Rummn, 808 i-ii; Sbawayhi, 856
i-859 i; as-Srf, 863 i-864 i; as-Suyt, 895 ii-896 i; at-Talib, 904 i-ii;
Talab, 905 i-ii; Ukbar, 946 i-ii; Yahy ibn Ad, 1028 i-ii; az-Zabd,
1037 i-ii; az-Zajjj, 1038 i-ii; az-Zajjj, 1038 ii-1039 ii; az-Zamaxar,
1039 ii-1040 i; az-Zubayd, 1045 i-ii. Lexicon Grammaticorum. Edited
by Harro Stammerjohann. Tbingen: Niemeyer.
Jahilia. Het woordenboek van De duivelsverzen. Edited by Maarten
Asscher [et al.]. Amsterdam: Contact. 5253.
Linguistic Attitudes and the Origin of Speech in the Arab World.
Understanding Arabic: Essays in contemporary Arabic linguistics in
bibliography kees versteegh xxv
Reviews
Fernndez, Mauro. 1993. Diglossia: A comprehensive bibliography
19601990, Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Word 47, 288291.
Peled, Yishai. 1992. Conditional Structures in Classical Arabic. Wies-
baden: O. Harrassowitz. Bibliotheca Orientalis 53, 557560.
Wagner, Daniel A. 1993. Literacy, Culture, and Development: Becoming
literate in Morocco. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Interna-
tional Journal of the Sociology of Language 119, 129134.
1997
Bedouin and Townspeople: Ibn Khaldns view on the development of
Arabic. The Diversity of Development: Essays in honour of Jan Klein-
penning. Edited by Ton van Naerssen, Marcel Rutten and Annelies
Zoomers. Assen: Van Gorcum. 332340.
Landmarks in Linguistic Thought, III: The Arabic linguistic tradition.
London: Routledge.
Sarf. The Encyclopaedia of Islam: New edition. Edited by C. E. Bosworth,
E. van Donzel, W. P. Heinrichs and G. Lecomte, assisted by P. J. Bear-
man and S. Nurit. Leiden: E. J. Brill. IX, 5354.
al-Shaybn, Ab Amr Ishk b. Mirr. The Encyclopaedia of Islam: New
edition. Edited by C. E. Bosworth, E. van Donzel, W. P. Heinrichs
and G. Lecomte, assisted by P. J. Bearman and S. Nurit. Leiden:
E. J. Brill. IX, 394395.
The Arabic Language. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. [2nd
revised edition 2001] [Arabic translation by Muhammad a-arqw:
Al-lua al-arabiyya. Cairo: Al-Majlis al-al li-t -ta qfa, 2003].
The Arabic Tradition. The Emergence of Semantics in Four Linguistic
Traditions: Hebrew, Sanskrit, Greek, Arabic. Edited by Wout van
xxvi bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Bohas, Georges (Ed.). 1993. Dveloppements rcents en linguistique
arabe et smitique. Damas: Institut Franais de Damas. Bibliotheca
Orientalis 54, 788793.
Dialectologia Arabica: A collection of articles in honour of the sixtieth
birthday of Professor Heikki Palva. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society.
1995. Bibliotheca Orientalis 54, 800802.
Durand, Olivier. 1995. Introduzione ai dialetti arabi. Milan: Centro Studi
Camito-Semitici. Bibliotheca Orientalis 54, 799800.
Gille, Christiane. 1995. Das Kapitel al-Mausl (Das Relativum) aus dem
Manhaj as-slik des Grammatikers Ab H ayn al-arnt (12561344).
Hildesheim: G. Olms. Bibliotheca Orientalis 54, 793795.
Khan, Mohammad-Nauman. 1994. Die exegetischen Teile des Kitb al-
Ayn: Zur ltesten philologischen Koranexegese. Berlin: K. Schwarz.
Bibliotheca Orientalis 54, 806809.
Watson, Janet C. E. 1993. A Syntax of Sann Arabic. Wiesbaden:
O. Harrassowitz. Bibliotheca Orientalis 54, 795799.
1998
Reviews
Endress, Gerhard and Dimitri Gutas. 1994, 1995. A Greek and Arabic
Lexicon: Materials for a dictionary of the mediaeval translations from
Greek into Arabic, fasc. 2 and 3. Leiden: E. J. Brill. Journal of the
American Oriental Society, 118, 108109.
Ingham, Bruce. 1994. Najdi Arabic: Central Arabian. Amsterdam:
J. Benjamins. Bibliotheca Orientalis 55, 294297.
Marais, Jean (Ed.). 1996. Quebecs Aboriginal Languages: History, plan-
ning, development. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters. Applied Linguistics
19, 131135.
bibliography kees versteegh xxvii
1999
Loanwords from Arabic and the Merger of d /d. Compilation and
Creation in adab and lua: Studies in memory of Naphtali Kinberg
(19481997). Edited by Albert Arazi, Joseph Sadan and David
J. Wasserstein. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. 273286. [= Israel
Oriental Studies 19].
The Dutch/ArabicArabic/Dutch Dictionary Project: Aims and
methods (with Jan Hoogland). Revue de la lexicologie 1415,
1326.
Zayd ibn Als Commentary on the Qurn. Arabic Grammar and Lin-
guistics. Edited by Yasir Suleiman. London: Curzon Press. 929.
Reviews
Rizk, Attia. 1992. Ibn a-ajar. M ttafaqa lafzuh wa-xtalafa manhu.
Stuttgart: F. Steiner. Der Islam 76.184186.
2000
Ed de Moor (19362000). Sharqiyyt 12, iii-vi.
Editors Foreword. (With Sylvain Auroux, Konrad Koerner and Hans-
Josef Niederehe). History of the Language Sciences / Geschichte der
Sprachwissenschaften / Histoire des sciences du langage. I. Berlin:
W. de Gruyter. Volume I, HSK 18.1. XXVXXXV.
History of the Language Sciences: An international handbook on the
evolution of the study of language from the beginning to the present =
Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften: Ein internationales Handbuch zur
Entwicklung der Sprachforschung von den Anfngen bis zur Gegenwart
= Histoire des sciences du langage: Manuel international sur lvolution
de ltude du langage des origines nos jours, I. Editor (with Sylvain
Auroux, Konrad Koerner and Hans-Josef Niederehe). Berlin: W. de
Gruyter. Volume I, HSK 18:1.
Language and logic in the Arabic grammatical tradition. History of the
Language Sciences / Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften / Histoire des
sciences du langage, I. Edited by Sylvain Auroux, Konrad Koerner,
Hans-Josef Niederehe and Kees Versteegh. Berlin: W. de Gruyter.
Volume I, HSK 18.1. 300306.
Tasrf. The Encyclopaedia of Islam: New edition. Edited by P. J. Bearman,
Th. Banquis, C. E. Bosworth, E. van Donzel and W. P. Heinrichs.
Leiden: E. J. Brill. X. 360361.
xxviii bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Enk, Gerrit J. van, and Lourens de Vries. The Korowai of Irian Jaya:
Their language in its cultural context. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Word 51, 134137.
Lallot, Jean. Apollonius Dyscole, De la construction (syntaxe). I. Intro-
duction, texte et traduction. II. Notes et index. Paris: J. Vrin. Word
51, 304308.
2001
Arabic in Europe: From language of science to language of minority.
Lingua e stile 36, 335346.
Arabic in Madagascar. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African
Studies 64, 177187.
History of the Language Sciences / Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften /
Histoire des sciences du langage, II. Editor (with Sylvain Auroux,
Konrad Koerner and Hans-Josef Niederehe). Berlin W. de Gruyter.
Volume II, HSK 18:2.
Linguistic Contacts between Arabic and other Languages. Arabica 48,
470508.
Naphtali Kinberg. Studies in the Linguistic Structure of Classical Arabic.
Editor (with Leah Kinberg). Leiden: E. J. Brill.
Reviews
Kropp Dakubu, M. E. Korle meets the sea: A sociolinguistic history of
Accra. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Word 52, 163166.
Owens, Jonathan. 1998. Neighborhood and Ancestry: Variation in the
spoken Arabic of Maiduguri, Nigeria, Amsterdam: J. Benjamins. Journal
of African Languages and Linguistics 22, 101105.
2002
Dead or Alive? The Status of the Standard Language. Bilingualism in
Ancient Society: Language contact and the written word. Edited by
J.N. Adams, Mark Janse and Simon Swain. Oxford: Oxford University
Press. 5274.
al-Zadjdjdj, Ab Ishk Ibrhm b. al-Sar. The Encyclopaedia of Islam:
New edition. Edited by P. J. Bearman, Th. Banquis, C. E. Bosworth,
E. van Donzel and W. P. Heinrichs. Leiden: E. J. Brill. XI, 377378.
al-Zadjdjdj, Abu l-K sim Abd al-Rah mn b. Ish k. The Encyclo-
paedia of Islam: New edition. Edited by P. J. Bearman, Th. Banquis,
bibliography kees versteegh xxix
Translations
Al Jahiz: Traktaat over de lof van de zwarten boven de blanken. De
taal der engelen: 1250 jaar klassiek Arabisch proza. Edited by Arnoud
Vrolijk. Amsterdam: Contact. 135139.
Hunayn ibn Ishaq: De behandeling van staar. De taal der engelen: 1250
jaar klassiek Arabisch proza. Edited by Arnoud Vrolijk. Amsterdam:
Contact. 279282.
Reviews
Abu-Manga, Al-Amin. 1999. Hausa in the Sudan: Process of adaptation
to Arabic. Cologne: R. Kppe. Word 53, 292296.
2003
Arab tradition. International Encyclopedia of Linguistics (2nd ed.). Edited
by William J. Frawley. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 202204.
De Arabische taalkunde in Nederland. Sharqiyyt 15, 2942.
The Arabic component of the Indonesian lexicon. Rintisan kajian
leksikologi dan leksikografi. Edited by Lilie Suratminto and Muna-
war Holil. Jakarta: Fakultas Ilmu Pengetahuan Budaya Universitas
Indonesia. 216229.
Woordenboek Arabisch-Nederlands. Amsterdam: Bulaaq. Editor (with
Jan Hoogland and Manfred Woidich).
Woordenboek Nederlands-Arabisch. Amsterdam: Bulaaq. Editor (with
Jan Hoogland and Manfred Woidich).
2004
Approaches to Arabic Dialects: A collection of articles presented to Manfred
Woidich on the occasion of his sixtieth birthday. Editor (with Martine
Haak and Rudolf de Jong). Leiden: E. J. Brill.
From Classical Arabic to the Modern Vernaculars. Morphologie: Ein
internationales Handbuch zur Flexion und Wortbildung = Morphology:
an international handbook on inflection and word-formation. Edited
xxx bibliography kees versteegh
2005
Breaking the Rules Without Wanting to: Hypercorrection in Middle
Arabic texts. Investigating Arabic: Current parameters in analysis and
learning. Edited by Alaa Elgibali. Leiden: E. J. Brill. 318.
bibliography kees versteegh xxxi
Reviews
Talmon, Rafael. 2003. Eighth-century Iraqi Grammar: A critical explora-
tion of pre-H allian Arabic Linguistics. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Jerusalem Studies in Arabic and Islam 30, 528535.
2006
A new treatise about the ilal an-nah w : Ibn al-Warrq on inna
wa-axawtuh. Grammar as a Window onto Arabic Humanism: A
collection of articles in honour of Michael G. Carter. Edited by Lutz
Edzard and Janet Watson. Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz. 5165.
Arabic Linguistic Tradition. Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics:
Second edition. Editor in chief: Keith Brown. Oxford: Elsevier. I,
434440.
D d. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J.
Brill. I, A-Ed. 544545.
Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J. Brill.
General editor (with Mushira Eid, Alaa Elgibali, Manfred Woidich
and Andrzej Zaborski). I, A-Ed.
Introduction. (With Mushira Eid, Alaa Elgibal, Manfred Woidich and
Andrzej Zaborski. Eds.). Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Lin-
guistics. Leiden: E. J. Brill. I, A-Ed. v-x.
History of Arabic language teaching. Handbook for Arabic Language
Professionals in the 21st Century. Edited by Kassem M. Wahba, Zeinab
A. Taha and Liz England. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. 312.
History of the Language Sciences / Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften /
Histoire des sciences du langage. Editor (with Sylvain Auroux, Konrad
Koerner and Hans-Josef Niederehe). Berlin: W. de Gruyter. Volume
III, HSK 18.3.
Leerboek modern geschreven Arabisch. Grammatica, woorden, idioom
en oefeningen. (with Everhard Ditters and Lieke de Jong). Nijmegen:
Radboud Universiteit. 1, 2, 3.
The Study of the non-Western Linguistic Traditions. History of the
Language Sciences / Geschichte der Sprachwissenschaften / Histoire
des sciences du langage. Edited by Sylvain Auroux, E. F. K. Koerner,
Hans-Josef Niederehe and Kees Versteegh. Berlin: W. de Gruyter.
Volume III, 18.3. 27912802.
xxxii bibliography kees versteegh
Reviews
Crowley, Terry. 2004. Bislama Reference Grammar. Honolulu. University
of Hawaii Press. Bdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde 162,
572575.
2007
Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. General editor (with
Mushira Eid, Alaa Elgibali, Manfred Woidich and Andrzej Zaborski).
Leiden: E. J. Brill. II: Eg-Lan.
Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. General editor (with
Mushira Eid, Alaa Elgibali, Manfred Woidich and Andrzej Zaborski).
Leiden: E. J. Brill. III: Lan-Ser.
H araka. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J.
Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 232236.
Idfa. (With Karin C. Ryding). Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and
Linguistics. Leiden: E. J. Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 294298.
Idmr. (With Michael C. Carter). Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and
Linguistics. Leiden: E. J. Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 300302.
Il. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J.
Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 307308.
Illa. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J. Brill.
II: Eg-Lan. 308311.
Inna wa-axawtuh. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics.
Leiden: E. J. Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 354358.
Interrogative Pronoun. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics.
Leiden: E. J. Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 387389.
Isnd. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Leiden: E. J.
Brill. II: Eg-Lan. 434437.
HISTORY
INSIDE THE SPEAKERS MIND:
SPEAKERS AWARENESS AS ARBITER OF USAGE
IN ARAB GRAMMATICAL THEORY
Ramzi Baalbaki
American University, Beirut
1. Introduction
1
In his Muqaddima (10811084), Ibn Xaldn (d. 808/1406) praises Sbawayhis
Kitb on the grounds that its author did not confine it to the formal rules related to
irb and that it is replete with proverbs and citations from poetry and speech. Those
who study the Kitb are therefore likely to enhance their malaka (natural linguis-
4 ramzi baalbaki
tic ability), although some of them end up mastering grammar as a sina (craft), but
not as a malaka. Contrarily, the books of the later authors (kutub al-mutaaxxirn) are
void of poetry and the speech of the Arabs, and contain nothing but grammatical rules
(al-qawnn an-nahwiyya). Readers of such works, according to Ibn Xaldn, can hardly
be expected to enhance their malaka and can only master the craft. See also Zakariyy
(1986, 23 ff.).
2
See also Carter (2004, 9598) for further discussion of the speakers role and its
significance to Sbawayhis reasoning. It would be particularly interesting to examine
in more detail the effect of the speakers choice (96) and the speakers intention (97) on
utterances in Sbawayhis analysis of speech.
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 5
3
Carter (1991, 127128) notes that although Sbawayhi uses the term taqdr exceed-
ingly sparingly, only 24 times in fact (see Troupeau 1976, 167), he does give plenty of
advice on reconstruction without calling it taqdr.
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 7
meaning which justifies the elision of the verb is present in the context
of situation since the listener would assume the virtual existence of a
verb of which he is the agent. Consequently, the grammarians interven-
tion to restore this verb would only elucidate, rather than contradict
meaning, based on his understanding of what the speaker has in mind.
The second principle which governs the relationship between taqdr
and meaning represents a further stage in Sbawayhis analysis of con-
structions. While he remains faithful to the rule that taqdr should not
contradict meaning, he explores the niyya4 (intention) of the speaker to
explain why he may well utter a certain part of the construction although
he has another usage in mind. An example of this is his belief that each
of the two constructions lam tika and l tka has the status (manzila)
of a noun at the level of the speakers niyya, and can thus be interpreted
as lam yakun itynun (Kitb III:2829). The grammatical implication of
this niyya is only fully revealed when the uttered part is virtually replaced
by what the speaker intended to say. Thus, in Farazdaqs line: mamu
lays muslih na aratan * wa-l nibin ill bi-baynin urbuh,
nibin is in the genitive although at the level of the actual utterance it
is conjoined to muslih na, which, being the predicate of laysa, is in the
accusative. According to Sbawayhi, the recurrent use of the preposi-
tion bi- with the predicate of laysa (e.g., lays bi-muslih na) reveals the
true intention of the speaker, and hence nibin is in reality conjoined
to a genitive noun which does not feature in speech, but is as valid as
an uttered noun. In other words, the preposition, which the speaker
has in mind, is syntactically valid and operational, and it determines
usage as if it were actually uttered (h att kaannahum qad takallam
bih f l-awwal; Kitb III:29). As far as meaning is concerned, Sbawayhi
asserts that the assumption of the preposition bi- in bi-muslih na does
not alter the meaning5 (l yuayyir al-man) because the preposition is
indeed frequently used with the predicate of laysa. Similarly, Sbawayhi
intervenes in constructions of the type marartu bihi fa-id lahu sawtun
sawta h imrin/surxun surxa t-takl to supply a verb (i.e. yusawwitu,
4
According to Troupeau (1976, 208), the terms naw and niyya occur 13 and 27
times respectively in the Kitb. The concept of intention, however, is often expressed
by much more frequent termsincluding an (136 times), man (891 times), arda
(1361 times), etc. (Troupeau 1976, 150; 102)or by expressions such as kaannahum
ql, tawahham, ixtra, etc.
5
The significance of preserving the meaning of the construction in this line as well
as the meaning of other constructions within the context of Sbawayhis analysis of the
taqdr of an after f is discussed by Baalbaki (2001, 186209, esp. 188).
8 ramzi baalbaki
3. Post-Sbawayhi authors
The first post-Sbawayhi author whose work reflects serious concern for
the speakers awareness is certainly Ibn Jinn. Groomed in the gram-
matical tradition and himself author of several works which are in full
conformity with the general grammatical theorymost notably Sirr
sinat al-irb, al-Luma f l-Arabiyya, and at-Tasrf al-mulkIbn
6
For the various senses in which the term tawahhum is used in the Kitb, see Baal-
baki (1982, 234237). In this particular case of Farazdaqs line, tawahhum refers to the
speakers mental restoration of elided parts in the utterance, resulting in their govern-
ment of parts actually uttered.
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 9
7
Ibn Jinn often expresses the notion of intuitiveness by derivatives of the root t-b-
(e.g., sun al-br subh nahu f an tabaa n-ns al hd; tahjum bihim tibuhum al
m yantiqna bihi; a-turhu l yuh sin bi-tabihi . . . hd l-qadr; Xasis II:117; III:273,
275 respectively). Cf. also the terms salqiyya and najr (I:76) for intuitiveness, and the
expressions min lutf al-h iss wa-safihi wa-nasat jawhar al-fikr wa-naqihi; quwwat
nafsihi wa-lutf h issihi; I:239; III:75). See also the comments of Suleiman (1999, 6465)
on the intuition of native speakers and the rationality of Arabic within the more general
framework of Ibn Jinn s study of tall (causation).
10 ramzi baalbaki
8
Note also the assertion of some grammarians that no mil may be classified as
manaw unless it cannot possibly be explained as lafz (l yudal il jal al-mil
manawiyyan ill inda taadd
u
r al-laf as-slih ; Suyt, Ham I:159).
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 11
makes a zealous appeal for placing meaning at the center stage of gram-
matical analysis and repeatedly argues that nazmwhose narrow sense
corresponds to word order, but which more generally refers to the com-
plex relations among the constituents of a structureis nothing other
than the proper adherence to the discipline of grammar (laysa n-nazm
ill an tada kalmaka l-wad allad yaqtadhi ilm an-nahw, 64). As such,
nazm should aim at what he calls the meanings of grammar (an-nazm
huwa tawaxx man n-nahw, 276, 282, 310, 403404; cf. Asrr, 65).
This means that syntactical rules, which govern the relationships among
the various parts of any utterance, can express the exact meaning
intended by the speaker since speech formation begins in ones mind ( f
n-nafs) and only then are words arranged to formulate the outcome of
this mental process according to a set of syntactical relationships (43f.).
Based on the conviction that the arrangement of meanings (at-tartb f
l-man) is prior to the arrangement of words, and that form is subsid-
iary to meaning (4445), it follows that any change in syntax is necessar-
ily accompanied by a change in meaning (86f.) The speakers awareness
of the intricacies of syntactic relations hence acts as a virtual arbiter in
his choice of the nazm, which best expresses the intended meaning.
Jurjns theory of nazm is to a large extent a reaction against tradi-
tional grammar in which formal aspects acquired greater prominence at
the expense of meaning. Even Sbawayhi, it has been suggested (Baalbaki
1983, 12f.), may have been the target of some of Jurjns critical com-
ments in which he accuses the grammarians of giving too little attention
to meaning. This notwithstanding, Jurjn is surely much closer in spirit
to Sbawayhi than to the later grammarians. Both authors strive to inves-
tigate the internal thinking of the speaker and examine its influence on
actual utterances. On a wider scale, Sbawayhi, Ibn Jinn and Jurjn, the
three most original authors in the related fields of nahw (grammar), phi-
lology (ilm al-lua), and stylistics (bala) respectively, share the view
that meaning should be the main focus of linguistic analysis. A variety
of conceptssuch as the speakers intuitiveness, competence, intention
and awareness of the tools at his disposalfeature in the works of the
three authors as part of their study of meaning and the mental processes
to which it is related. Unfortunately, however, the three have one more
thing in common, for although their focus on meaning and the speakers
awareness represents the most significant and original aspect of their
contribution, that focus gave way in later writings to an ever-growing
shift towards formal considerations and pedantic formulae which rel-
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 13
egate meaning and those concepts that are related to it to a much lower
position in their scale of linguistic analysis.
9
The term particle is used here in a general sense which includes not only what the
traditional grammarians classify as particles proper (h urf ), but also what they consider
to be verbs or nouns. We shall therefore refer, for example, to amm, interrogative m,
and the halumma as particles although they are traditionally classified as particle, noun,
and verb respectively.
14 ramzi baalbaki
10
Another example of law is m in mahm (interpreted as m- + -m), and after
conditional in, adverbial id, and pronominal ayy (III:5960).
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 15
11
Only rarely does h ikya involve more than two constituent elements, as in dlika
which Sbawayhi mentions side by side with other h ikya particles that are made up of
two elements (III:332), and laallam in which -m is added to laalla- (IV:221), itself a
compound particle (la- + -alla; III:332).
12
Sbawayhi also uses the term h ikya in connection with personal and demonstra-
tive pronouns (e.g., anta, hd, huli, dka, dlika, etc.; III:332; IV:218), but these are
not relevant to our discussion. Also beyond our scope are particles like lan which may
well be the result of merging two elements (III:5) but which speakers do not normally
recognize as compound particles.
16 ramzi baalbaki
17. rubbam: kalima wh ida, like qallam and other similar particles
(abhuhum; III:115); precedes verbs, unlike rubba- (III:116).
18. h abbad: kalima wh ida (II:180).
19. al and am (as interrogative particles): h ikya (III:332).
20. all and hall: h arf wh id (III:5, 115); -l imparts a new meaning to
hal- (IV:222).
21. ill (as a conditional particle): h ikya (III:332).
22. imm (as a conditional particle): h ikya (III:332); see also
h aytum.
23. md and badam: see below.
13
The term lamh al-asl is used by the later grammarians mainly to refer to the
speakers recognition of word class as reflected in usage. One example is that proper
nouns such as H rit and H asan, contrary to the norm, may be prefixed with the definite
article al- since they are originally adjectives. The article is hence called al-allat li-lamh
al-asl (Suyt , Ham I:174175), and the speakers recognition of the adjectival origin
(lamh as-sifa) of such proper nouns justifies its prefixation to them (Ibn Aql, arh
91; Umn, arh I:8586). Due to the obvious similarity between the recognition of an
original word class and the recognition of a particles etymology, the term lamh al-asl is
perfectly applicable to m d, man d, etc. when they are split into two units.
18 ramzi baalbaki
14
Note that Sbawayhi does not refer to the fact that, in actual speech, stress may be
an essential factor in differentiating md from m d. As a single word, md would
normally receive stress on its first syllable. Conversely, the separation of the two ele-
ments would be indicated by a stronger stress on d than m, perhaps to underline the
likely demonstrative function of d. In short, the difference in meaning between the two
options can be best demonstrated by translating md faalta and m d faalta as What
have you done? and What is this that you have done? respectively.
speakers awareness as arbiter of usage 19
15
Sbawayhi cites the reverse usage, i.e., the accusative after m d and the nomina-
tive after md. But although this is grammatically explicable, he asserts that to use the
nominative after m d and the accusative after md is the most appropriate manner
of response (wajh; aqrab il an taxud bihi; II:418419).
16
Cf. the role of reanalysis in the use of tlam as discussed by Anghelescu (2004,
115116).
17
To illustrate this distinction in the case of innam, for example, we can replace it
by inna m in some Qurnic verses where this is syntactically possible. The resulting
constructions are grammatically sound, but they obviously differ in meaning from the
original constructions. Cf. innam/inna m ttuhu al ilmin ind (Q, 28:78); wa-
man yabxal fa-innam/fa-inna m yabxalu an nafsihi (Q, 47, 38); innam/inna m
tuxzawna m kuntum tamalna (Q, 66:7).
20 ramzi baalbaki
conditional particle ill (see no. 21 in the list of h ikya particles). But
irrespective of whether or not he actually differentiates between the two
types of ill at the etymological level, it is obvious that he intends to
establish the contrast between h ikya and non-h ikya particles at the
level of the speakers awareness of their compound versus non-com-
pound nature. In other words, the fact that linguistic analysis may well
prove the compound nature of exceptive ill and similar particles is of
no interest here to Sbawayhi since it has little to do with the speakers
awareness of their etymology. Based on the fact that proper usage and
comprehension of pairs of utterances which have two apparently identi-
cal particles is dependent on the distinction between the simple versus
the compound nature of each particle in a pair (e.g., exceptive versus
conditional ill), we can interpret Sbawayhis interest in such pairs as
part of his overriding interest in the competence of the speaker in cor-
rectly communicating the intended meaning to his listener. As for why
the particles which he describes as non-h ikya are considerably fewer
in number than the h ikya particles, two reasons may be suggested. The
first is Sbawayhis faith in the speakers ability to break down compound
particles into their componentsalthough some of them are more eas-
ily recognizable as compounds than othersand thus arrive at what
the later authors call lamh al-asl. The second reason may have to do
with the grammarians own failure, due to their largely synchronic and
non-comparative approach, to ascertain the compound nature of a large
number of particles (e.g., lam, layta, lta, laysa, kayfa, ayna, etc.).
Within the above confines, the particles which Sbawayhi explicitly
describes as non-h ikya (III:332) are the following:
4. al: When used inceptively, it is a non-h ikya particle which has the
status of words like qaf (back) and rah (quern), in contrast to inter-
rogative al which is a h ikya particle (no. 19 above).
5. am: Like al, it is a non-h ikya particle when used inceptively, in
contrast to interrogative am (no. 19 above).
The distinction between non-h ikya particles and their h ikya counter-
parts in context is, of course, dependent on the speakers competence
in using the appropriate syntax, stress intonation, etc. But proper com-
municationas is implied in Sbawayhis textis also to a large extent a
function of the listeners ability to identify each of two identical particles
one of which is simple and the other is compound. This etymological
distinction is to be assumed in the listeners comprehension of sentences
in which these particles appear. Cf., for example:
l tatn fa-tuh additan ill izdadn fka rabatan (III:32) and wa-ill
tafir l wa-tarh amn akun min al-xsirna (Q 11:74; note that the
choice of these two examples is ours, since Sbawayhi does not provide
contrasting examples for ill);
amm Zaydun fa-muntaliqun (III:332), and amm anta muntaliqan
intalaqtu maaka (III:332); and
al innahu dhibun (IV:235) and al rajula imm Zaydun wa-imm
Amrun (I:289).
5. Conclusion
6. References
Ibn Xaldn, Muqaddima = Waliyy ad-Dn Ab Zayd Abd ar-Rahmn b. Muhammad
Ibn Xaldn, al-Muqaddima. Beirut: Dr al-Kitb al-Lubnn, 1956.
Jurjn, Asrr = Ab Bakr Abd al-Qhir b. Abd ar-Rahmn al-Jurjn, Asrr al-bala.
Ed. By Helmut Ritter. Istanbul: Government Press, 1954.
Jurjn, Awmil = Ab Bakr Abd al-Qhir b. Abd ar-Rahmn al-Jurjn, al-Awmil
al-mia n-nahwiyya f usl ilm al-Arabiyya, bi-arh Xlid al-Azhar. Ed. by al-Badrw
Zahrn. 2nd ed. Cairo: Dr al-Marif, 1988.
Jurjn, Dalil = Ab Bakr Abd al-Qhir b. Abd ar-Rahmn al-Jurjn, Dalil al-ijz.
Ed. by Muhammad Rad Rid. Repr. from the Cairo edition, Beirut: Dr al-Marifa,
1981.
Jurjn, Jumal = Ab Bakr Abd al-Qhir b. Abd ar-Rahmn al-Jurjn, al-Jumal. Ed. by
Al H aydar. Damascus: Dr al-H ikma, 1972.
Mubarrad, Muqtadab = Ab l-Abbs Muhammad b. Yazd al-Mubarrad, al-Muqtadab.
Ed. by Muhammad Abd al-Xliq Udayma. Cairo: Dr at-Tahrr, 196568.
Sbawayhi, Kitb = Ab Bir Amr b. Utm n Sbawayhi: al-Kitb. Ed. by Abd as-Salm
Muhammad Hrn. Cairo: al-Haya l-Misriyya l-mma, 1977.
Suyt, Ham = Jall ad-Dn Ab l-Fadl Abd ar-Rahmn b. Ab Bakr as-Suyt , Ham
al-hawmi arh jam al-jawmi f ilm al-Arabiyya. Cairo: Matb aat as-Sada, 1327
A.H.
Umn, arh = Ab l-H asan Al b. Muhammad al-Umn, arh al-Umn al
Alfiyyat Ibn Mlik al-musamm Manhaj as-slik il Alfiyyat Ibn Mlik. Ed. by
Muhammad Muhy d-Dn Abd al-H amd. Cairo: Dr al-Kitb al-Arab, 1955.
Michael Carter
University of Sydney
It is well known that Arabic grammar and Islamic law enjoy a peculiarly
close relationship. The two sciences are united by a common purpose,
to control linguistic and general behaviour respectively, and they share
a common methodology, namely the inductive derivation of rules from
a linguistic corpus and the deductive application of these universal rules
to particular acts of the Muslim. Where they differ is in their sources.
Grammar relies on the natural, worldly speech of a select range of
human speakers (Bedouin), law on the inspired texts of the Qurn and
the H adt, which are supernatural in origin and holy in status. All legal
systems are linguistic codes of one sort or another, spoken or written,
but the total dependence of Islamic law on a finite body of revealed and
prophetic language is unique. Its modern secular analogue is the type of
law which is derived from a written constitution, and here too, the law
has to be discovered by an essentially linguistic process, whereby there
is often disagreement over the presumed intentions of those (invariably
dead) who framed the document.
The development of a method for interpreting the language of the
Qurn and H adt took several centuries, and at risk of oversimplifica-
tion it can be said that the two sciences of grammar and law, aided by
imported Aristotelian logic, leap-frogged each other in an evolutionary
series, where the advances of one made further progress possible in the
other. This paper will review the general similarities in the approach
to language in early grammar and law, especially Sbawayhis intuitive
pragmatism (here in the non-technical sense) and his awareness of the
legal implications of grammatical form. There follows a brief account of
some grammatical/legal problems discussed in an intermediate phase
in the 3rd4th/9th10th centuries, and the paper concludes by listing a
number of features of legal methodology which can be linked with ideas
first noted in Sbawayhi, but which only acquired their fully developed
form after the maturing of us l al-fiqh as a discipline.
26 michael carter
1
It is relevant here to recall a similar analysis of the syntax of the zaydun ja abhu
structure, Zayd, his father came, which Bravmann (1953, 136) explained as deriv-
ing from a self-answered question, What about Zayd? His father came; Sbawayhi loc.
cit. actually compares the nima construction to this same type, viz. abdullhi dahaba
axhu Abdullh, his brother has gone. Bravmanns Isolated Natural Subject is not
pragmatics and contractual language in early arabic 29
Sbawayhi makes more or less the same statement about the syntax
of marartu bi-rajulayni muslimin wa-kfirin/muslimun wa-kfirun I
passed by two men, one Muslim, one pagan, where the speaker will
choose between the oblique case ( jarr) in adjectival agreement or the
independent (raf ) case as if muslimun wa-kfirun were predicates of
elided subjects, because, as Sbawayhi observes (Der. I:182/Bl. I:214,
and see Der. I:215/Bl. I:252 for another, similar case), the speaker tries
to anticipate the question the listener might pose, either, what sort of
men? or, who were these two men?
Like Grice, Sbawayhi is very concerned with the listeners role in
conversation, and there are many linguistic events in which the listener
influences the speakers choices. In what would be a neither [. . .] nor
[. . .] construction in English, it is qabh . i.e. structurally incorrect, to
say marartu bi-rajulin l frisin I passed by a man who was neither
a knight without completing it with wa-l ujin nor a valiant per-
son or the like, because it is an answer to someone who asked youor
whom you have put in the status of having askedwhether you passed
by a knight or a valiant man (Der. I:313/Bl. I:358, translators italics).
By the same token a listener who answers no to the disjunctive ques-
tion Is it Zayd who is with you or Bir? when one of them is known
to be there, has broken the communicative contract so gravely that his
answer is classified as muh l [morally] wrong, [semantically] absurd,
i.e. an utterance which is self-contradictory and therefore meaningless
(Der. I:432/Bl. I:483). As if to reinforce the importance of the listener,
Sbawayhi comments that in talking to oneself, e.g. hall af alu why
dont I do this, you are like the listener (Der. I:114/Bl. I:136, kunta
fhi ka-l-muxtabi).
There is even a discussion of what looks like body-language when
Sbawayhi describes how, on seeing the figure of an unknown person,
some sign (ya, the same word as for the verses of the Qurn!) appears
by which you identify him, so you exclaim, Abdullh! Good Lord!
Not only that, the same elliptical exclamation (that is, a predicate with-
out a subject) can be uttered when the sign by which you identify a
person is his voice or perfume, or simply what you hear said about him
(Der. I:240/Bl. I:279).
intrinsically Gricean, but it accords well with the eminently Pragmatic principle stated
by Sbawayhi (Kitb Der. I:346/Bl. I:394, a notion he acquired from his teacher al-
Xall b. Ahmad), that every subject must have a predicate because the listener is expect-
ing it.
30 michael carter
It will be apparent that as well as the speaker and listener, the physical
context is also linguistically relevant. Both Grice and Sbawayhi like to
present their data in the form of utterances set in a described situation.
In Grice it is undoubtedly fictitious and often involves broken-down
cars or sherry parties, in Sbawayhi it probably reflects actual observa-
tion, e.g.:
an example of the suppression of the verb which could be expressed in
normal usage is when you see a man who has just returned from a journey
and you say, the best of returns xayra maqdamin, [. . .] where the depen-
dent (nasb) form is as if [the speaker] had [syntactically] constructed it on
the basis of having said may you return, viz. qadimta xayra maqdamin,
and even though he was not heard to say this expression, the arrival of the
other person and the sight of him have the same [linguistic] status as the
speakers saying qadimta (Der. I:114f./Bl. I:136f.).
The similarity with Gricean Pragmatics is unmistakable here: not only
does the speaker engage in a cooperative activity with the listener in a
real context, but that context itself can become an active constituent in
the grammatical form of the utterance (cf. Carter 2002, 7, where the
above item is discussed).
In the same way the vocative particle can be dispensed with when
the listener is standing right in front of the speaker (Der. I:104, 274/
Bl. I:125, 316); the object of a blessing does not have to be indicated
if the intended recipient is obvious from the context (Der. I:131/Bl.
I:157)the speaker however remains free to name the recipient for pur-
poses of emphasis). In a rather violent scenario (Der. I:107/Bl. I:128)
the speaker can dispense with the verb and merely shout the persons
name if he sees someone about to be killed or being abused. This is com-
mon in warnings, e.g. al-jidr(a) [mind] the wall!, al-asad(a) [dont
go near] the lion!, and the cry of at-tarq(a), at-trq(a) [get out of] the
way! [Get out of] the way!2
A striking feature of the Kitb is the sheer quantity of commercial and
contractual talk, much of it admittedly trivial, though it does tell us how
preoccupied the Bedouin in the Mirbad were with the price of sheep,
camels and wheat.3 But many items are strictly legal in form and con-
2
These are always printed with dependent (nasb) case endings, however, in the cir-
cumstances they are bound to be in pausal form.
3
The Mirbad was not only a market but also a place where H adt scholars came to
check their vocabulary (EI 2, art. Mirbad by C. Pellat), and this may be one of the
reasons why Sbawayhi came to Basra to study tr or H adt. As it happens mirbad
pragmatics and contractual language in early arabic 31
is mentioned once in the Kitb (Der. II:265/Bl. II:248) but only as an example of the
mif al pattern.
32 michael carter
yadan bi-yadin I traded with him hand in hand (i.e. for cash), where
the dependent (nasb) forms are obligatory, since they are not literal, but
simply mean immediately, on the spot, no matter how physically close
the listener might be. In other words the legal (utterance) meaning is
different from the overt (sentence) meaning: by saying these words in
this form a legal obligation is created regardless of their literal meaning.
This leads to a whole string of commercial expressions, bitu -a tan
wa-dirhaman, qmartuhu dirhaman f dirhamin, bituhu dr diran
bi-dirhamin, bitu l-burra qafzayni bi-dirhamin, axadtu zakta mlihi
dirhaman li-kulli arbana dirhaman, bayyantu lahu h isbahu bban
bban, in all of which the phrase indicating the unit and price (scil. tan
wa-dirhaman one sheep and one dirham) must be stated in its entirety,
otherwise the meaning will not be valid l yasih h u l-man, i.e. legally.
By this Sbawayhi means only in the case of a contractual intent, since
the shortened expressions omitting the price are still meaningful but not
in any contractual sense, e.g. bitu tan tan I hereby sell my [col-
lective] sheep, sheep by sheep, bituhu dr diran I hereby sell him
my house, one cubit, but this would lead the listener to believe that you
were selling your sheep one at a time or that your house was only one
cubit in size, and so on.
Nevertheless, as he observes, the price or the unit are frequently
omitted in ordinary speech, and people will say kna l-burru qafzayni
the wheat was [for sale] at two bushels, omitting the price, or al-burru
bi-sittna the wheat is for sixty [dirhams], omitting the unit of quantity.
They do this, Sbawayhi says, because in the first instance they know
in their hearts ( f sudrihim) that bi-dirhamin is meant and that the
dirham is the standard price unit (allad yusaaru alayhi), so it is as if
they were answering the question, How much you get for a dirham?,
while in the second they and the listener both know what they mean,
as if someone had asked What is the price of a load? and received the
answer The load is [for sale] at sixty [dirhams] (Der. I:166/Bl. I:196).
Sbawayhi advises us to follow the practice of the Arabs in this, though
al-Xall complicates the picture somewhat by pointing out alternative
formulations.
Sbawayhis Pragmatic approach is self-evident here: he puts the
conversation in a real-life setting, which assumes all the Gricean max-
ims: he distinguishes between utterance and sentence meaning, and he
accounts for the grammatical features of the expressions in terms of the
extralinguistic situation and the intentions of the participants. If a state-
ment such as yajzu an taqla bitu d-dra dirun bi-dirhamin (Der.
pragmatics and contractual language in early arabic 33
4
The old definition of jiz by Bergstrer (1935, 32) is still the most informative:
zulig im moralisch-religisen und zugleich rechtlichen Sinne, und daher rechtsgltig,
rechtswirksam. Replace legal by linguistic to see what the term meant to Sbawayhi:
permissible in a religious-moral and at the same time linguistic sense, hence linguisti-
cally valid, linguistically effective.
5
Sbawayhis examples in this section are not unambigously performatives, and they
can be, and have been translated elsewhere as literal statements I have sold etc.
6
The Stoic term pragmata for the things done which are represented by words is the
basis of our linguistic Pragmatics in the sense of doing things with words.
34 michael carter
7
Through a scribal error the single kad (scil. kad dirhaman) and paired kad (scil.
kad wa-kad dirhaman) are not distinguished in the manuscript.
8
Further references in Carter 2003a, endnote 27 referring to p. 180.
36 michael carter
not those who are miserly with the bounty that has come to them reckon
[being miserly] is better for them . . ., and Sbawayhi explains that God
here omits the word al-buxla being miserly which would be required
as the first direct object of reckon, because the listener, al-muxtab,
will know from the verb yabxalna they are miserly that miserliness
is meant. Anyone who has consulted a tafsr will be familiar with this
method of filling gaps in the Qurn, and the usl sources are no excep-
tion in the use of this procedure.
A second point of similarity between Sbawayhi and the usls is the
presumption of sanity. Sbawayhi assumes, without spelling it out, that a
speaker will be mentally capable of formulating an idea and conveying
it successfullythis is implicit in his criterion of mustaqm right, used
for utterances which are fully understood in their intended meaning,
and in the term murd what is intended for the meaning of speech
acts. The lawyers turned this into an overt legal principle. They had to
decide who was allowed to speak, and to eliminate those who were not
legal persons, and therefore had no voice, such as infants and the insane,
and they produced the following conditions of legally valid speech (here
paraphrased from Ali 2000, 42 based on al-mid, d. 631/1233):
1. It must be uttered intentionally.
2. It must be intended for a particular listener.
3. The listener must be rational and understand it.
The first condition presupposes sanity, because only a sane person can
form an intention at all (legal or otherwise), or indeed be a Muslim for
that matter (sanity later formed part of the definition of a Muslim); the
second criterion excludes soliloquy, and the third anchors speech in a
sane society, as well as giving us a hint as to how the usls saw them-
selves in the dialogue. To recall the notion of leap-frogging introduced
above, it should be noted that these new legal definitions of speech found
their way back into grammar, where the speech of the insane, or of those
talking in their sleep, or even of birds imitating humans, were excluded
for the sole reason that their speech could not be intentional (e.g. a-
irbn d. 977/1570, Nr 10, though it appeared before his time).
God himself comes under the same constraints: in order to commu-
nicate with humanity he must speak rationally. His attributes allow for
this: he has an intellect, a will and the power of speech, and his language
is that of the people he is addressing (there is some literature, which can-
not be looked at here, on the requirement that God address his prophets
in the language of their own people otherwise the revelation will be in
38 michael carter
vain: you cannot punish sinners for disobeying laws they are unable to
understand). For the usls Gods mode of communication (bayn) is
inevitably a major theme in their treatises: they either begin their works
with a detailed review of the nature of Arabic and of legal semantics,
e.g. the introductory chapters of Ab l-H usayn al-Basr (d. 436/1044),
Mutamad, or else the subject is raised after the epistemological topics
have been covered, e.g. al-Bqilln (d. 403/1013), Taqrb, from I:316.
For Sbawayhi, and later the usls, lexical meaning is arbitrary. Defi-
nition by synonyms only leads to infinite regression (Der. II:339/Bl.
II:312), and meaning is nothing more than intention, hence the verb
arda to want and its derivatives are among the commonest terms in
the Kitb (1,362 times, plus 20 in the passive, according to Troupeau
(1976), s.v., and there are also synonyms). It is clear, too, that Sbawayhi
fully aware of the distinction between utterance meaning and sentence
meaning: he refers more than once to man l-kalm and man l-h adt
the [integral] meaning of the utterance i.e. not simply the sum of its
lexical parts, and man itself is almost exclusively used to denote the
meaning of speech acts, not of words, such as the acts of expressing sur-
prise, asking a question, giving an order etc., e.g. the meaning of swear-
ing an oath man l-qasam, the meaning of calling man n-nid, and
even of grammatical categories, the meaning of the dependent form
man n-nasb, the meaning of tanwn, etc.
A significant similarity between Sbawayhi and the lawyers is that they
both define the meanings of the particles (h urf ) in terms of their dis-
course functions: thus wa- and is used to to bring one thing together
with another and join them without indication of order, and fa- and
[then] is the same except that you leave some scope for one to be after
the other (Der. II:330/Bl. II:304), cf. Ab l-H usayn, Mutamad I:20,
very concisely, wa- is li-l-jam for joining while fa- is li-l-taqb for
arranging consecutively. Sbawayhis definition of naam yes is inter-
esting: instead of the expected agreement or consent he gives us a
rather legalistic definition: naam indicates promise and belief , ida
wa-tasdq (Der. II:339/Bl. II:312), the former implying some kind of
contractual commitment (yes, I promise do it), the latter indicating
assent to a proposition (yes, I believe what you say), which in our con-
text could mean believing the sellers description of the goods or the
terms of a contract.
Sbawayhi never even asks where meaning originates, but the usls
were obliged to agree on an answer before they could proceed to the
pragmatics and contractual language in early arabic 39
derivation of law from the texts. Here is a case where the debates of
the intervening century and a half carried the lawyers a long way from
Sbawayhis agnostic position. They had to reconcile the potentially infi-
nite backward extension of meaning with the historical fact that Arabic
is not the oldest human language. Part of the solution, which will not be
discussed here, was to attribute to Adam the bridging role connecting
the supernatural Arabic he spoke in Heaven with the temporal world he
inhabited after the Fall. He himself did not speak Arabic on earth which
appeared only later, evolving naturally until it reached perfection in the
time of Adams prophetic heir and descendant, Muhammad.9
After Sbawayhi there was considerable discussion of the origins of
language, which has been investigated for the grammarians by Lou-
cel (196364), with the general conclusion that the choice lay between
divine ordination (tawqf) or human convention (tawdu). The lacuna
which Loucel pointed out, that there was no comparable study of the
origins of language in the legal sciences, remains unfilled and will not be
dealt with here. For our purposes it must suffice to note that there was
overall preference for the view that language is in some way convention-
ally imposed (by wad) but the identity of the imposer, wdi, is left
obscure, perhaps deliberately: it may be God, it may be the first users of
Arabic, it may be all users of Arabic who agree amongst themselves on
the meaning of a word.
The real dispute concerned whether meaning could be imposed inde-
pendently of a words being used. At one end of the spectrum (Mutazil),
a word does have a meaning before it is used, and at the other (Ibn
Taymiyya), a word cannot have a meaning until or indeed unless it is
used. These issues are well described by Ali (2000): what is important
for this paper is that none of these ideas, including the term wad in
this sense, are found in the Kitb. The concept must have emerged later,
probably under the influence of the Platonic debate over whether words
had meaning by their nature ( physis, cf. Arabic taba, replaced in Islm
by the creating God) or by imposition (thesis, the same as the wad of the
grammarians and lawyers).
From the lawyers point of view it was important to detach meaning
from prehistory: in spite of disagreement about the origins of language,
lexical meaning was taken as given, either a priori or as recorded by lexi-
cographical experts (ahl al-lua), or synchronically by mere usage. It
9
See Carter (2003b).
40 michael carter
could then be treated as purely conventional, and in this way the lawyers,
after a long debate in which Sbawayhi took no part, eventually returned
to his Pragmatist position. Meaning, regardless of where it comes from,
is what you do with the language, or, put another way, language is only
meaningful for usls when it has legal effects outside the actual utter-
ance. This restriction of meaning to habit and community usage enables
the law to control that communitys behaviour. The result is the same for
both grammarians and lawyers: speakers are obliged to stay within the
habitual codes, whether linguistic or social.
We might say that Sbawayhi took a lawyers view of language and
lawyers a Sbawayhian view. Consider his Pragmatist interpretation of
such verbs as ra etc. to see, consider, regard, be of the view that, of
which he says, even a blind man can use ra to see and say, I regarded
Zayd as the good man raaytu zaydan-i s-slih a (Der. I:13/Bl. I:18).10
The equivalent lawyers position is stated by a-aybn (b. 132/749, d.
189/804, and therefore a contemporary of Sbawayhi): a blind man who
has to feel the goods for sale when making a purchase is in the same
place (mawdi, i.e. legal situation) as a sighted man ( Jmi 81).
The primacy of usage and habit is asserted many times by Sbawayhi,
and there is no better illustration (because one senses a tongue in cheek
here) than his discussion of expressions of praise and blame. They are
not unconstrained, he says, you must follow the speech habits of the
Arabs, so you cannot, for example, praise someone for being a tailor
or a seed-merchant, still less praise a person in terms normally used of
God, e.g. al-h amdu li-zaydin praise be to Zayd!. Sbawayhi, or pos-
sibly a commentator, allows himself a pun here by saying that would
be a grave sin, am, playing on tam magnification, the name for
this laudatory construction (Der. I:214f/Bl. I:251). And although it is
correct to use such attested idioms as he is as close to me as where my
waist-cloth is tied huwa minn maqida l-izri, you cannot say he is as
close to me as where the horse is tethered *huwa minn marbita l-farasi
(Der. I:174/Bl. I:206). Ab l-H usayn discusses the interdependence of
meaning and use in a similar way (e.g. Mutamad I:17f, 2228), and it is,
of course the central problem of usl semantics, as Ali (2000) demon-
strates in great detail.
10
The example is perhaps deliberately perverse, as the natural reading would be I
saw the good man Zayd, but this is in a chapter on verbs of the heart, so ra must have
the complete sentence Zayd [is] the good man as its direct object.
pragmatics and contractual language in early arabic 41
References
as-Srf, arh = Ab Sad as-Srf, arh Kitb Sbawayhi. MS Atif Efendi 2548.
a-irbn, Nr = Muhammad a-irbn al-Xatb, Arab Linguistics, an introductory clas-
sical text with translation and notes [Nr al-sajiyya f h all alfz al-jurrmiyya].
Michael G. Carter, ed. Amsterdam. 1981.
Kinga Dvnyi
Corvinus University, Budapest
1. Introduction
1
A notable exception, where different readings reflect a difference in meaning is e.g.
Q 5:6. For the analysis of this ya, see Dvnyi 198788 and Burton 1988.
2
Makram and Umar (1985, I:5) also list al-h amda and al-h amdi among the readings
of this verse.
3
This is in contrast with al-Axfa (Man I:9 ff.) whose analysis at this place is rather
similar to that of al-Farr, but who also provides a detailed grammatical analysis of the
raf ending.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 47
The (b) variant, i.e. al-h amdi li-llh is treated as one word. As such, it is
compared to ibil, where two i vowels follow each other. This is a descrip-
tive explanation making reference to usage. Other parallels are pre-
sented as well, among them the (c) variant: al-h amdu lu-llh. Al-Farr
approached this corpus from the point of view of the listener to the text.
And it seems from the second step employed by al-Farr that the listener
could hear some variants. And because al-Farr was interested not only
in the text of the Qurn, but obviously placed it in the context of the
Arabic language as a whole, he analyzed these versions. What is even
more, he proceeded to explain these variants in detail thoughaccord-
ing to his knowledgethese variations were not Qurnic readings.
4
It is important to note in this respect, that while the analysis of al-Axfa goes along
the same lines (Man I:18) (with the usual difference in terminology), but with one
basic difference, i.e. that he does not define negatively the ending of the word, in other
words he does not say what it is not, rather contents himself with saying what it is. That
is to say, he does not deal with the refutation of grammatically incorrect endings or with
48 kinga dvnyi
the refutation of grammatically not permissible analyses. This difference will remain
characteristic throughout the two books.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 49
5
In connection with this third analysis, attention should be called to the difficulties
of grammatical and semantic analysis arising from the lack of punctuation. No wonder
that writings on qat and istinf developed into a special branch of the Qurnic sci-
ences. On the use of istinf and related terms in early grammar and exegesis in general,
see Versteegh 1993, 132136 and the literature cited there.
6
The reading in nasb can be found at this place in todays printed editions, and this
was al-Farr s reading as well (Man I:12, 2). The raf ending was read by Ibn Masd
and Ubayy among others (see Makram and Umar 1985, III:125).
50 kinga dvnyi
the other word in the phrase which is a common noun (tijra, layl, amr)
but to the people who act behind these words. Similar structures are
not permitted in the case of possible ambiguity, e.g. *qad xasara abduka
is not permitted because of the ambiguity of the word abd (he can both
be trader and the object of trade), as al-Farr puts it, its meaning cannot
be known: fa-l yulamu manhu (Man I:15, 3).
7
For the difference in al-Farrs usage between hl and qat, see Kinberg 1996, 194.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 51
3.1.1 Man I:13 regarding Q 2:7 xatama llh al qulbihim wa-al
samihim wa-al absrihim iwatun
This ya has a variant reading, iwatan, which entails no differ-
ence in the meaning of the ya (wa-manhum wh id ).8 This read-
ing is explained by otherssays al-Farrby the idmr of jaala. This
8
It might be interesting to note that al-Axfa did not mention the existence of differ-
ent readings here (see al-Axfa, Man I:34).
52 kinga dvnyi
9
Mainly because he considered it the accepted reading. This was the reading of a
great number of readers, among them al-Kis (cf. Makram and Umar 1985, VII:65),
but in todays printed mush af the -un reading can be found.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 53
10
On the meaning of this term in the Man, see Kinberg 1996, 377.
54 kinga dvnyi
11
On the meaning of this term in the Man, see Kinberg 1996, 377.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 55
12
From among the 64 Qurn readers whom al-Farr quotes by name, Ibn Masd
is by far the most frequently quoted, with 411 references. Ubayy is the seventh most
frequently quoted reader, with 92 occurrences. Cf. Dvnyi 1991, 160161.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 57
3.5.1 h l
13
Az-Zajjj (Man II:317) refutes this explanation without mentioning al-Farr
and says that it is not necessary to suppose wa- in h l in general.
58 kinga dvnyi
14
Az-Zajjj (Man I:229) also accepts this analysis.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 59
In the case of xayr both structures are correct whereas their substitutes
cannot be used in the other structure. Since there are no different read-
ings here it might be supposed that by illustrating these structures in
detail al-Farr may possibly refute analyzing techniques that take into
account only the surface structure.
4. Concluding remarks
15
According to Talmon (2003, 309312) Sbawayhis main concern in syntax is irb
carried out by amal effect. Talmon also postulated that in the Kitb al-h udd, al-Farr
seemed to focus in his syntactic description on sentence-types and the determination
of syntactic relations. We can also experience in the Man that while al-Farr dealt
with irb-endings in a somewhat flexible way, he did not make allowances in the case
of syntactic structures.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 63
16
Al-Farr accepts these variant forms in case of different existing sam in the col-
lected corpus, as e.g. in the case of al-h amda/i/u (Q 1:2). If, however, the difference
appears not in the given vowel ending but in the explanation, then he always advocates
the explanation based on iml, as e.g. in Q 1:7 where he does not accept the expla-
nation according to which the ending of ayri would be determined by the preceding
alayhim.
64 kinga dvnyi
at-Tabar had access to a fuller version of the Man, it is, however, also
possible that al-Farr was only one prominent exponent of a common
thinking about grammatical issues in the Qurn and the analyses he
dictated from his memory belonged to a common stock of knowledge, a
long line of grammatical exegetical tradition, with which at-Tabar was
still familiar. It is interesting to note, however, that the two other Man
works, Ab Ubaydas Majz and al-Axfas Man do not seem to have
been incorporated into what became the definitive commentary of the
Qurn for centuries. So it might be concluded that while the grammati-
cal tradition as it was shaped in Basra outshone the Kfan, its trace in
the grammatical analysis of the Qurn is not significant.17
5. References
17
An interesting feature of al-Farr s explanatory method is his usageat certain
placesof the 2nd person singular in the case of irb endings and other grammatical
interpretations. The use of 2nd person singular is on the one hand the usual practice
in Sbawayhis Kitb, but Sbawayhi presents his linguistic analysis from the point of
view of the speaker, the producer of different utterances, whereas al-Farr deals with
a concrete text, and what is even more, the text of the revelation. The use of the 2nd
person singular in this case might indicate that al-Farr considered that the sacred text
was the one without the short vowel endings or that it had been revealed according to
what is termed as sabat ah ruf which leaves the reader of the text some freedom in the
vocalic realization. It should, however, be noted that al-Farrsimilarly to other com-
mentators, or in fact Sbawayhi when he deals with the Qurn (e.g. Kitb II:155, 10 ad
Q 5:69)does use the 3rd person singular or the passive when he deals with different
irb endings in the Qurn.
R in the MAN of al-farr
IDM 65
Werner Diem
Cologne
1. Introduction
al-h amdu li-llhi llad type with allad as a conjunction meaning that;
because (Piamenta 1979, 89, 172f., 176).
2. Theoretical approaches
1
This and the following translations from the Hebrew of Blau are mine.
arabic allad as a conjunction 69
are also some referring to future events with the heads of the clauses
expressing prevention and necessity.
As to the origin of the conjunctional allad, Blau begins section (a)
with the following words (1961, 226):
Relatively usual are attributive clauses (apposition), which represent the
transition from relative clauses,
a statement which is continued in a note with the remark (words in
brackets are my additions):
However, this does not mean that allad introducing noun clauses has
originated from attributive clauses only. It is, for example, possible that
from sentences such as al-h amdu li-llhi llad anan Praise be to God
who helped me allad = k, e- [that; because] originated, marking
object clauses or mipne e [because].
These are quite general statements, which hint to the direction where,
according to Blau, a historical interpretation should be looked for. In his
opinion, as can be grasped from both remarks cited above, the origin of
allad as a conjunction has to be seen (a) in attributive relative clauses
and (b) in the al-h amdu li-llhi llad type.
2
CA = Classical Arabic, MA = Middle Arabic, ASP = Ancient South Palestinian, JA
= Judaeo-Arabic.
arabic allad as a conjunction 73
Contrary to this statement, the person in the A (i.e., the head) to whom
the illi clause refers is not always the logical subject, as is, e.g., borne
out by the above-mentioned example inta karihni lli bal il-h a, where
the Person, die im uS als Subjekt auftritt is the (logical) object, not
the (logical) subject of the sentence. Furthermore, there are examples of
type B declared by Woidich to be marginal where there is no pronomi-
nal concatenation between the illi clause and an element of the head at
all, e.g. ana mabst illi ma-g I am glad he did not come (1980, 229).
Considering this evidence, it seems to me that the feature of coreferenti-
ality is questionable for Woidichs type B in Cairene Arabic, and it is evi-
dent from Blaus, Spitalers and my evidence that it cannot be sustained
in a general diachronic and diatopic perspective. A certain degree of
coreferentiality is per se bound to exist for the simple reason that when
in the heads of sentences emotions are spoken of the causes of these
emotions as expressed in substantival clauses depending on those heads
are in most cases connected with the persons mentioned in the heads of
the sentences as having these emotions.
Important insights in Woidichs article are that in type B the element
of the head to which the illi clause refers must be human (1980, 230),
that the predicates are faktiv, that is, refer to real facts, mostly past
events (1980, 231), and that this kind of illi can always be replaced by
inn- that, with the difference that illi is considered by the informants
as being strker than inn-, that is, more affective (1980, 234).
sentences like il-h amdu li-llh illi waaik fiyya Lob sei Gott, der dich
mit mir zusammengebracht hat:
unterlag einer Funktionsschwche [. . .]. Als starres Syntagma wurde
diese Formel nicht mehr als analysierbar aufgefat, was zur Folge hatte,
da insbesondere N = allh nicht mehr als Nomen gesehen wurde, dem
ein syndetischer Relativsatz angeschlossen werden konnte. (1989, 111)
While in the assumption of Funktionsschwche Woidich explicitly fol-
lows Spitaler, he differs from him in assuming that the al-h amdu li-llhi
llad formula was re-interpreted because there are similar sentences in
Cairene Arabic having the same marked structure of Rhema-Thema,
that is, comment-topic, such as h ilwa di prima ist die! or b ikkalm
da eine Schande sind solche Worte! He sums this up by saying
da die Reinterpretation von illi als Relativpronomen zu illi da ausgelst
wurde durch den Umstand, da die ursprngliche syntaktische Struktur
mit dem eingebetteten Relativsatz nicht der thematisch-kommunikativen
Funktion dieser Stze entsprach. Sie war markiert und wurde durch Rein-
terpretation der bei diesen Stzen blichen funktionalen Satzstruktur
Prd.Subjekt angeglichen. Dadurch konnte dem illi die Funktion einer
Konjunktion zugeordnet werden, die Subjektsstze einleitet. (1989, 115)
Here we have to ask what Woidich intends to demonstrate from a
general Arabic perspective. Does he want to demonstrate a historical
development valid for Cairene Arabic only, or a general development
in Neo-Arabic the results of which are palpable in Cairene Arabic also?
A reconstruction of the first kind would be flawed by the fact that the
Cairene conjunctional allad cannot be detached from the common
history of Neo-Arabic, and a reconstruction of the second kind by the
fact that it would be problematic to reconstruct a common Neo-Arabic
development on the basis of the specific evidence of one modern dialect,
while disregarding other evidence, older and newer. Since we are con-
cerned here with the second perspective only, which is tantamount to a
general reconstruction of the conjunction allad in Neo-Arabic, we have
to ask what Woidichs theory means for the history of the conjunctional
allad in early Neo-Arabic.
In Neo-Arabic the equivalents of Woidichs above-mentioned two
Cairene examples would probably be something like h ilwa hd and ayb
hd l-kalm. Comparing these sentences with a sentence like al-h amdu
li-llhi llad jita, it seems very improbable that the two types of sen-
tences should have been mentally connected by any speaker of Arabic,
76 werner diem
The fact that Woidich declares his example (13) itnaddimit illi gat
maya sie bereute es, da sie mit mir gekommen war not to belong
to the original type, confirms that, in his opinion, it is in nominal sen-
tences that this type originated (1989, 119). Against this it can be argued
(a) that verbal sentences (such as itnaddamit illi) seem to prevail over
nominal sentences (such as ana h mr illi), and (b) that it seems highly
improbable to me that speakers should have used sentences like ana
h imruni llad addaytu d-dannra I am an ass, (I) who have paid the
dinars, an farh nuni llad najawtu I am glad, (I) who have escaped
or an mutaassifuni llad taaxxartu I am sorry, (I) who was late at all.
For this theory to be accepted, it would be prerequisite to find unam-
biguous relative clauses of this kind in Classical Arabic. I have checked
more than a thousand items with allad in Tradition, many of them in
dialogues, without finding even one example of such constructions, and
I dare say that it is very improbable that they occurred at all.
To sum up, as long as the syntactic type ana h imr illi dafat il-h isb,
which Woidich presumes to be the starting point of this type, is not
shown to have been a normal construction in pre-Neo-Arabic, I con-
sider sentences of this kind in Neo-Arabic the result of a specific devel-
opment, which should be explained otherwise, rather than the origin
thereof.
3
There follow four further an-clauses dependent on ka-llad yuh ibbu. Spitalers quo-
tation has the variant bi-sh ibih.
arabic allad as a conjunction 79
4
Goitein reads [il l-]xayri, Gil li-xayrin. Gil does not mention Goiteins reading.
5
allat, which seemingly refers to al-minnah, is due to a kind of hypercorrection.
6
Another example with allat that, or, more exactly, li-llat in order that, is li-
anna qawm mina l-maribati qad sr yusall indan li-llat (!7%%) yutbahum in
Goitein, Kneset, No 4v, 4f. Indeed, Goitein rendered !7%% as the Hebrew final conjunc-
tion *.)%. However, Gils re-edition in Texts, No 328, has %% instead of !7%%. So what
we have here is the simple prayer Allhu yutbhum May God reward them!sc. the
Maghrebis for praying in the synagogue of the Jerusalemites in Old Cairo.
arabic allad as a conjunction 81
B. The head of the sentence does not express praise of or gratitude to God
(a) The head of the sentence contains an abstract noun expressing a
non-personal emotional evaluation of the contents of the allad
clause
(5) wa-m wajadn azan li-qulbin ayra annahu l-waylu
lan nah nu llad in li-hdihi l-masibi wa-narab hdihi
l-akwsa l-murrata
We did not find consolation for our hearts but (all we can
say is) that woe is us that we have lived (long enough to go
through) these disasters und (that we) have to drink these
bitter cups!
Gottheil and Worrell, Fragments, No 27r, 79 = Gil, Texts, No
501r, 79 (letter from Jerusalem to al-Fustt, 1065 C.E.)
7
The details of the happy outcome of the affair in question are imparted immedi-
ately before the passage cited.
8
Gil in his translation considers dlika an antecedens of allad in the sense of the
German darber, da. However, the alladclause is an apposition to dlika, which in
its turn refers to details mentioned before. In other words, the sentence is an expansion
of the usual fa-h amidn llha al dlika.
9
The addition is mine. Other additions are possible, but praise of God is the most
probable one.
10
Dialectal form for maayn.The language of the letter is substandard and exhib-
its features of Moroccan Jewish Arabic.
11
The grapheme renders Masar < Masr < Misr.
82 werner diem
12
Sc. the male relatives of the bride.
13
Ashtor conceives of allad as standing for alladna, translating Estoy contento de
aquellos con que [he emparentado por matrimonio].
14
According to Ashtor, the date is 1053. The difference consists in the reading of the
last letter in the date according to the Jewish era on the margin (ttyd vs. ttyh )
15
Sc. the addressee and his mistress, the plural standing for the dual in vulgar
language.
16
That is, the mob.
17
Sc. a letter to be sent to the writer of the letter, who is the addressees father.
arabic allad as a conjunction 83
Anger
(10) wa-an adbnu alayka y-ax katr allad wasal[ta il]
Misra wa-lam tasil il Adana
I am very angry about you, O brother, that you came to
Egypt (or Cairo), whereas you did not come to Aden18
Braslavski, Mishar, r 12 (Letter from Aden to al-Mahdyah,
c. 1149 C.E.)
Reproach19
(11) m baqiya alayn ayun ill llad lam tuarrifn kayfa
knat wasyatu xlika naxuduhu (!) llad lam tuarrifn in
kna wasala laka ayun mina l-kutubi
Nothing remains for us (to say) except that (until now)
you have not informed us as to how your uncles last will
was. What we reproach him (!)20 with is that you did not
inform me as to whether you received any of our letters
Gottheil and Worrell, Fragments, No 9v, 40f. (letter from
al-Fust t to Aden, probably 12th c. C.E.)
Grief
(12) wa-azza alayn dlika katr allad lam yakn ah adun
minn indaka yuwinuka f-m jar alayka f taabika f
m yaxussu amra xlika
and we were very much grieved by that,21 (namely) that
none of us was with you to assist you in that which you
had to endure in your concerns regarding the affair of (the
illness and death of) your uncle
Gottheil and Worrell, Fragments, No 9r, 12f. (letter from
al-Fust t to Aden, probably 12th c. C.E.)
(13) wa-dqa sadrun katr allad lam yakn laka maahu
kitbun yutamminun
and we were very much distressed that he had no letter
of yours with him setting our minds at rest (with regard
to you)
18
The writer intends to say that continuing the travel from Egypt to Aden would have
been easy for the addressee, his brother.
19
Only the second allad in (11) is an example of allad following a verb expressing
reproach. For the first allad, see (17).
20
Scribal error for you.
21
Reference to the illness and death of the addressees uncle, the details of which are
recapitulated by the writer before.
84 werner diem
22
Reference to two addressees, whose letter the writer answers.
arabic allad as a conjunction 85
Asking whether we can conclude from the scarcity of this type in doc-
uments, especially letters, that it was likewise marginal in the spoken
language, we must allow for some reservations. The H amdalah occurs
frequently in letters, mostly at the beginning but also in other parts.
Usually the H amdalah is mentioned in the context of news which are
deemed praiseworthy, as, for example, the writers or other persons
good health or a good outcome of a difficult situation. However, this
kind of the H amdalah is usually preceded by the report of the fact to
which it refers, as, e.g., katabtu ilayka . . . wa-an wa-man qibal bi-
xayrin wa-fiyatin wa-l-h amdu li-llhi (al dlika) I am writing you . . .,
while I and my family are in good healthPraise be to God (for this).
This conventional structure prevents the al-h amdu li-llhi llad type
from frequently occurring in letters, which in its turn must also lead
to lower frequency of the re-interpreted al-h amdu li-llhi llad in let-
ters than may have been the case in the spoken language. Documentary
texts where the al-h amdu li-llhi llad type usually does occur are, e.g.,
waqf documents, appointments of high officials and marriage contracts
between persons belonging to the upper class. In these kinds of texts, an
introductory al-h amdu li-llhi llad is expanded into long complicated
passages praising God for bounties related to the topic of the text, but
they are of so elaborated a style that they lack any deviation from the
literary language. To sum up, the rare occurrence of the re-interpreted
al-h amdu li-llhi llad in documents is of no relevance for the question
of its potential frequency in the spoken substandard language.
Scarce is also my evidence of the type B(a), where an abstract noun
expresses a non-personal evaluation of the contents of the allad clause,
especially when compared with the abundant evidence of this type in
Cairene Arabic as collected by Woidich (1980 and 1989). Again it is pos-
sible that the scarcity of early evidence of this type in documents is due
to specific circumstances. Expressions of this type are mostly exclama-
tory and thus have a clear Kundgabefunktion, which makes it more
likely for them to be used in the spoken language than in writing.
4. Historical typology
4.2 Types A(a) al-h amdu li-llhi llad Praise be to God that and type
A(b) h amidtu llha llad I praised God that
There seems to be nobody so far denying the validity of Spitalers theory
that in al-h amdu li-llhi llad, to which my type A(a) corresponds, the
relative particle came to be re-interpreted as a conjunction meaning
da; that. In Spitalers view, this development is due to a Funktions-
schwchung of allad, whereby das nachfolgende allad zwangslufig
den lebendigen Zusammenhang mit seinem Beziehungsnomen [ver-
lor] (for details see above 2.3), and this opinion is whole-heartedly
shared by Woidich (see above 2.7).
In my opinion, this approach is flawed by the fact that, besides the
nominal type al-h amdu li-llhi llad, attested in the Qurn and else-
where, there existed a corresponding verbal type, as e.g., in the saying
ascribed to Muhammad, y-maara l-arabi h mad llha llad rafaa
ankumu l-ura O company of the Arabs, praise God, who took the
tithes from you! Ibn H anbal, Musnad, Musnadu l-aarati l-mubairna
bi-l-jannati, No 1566. This verbal type is likewise attested in the form of
the re-interpreted verbal type A(b), along with the re-interpreted nomi-
nal type A(a). The existence of the re-interpreted verbal type A(b), whose
verb varies according to the syntactic context, clearly proves that when
the re-interpretation of al-h amdu li-llhi took place its constituents, in
spite of its formulaic character, must have been present in the minds of
the speakers and cannot have been a de-etymologized complex as, e.g.,
add how much? (< *qadr ayyi ayin) in Syrian Arabic or izzayy
how? (< * zayy) in Cairene Arabic. Both the nominal al-h amdu
li-llhi and the verbal h amidtu llha are equally attested as early as in
pre-Islamic poetry,23 which proves that they had existed side by side
from the first.
23
An example of al-h amdu li-llhi occurs in the Muallaqah of Imra al-Qays, verse
124, in Ahlwardts edition, and for examples of the verbal type see Brockelmann (1922,
arabic allad as a conjunction 87
116). Additional verbal examples occur in Labds Dwn No 6, 1 (h amidtu llha wa-
llhu l-h amdu etc.) and No 5, 1 (wa-llhu rabb mjidun mah mdun). For examples of
the related bi-h amdi llhi, see Brockelmann (1922), and an additional example occurs in
the Muallaqah of an-Nbiah, verse 12, likewise in Ahlwardts edition.
24
Such causal function of relative clauses is, it seems, not dealt with by Lehmann
1989 in his otherwise comprehensive morphological and semantic analysis of the rela-
tive clause in a great number of languages, including Arabic. Nor is his chapter Vom
Relativpronomen zur Konjunktion (1989, 389393) of much help for the problem of
allad as a conjunction, as he considers any relative pronouns that have lost their inflec-
tion to be Konjunktionen if there is no resumptive pronoun in the subordinate clause.
How Lehmann thinks the transition from uninflected relative pronouns to true con-
junctions meaning that or because to have been remains unclear, in spite of some
final remarks (1989, 391).
88 werner diem
(a) al-h amdu li-llhi al + noun/pronoun praise be to God for . . . and
h amidtu llha al + noun/pronoun I praised God for . . . In both
constructions, the al phrase indicates the reason why God shall
be praised. They are so frequent, particularly the former, that it is
superfluous to give examples.
25
Adab al-qad I, p. 247.
arabic allad as a conjunction 89
(b) al-h amdu li-llhi (al) an(na) praise be to God (for) that . . . and
h amidtu llha (al) an(na) I praised God (for) that . . . The prepo-
sition al can be elided as can any preposition preceding an(na).
Sentences of this kind seem absolutely normal, but I can adduce
only few examples of the verbal type, one from pre-Islamic times
and the other examples later: h amidtu llha an ams Rubayun *
bi-dri l-hni malh yan muqm (Wfir) I praised God that
Rubay got * in the house of disgrace, placed there in a shameful
way (Maqil b. Xuwaylid) Dwn al-Hudalyn I, No 14, 3; istahalla
yah madu rabbahu an l yakna asbahu d h aqqin f l-fayi and
he began to praise his Lord that none who had a right to the booty
had injured him ad-Drim, Sunan, Kitb al-muqaddimah, No 91;
allha ah madu al an jaalan min ulami l-arabyati God I
praise that he made me belong to the scholars of the Arabic lan-
guage az-Zamaxar, Mufassa l, 2, 2. Another example of the verbal
type with God as the subject of an anna-clause is cited by Blau for
Christian Arabic for kr I: akara llha annahu lam yuxallhi yusu
il abdihi He thanked God that He had not let (or made) him
act unjustly to His servant (19661967, 526). With subordinate
clauses whose subject is coreferential with Allh (second and third
examples), this construction is optional instead of (a), whereas it
is the only possible construction for subordinate clauses whose
subject is not coreferential with Allh (first example). It cannot be
excluded that this construction is more usual in or even restricted to
the verbal type, which is less formulaic than the nominal type. More
examples would be desirable; their being so scarce so far is perhaps
due to my (and my predecessors) not noting them simply because
they are so normal and therefore do not seem to deserve attention.
(c) ah maduhu (al) an(na) I praise Him (for) that . . . Whenever
Allh is replaced by the personal pronoun, only this construction
is possible. This construction is especially frequent as a continu-
ation of the relative clause type in the religious arengas (xutbahs)
of Mamluk documents: al-h amdu li-llhi llad . . . nah maduhu al
annahu . . . This construction would also be the only one possible
for the nominal head lahu l-h amdu but I have no examples.
(d) h amidtu llha id/fa- I praised God because. In this type, the sub-
ordinate clause is not dependent on the verb of the head as in the
preceding types but forms a subordinate causal clause. Examples
of each of the two conjunctions are the pre-Islamic verse h amidtu
90 werner diem
ilh bada Urwata id naj * Xirun wa-badu -arri ahwanu min
26
badin (Tawl) I praised my God after (the death of my brother)
Urwah (in battle) because (my son) Xir was (at least) saved, *
and some evil is easier to bear than another (Ab Xir) Dwn
al-Hudalyn III, No 14, 1, and, in Tradition, y-iata h mad llha
fa-qad barraaki llhu O iah, praise God because God has excul-
pated you! al-Buxr, Sah h , Kitb a-ahdt, No 2467.
These functional and syntactic correspondences are set off in the fol-
lowing table, in which all sentences express the notion of praise being
due to God for the salvation of the speakers, which is directly or indi-
rectly ascribed to Him. Of the types marked with ?, no evidence has
been adduced so far, but they would be normal Arabic from a syntactic
point of view.
(a) Nominal type
26
bad in the rhyme.
arabic allad as a conjunction 91
extent. On the other hand, it is the verbal type who seems to exhibit
greater variability, and thus it may have been this type, or perhaps rather
the existence of this type in its various subtypes, that may have triggered
the re-interpretation of the more formulaic nominal type.
Besides the examples of h md, there are examples of the same basic
structures containing synonymous expressions, which shows a first
semantic generalization of the re-interpreted allad. There is my example
(2) fa-li-llhi l-h amdu wa-l-minnatu llat (!) knati l-aqbatu h amdatan,
and among Spitalers examples there is ukuri r-Rah ma r-Rah mn /
allad lam tajid al-malik Qays f hd l-makn danke dem Allbarm-
herzigen, dass du den Knig Qais nicht an diesem Ort gefunden hast
from the Antar novel, where additionally Allh is replaced by its syn-
onym ar-Rah mn ar-Rah m, reversed there because of the rhyme. Blau
adduces further examples of synonymous verbs (sbh II, kr I, mjd II),
which, however, are syntactically ambiguous (1967).
We have reason to assume that the synonymous roots had already
been in use, besides h md, as alternatives of h md from the first, as we have
nominal examples such as wa-li-llhi l-h amdu wa--ukru To God praise
and thanks are due! (Dietrich, Briefe Hamburg, No 42a, 3 [c. 916/7 C.E.],
and likewise in Tradition fa-laka l-h amdu wa-laka -ukru Ab Dwd,
Sunan, Kitb al-adab, No 4411); wa--ukru li-llhi Thanks be to God!
(Anawati and Jomier, Papyrus chrtien, line 3 [9th c. C.E.]); wa-li-llhi
-ukru katran kam huwa ahluhu wa-mustah iqquhu To God repeated
thanks are due as he is entitled to and worthy of it (Rib, Lettres II,
No 17r, 5 [9th c. C.E.]). Furthermore, there are the Christian formulae
as-subh u li-llhi Praise be to God! and al-majdu li-llhi Glory be to
God!, for which the reader is referred to my Briefe Heidelberg, 24 and 25
respectively. An example of ukr and a relative clause is fa-aqimi -ukra
li-llhi llad snaka bi-dlika Therefore extend in the right way your
thanks to God, who preserved you thereby (Rib, Lettres I, No 5, 22
[9th c. C.E.]). When al-h amdu li-llhi llad and h amidtu llha llad were
re-interpreted, this development comprised the synonyms of h md also.
A final point to be made regards the translation of the re-interpreted
allad as that, da. Asking why allad can be translated with simple
that da, while, according to what I have tried to point out above, its
re-interpretation is based on an implicit causal relation, we should be
aware of a hitherto neglected fact: the syntactic opacity of that, da.
As with Arabic an and anna, prepositions preceding that, da in
English and German can or must be elided, which leads to the basic
94 werner diem
27
allad might also be interpreted here as a relative pronoun standing for alladna.
arabic allad as a conjunction 95
In my opinion the solution to this problem should not and need not
be looked for in Cairene examples such as h ilwa di or their early Neo-
Arabic equivalents if any existed. But before going into details, I think it
appropriate to recapitulate some important points:
(a) That the type A(a) al-h amdu li-llhi llad is likely to be the starting
point of the type B(a) malh un allad may be assumed for the simple
fact that it is only al-h amdu li-llhi llad where the transition of the
relative particle allad to a conjunction can be explained, whereas
this is not feasible for malh un allad and the other expressions of
this type.
(b) The sentences of my type B(a) have a comment-topic structure.
(c) When asking for a link between the type A(a) al-h amdu li-llhi llad
and the type B(a) malh un allad, one can rightly assume, as Woid-
ich did, that this link lies in that al-h amdu li-llhi llad had (finally)
been reduced to being a (positive) evaluation of the fact mentioned
in the allad-clause. This reduced meaning of al-h amdu li-llhi llad
would have been equivalent to good that; nice that.
However, there remains the question of the structure of the type B(a)
malh un allad. In this respect, my theory differs from Woidichs. In my
opinion, we should not start from sentences such as Cairene h ilwa di
or b ik-kalm da nor their Neo-Arabic equivalents in order to explain
malh un allad and similar expressions. Asking rather whether there
are other examples of the structure comment + that + topic in Classi-
cal Arabic (and Neo-Arabic), we can answer in the affirmative: there is
an absolutely normal type consisting of a noun + an(na) clause, as for
example malmun anna it is known that, h asanun anna it is good
that, barakatun anna it is a blessing that and so on.28 This is why
we can transpose all examples of my type B(a) into normal Arabic by
replacing allad by an(na), with potential small changes due to anna
demanding an accusative. It should be noted that the transformation
is always possible from allad to an(na) but not always from an(na)
to allad. Thus the transformation of malmun an(naka) jita into
?
malm allad jita would be very questionable, and for Cairene Arabic
?
malm illi gt would probably not be acceptable to most speakers. This
28
In modern literary Arabic, the type mina l-malmi anna would be more likely to
correspond.
96 werner diem
(a) The structure of the type B(a) is always comment + allad + topic
and cannot be reversed. Thus malh allad jita It is nice that
you came is possible, whereas *?allad jita malh is not. Woidich
remarked this for his type B, with which my type B(b) partially
overlaps, but this restriction is valid of his type A and my type B(a)
also (1980, 235).
(b) The head of the sentence consists of an evaluating expression.
Thus malh allad jita It is nice that you came is possible, whereas
*?malm allad jita It is known that you came is usually not.
(c) The logical subject of the allad-clause is human. Woidich remarked
this for his type B for the syntactic subject of the allad clause, but
the same holds true for this type (1980, 230). Thus a sentence such
as malh llad wasala is possible in the meaning It is nice that he
(sc. a certain person) arrived, whereas the meaning It is nice that it
(sc. a letter or a parcel) arrived is excluded or questionable. What,
however, is attested in both the old and new evidence are allad
clauses with a non-human syntactic subject which however refer
to a logical human subject. Thus, a sentence such as malh allad
wasalan It is nice that it (sc. the letter) reached me or, more freely,
arabic allad as a conjunction 97
(a) al-h amdu li-llhi llad najjn has the structure al-h amdu li-llhi +
allad clause, which is not reversible.
(b) The head is evaluating.
(c) The subject of the allad clause, which is Allh, is, in a anthropo-
morphistic perspective, human.
(d) The subject of the allad clause is pronominal, being implied in the
verb that refers to Allh.
(e) The relative clause refers to past events only due to the semantics of
to praise in the meaning of to thank.
declares it to have had a separate origin in relative clauses where the subject
of the head and the subject of the allad clause are coreferential, as in Cairene
ana h mr illi dafat il-h isb (1989). In my opinion, this interpretation
is flawed in several respects, for which the reader is referred to para-
graph 2.7.
Even if I do not find Woidichs historical explanation of this type con-
vincing, it is worthwhile to mention that the sentence which, according
to him, was the starting point shares with al-h amdu li-llhi llad, in spite
of their different structures, the three characteristics mentioned above:
(a) The relative clause is non-restrictive, (b) there is an underlying causal
relation between the head and the relative clause (I am an ass! Why?),
(c) illi goes back to the uninflected allad, to which the relative pronouns
had been reduced.
Before continuing, I think it appropriate and useful to draw atten-
tion to the fact that this type B(b) shares with type B(a) the restrictions
(b)(e) mentioned above, that is, all restrictions with the exception of
the one concerning specific heads. As in the case of type B(a), a histori-
cal theory must take account of these restrictions and explain why they
exist. The assumption that this type had developed from coreferential
relative clauses as claimed by Woidich would explain the restrictions
(a)(c) but not (d) nor (e), as some emotions can concern both past
and future events. Therefore, it is plausible to assume that this type B(b)
developed from the verbal type A(b) h amidtu llha llad in the same way
as the type B(a) developed from the nominal type A(a) al-h amdu li-llhi
llad. In the first case, features of an impersonal expression were general-
ized, and in the other case, features of a personal expression.
This development, as I see it, was as follows: The inherited conjunc-
tion in Arabic sentences of the type I was glad that he came was in
Classical Arabic, and still is in most dialects, an(na), e.g. farihtu an (or
annahu) ja in the classical language. In a certain sense, praising God
for an agreeable event that has happened is an expression of an emo-
tion. Saying, for example, in German Ich danke Gott, da ich davon
verschont geblieben bin, is equivalent to Ich bin froh, da etc. This
semantic overlap made it possible for the allad of h amidtu llha llad
I praised (thanked) God that to be generalized to verbs expressing
likewise the positive emotions of joy, contentment etc. Subsequently, as
Spitaler assumed, this generalization was extended, by Kontrastanalo-
gie, to verbs expressing negative emotions such as anger, reproach, grief
and so on (1962, 109).
arabic allad as a conjunction 99
29
I have simplified Singers complicated transcription.
30
See also Woidich (1980, 224) for the same function of illi in the Judaeo-Arabic
dialect of Tunis.
arabic allad as a conjunction 101
hensive studies of their exact distribution. For Cairene Arabic, one can
state on the basis of Woidichs two studies that examples as cited above
for Tunisian Arabic would most certainly be declared to be ungram-
matical or unusual by native speakers.
As for the early history of Cairene Arabic, one should be cautious
about taking the language of the Jewish-Arabic documents of the Cairo
Genizah from the 11th century C.E. and later as early evidence of Cairene
Arabic, because many of the writers of those documents hailed from
the Maghreb, especially from what is today Tunisia, and there remained
strong bonds between the Jewish traders who had settled in al-Fust t
and elsewhere in the Islamic East and their relatives and partners in the
Maghreb. This means that deviations in those documents in the usage of
allad as a conjunction as compared with todays Cairene Arabic might
be ascribed to the Maghrebine background of their writers. Therefore
extreme examples of the conjunction allad in Judaeo-Arabic docu-
ments are to be connected to modern Tunisian Arabic rather than to
modern Cairene Arabic.
analogy with an(na). To put it another way, the existence of cases such
as (6) wa-an . . . mutabitun bi-llad ttasaltu ilayhim I am . . . rejoicing
that I joined them, where allad is preceded by the preposition bi- typi-
cal of the verb bt VIII on which it depends, proves that the process
of the re-interpretation of allad as a conjunction meaning that had
taken place to its full extent. In the modern dialects, the combination
of illi with prepositions does not seem possible; at least Woidich does
not mention it for Cairene Arabic (1980 and 1989), and I do not have
examples thereof either.
Let us now have a look at some of my examples and see what syn-
tactic status allad has and which prepositions are possibly missing. I
shall insert the prepositions missing in the surface structure but existing
in the depth structure in brackets, and also give a translation of these
prepositions:
On the other hand, there do exist many sentences where allad intro-
duces a subject or an object clause so that no preposition can be supple-
mented in the deep structure:
(9) inn ajabu minka llad lam tusb man yaktubu laka kitb ill
daf atan
I am astonished at you that you (allegedly) found only once some-
body writing a letter down for you
5. Summary
31
And by analogy semantically related verbs such as kr I, sbh II and mjd II.
104 werner diem
wayl laka llad (for wayl laka taassaftu llad (for taassaftu
anna) anna)
Woe is you that I regretted that
(e) Generalization of allad for heads not expressing emotions, with
allad still having an affective value and retaining its original restric-
tions as in (a)(d):
alamtuhu llad
I informed him (of the pleasant/regrettable fact) that
(f) Generalization of allad as an unmarked conjunction that without
syntactic or semantic restrictions:
th il-ahid illi ma yfh
He made a pledge that he would not see her (Tunisian Arabic)
Stage (f), which is found in the dialect of Tunis and the dialect of the
Jews of Tripolis (Libya), is the final point of the development of allad as
a conjunction. The development of allad (illi) in Cairene Arabic, which
is the best-known of all Arabic dialects, reached stage (d) only.
sei Gott dem Herrn, der etc., is restricted to a high stylistic level and is
possible for verbs such as danken, preisen, loben only, e.g. Es ist mir
ein Anliegen, an dieser Stelle Herrn N.N. zu danken, der dieses Projekt
hochherzig gefrdert hat. A corresponding formulation in less formal
language is, e.g., Ich mchte Herrn N.N. dafr danken, da er dieses
Projekt untersttzt hat. So the fact that al-h amdu li-llhi llad seems
familiar to us must not prevent us from enquiring as to the reason for
this construction. To this question the following lines will be dedicated.
Considering that al-h amdu li-llhi was in use in pre-Islamic times
already (see above 5.2), we can assume that its expanded form al-h amdu
li-llhi llad is likewise pre-Islamic, although there is no explicit evidence
of it so far, at least none that I am aware of. The basic formula itself is
probably a calque on the Syriac ubh l-alh, as remarked by Theodor
Nldeke and Friedrich Schwally (1909, 112, footnote 1) for the Ftih ah
of the Qurn: entspricht genau syrischem ubh l-alh32 bezw.
teboht l-alh und neutestamentlichem . In this context,
Nldeke and Schwally also mention the so-called Berk in the Old Tes-
tament and the Christian liturgy as a parallel to the Syriac and Greek
formulae, without, however, connecting it to the Qurn. Anton Baum-
starks article Jdischer und christlicher Gebetstypus im Koran (1922)
is in a certain sense a comment on the short remarks of Nldeke and
Schwally, although he does not refer to them. In the following, I shall
first sum up some important points of Baumstarks article and then add
some deliberations of my own:
(a) In the Old Testament, there is the so-called Berk (blessing) of the
structure brk Yahw Blessed is (or be) Yahwe, to which a nomi-
nal attribute or a relative clause can be added, e.g. brk Yahw aer
hiss l etke m miy-yad Misrayim -miy-yad Par Blessed be Yahwe,
who delivered you from the hand of the Egyptians and the hand of
Pharaoh Exodus 18:10.33 A corresponding Qurnic expression is
tabraka in the subtypes tabraka llhu rabbu l-lamna Blessed
be God, the Lord of the whole world Q 7:54 and tabraka llad
bi-yadih l-mulku Blessed be the One in whose hand is the king-
dom Q 67:1, as well as the exceptional brika in brika man f n-nri
32
In the original text in Syriac script.
33
This passage has already been cited by Spitaler (1962, 107) but in another con-
text, where he asks whether this expression might be a parallel to the development of
al-h amdu li-llhi llad. Instead of Spitalers h iss l, read hiss l.
106 werner diem
relative clause while there are participles and clauses in the Greek
doxologies, but he does not pay further attention to this difference. In
my opinion, the solution to this problem is found in the Syriac context,
through which the doxology was probably transmitted to the Arabs.
Baumstark (1922, 235) mentions himself that the Syriac doxology is
ubh l-, without however further dwelling upon it, while Nldeke and
Schwally (1909), as mentioned above, were of the opinion that al-h amdu
li-llhi goes back to ubh l-alh. It is also interesting in this context
that for Barhebrus, as cited by S. Payne Smith (1879 II, 4026), the
ubh l- formula must have been closely connected to the H amdalah, as
he renders in his dictionary the Syriac ubh l-mrayym l-lmn Praise
be to the Elevated One to all eternity with the Arabic al-h amdu li-l-l
il d-dahri.
In the Syriac New Testament, the simple doxology is part of a sentence
in w-kulleh amm da-h z yab-w ubh l-alh Et omnis plebs ut vidit,
dedit laudem Deo Lk 18:43. Syntactically independent simple doxolo-
gies are ubh l-alh Praise be to God (Payne Smith 1903, 563a) and
ubh l-ab w-la-br wa-l-rh qadd Praise be to the Father, the
Son and the Holy Spirit (Payne Smith 1879 II, 4026). As for expanded
doxologies, we find evidence of them in the Breviarium Chaldaicum, e.g.
ubh l-tb da-b-yad h ubbeh gl teboht la-bnayn Praise be to the
Good One, who through His love revealed glory to men (Breviarium
I, kh = 28) or ubh l-mry da-b-yad tuqpeh hg
am la-trn wa-p
raq
l-abdaw Praise be to the Lord, who through His power overthrew
the tyrant and saved His servants (Breviarium III, 333). Examples of
expanded doxologies in colophons of books are ubh l-ab w-la-br
wa-l-rh qadd d-h ayyel wa-dar w-sayya Praise be to the Father,
the Son and the Holy Spirit, who strengthened, assisted and supported
(respectively) and ubh l-ab d-h ayyel w-la-br d-sayya wa-l-rh
d-qud d-aml Praise be to the Father, who strengthened, the Son,
who assisted, and the Spirit of Holiness, who accomplished (Payne
Smith 1879 II, 4026).
We can safely infer from these examples that the expanded Ara-
bic doxology al-h amdu li-llhi llad is nothing but a rendition of the
Syriac ubh l-alh d- in the same way as the simple Arabic doxology
al-h amdu li-llhi is a rendition of the Syriac ubh l-alh. This means
that the Arabic relative pronoun allad corresponds to the Syriac d-,
which in its chief function is also a relative pronoun. It is true that d- is
also a conjunction of wide and vague meaning so that the d-clauses of the
108 werner diem
7. References
Gottheil and Worrell, Fragments = Richard Gottheil and William H. Worrell, Fragments
from the Cairo Genizah in the Freer Collection. New York: Macmillan, 1927.
Ibn Ab d-Dam a-fi, Adab al-qad = ihb ad-Dn Ab Ishq Ibrhm b. Abd
Allh al-Hamdn al-H amaw al-marf bi-bn Ab d-Dam a-fi, Kitb adab
al-qad. Ed. by Muhy Hill as-Sarhn. 2 volumes. Bagdad: Matbaat al-ird, 1984.
Ibn H anbal, Musnad = Ahmad b. H anbal, Kitb al-Musnad. See Mawsat al-hadt.
al-Jhiz, H ayawn = Ab Utm n Amr b. Bahr al-Jhiz, Kitb al-h ayawn. Ed. by Abd
as-Salm Muhammad Hrn. Cairo: Matbaat Lajnat at-talf wa-t-tarjamah wa-n-
nar, 1969.
Labd, Dwn = arh Dwn Labd b. Rabah al-mir. Ed. by Ihsn Abbs. Kuwait:
Governmental Press, 1962.
Mawsat al-hadt = Mawsat al-hadt a-arf. al-Kutub at-tisah. CD-Rom. 1st edition.
arikat Saxr li-barmij al-hsib (19911996).
an-Nas, Sunan = Ab Abd ar-Rahmn an-Nas, Kitb as-Sunan. See Mawsat
al-hadt.
Rib, Lettres III = Ysuf Rib, Lettres arabes. Annales islamologiques 14, 1978,
1535; 16, 1980, 129.
Toledano, Teudot = Jacob Moses Toledano, Teudot mik-kitbe yad. Hebrew Union
College Annual 4, 1927, 449467.
az-Zamaxar, Mufassa l = Ab l-Qsim Mahmd b. Umar az-Zamaxar, Kitb
al-Mufassa l f n-nahw. Ed. by J. P. Broch. Christiania etc.: P. T. Mallingius, 1879.
Pierre Larcher
Universit de Provence (Aix-en-Provence, France)
1. Introduction
Vers la fin des annes 60 et le dbut des annes 70, il y eut, avec lex-
plosion de la linguistique, celle dune sous-discipline : lhistoire de la
linguistique. Le mouvement atteignit mme les arabisants. De par sa
nature mme, le dh dal-Zajjj attira lattention, en particulier celle
1
Ce texte est la version crite de la leon ERASMUS faite au sminaire du Pr. Dr.
Andreas Kaplony, lOrientalisches Seminar de lUniversit de Zrich, le mardi 19 Avril
2005. Que les collgues et tudiants de lOrientalisches Seminar soient remercis pour
leurs remarques et questions, dont a bnfici la version finale.
114 pierre larcher
2. Description
Dans les deux cas, cependant, muwallad signifie, comme seul objet ou
second des deux objets de wallada, engendr . Cest srement par
lide de mis au monde que le terme muwallad a pris, tout la fois
par mtaphore et gnralisation, le sens de tout ce qui est nouveau,
moderne (al-muh dat min kulli ay LA, art. wld). Il peut se dire, soit
de quelquun, soit de quelque chose : il se dit en particulier des potes
modernes (al-muwalladn min a-uar) et des nologismes (sum-
miya al-muwallad min al-kalm muwalladan id istah dathu wa-lam
yakun min kalmihim fm mad ce quil y a de muwallad dans le par-
ler a t ainsi appel, quand on le produit, sans quil ait exist dans le
parler auparavant ). Comme tout ce qui est nouveau, le terme peut sen-
tendre en mauvaise part comme quelque chose de fabriqu, controuv,
apocryphe. Cest sans doute par une extension de ce dernier sens que
trs tt le terme a pris le sens de non purement arabe , pouvant se
dire, l encore, soit de quelquun soit de quelque chose, cf. LA, art. WLD
arabiyya muwallada wa-rajul muwallad id kna arabiyyan ayr mah d
de larabe ou un homme muwallad(a), sil nest pas purement arabe .
Historiquement, le terme sest dit des enfants ns, la suite des conqutes
islamiques, dunions mixtes, gnralement entre des pres arabes et des
mres non arabes. Si donc lon suit le mouvement smantique suggr
par LA, le sens de mtis nest pas mettre au dpart, mais au contraire
larrive dun processus dvolution smantique . . . Notons que ce der-
nier sens pourrait aussi satteindre par un simple et banal processus de
tadmn, consistant faire entrer dans un mot le sens de toute une
collocation, muwallad tant mis pour muwallad min muxlatat al-Arab
al-Ajam ( issu/produit du mlange des Arabes et des non-Arabes ).2
Maintenant, en quoi consiste prcisment ce processus de corrup-
tion de la langue ? Celui-ci est dcrit au travers dune anecdote mettant
en scne Ab l-Aswad ad-Dual et sa fille.
La tradition a vu dans ce personnage du Ier/VIIe sicle le pre de
la grammaire arabe. Pourquoi lui plutt quun autre ? Dabord, parce
quil est dorigine arabe : sa gnalogie complte, telle que donne par les
Tabaqt (21) de Zubayd, m. 379/98990, le rattache aux Kinna, tribu
2
Cest un processus fondamental, tant dans le lexique de larabe classique (e.g. jihd
guerre sainte mis pour jihd f sabl li-llh combat pour Allah , siysa politi-
que , mis pour siysa madaniyya ( gouvernement de la cit ) que dans celui de larabe
moderne (tlib tudiant mis pour tlib al-ilm celui qui cherche le savoir , amn
secrtaire mis pour amn as-sirr dpositaire du secret ).
les origines de la grammaire arabe 117
3. Interprtation
3.1 De lhistoire . . .
Au XIXe sicle, la linguistique, ne au tournant du XVIIIe et du XIXe,
sous forme de la grammaire compare (des langues indo-europennes),
devient historique. On ne cherche plus seulement reconstruire en
amont des protolangues (Ursprache). Plus modestement, on cherche
retracer en aval lvolution des langues existantes.
La linguistique historique est une spcialit essentiellement allemande.
On ne stonnera donc pas que ce soient les arabisants allemands qui, les
premiers, se sont intresss lhistoire de larabe. Ils rinterprteront le
fasd al-lua de la tradition arabe, caractrise par les lah n ou fautes de
irb, comme le signe dune volution dun type ancien arabe (en alle-
mand Altarabisch et en anglais Old Arabic) vers un type no-arabe (en
allemand Neuarabisch et en anglais New ou Neo-Arabic). Le type ancien
arabe est videmment caractris par lexistence dune flexion dsinen-
tielle, casuelle et modale, le type no-arabe par la disparition de cette
flexion. Le type ancien arabe est donc plus synthtique et le type no-
arabe plus analytique. Corollairement, dans le type ancien arabe, lordre
des mots est plus libre, mais, dans le type no-arabe, moins libre. Quand
le type ancien arabe commence se dgrader en type no-arabe, nous
entrons dans le moyen arabe (en allemand Mittelarabisch et en anglais
Middle Arabic). Cest Heinrich Leberecht Fleischer (18011888) qui
projettera, implicitement dans un article de 1847, explicitement dans
un article de 1854, sur larabe cette tripartition clbre en linguistique
historique. Voici ce quil crit en 1854 (23) :
les origines de la grammaire arabe 119
Als heilige Sprache des Islam, Organ der Gelehrsamkeit und hhern Wis-
senschaftlichkeit, Mittelpunkt oder vielmehr ausschliesslicher Gegen-
stand aller Schulphilologie, steht das Altarabische seinem Abkmmling,
dem Neuarabischen, in der Anschauung des Morgenlandes selbst schroff
gegenber. Nur jenes heisst bei den Gelehrten al-luah, die Sprache, al-
arabiyyah, das Arabische schlechthin, dieses al-lisn al-mm oder al-
mm, die gemeine Mundart, la lingua volgare.
Il est clair, daprs la description mme quen donne Fleischer, que lan-
cien arabe est larabe classique et le no-arabe larabe dialectal et non
moins clair que si les deux varits coexistent en synchronie, larabe dia-
lectal est explicitement compris comme tant historiquement le des-
cendant (Abkmmling) de larabe classique.
Un peu plus loin (4), il mentionne le moyen arabe. Il lavait dj exac-
tement dcrit (du point de vue de la linguistique historique) en 1847,
propos de la langue dun codex grco-arabe (155), quil compare celle
des Mille et une nuits, auxquelles il avait consacr sa dissertatio en 1836 :
Wie in der Tausend und Einen Nachten sind auch hier einzelne jener
ltern Formen mit der neuern gleichsam noch im Kampfe begriffen ;
willkrlich tritt bald die eine, bald die andere ein . Ltat moyen dune
langue se caractrise en effet par lalternance, en synchronie, dlments
interprtables, en diachronie, comme relevant encore de ltat ancien
(lter) ou dj de ltat moderne (neuer).
Un de ses lves, Ignaz Goldziher (18501921), dans un crit de jeu-
nesse rdig en hongrois et aujourdhui traduit en anglais, compare expli-
citement la relation entre ancien arabe et no-arabe celle du latin et des
langues romanes, appeles jadis no-latines (Goldziher 1994, 20) :
As French abandoned the case inflection of Latin and developed the
Roman synthesis into analysis, making de lhomme from hominis, so did
the living Arabic of today dissolve the old rajulin into met r-rajul ; as latin
scrip-si developed into French jai crit (. . .), so was Old Arab[ic] aktubu
turned into biddi aktub ou bi-aktub.
Cette conception allemande de lhistoire de larabe se retrouve au
XXe sicle, en particulier chez Johann Fck (18941974) dans son grand
ouvrage Arabya (Fck, 1955[1950]), et, aujourdhui encore, chez Jos-
hua Blau, le grand matre du moyen arabe (e.g. Blau 2002, 16).
Objectivement, cette conception rejoint celle que sen faisait au VIIIe/
XIVe sicle Ibn Xaldn (m. 808/1406) et quil expose deux reprises
dans la Muqaddima : une premire fois dans la section 22 (6757), inti-
tule f lut ahl al-amsr ( Des parlers des habitants des villes ) du
chapitre IV, consacr aux villes et pays , et une seconde aux chapitres
120 pierre larcher
3
Cest cette expression qui donne, par rcriture, celle de al-lua al-fush .
4
Sur cette subdivision, cf. Rabin (1951). On comprend pourquoi Ab l-Aswad
d-Dual, natif du Hedjaz, est dit avoir fait un dtour par lArabie centrale . . .
5
Du moins la version de ce texte connue par le Muzhir (I:211212) ou, mieux, le
Iqtirh (20) de Suyt (m. 911/1505), non celle publie par Mahdi en 1969. Sur les deux
versions de ce texte, cf. Langhade (1994, 248258) et Larcher (2006a).
6
Sur Ibn Xaldn et lhistoire de larabe, cf. Versteegh (1997a, 153165) et Larcher
(2006b).
les origines de la grammaire arabe 121
3.2 la sociolinguistique
En citant lexpression italienne de lingua volgare, certes attire par celle
de al-lisn al-mm(),7 Fleischer montre quil na pas seulement en tte la
linguistique historique, mais aussi le modle italien. Or, dans ce modle,
la langue vulgaire nest videmment pas dsigne en termes diachro-
niques, cest--dire historiques, comme descendant du latin ; elle lest
au contraire, en termes synchroniques et sociolinguistiques, comme
langue du vulgum pecus, par opposition au latin langue des clercs .8
Mais, l encore, cette conception, qui, pour larabe, sera baptise ult-
rieurement par les arabisants diglossie,9 rejoint objectivement celle que
se font les auteurs de langue arabe, commencer dailleurs par az-Zajjj
lui-mme. Au chapitre XVII, intitul bb dikr al-fida f taallum al-
nahw, il demande (95) :
quoi sert dapprendre la grammaire, la plupart des gens parlant naturel-
lement10 sans flexion dsinentielle, quils ne connaissent pas, tout en com-
prenant les autres et en [se] faisant comprendre deux ( fa-m al-fida f
taallum an-nahw wa-aktar an-ns yatakallamn al sajiyyatihim bi-ayr
irb wa-l marifa minhum bihi fa-yafhamn wa-yufhimn ayrahum
mitl dlika).
7
Fleischer ne donne aucune rfrence pour ces deux expressions. Cest dommage,
car si, lpoque o il crit (milieu du XIXe sicle), lexpression al-arabiyya est, comme
il le note, couramment utilise, par une mtonymie significative, pour dsigner larabe
classique, cest lexpression de al-lua ad-drija qui est utilise pour dsigner larabe dia-
lectal. Lexpression dal-lua al-mmiyya (vs al-lua al-fush) napparatra que vers la
fin du XIXe sicle, du moins comme nom de cette varit, mais ds le Moyen Age, on la
rencontre pour dsigner un vulgarisme au sein de la langue.
8
La comparaison avec la situation italienne ne peut dailleurs tre pousse trop
loin sans aporie. Le domaine arabe na pas connu la rvolution qua connue le domaine
roman (et, mutatis mutandis, lEurope entire), savoir la promotion des langues vul-
gaires au rang de langues littraires, ce qui fera du latin (et seulement pour un temps,
plus ou moins long selon les pays) le vhicule de la seule culture savante. Ainsi, aprs
Il cantico delle creature (1226) de Saint Franois dAssise (11821226), Dante Alighieri
(12651321), logiquement, crit La Divine Comdie en langue vulgaire, mais traite de
celle-ci en latin (De vulgari eloquentia).
9
Ce terme, venu de la linguistique no-hellnique (1885), a t explicitement intro-
duit en linguistique arabe par William Marais (18741956), dans un article de 1935,
avant que le concept ne soit thoris, partir de larabe et dautres langues, par Charles
A. Ferguson (19211998), dans un article de 1959. Pour le dtail, cf. Larcher (2003).
10
Blanc (1979, 165, n. 20) traduit par spontaneously et Versteegh (1995) par
intuitively .
122 pierre larcher
4. Discussion
On le voit : tout tourne autour du irb, tant dans le texte daz-Zajjj que
dans linterprtation, tout la fois historique et sociolinguistique, qui en
est faite. Pourtant, ds avant le XIXe sicle et lessor de la linguistique his-
torique, une tout autre tendance tait apparue chez certains arabisants.
Ds le XVIIIe sicle, des arabisants, galement allemands dailleurs,
comme Johann Davis Michaelis (17171791) et Johann Gottfried Hasse
(17591806), avaient dvelopp ce que Gruntfest (1991), qui la tu-
die, appelle A Early theory of Redundancy of Arabic Case Endings .
Notons quils rinterprtaient des ides dj exprimes, au XVIIe
sicle, par lItalien Antonius ab Aquila (Antonio dellAquila), Franciscain
envoy en mission auprs des Chrtiens dAlep et auteur de la premire
11
On lira avec profit larticle Lah n al-mma, de EI2, d Charles Pellat (1914
1992).
12
On notera que dans lunique manuscrit, dat de 617H, qui sert de base ldition du
dh , il y a dans lavant-dernier paragraphe de ce chapitre XVII, une magnifique faute de
irb : lan yumkin ah ad [corrig par lditeur en ah adan] min al-muwalladn iqmat-hu
ill bi-marifat an-nahw ( Nul, parmi les muwalladn, ne pourrait ltablir (la posie),
sauf par la connaissance de la grammaire ). Labsence du alif rvle au minimum quil
nest pas prononc, voire suggre que ah ad a t trait comme le sujet de yumkin et par
suite iqma comme lobjet, ce que peut galement suggrer le masculin yumkin.
124 pierre larcher
13
Cf. Fck 1955, 78. Fck considre que la Fabrica overo Dittioniario della lingua vol-
gare arabica et italiana (1636) de Dominicus Germanus de Silesia (15881670) nest pas,
malgr son titre, un dictionnaire, mais une introduction, presque sans valeur, larabe
vulgaire. En tout cas, on voit que ce sont des clercs, Italiens ou lis lItalie, qui, sous
lappellation, valant signature, de langue vulgaire , sont les inventeurs de larabe
dialectal. Cette double qualit, jointe au fait quils taient des hommes de terrain et non
de cabinet, les y prdisposait.
les origines de la grammaire arabe 125
ancien arabe, quil nemploie pas et pense correcte : pour viter une faute,
il en commet une autre !
Certes, ces arabisants voyaient dans les dsinences casuelles une
invention des grammairiens arabes, position encore dfendue au XIXe
sicle par Alos Sprenger (18131893). Si personne aujourdhui ne croit
plus cela, en revanche la redondance de la flexion en arabe classique
amne beaucoup darabisants douter que lhistoire de larabe consiste
en une volution du type ancien arabe vers le type no-arabe, caractri-
ss respectivement par la prsence et labsence de cette flexion.
Deux positions se sont fait jour. Lune est trs rpandue chez les ara-
bisants. Lakkadien possdant une flexion casuelle triptote et dautres
langues smitiques exhibant des restes de flexion casuelle, les arabisants
admettent que la flexion casuelle de larabe classique est un trait de haute
antiquit, qui sest maintenu dans le seul registre potique de la langue.
Sous linfluence de la reprsentation diglossique de larabe, rtoprojete
sur lhistoire de la langue, ce registre potique est souvent vu comme
une langue commune (koin), vhiculaire, oppos aux vernaculaires que
sont les anciens dialectes arabes. Cette koin serait galement la langue
du Coran, quelques hedjazismes prs. Malgr les apparences, cette
hypothse arabisante nest pas si diffrente de la thse thologique ! Cel-
le-ci, on la vu, se rsume en une double identification : lune, opre sur
une base scripturaire, de la langue du Coran avec la langue de Quray
et lautre, opre sur une base purement dogmatique, de la langue de
Quray avec al-lua al-fush . Il y a un sicle, Vollers (1906) acceptait la
premire identification, mais refusait la seconde. Il supposait en effet que
le Coran avait dabord t nonc et crit dans le vernaculaire de la Mec-
que, parler ouest-arabique dpourvu de irb, avant dtre rcrit dans la
langue vhiculaire de la posie, parler est-arabique pourvu de ce irb.
Kahle (1959[1947]) reprit cette hypothse en lattnuant : si le ductus
coranique (rasm) reflte le vernaculaire de la Mecque, les qirt, elles,
refltent la langue vhiculaire de la posie. La plupart des arabisants (cf.
Blachre 1952, 6682) refusent la premire identification et, par suite,
la seconde, mais acceptent la troisime, dcoulant de la suppression
du moyen terme, i.e. langue du Coran = al-lua al-fush . Or, si lon relit
le clbre texte du Sh ib (5253) dIbn Fris (m. 395/1004), dont la
source nest autre que celui attribu al-Farr (m. 207/822) et jadis
exhum par Kahle (1959[1947]), on saperoit que pour concilier vrit
thologique et vrit philologique (i.e. le fait que la langue du Coran,
identifie la luat Quray, exhibe des traits, les fameux hedjazismes ,
qui ne sont pas ceux de la lua al-fush ) ces auteurs imaginaient un
126 pierre larcher
14
Sur ces deux textes, cf. Larcher 2004 et 2005b.
15
Comme le suggre en outre la ralisation du long rsultant de la qfiya mutlaqa
comme . . . -an (tanwn at-tarannum) attribue aux Tamm, dans la rcitation potique
(ind). Dans les deux cas, on peut donc avoir larticle et voir et/ou entendre /an.
16
Un exemple dans linscription dUmm al-Jiml (Ve ou VIe sicle ap. JC ?), avec un
mot lu successivement par Littmann en 1929 et 1949 comme iyran et afran. Nous
parlons bien sr ici de la seule flexion marque par des voyelles brves.
17
Cf. lanalyse qui est propose de Cor. 85 :2122 dans Larcher (2005a).
les origines de la grammaire arabe 127
18
Tamd est loin dtre un cas unique. On peut galement citer salsil de 76 :4 et
qawrr de 76 :1516. Par ailleurs on a compris que, pour ma part, je ne considre
pas - comme la prononciation pausale de -an, mais -an comme une rinterprtation
ultrieure dun - fondamental . Linscription du Jabal Usays (5289 ap. JC) montre
128 pierre larcher
quavant linvention du t marbta les deux ralisations dun mme morphme se tra-
duisent par deux graphies : -h la pause, mais -t en liaison (il reste des traces de cet tat
de choses dans le ductus coranique, avec des exemples de rah mat ou nimat). On voit
dautant moins pourquoi les deux ralisations phoniques du tanwnan de larabe classi-
que auraient donn lieu dans le matriel prclassique une graphie unique (correspon-
dant -) que, dans les textes du moyen arabe, le suffixe relateur -(V)n se traduit dans
la graphie par un n.
19
Ma collgue Catherine Miller, consulte, mindique qu lheure actuelle le Juba-
Arabic est encore loin dtre un dialecte arabe. En outre les choses vont un peu dans tous
les sens, manifestant des tendances contradictoires.
20
Cf. dailleurs, Versteegh lui-mme (2004).
21
Cf. Larcher (2006b).
les origines de la grammaire arabe 129
5. Conclusion
6. Rfrences
Fleischer, Heinrich. 188588. Ueber arabische Lexicographie und Talibs Fikh al-
luah. Berichte ber die Verhandlungen der Kniglich Schs. Gesellschaft der Wissen-
schaften. Philol.-histor. Cl. 114 [repris dans Kleinere Schriften, 18851888, t. III, ch.
IX, 152166].
Fck, Johann. 1955 [1950]. Arabya. Recherches sur lhistoire de la langue et du style
arabe, Paris, Didier [tr. fr. de Arabya. Untersuchungen zur arabischen Sprach- und Stil-
geschichte, Abhandlungen der schsischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Leipzig,
Philologisch-historische Klasse. Band 45, Heft 1, Berlin, Akademie Verlag, 1950].
. 1955. Die arabischen Studien in Europa bis in den Anfang des 20. Jahrhunderts.
Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz.
Goldziher, Ignaz. 1994. On the History of Grammar among the Arabs. An Essay in Lite-
rary History, translated and edited by K. Dvnyi et T. Ivnyi, Studies in the History of
the Language Sciences, 73, Amsterdam: Benjamins, 1994 [traduction anglaise de A
nyelvtudomny trtnete az araboknl, Nyelvtudomnyi Kzlemnyek 14, 307375,
1878].
Gruntfest, Y. 1991. From the History of Semitic Linguistics in Europe: an Early Theory
of Redundancy of Arabic Case-endings. in: K. Dvnyi et T. Ivnyi, eds. Proceedings
of the Colloquium on Arabic Grammar, The Arabist. Budapest Studies in Arabic 34.
Budapest. 195200.
Holes, Clive. 1995 [2004]. Modern Arabic. Structures, Functions, and Varieties. London:
Longman [Revised Edition, Washington D.C.: Georgetown University Press].
Kahle, Paul. 1947 [1959]. The Cairo Geniza, First Edition: 1947, Second Edition: 1959.
Oxford: Basil Blackwell.
Kazimirski, A. de Biberstein. 18467. Dictionnaire arabe franais, 2 vols. Paris : Tho-
phile Barrois.
Langhade, Jacques. 1994. Du Coran la philosophie. La langue arabe et la formation du
vocabulaire philosophique de Farabi. Prface de Jean Jolivet. Damas : IFEAD.
Larcher, Pierre. 2003. Diglossie arabisante et fush vs mmiyya arabes : essai dhistoire
parallle . Auroux, Sylvain et al. eds. History of Linguistics 1999. Selected Papers from
the Eighth International Conference on the History of the Language Sciences (ICHoLS
VIII), Fontenay-St.Cloud, France, coll. SIHoLS 99. Amsterdam: Benjamins. 4761.
. 2004. Thologie et philologie dans lislam mdival : relecture dun texte clbre
de Ibn Fris (Xe sicle) , dans Le discours sur la langue sous les rgimes autoritaires,
Cahiers de lILSL, n 17. Universit de Lausanne. 101114.
. 2005a. Arabe prislamique, arabe coranique, arabe classique : un continuum ? ,
dans Karl-Heinz Ohlig et Gerd-Rdiger Puin (Hrsg) : Die dunklen Anfnge. Neue
Forschungen zur Entstehung und frhen Geschichte des Islam. Berlin : Verlag Hans
Schiler. 248265.
. 2005b. DIbn Fris al-Farr ou un retour aux sources sur la lua al-fush , Asia-
tische Studien/Etudes asiatiques, LIX, 3, 797814.
. 2006a. Un texte dal-Frb sur la langue arabe rcrit ? Lutz Edzard and Janet
Watson (eds.). Grammar as a Window onto Arabic Humanism. A Collection of Articles
in honour of Michael G. Carter. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. 108129.
. 2006b. Sociolinguistique et histoire de larabe selon la Muqaddima dIbn Xaldn
(VIIIe/XIVe sicle) . Pier Giorgio Borbone, Alessandro Mengozzi e Mauro Tosco
(eds.), Loquentes Linguis Studi linguistici e orientali in onore di F.A. Pennacchietti /
Linguistic and Oriental Studies to Honour F.A. Pennacchietti / Lingvistika kaj orientaj
studoj honore al Fabrizio A. Pennacchietti. Wiesbaden : Harrassowitz. 425435.
Littmann, Enno. 1929. Die vorislamisch-arabische Inschrift aus Umm ij-Jiml , ZS,
VII, 197204.
. 1949. Arabic Inscriptions (Syria : Publications of the Princeton University Archaeo-
logical Expedition to Syria in 19045 and 1909. Division IV, Section D). Leiden: E. J.
Brill.
Marais, William. 1930. La diglossie arabe , in LEnseignement publicRevue pdago-
gique, tome 104 n12 (1930), 401409.
les origines de la grammaire arabe 133
Owens, Jonathan. 1998. Case and proto-Arabic. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and
African Studies, I:61/1, 5173 et II:61/2, 215227.
Rabin, Cham. 1951. Ancient West-Arabian. London: Taylors Foreign Press.
Versteegh, C. H. M. 1977. Greek Elements in Arabic Linguistic Thinking. Leiden: E. J.
Brill.
Versteegh, Kees. 1981 [1983]. A dissenting grammarian: Qutr ub on declension. Histo-
riographia Linguistica 8:23, 403429 [repris dans Cornelis H.M. Versteegh, Konrad
Koerner and Hans-J. Niederehe, eds. The History of Linguistics in the Near East, Stu-
dies in the History of Linguistics, 28. Amsterdam: Benjamins. 1983.167193].
. 1984. Pidginization and Creolization: The Case of Arabic. Amsterdam Studies in
the Theory and History of Linguistic Science, Series IV-Current Issues in Linguistic
Theory. Amsterdam: Benjamins.
. 1995. The Explanation of Linguistic Causes, Az-Zajjjs Theory of Grammar. Intro-
duction, Translation, Commentary. Studies in the History of the Language Sciences
75. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
. 1997a. Landmarks in Linguistic Thought III. The Arabic Linguistic Tradition. Coll.
History of Linguistic Thought. London: Routledge.
. 1997b [2001]. The Arabic Language. Edinburgh: University Press [2me d. 2001].
. 2004. Pidginization and Creolization revisited: The Case of Arabic. dans Mar-
tine Haak, Rudolf de Jong and Kees Versteegh, eds. Approaches to Arabic Dialects.
A Collection of Articles presented to Manfred Woidich on the Occasion of his Sixtieth
Birthday. Leiden: E. J. Brill. 343357.
Wetzstein, Johann Gottfried. 1868. Sprachliches aus den Zeltlagern der syrischen
Wste. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft 22. 69194.
contenant la syntaxe de larabe et dit aux gens : suivez cette voie, cest-
-dire allez dans ce sens ; nahw signifie direction et cest pourquoi la
grammaire a t appele nahw.
On dit quil fut le premier crire dans un ouvrage que le discours
est nom, verbe et particule, dote dune valeur smantique. Interrog
ce sujet, il dclara : je lai emprunt au commandeur des croyants Al b.
Ab Tlib (Dieu tende ses bndictions et son salut sur lui !) .
Il arrive quun nom, un qualificatif ou un surnom lemporte pour une
chose. Celle-ci est alors connue sous ce nom spcifiquement, lexclu-
sion de tout autre objet entrant dans la comprhension de ce nom. Le
fiqh, on le sait, est lintelligence des choses. On dit faqihtu le rcit aussi
bien que je [l] ai compris et un homme faqh ou faqih, cest--dire qui
comprend. Puis le fiqh est devenue la science religieuse, spcialement.
Et quand on dit un homme faqh, on vise seulement lhomme savant en
matire de Loi, mme si toute personne qui comprend une science et y
excelle est un faqh en cette science. Et, de mme, tibb est lhabilet. Cest
de l que lon dit un homme de tibb et tabb, sil est habile. Puis tabb est
devenu insprable de ceux qui sintressent la science des philosophes
ayant pour effet la conservation de la sant et, plus spcialement, per-
mettant de la recouvrer. Les exemples de ce genre de choses abondent.
SBAWAYHIS VIEW OF THE ZARF AS AN MIL
Aryeh Levin
The Hebrew University, Jerusalem
1. Introduction
1
See Sb. I:176, 1720.
2
The form maa is conceived of by Sbawayhi and the other grammarians as a noun
taking the accusative (see Sb. I:177, 1415). When following the particle min ma takes
the genitive, as in the example min maihifrom him (ibid.).
3
See Sb. I:170, 1720.
4
See Sb. I:176, 1720.
5
See Sb. I:207, 2021.
6
See Sb. I:222, 1420. Cf. Sb. I:207, 2021.
136 aryeh levin
ah adun mitluka fh nobody like you was in it (ibid.). When the zarf
is the indispensable predicate of the sentence it is called mustaqarr,7 lit.,
a place where someone is. As a grammatical term mustaqarr desig-
nates an indispensable predicate of the nominal sentence, denoting the
place where the subject is.8 The term mustaqarr is sometimes restricted
by an expression denoting its grammatical quality as an indispensable
part of the sentence, as in mustaqarran taktaf bihi a predicate denoting
the place where the subject is, with which you content yourself [when
intending to express a complete sentence] (Sb I:21, 11), and mustaqar-
ran lizaydin yastan bihi s-suktu a predicate denoting the place where
Zayd is [occurring in the sentences inna fh zaydun and inna zaydan
fh], with which a complete sentence can be satisfied as its comple-
ment.9 (Sb. I:222, 2021).
When the zarf is not an indispensable part of the sentence it is called
ayr mustaqarr not a mustaqarr.10 It is said that the zarf in this case is
mulan or law a dispensable zarf which does not operate as an mil
(see below 4).
The form mustaqarr sometimes occurs in combinations referring to a
dispensable part of the sentence. These combinations include restrictive
expressions indicating that the whole combination refers to a dispens-
able part: in referring to the example fh abdu llhi qimun Abdal-
lah is standing in it (Sb. I:223, 2), where fh is a dispensable part of
the sentence, Sbawayhi says that fh here is a mustaqarr lil-qiym an
expression denoting the place where the act of standing [expressed in
the predicate qimun] takes place.11 Similarly, in referring to the exam-
ples fha abdu llahi qiman and abdu llhi fha qiman Abdallah is
standing in it (Sb. I:222,15), Sbawayhi says that qiman is a h lun
mustaqarrun fh [an expression denoting] a h l (= a state) where [the
subject abdu llhi] is. Note that the above combination refers to a part
of the sentence that is a h l and not a zarf.
7
See Sb, I:21, 717; 222, 1422.
8
This definition is inferred from Sb. I:222, 1422; See also Sb. I:21, 411; as-Srf
III, 11, 914; as-Srf according to Jahn, 1895, I/2, 73, note 16.
9
Lit. with which silence can be satisfied [after expressing a complete sentence].
10
See Sb. I:21, 1415.
11
See Sb. I:223, 19.
sbawayhis view of the zarf as an mil 137
2.1 A zarf cannot operate as the mil producing the nominative in the
subject
Sbawayhi believes that in nominal sentences a zarf cannot operate
as the mil producing the nominative in the subject (= al-mubtada),
irrespective of whether the zarf occurs as an indispensable predicate
(= mustaqarr) or as a dispensable part of the sentence. Hence, in a sen-
tence like fh abdu llhi qiman (Sb. I:222,15), the mil of the subject
abdu llhi is not the predicate fh, but the abstract mil called al-ibtid.12
In Sbawayhis view, the sense of al-ibtid is the act of putting the noun
in a position where it is unaffected by any word operating as an mil.13
The view that the zarf cannot be the mil of the subject derives from
the notion that in a nominal sentence, a word operating as an mil pro-
ducing the nominative must be logically identical with the noun affected
by it. For example: in the sentence abdu llhi axka Abdallah is your
brother (Sb. I:6, 11), the subject abdu llhi is logically identical with
the predicate axka, since Abdallah is your brother and your brother
is Abdallah.14 Hence the subject abdu llhi is the mil producing the
nominative in the predicate axka.15 In contrast, in fh abdu llahi
qiman, the predicate fh is not identical with the subject abdu llhi,
since it is an expression denoting the place where the subject is, and
hence fh cannot be the mil producing the nominative in the subject
abdu llhi.16 As a result, this sentence does not include any word that
can operate as an mil producing the nominative in the subject abdu
llhi. Hence, abdu llhi takes the nominative because of the effect of
al-ibtid.17
Sbawayhi contends that examples beginning with inna, such as inna
fha zaydan (Sb. I:222, 20), confirm that fh does not produce the
12
See Sb. I:222, 14223, 18.
13
See Levin, (forthcoming), mubtada, 4.1.
14
This notion is discussed in detail in Levin, 1979, 199202; Levin, 2002, 359,
15360, 11; Levin, 2006, 110111, 5; Levin, forthcoming, Cahiers linguistiques, 3.2.
15
For this notion see Sb. I:239, 59.
16
See Sb. I:222, 14223, 18.
17
See Sb. I:222, 1419.
138 aryeh levin
nominative in the subject, since in the above example inna is the mil
of the subject zaydan, as is shown by its accusative ending.18
Although Sbawayhi believes that the zarf cannot be the mil of
the mubtada, it is inferred that he holds that the zarf can produce the
accusative in nouns occurring as a h l, as in nominal sentences of the
type abdu llhi fh qiman and fh abdu llhi qiman Abdallah is
standing in it (Sb. I:222, 15).19 In his view, in these examples, the mil
producing the accusative in the h l qiman is the zarf fh.20 Sbawayhi
also explicitly says that the zarf is the mil producing the accusative in
words denoting measures of distance occurring as a tamyz 21 (see below
3).
2.2 Arguments confirming that in Sbawayhis view the zarf is the mil
of the hl
Sbawayhi does not explicitly say that the zarf is the mil producing the
accusative in the h l in certain constructions of the nominal sentence.
However, his view in this respect is inferred from some places in the
Kitb text.
18
Sb. I:222, 19223, 1.
19
Sbawayhi refers to the accusative in these examples both as a h l (Sb. I:223, 1) and
a xabar (Sb. I:222, 140). For this special use of xabar see Levin, 1979, 193196, 2.4.
20
See Sb. I:222, 49. See also Sb. I:167, 1116; Sb. I:218, 616, especially lines
1213. See below 2.22.2.3.2.
21
The later grammarians term tamyz does not occur in the Kitb.
22
See Sb. I:21, 719.
sbawayhis view of the zarf as an mil 139
2.2.2 In his above discussion, dealing with the possibility that a zarf
can operate as an mil, Sbawayhi does not give any example illustrating
this point. However, it is clear that his statements in this respect refer to
examples such as fh abdu llhi qiman and abdu llhi fh qiman,
discussed elsewhere in the Kitb.24 Since Sbawayhi explicitly says that
in these examples the mil of the mubtada abdu llhi is not the zarf,
but al-ibtid (see above 2.1), it is inferred that the mil producing
the accusative in qiman, which is a h l, is the zarf fh. It should be
stressed that the zarf fh is the only part of the sentence which can be
the mil producing the accusative in qiman, since the mubtada abdu
llahi is logically identical with qiman, and a noun which is logically
identical with another noun can produce in it only the nominative, as in
fh abdu llhi qimun (see above 2.1).
23
See Sb. I:21, 919.
24
See Sb. I:222, 14224,2.
25
The translation here is based on Lanes rendering of the expression wajaba l-bayu
(see Lane VIII, 2922A,1517). According to Sbawayhi laka -u is equivalent to
wajaba -u.
26
See Sb. I:167, 1116. Cf. Sb. I:222, 14223, 1.
140 aryeh levin
mil of the h l,27 it is clear that in his view, the mil of tan in wajaba
-u atan bidirhamin tan bidirhamin is the verb wajaba, while the
mil of qiman in istaqarra zaydun qiman is the verb istaqarra. Since
Sbawayhi holds that laka and fh are equivalent to wajaba and istaqarra
which operate as awmil, it is inferred that in his view laka and fh
also operate as awmil in the corresponding examples laka -u atan
bidirhamin tan bidirhamin and fh zaydun qiman respectively. For
similar examples where a combination of li + genitive or li + a relative
clause operates as an mil see Sb. I:223, 18224, 2.
27
See Sb. I:15, 1822.
28
See Sb. I:238, 1418.
29
See Sb. I:176, 612. For xalfa as a zarf see Sb. I:177, 14.
30
See Sb. I:176, 611. For the amal in irna dirhaman see Carter, 1972. See also
Levin, (forthcoming), Cahiers linguistiques, 3.2.
sbawayhis view of the zarf as an mil 141
31
See Sb. I:21, 1415.
32
The contrast between il and iml is inferred from Sb. I:21, 914, where
Sbawayhi uses the forms milan and yamalni in contrast to al-il and alayta. For
the occurrence of the term iml in the Kitb, also when referring to other awmil, see
Troupeau, 1976, 149, voc. iml.
33
The expression indispensable predicate here is based on Sbawayhis view of xabar
kna (see Levin, 1979, 203205, 2.6).
34
See Sb. I:21, 714.
35
See Sb. I:222, 14223,1.
36
See Sb. I:223, 12.
142 aryeh levin
Sbawayhi compares the il of the amal of the zarf with that of the
verbs later called afl al-qulb.37 He says that when the il of the zarf
takes place, it is preferable to pronounce it at the end or close to the end
of the sentence. In contrast, when the zarf is a mustaqarr occurring as an
mil, it is preferable to put it at the beginning of the sentence, like verbs
such as zunnu and ah sibu, which are pronounced at the beginning of
the sentence when they are awmil.38
Sbawayhi illustrates two types of taqdr construction of sentences
containing a zarf mulan:
(i) In referring to the sentence inna bika zaydan maxdun Zayd is
enchanted by you (Sb. I:242, 2), where the il of the zarf bika takes
place, Sbawayhi says that when the speaker expresses this sentence, it
is as if he were saying inna zaydan maxdun. Similarly, when saying
inna fka zaydan la ribun Zayd covets you (Sib. I:242, 5) it is as if the
speaker were saying inna zaydan ribun.39 These taqdr constructions
illustrate the notion that when the above sentences are pronounced it
is as if the zarf bika and fka are not spoken, and hence they cannot
operate as the mil producing the accusative in maxdun and ribun
respectively.
It appears that Sbawayhi holds this view in order to solve a theo-
retical difficulty arising from one of the main principles of the theory
of amal: in his view, the effect of an mil producing the nominative
or the accusative in the noun is always applied, irrespective of whether
this mil is an indispensable part of the sentence or not.40 This principle
seems to be violated if one assumes that when a zarf such as fh is an
indispensable predicate, as in fh zaydun qiman, it is the mil pro-
ducing the accusative in the h l qiman, but when fh is a dispensable
part, as in fh zaydun qimun, its amal is abolished. In order to solve
this difficulty Sbawayhi says that when the amal of the zarf is abol-
ished, the zarf does not occur in the taqdr construction. Since accord-
ing to the grammarians the relevant construction, as far as grammatical
analysis is concerned, is that of the taqdr, Sbawayhi assumes that fh
37
The il of the amal of this category of verbs is discussed in chapter 31 of the
Kitb (= Sb. I:49, 452, 15).
38
See Sb. I:21, 1013.
39
See Sb. I:242, 28. Sbawayhis words expressing this notion are very clear:
. . . kaannaka aradta inna zaydan ribun wainna zaydan maxdun walam tadkur fka
wal bika fauliyat hhun kam uliyat f l-ibtidi (Sb. I:242, 78).
40
See Sb. I:223, 613.
sbawayhis view of the zarf as an mil 143
does not occur in the taqdr construction,41 and hence it is clear that its
amal cannot be applied.
(ii) Sbawayhi says that when the speaker expresses the sentence
fh abdu llhi qimun he intends it is as if he were saying abdu llhi
qimun fha. This taqdr construction illustrates the view that when
the zarf is not an indispensable predicate and hence is not an mil, the
speaker imagines that it is as if he were pronouncing the zarf at the end
of the sentence, since as regards grammatical theory it is preferable to
pronounce a zarf which is not an mil at the end of the sentence, or at
least in a position close to the end (see above 2.2.1). Sbawayhi says
that when the il of the zarf occurs in an example like fh abdu llhi
qimun the speaker imagines that it is as if he were saying abdu llhi
qimun fh, since in this taqdr construction the zarf which is not an
mil occurs at the end of the sentence.42
41
For taqdr constructions which are shorter than their corresponding literal con-
structions see Levin, 1997, 146148, 3.3.
42
See Sb. I:222, 22223,6.
43
Derenbourgs edition has idan instead of sidan (see Sb. I:207, 1718). How-
ever, Hrns version sidan is supported by Sb. I:206, 8 in Derenbourg. The version
sidan also occurs in all the later grammarians treatises (see, for example, al-Fris, I:
250, 710; as-Srf, VI: 131, 7 (in a quotation from Sbawayhis text).
144 aryeh levin
44
I.e., in syntactic constructions including a relative clause beginning with a zarf,
such as marartu birajulin maahu ksun maxtmun alayhi I passed by a man having
with him a sealed sack (Sb. I:207, 1516). Many examples of this type are discussed in
Chapter 112 of the Kitb (=Sb. I:206,5210,2).
45
I.e., the clause maahu saqrun sidan bihi adan.
46
The term al-ibtid here denotes a position occurring at the beginning of the utter-
ance. For al-ibtid in this sense, see, for example, Sb. II:295, 16; 296, 1115; 297, 36;
362, 1623.
47
See Sb. I:222, 14223, 2. See above 4.
48
I.e., when the speaker says fh abdu llhi qimun he intends it is as if he were say-
ing abdu llhi qimun (for this notion see as-Srf, VI:135, 18136, 5; see above 4).
49
This example does not occur in the Kitb. It has been introduced here according
to al-Friss interpretation (See al-Faris, I:251, 35) in order to explain Sbawayhis
intention.
50
This example does not occur in the Kitb. It is introduced according to al-Friss
interpretation (see al-Faris, I:251, 37), in order to explain Sbawayhis intention.
51
In Sbawayhis manner of expression a combination such as f az-zurf denotes the
sense of in sentences beginning with a zarf . Similarly, the expression f l-fil denotes
in sentences beginning with a verb (see Sb. I:17, 17); f darabain a sentence begin-
ning with daraba (see Sb. I:16, 1820); f knain a sentence beginning with kna
(Sb. I:17, 12).
52
For this notion see Sb. I:222, 14223, 18.
53
Ibid.
sbawayhis view of the zarf as an mil 145
The following remarks and conclusions are inferred from the above pas-
sage. These conclusions are supported by other texts in the Kitb, dis-
cussed in this paper.
(1) A zarf can operate as an mil only when it is a mustaqarr, i.e.,
only when it is the indispensable predicate of a certain sentence or of a
certain clause.
(2) The zarf cannot be an mil producing the nominative in the sub-
ject or in the predicate. In a nominal sentence such as fh abdu llhi
qimun the mubtada abdu llhi takes the nominative because of the
amal of al-ibtid, and abdu llahi is the mil producing the nominative
in the predicate qimun.
(3) In a sentence such as marartu birajulin maahu saqrun sidan
bihi adan, the noun rajulin cannot be the mil producing the nomi-
native in sid, since rajulin is not affected by the ibtid, and hence it
is not a mubtada. In Sbawayhis view, in a nominal sentence, only a
mubtada can produce the nominative in a noun occurring as a predi-
cate. The noun affected by the mubtada must be logically identical with
it. Since the sentence marartu birajulin and the clause maahu saqrun
sidan bihi adan do not contain a mubtada logically identical with
sid, sid cannot take the nominative. The only word, which can be the
mil of sid in the above utterance is the zarf maa, which can produce
the accusative in sid. Hence it is impossible to abolish the amal of
maa, since if its amal were to be abolished the word sid would remain
without an mil.
(4) But in fh axawka qimni , the mubtada axawka takes the
nominative because of the amal of al-ibtid, and hence it can be the
mil of the predicate qimni. It is also possible to say fh axawka
qimayni in it are your two brothers standing. In this structure
axawka takes the nominative because of the amal of al-ibtid, and
fh, which is a mustaqarr, is the mil producing the accusative in the
h l qimayni.
(5) The form ibtid contained in the expression lianna hd
laysa bibtidin denotes an expression occurring at the beginning of
the utterance. It does not denote here any of the terms it designates
in Sbawayhis terminology of the nominal sentence. The words lianna
hda laysa bibtid express the notion that the clause maahu saqrun
sidan bihi is not an independent sentence occurring at the beginning
of the utterance.
(6) There is another argument which, according to as-Srf, pre-
vents the il of maahu in the clause maahu saqrun sidan bihi adan:
146 aryeh levin
6. Conclusions
7. References
Yishai Peled
Tel Aviv University
1. Introduction
1
For a detailed discussion of this correspondence, see Levin 1985.
150 yishai peled
2
To be sure, there were grammarians who analyzed both constructions as an inverted
jumla ismiyya with a fronted xabar; others accepted more than one type of analysis. For
a discussion, cf. Ibn Ab r-Rab, Bast I:583ff.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 151
2. qimun zaydun
3
Sbawayhi (Kitb I:239) asserts that while the active participle and the verb may be
similar in some respects, one must appreciate the difference between them. Other gram-
marians (e.g. Ibn al-Anbr, Asrr, 70) pointed out that the active participle is weaker
than the verb, and cannot, therefore, exercise verbal amal, unless supported by some
preceding element (see below).
4
For the concept itimd as it is used in al-Xalls Kitb al-Ayn with reference to other
grammatical structures, see Talmon 1997, 210.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 153
nominal constituent.5 For discussion, see, e.g. Ibn al-Anbr, Asrr: 70;
cf. Goldenberg 2002, 199201.
Ibn as-Sarrj is aware, however, of the implications of a verbal analy-
sis of qimun zaydun for the theory of amal. He argues (Usl I:60) that
in qimun abka (Your father is standing), qimun is assigned the
raf case by the ibtid, and abka is assigned the same case by the verb
preceding it. He indicates further that abka fills a xabar position.
In any event, both Sbawayhi and Ibn as-Sarrj reject the use of dribun
bakran amrun ( Amr hits Bakr) as an independent sentence, on the
ground that the active participle, while being analogous to the verb, is
by definition a nominal, and as such cannot be made to function identi-
cally to a verb in terms of case assignment. The above examples, where
the participle is linked to a preceding antecedent (mawsf), a mubtada,
or an interrogative particle, are viewed as analogous to the construc-
tion dribun bakran when anchored, under the principle of itimd, to
some external constituent (mah ml al ayrihi), such as a mubtada,
thus presenting a well-formed independent sentence (e.g. hd dribun
bakranthis [person] is hitting Bakr) (Ibn as-Sarrj, Usl I:60; and cf.
Sbawayhis position above; Levin 1985, 125126).
Like Sbawayhi and Ibn as-Sarrj, as-Zajjj (Jumal, 3738) was aware
of the theoretical problems raised by sentences consisting of an active
participle followed by a noun phrase. In particular he demonstrated the
implications for the grammatical agreement between the two constitu-
ents. To the extent that qimun in qimun zaydun is conceived of as
xabar muqaddam (a fronted xabar), it must be replaced by qimni or
qimna, once zaydun is substituted by a dual or a plural form respec-
tively. But under the alternative analysis cited by as-Zajjj, in which
qimun is assigned a verbal function, the active participle preceding
its subject should invariably take the singular form. In other words, the
proponents of this analysis would have qimun az-zaydni/az-zaydna
rather than qimni z-zaydni and qimna z-zaydna.6
5
Ibn Ab r-Rab (Bast I:585) remarks that some grammarians rejected the idea of
an adverbial/prepositional phrase assigning case. They argued that such phrases were
different in status (manzila) from the adjective. The latter, they argued, is capable of
inflection, and as such is more powerful than the adverbial/prepositional phrase. There-
fore, they concluded, the adverbial/prepositional phrase may not be analyzed as a case
assigner even where the principle of itimd is met. I return to this issue later.
6
See, e.g. Ibn Ab r-Rab (Bast I:584), who also indicates that the proponents of
akaln l-bart must, by extension, say qimni z-zaydni and qimna z-zaydna,
154 yishai peled
since in this version of the language the verb preceding the subject agrees with it in
number and gender (for a detailed discussion of akaln l-bart, see Levin 1989).
7
The grammarians, however, recognized that the personal pronoun incorporated
in an active participle cannot qualify as fil in the way an implicit personal pronoun
in a verb can. Thus, while allad daraba zaydun (The one who hit is Zayd) is a per-
fectly grammatical sentence, allad dribun zaydun is not, since, unlike allad daraba,
allad dribun cannot implement the function of a subject clause (see Jurjn, Muqtasid
I:463464).
8
This is, perhaps, why the Kfans, who rejected the analysis of qimun zaydun as an
inverted nominal sentence, could accept it as modeled on a verbal sentence: under the
verbal analysis the pronoun in qimun is disabled so there is no problem of cataphora
(cf. above).
9
For Ibn Ya (arh I:8788), then, a sentence such as zaydun qimun abhu
(Zayd, his father is standing) consists of a mubtada (zayd) and a xabar, the latter ana-
lyzed as a complex construction consisting of a fil (qimun) and a fil (abhu).
10
This type of analysis is attributed to Axfa; see, e.g. Ibn Usfr, arh I:341.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 155
tive particle: m qimun az-zaydni (the two Zayds are not standing),
a-qimun az-zaydni (Are the two Zayds standing?). According to Ibn
Aql (d. 1367) (arh I:189), qimun, in each of the last two sentences,
functions as a mubtada, whereas az-zaydni is a fil sadda masadd al-
xabar (a fil substituting for the xabar). Indeed, this is the common
formula employed by those later grammarians who adopted the verbal
analysis of the construction in question (cf. Carter 1981, 189).
At this point one might ask how frequent in classical Arabic are such
sentences as qimun az-zaydni? I looked for this construction in the
Qurnic text, but no example of it was attested. In all the recorded cases,
a singular participle is followed by a singular noun phrase, or, otherwise,
a singular feminine participle by a plural (non-human) noun phrase.
It is interesting to note, however, that all cases display some kind of a
supporting element. In the vast majority of examples, the construc-
tion in question functions as predicate to a preceding subject realized
as either a referential nominal (typically, but not necessarily, in a sen-
tence introduced by inna or one of its sisters), or, otherwise, as a non-
referential damr a-an: wa-zann annahum mniatuhum h usnuhum
(They believed that their fortresses would protect themQ. 59:2),
wa-huwa muh arramun alaykum ixrjuhum (You are not allowed to
expel themQ. 2:85). Huwa in the latter example functions as damr
a-an. One example was noted where the supporting element is the
interrogative particle a-: a-ribun anta an lihat (do you loathe my
gods?Q. 19:46).
What is then the effect of the supporting element that makes [zay-
dun/rajulun] qimun abhu or a-/m qimun abhu an acceptable
verbal construction, as opposed to qimun abhu? Al-Xall (see above)
does not provide an elaborate answer. He argues, however, that a partic-
iple cannot easily replace a verb in pre-subject position, because it is an
ism. A verb and a noun, he maintains, may in certain positions imple-
ment similar functions, but they must still be differentiated. Nor did later
grammarians elaborate on the function of the supporting element. But
their discussion of the relevant cases might give us a clue. To phrase the
question differently, how does the supporting element impart further
verbal force to the adjectival predicate that enables it to act analogously
to a verb in such cases? If we compare the two constructions qma zay-
dun and qimun zaydun, we can see that the difference between the
two is that the finite verb, while devoid of a pronominal element, is still
inflected for person, whereas the participle is not. Lacking either a pro-
nominal element or inflection for person, the participle is excluded as a
156 yishai peled
11
That, I believe, is what is intended by al-Xall (Sbawayhi, Kitb I:239) when he
refers to the participle in such cases as [kna] sifatan jar al mawsfin aw jar al
smin qad amila fhi [the participle] is an adjective agreeing with a head or [other-
wise] with a noun acting upon it, and further when he says: l yaknu maf lan f
dribin h att yaknu mah mlan al ayrihi fa-taqlu hd dribun zaydan . . . drib
cannot take an object unless it is linked to some other constituent, as for example in
hd dribun zaydanthis [person] is hitting Zayd.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 157
Once we correlate qimun zaydun with qma zaydun, rather than with
zaydun qimun, with the consequence that qimun is to remain in
the singular irrespective of the number of the following noun (qimun az-
zaydni/az-zaydna), one can hardly see how sentences such as qimun
zaydun under a verbal analysis, let alone qimun az-zaydni, may be
viewed other than as cases of jumla filiyya. Indeed, when presenting the
fil, some of the grammarians, like Ibn Ya (arh I:74), indicate that
the position preceding the fil is available for a verb ( fil) or a nominal that
is analogous to a verb (abahuhu, m huwa f man l-fil min al-asm).
In this latter category they normally include the active and passive par-
ticiples, as well as such adjectives as h asan (sifa muabbaha bi-smi l-
filan adjective analogous to the active participle, e.g. Ibn Ya, arh
I:87). It is argued that in a sentence such as zaydun dribun ulmuhu12
(Zayd, his slave is hitting), dribun, much like yadribu, assigns raf to
ulmuhu. One may infer, then, that Ibn Ya would regard a sentence
such as qimun zaydun as a verbal sentence. Yet I have not recorded
any explicit reference to this type of sentence as a jumla filiyya. In any
case, the prevalent analysis of the construction under discussion was, as
already indicated, mubtada+fil sadda masadd al-xabar. It is not sur-
prising, however, that the grammarians adhering to this analysis did not
commit themselves to explicitly categorizing such sentences as either
jumla filiyya or jumla ismiyya.
A remarkable exception is Ibn Him al-Ansr (d. 1360) who, in his
famous book Mun l-Labb, provides an elaborate discussion of Arabic
sentence types. Ibn Hims classification will be discussed in detail in
section 5 below. As we shall see, he defined three sentence types (rather
than two!) by the kind of constituent introducing the sentence. Thus,
a sentence introduced by a nominal element is a jumla ismiyya. And
among his examples of jumla ismiyya we find the sentence qimun az-
zaydni. Ibn Him was, indeed, aware of the controversy surrounding
this sentence, indicating that it was accepted as a well-formed sentence
by Axfa and the Kfans. As we saw above, qimun az-zaydni was
adduced as an acceptable sentence in Arabic also by Zajjj, but the latter
did not classify it as jumla ismiyya.
12
Note, however, that in Zamaxars and Ibn Yas examples the construction at
issue is itself a xabar following a mubtada. As we have seen, this is consistent with the
principle of itimd.
158 yishai peled
But, to the extent that this analysis holds, does not it follow (at
least from the grammarians viewpoint) that qimun zaydun rep-
resents a sentence type in its own right? To my knowledge, no such
proposition has ever been advanced in medieval Arab grammatical
literature.13
3. fh / f d-dri zaydun
3.1 Sbawayhi
In his bb al-ibtid (chapter 132), Sbawayhi does not develop any dis-
cussion of this sentence sub-type. But elsewhere in the Kitb (I:170171;
cf. Levin 1987, 362, and Owens 1989, 224) he argues that in cases such as
huwa xalfaka (He is behind you) it is the subject huwa that assigns the
nasb case to xalfaka. Indeed, this is consistent with his argument (Kitb
13
Badawi (2000, 8f.) claims that the grammarians recognized three types of sentences
namely: filiyya, ismiyya and wasfiyya, introduced, respectively, by a verb, a noun and an
adjective (a participle or otherwise). He emphasizes the use of different terms for the
subject and predicate in each sentence type, indicating that in the jumlat wasf these are
referred to as mubtada and fil sadda masadd al-xabar. However, the term jumlat wasf
has not been attested in the grammarians writings studied for the present work.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 159
I:239) that in zaydun muntaliqun, it is the subject that assigns raf to the
predicate.14 However, what about sentences such as fh zaydun, con-
sisting of an adverbial/prepositional phrase followed by a nominatival
noun phrase? Sbawayhi deals with these cases within the framework of
his discussion of sentences such as fh abdu-llhi qiman and abdu-
llhi fh qiman (Abdullh is in it, standingcf. Talmon 1993, 281).
He starts his discussion analyzing qiman as an accusatival xabar to
abdu-llhi. Then he goes on to indicate that abdu-llhi in these cases:
irtafaa bi-l-ibtidi li-anna llad dukira qablahu wa-badahu laysa bihi
wa-innam huwa mawdiun lahu wa-lkinnahu yajr majr l-ismi l-mab-
niyyi al m qablahu
is assigned the raf case by the ibtid since the constituent occurring
either before or after it [= the adverbial] is not it [= is not identical in refer-
ence with it], but rather signals its location. Yet [this adverbial] functions
analogously to a noun built upon the [subject] preceding it(Sbawayhi,
Kitb I:222).
Sbawayhi, as can be seen, points out that fh is non-coreferential with
abdu-llhi, but rather refers to Abdullhs location (mawdi). But it is
precisely this observation that underlies his endeavor to establish, first
of all, the acceptability of fh abdu-llhi/abdu-llhi fh as a complete
independent sentence. To this end he draws an analogy between fh
abdu-llhi and hd abdu-llhi (This is Abdullh), claiming that
in terms of completeness, the former, much like the latter, is a kalm
mustaqm (a correct sentence) that h asuna [badahu] s-suktu (that
may appropriately be followed by silenceSbawayhi, Kitb I:222 and
239240). Similarly, abdu-llhi fh is presented by him as analogous
to abdu-llhi axka (Abdullh is your brother): in both cases the
second constituent is built (mabn) upon the first. As for abdu-llhi,
Sbawayhi states clearly that, whether preceding or following the prepo-
sitional phrase, it is assigned the raf case by the ibtid.
But once a predicatival relationship is established between fh and
abdu-llhi, Sbawayhi reanalyzes the sentence assigning fh the func-
tion of xabar and abdu-llhi the function of mubtada. The position of
qiman is then demoted to that of h l (see Figure 1 below). He points
out, however, that since fh represents the persons location, fh abdu-
llhi is paraphrasable by istaqarra abdu-llhi. In other words, fh
14
Note, however, that the amal in huwa xalfaka is presented by Sbawayhi as analo-
gous to that in his model construction irna dirhaman (Twenty dirhams).
160 yishai peled
mubtada xabar
fh abdu-llhi qiman
Figure 1
behaves analogously to the verb istaqarra. As we shall see in 3.2, the verb
istaqarra, or otherwise the participle mustaqirrun, have since become
the grammarians most common device for explaining the grammatical
structure of sentences such as zaydun fh / fh zaydun.
A further indication of Sbawayhis consideration of fh as a verb-like
element is his statement (Kitb I:223) that qiman in the above sen-
tence may, alternatively, be replaced by qimun in the nominative. This,
he explains, is the result of abrogating (alayta) fh. In the medieval
grammarians writings, ilg is normally used as a technical term denot-
ing the annulling of amal. It is typically used with reference to potential
awmil, that is, elements that normally exercise amal upon other ele-
ments in the sentence (for discussion see, e.g. Peled 1992a, 150152).
One may infer, then, that Sbawayhi considered fh, in virtue of its act-
ing analogously to istaqarra, as an mil assigning nasb to qiman in
fh abdu-llhi qiman. As we shall see later, such adverbials as fh
were considered by some early grammarians as an mil assigning raf
to the following subject in such cases as fh zaydun. This view is typi-
cally attributed to the Kfans. Yet, Sbawayhi (Kitb I:223224) then
enters into an extensive discussion designed to exclude the possibility
that fh in sentences such as fh abdu-llhi qimun is the mil assign-
ing raf to abdu-llhi. He draws an analogy between this sentence and
bika abdu-llhi maxdun (Abdullh is fascinated by you). He argues
that an operator assigning case to an optional constituent (qimun in
the former sentence) has the same status (manzila) as an operator act-
ing upon an obligatory constituent (maxdun in the latter).15 Sbawayhi
emphasizes that in both cases (as well as in similar ones adduced by
him) the adjective is built upon the noun, thus establishing a predicati-
val relationship between the two. The prepositional phrase, by contrast,
is a law, i.e. a constituent that neither assigns nor receives amal. In fh
15
Indeed, in later grammatical writings, the model sentence bika zaydun maxdun
features regularly in the Basran arguments against the Kfan claim that in fh zaydun
it is fh that functions as the mil assigning raf to zaydun (cf. Ibn al-Anbr, Insf
I:5253).
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 161
16
The words h aytu and h na alternate in this position in two different versions of
the text.
17
Talmon (1993, 283284) confronts the long version cited here with a shorter one
that to me looks rather obscure.
162 yishai peled
18
As we have seen, however, Sbawayhi used this device in dealing with sentences
such as fh abdu-llhi qiman, to account for the nasb of qiman; he did not employ
it in cases such as fh zaydun or zaydun fh, pointing rather to the ibtid, in both, as
the mil assigning raf to zaydun.
19
For the Kfan theory of xilf (or muxlafa), see Astarbd, arh I:214; Ibn al-
Anbr, Insf I:245247; Muji, arh , 87, n. 216; and cf. Carter 1973).
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 163
20
Ibn Usfr (arh I:347348) emphasizes that using an adverbial/prepositional
phrase as a xabar substitute is only admissible when the deleted element is recoverable
from the surface constructionotherwise, the xabar should appear in full. Thus, for
example, zaydun f d-dr is only allowed if it is intended to convey the meaning mus-
taqirrun f d-dr, because f, signalling a receptacle (wi), is compatible in meaning
with istiqrr (staying). If, however, zaydun f d-dr is intended to convey the mean-
ing of dh ikun f d-dr ([Zayd] is laughing in the house), then the word dh ik must
occur; for, unlike the meaning of staying, that of laughing cannot be recovered from
the preposition f. Cf. Astarbd, arh I:215, for linking elements like h sil and kin
(be); Levin 1987, 360.
21
Ibn as-Sarrjs use of the term h adt in this case is significant, for it signalizes predi-
cate realized whether as fil or as xabar (cf. Goldenberg 1988, 4649).
164 yishai peled
22
Astarbd (arh I:215) claims that the underlying element is obligatorily deleted,
rejecting such sentences as zaydun kinun f d-dr. He indicates that Ibn Jinn did allow
such constructions, but points out that there is no evidence to support this position.
23
This is evidently Mujiis way of claiming a xabar status for the adverbial/prepo-
sitional phrase. Astarbd (arh I:216217) points to Fris and his followers as advo-
cating the same hypothesis. But Srf is cited by him as claiming that the pronoun is
deleted as part of the linking constituent.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 165
3.3 Ab Al l-Fris
Ab Al l-Fris (d. 987) is considered to be one of the first grammar-
ians who advanced in an explicit way and developed the idea of sentence
types in Arabic (cf. Owens 1988, 3637). He defined each type, and
spelled out the problematic nature of the dichotomy verb+noun ( jumla
filiyya) versus noun+noun ( jumla ismiyya).24 Indeed, he was the first to
present a detailed argument with the conclusion that zaydun f d-dr is
neither a jumla filiyya nor a jumla ismiyya.
Having defined the two basic sentence types in Arabic, Fris turns
to concentrate upon the construction represented by zaydun f d-dr.
Indeed it looks as though Friss definition of the two basic sentence
types is meant as an introduction to his discussion of this particular
construction (Fris, Askariyya, 105109). He starts by indicating that,
although such sentences are composed of a nominal element (i.e. the
two nouns) and a particle (the preposition), they do not have the same
status as inna sentences, where the particle enters into a sentence made
up of two nouns. This is because f d-dr is non-coreferential with zay-
dun. And since zayd and f d-dr are not identical in reference, they
cannot be analyzed simply as subject and predicate. However, given that
zaydun f d-dr is definitely a well-formed sentence in Arabic, one must
assume some underlying (muqaddar) linking element to account for the
predicatival relationship between its two constituents. As we saw in 3.2,
this linking element must inevitably be either a noun or a verb (a par-
ticle does not bear any reference). To the extent that either of these can
be posited, a sentence such as zaydun f d-dr must eventually belong
either to the verb+noun or to the noun+noun type.25
24
Anxious to provide accurate and valid definitions, Fris (Askariyya, 104105)
points further to the option of a particle (h arf) entering into either of the two defined
jumlas, to form a kalm. What the reader is invited to infer is that the resulting con-
struction is an independent grammatical sentence whose basic type (i.e. filiyya or
ismiyya) is unaffected. He exemplifies this by sentences introduced by hal, inna, m,
qad and lam. (As a matter of fact, the same principle had already been stated by Ibn
as-Sarrj, Usl I:43.)
25
Fris (Askariyya, 109) draws a comparison between the case in question and
address (nid) expressions. He argues that y zaydu (O, Zayd!), much like f d-dri
zaydun, consists of nominal elements and a particle, and constitutes an independent
sentence. The difference between the two, he maintains, is that in the case of y zaydu a
verbal element should be assumed, which renders the address expression a sub-type of
a jumla filiyya, whereas in the case of zaydun f d-dr/f d-dri zaydun no such element
can be posited (see below).
166 yishai peled
he maintains, is borne out by the fact that the adverbial may not be pre-
ceded by a circumstantial phrase; a sentence such as *qiman f d-dri
zaydun is inadmissible, but it would be allowed if f d-dr had a verbal
value (a sentence such as qiman dah ika zaydun is considered as per-
fectly acceptable by the grammarians.)
All the above boils down to a rejection of the istaqarra/mustaqirrun
hypothesis, and that, in turn, leads Fris to the conclusion that sen-
tences such as zaydun f d-dr/f d-dri zaydun should be considered
neither as jumla filiyya nor as jumla ismiyya; they must be thought of,
rather, as representing a sentence type in its own right. Note, however,
that Fris did not assign the type of sentence under discussion any spe-
cial designation. The term jumla zarfiyya to which we will be introduced
below was coined in a later period.
But if one is supposed to assume no underlying element linking the
two predicatival constituents in zaydun f d-dr/f d-dri zaydun, what
is then the assigner of raf to zaydun in such cases? As we saw in 3.1,
Sbawayhi, who was not committed to any theory of sentence types, had
no problem presenting the ibtid as raf assigner to zayd in both zaydun
f d-dr and fh zaydun. But for Fris, making a similar claim would
imply classifying fh zaydun as a jumla ismiyya. Regarding the raf
assigner in zaydun f d-dr Fris does not develop any elaborate discus-
sion, apparently because in such cases one would automatically refer to
the ibtid as the raf assigner. However, when it comes to fh zaydun,
the construction on which he focuses his discussion, Fris presents a
clear position as to the rfi of zaydun. Having shown that neither a verb
nor a noun can be posited as a linking element, and having proved, fur-
ther, that the adverbial itself cannot be claimed to function as a verb,
Fris (Askariyya, 108109) refers the reader to Ab l-H asan [al-Axfa]
(d. 733), explaining that these are the reasons why Ab l-H asan regarded
the adverbial per se as the rfi when preceding a noun functioning as
muh addat anhu (of whom the message is predicated, subject). Notice
that it is not the term fil that is used with reference to that noun, but
rather muh addat anhu, a term that cuts across all sentence types. As
we shall see, however, later grammarians did not refrain from using the
term fil in this particular context.
Obviously, attributing the assigning of raf to an adverbial/preposi-
tional phrase constitutes a serious problem for the theory of amal. Since
the formulation of this theory, the grammarians always insisted that the
function of case assignment is implemented by either a verb or a par-
ticle. Various elements, notably active participles and other adjectives
168 yishai peled
were claimed to have a verbal force. But in our case, as we have seen,
Fris argued that f d-dr was not verbal enough to allow a circum-
stantial phrase to precede it. So one might ask what it is that qualifies
fh as raf assigner. To my knowledge, this point has never been clari-
fied by the grammarians. And it is no wonder that the concept of jumla
zarfiyya, where a predicatival prepositional phrase assigns raf to the
following subject, remained marginal and never became part of main-
stream medieval Arab grammatical thinking. Anyhow, for Fris, Axfas
position regarding the raf assigner in fh zaydun constituted further
support for his thesis that this construction represents a sentence type
in its own right.
26
Astarbd (arh I:232) maintains that the problem of ambiguity between xabar
and sifa is acute, owing to the common occurrence of an adverbial in xabar position
in Arabic. He cites, however, one case where an adverbial xabar follows an indefinite
mubtada, pointing out that it is perfectly acceptable when the sentence is used as an
exclamation (du). Astarbd also remarks that fronting a non-adverbial xabar to an
indefinite mubtada does not eliminate the ambiguity. Thus, if you transform rajulun
qimun into qimun rajulun, rajulun could be analyzed as xabar of qimun or as an
apposition (badal) to it, whereas a fronted adverbial in similar cases is bound to be inter-
preted as xabar, due to its nasb case, whether explicitly marked (lafzan), or understood
by position (mah allan).
27
Note that an indefinite mubtada introducing a negative or interrogative sentence
is readily accepted by Ibn Jinn. Thus he admits (Xasis I:300) sentences such as hal
ulmun indaka (Is there a boy with you?) and m bistun tahtaka (There is no
carpet under you), claiming that they are communicatively useful, as opposed to sen-
tences such as rajulun indaka (A man is with you). The argument is that one can
170 yishai peled
negate the existence of, or pose a question with regard to, an unknown entity (mankr
l yuraf ), while there is no communicative value in predicating of an unknown entity
affirmatively.
28
Similarly, Astarbd (arh I:232) regards the obligatory fronting of the xabar in
cases such as f d-dri rajulun as a corrective (musah h ih ) procedure designed to handle
the indefiniteness of the mubtada.
29
Ibn Jinn (Xasis I:319320) then refers to sentences displaying an indefinite
mubtada in sentence-initial position. He argues, however, that these are not predicatival
sentences, in the sense that they are meant to express a wish or imprecation rather than
convey information. Another case is explained by him as paraphrasable by a negative
sentence (cf. n. 27 above).
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 171
man and m: kayfa axka (How is your brother?), man axka (Who
is your brother?), and the like.
Ibn Ab r-Rabs second case of obligatory xabar fronting is the con-
struction f d-dri rajulun. This, however, is dealt by him in pragmatic
rather than in purely formal terms, and will, therefore, be reviewed in the
following sub-section. The third case is exemplified by Ibn Ab r-Rab
(Bast I:588) by the sentence al t-tamrati mitluh zubdan (on the date
there is butter of an equal amount). He indicates that the reverse order
(mitluh zubdan al t-tamrati) is disallowed since -h in mitluh is an
anticipatory pronoun in both lafz (surface) and martaba (underlying)
structures, thus violating the rule of the anticipatory pronoun (al-idmr
qabla d-dikrcf. section 2 above). For further discussion of the relation-
ship between anaphora and the position of the xabar, see Astarbd,
arh I:232233.
Introducing his fourth and final case of obligatory xabar fronting, Ibn
Ab r-Rab (Bast I:588) cites the exceptive sentences m frisun ill
zaydun (No one is a horseman but Zayd) and m f d-dri ill amrun
(No one is in the house but Amr). In these two sentences the subject
nominal occurs sentence-finally and is dominated by the exceptive par-
ticle ill. Reversing the order in such cases, Ibn Ab r-Rab points out,
would not violate the rules of Arabic grammar, but result in a sentence
different in meaning from the original one. The sentence m frisun ill
zaydun assigns to Zayd, and only to him, the attribute of horsemanship.
This sentence, however, is neutral as to whether or not Zayd possesses
other qualities as well. But if the order of constituents is reversed so
as to make the subject zaydun precede the predicate, the resulting sen-
tence m zaydun ill frisun unmistakably excludes the possibility that
Zayd possesses any quality beside horsemanship. Similarly, the sentence
innam frisun zaydun is equivalent in meaning to m frisun ill zay-
dun, whereas innam zaydun frisun is synonymous with m zaydun
ill frisun, which explains why a mubtada-xabar order is inadmissible
in this related case as well.
Ibn Usfr (arh I:353) adds two more cases where the xabar is oblig-
atorily placed sentence-initially: 1. When the mubtada is a nominalized
clause introduced by anna: f ilm annaka qimun (It is known to me
that you are standing); 2. When the xabar is a kam al-xabariyya phrase:
kam dirhamin mluka (How many dirhams you have!).
The first of these two cases is dealt with also by Astarbd (arh
I:233234) who cites Fris as claiming that the adverbial/prepositional
phrase in such cases exercises amal (raf ) upon the following anna
172 yishai peled
clause with no supporting element (cf. 3.3 above; for itimd, see sec-
tion 2 above). Astarbd (arh I:233) explains that the reason for the
obligatory fronting of the xabar (whether adverbial or not) in such cases
is that if the anna clause were placed sentence-initially, the word nna
could be misread as inna rather than anna. For, between the two par-
ticles, it is the former rather than the latter that is associated with the
initial position in the sentence. Astarbd points out further that if the
xabar precedes the anna clause it is bound to be correctly analyzed as
xabar to the following clause as a whole rather than as a fronted constit-
uent governed by anna, because a constituent within the scope of inna/
anna cannot be preposed to either of these particles. Furthermore, once
the adverbial/prepositional phrase is established as the xabar of the fol-
lowing clause, then the particle heading that clause will be easily read as
anna, because a mubtada clause, being a noun clause, cannot be intro-
duced by inna. For further discussion of this issue, see Ibn Ya, arh
VIII:5960.
As we have just seen, f d-dri rajulun was only one item, and not nec-
essarily the first, on the list of constructions presented by the grammari-
ans as examples of obligatory fronting of the xabar. But it was apparently
the most difficult to deal with in purely syntactic terms. For one thing,
like the related f d-dri zaydun, it presented a challenge to the theory
of amal. For another, the indefiniteness of the mubtada could not, in
itself, constitute sufficient grounds for ruling out its occurrence in sen-
tence-initial position (cf. Astarbd, arh I:202207 for a detailed dis-
cussion of cases of an indefinite mubtada in sentence-initial position).
The grammarians main formal explanation for the obligatoriness of
predicate-subject order in this case was that an adverbial/prepositional
phrase following an indefinite nominal could be wrongly interpreted
as an attribute rather than a predicate. But as we have just indicated,
sentences with an indefinite mubtada do occur in Arabic. Indeed, as
we will see shortly, the strongest argument against *rajulun f d-dr was
pragmatic rather than syntactic.
30
According to Talmon (1993, 285287), the idea is already attested in ninth century
writings where the locative is typically referred to as sifa and the nominatival noun fol-
lowing it as xabar as-sifa.
31
This obviously rests on the assumption that in a sentence containing only one
nominatival noun, it is this noun that should be construed as the muh addat anhu. This
term, while referring literally to a pragmatic function, signals in the grammarians usage,
the subject, irrespective of sentence type; its counterpart h adt signals the predicate (see
Goldenberg 1988, 4649, for discussion).
32
Notice that yubtadau and ibtid are both construed in this case as used as
mubtada or implementing a mubtada function.
174 yishai peled
5.1 Background
Returning now to the question of the raf assignment in cases such as
fh zaydun, most of the grammarians from Sbawayhi onwards regarded
ibtid as the operator assigning raf to zaydun. This, however, was by no
means universal, as we have seen. Indeed, Ibn al-Anbr (Insf I:5155)
attributes this position to the Basrans while presenting the other (much
less common) position as Kfan. We learn that the Kfans, as well as
the Basran grammarians Mubarrad and Axfa (cf. 3.3 above), regarded
the adverbial/prepositional phrase in the above case as the assigner of
raf to the following noun zaydun.33 Ibn al-Anbr maintains that both
the Basrans and the Kfans resort to Sbawayhi for support for their
respective claims. The Basrans obviously point to chapter 133 in the
Kitb, where, as we have seen, Sbawayhi refers to the ibtid (though
without using the actual term) as the mil assigning raf to zaydun. The
Kfans, for their part, draw upon a number of cases where, according to
Sbawayhi, an adverbial assigns raf to a following noun (Ibn al-Anbr,
Insf I:52). It is upon such cases, Ibn al-Anbr argues, that the Kfans
base their claim that in fh zaydun it is fh that should be regarded as
the rfi of zaydun.
Astarbd (arh I:218) indicates that the analysis of zaydun in f
d-dri zaydun as fil of the adverbial/prepositional phrase was advanced
by the Kfans, as well as by Axfa in one out of two statements he made
33
This position is clearly evidenced in Farrs Man l-Qurn (e.g. I:195196;
III:133). See Talmon (1993, 279) for further details and references.
176 yishai peled
34
Ibn al-Anbr (Insf I:51) adds Mubarrad to the proponents of this kind of analy-
sis (and cf. Ibn Usfr, arh I:158159).
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 177
35
A fourth type, jumla artiyya, which, as he indicates, was proposed by Zamaxar,
is rejected by Ibn Him on the ground that the conditional clause should be categorized
as jumla filiyya.
178 yishai peled
36
Unless signalling existence, in which case it is labelled kna at-tmma complete
kna, and treated as an ordinary verb.
37
This had been recognized already by Sibawayhi, although in his account (Si-
bawayhi, Kitb I:16) he depicted kna as analogous to daraba in terms of transitivity
(tadiya): like daraba it takes two nominal complements, one in the nominative, the
other in the accusative.
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 179
raf to the nominal following it. He did not, however, refer to that nomi-
nal explicitly as fil. The term muh addat anhu which he used, signals
in medieval Arabic grammatical literature the subject of the sentence,
whether a fil or a mubtada. Indeed, the specific grammatical status of
the nominatival constituent, as determined by the mil assigning it the
raf case, never ceased to be a topic of debate among the grammarians.
Yet one thing emerges quite clearly. The analysis of zaydun as fil in
both f d-dri zaydun and qimun zaydun, normally attributed to the
Kfans and Axfa (see section 2 above), always comes up when these
two constructions are discussed. It was never abandoned. However, of
these two constructions, it is only fh/f d-dri zaydun that was con-
sidered, albeit by a small number of grammarians, as a sentence type in
its own right. The reason for this should by now be clear. The opening
predicative constituent in each of the three sentence types was regarded
as an operator (mil) assigning case to the following constituent(s): sen-
tence types were unmistakably correlated with amal types. And since
the participle (qimun) could not be viewed as other than a verbal or
a nominal element, it could not be regarded as introducing a sentence
type in its own right. By the same token, a sentence such as zaydun f d-
dr, introduced as it is by a nominatival noun, could only be defined as
jumla ismiyya. The concept jumla zarfiyya was by and large associated
with cases where a zarf could be claimed to be a mil assigning raf to
the nominal following it. As we will see in the next sub-section, it was
Ibn Him, an eminent proponent of the tripartite division, who also
appreciated and spelled out the problems arising from the actual notion
of sentence types in Arabic, whether two or three.
5.3 Problems
As we have seen throughout, the problems the grammarians encoun-
tered in categorizing Arabic sentences stemmed from the fact that their
conception of sentence types was deeply embedded in the theory of
amal. This is manifested also in the way these problems are illustrated
by Ibn Him (Mun, 493497). He offers an illuminating discussion
of ten cases where a sentence can be construed as either a jumla filiyya
or a jumla ismiyya, or, otherwise, raise a controversy among grammar-
ians as to the right categorization. Significantly, no case is cited as an
unambiguous jumla zarfiyya. Since the basic arguments recur through-
out his discussion, I will review only four of his examples that, I believe,
well illustrate the problematic aspects of the traditional categorization
of sentence types.
182 yishai peled
Let us start with Ibn Hims fourh example md sanata (What have
you done?). He points out that this sentence may be paraphrased as
either m llad sanatahu, or as ayya ayin sanata. Since llad sanatahu
is a nominalized constituent, the sentence, according to the first para-
phrase, must be categorized as a jumla ismiyya. Ibn Him indicates that
the first constituent m is analyzed as a fronted xabar by Axfa, and
as mubtada by Sbawayhi. By contrast, the proponents of the second
paraphrase, ayya ayin sanata, would categorize the same sentence as a
jumla filiyya, analyzing ayya ayin as a fronted direct object. (And see,
further, Ibn Hims discussion of the sentence md sanatahu.)
Ibn Hims sixth example reads qm axawka (Your two brothers
stood up). This sentence is presented by him as acceptable, subject to
specific types of analysis. (To what extent this construction was in actual
use in medieval Arabic is immaterial for the present discussion). First,
the sentence could be categorized as jumla filiyya if (1) the ending - in
qm is interpreted as a dual-marking particle (h arf tatniya), much as
the -t in qmat Hindun is analyzed as a feminine marker (and not as a
pronoun); or alternatively if (2) the ending - is interpreted nominally
and the following axawka is analyzed as apposition (badal) to it. Sec-
ond, qm axawka may be categorized as jumla ismiyya with a fronted
xabar (with the ending - interpreted nominally and axawka analyzed
as a postposed mubtada). Note that Ibn Him does not mention the
possibility of analyzing qm axawka as a jumla filiyya with axawka
functioning as fil to qm (luat akaln l-bart see above, section
2, n. 6).
The seventh example presented by Ibn Him is nima r-rajulu zaydun
(What a nice man is Zayd). This sentence, he explains, may be viewed
as an inverted jumla ismiyya, with nima r-rajulu functioning as a pre-
posed xabar to zayd. Under an alternative analysis, however, zaydun
could function as xabar to a deleted mubtada. Ibn Him argues that
under the latter analysis, nima r-rajulu zaydun consists of two asyndeti-
cally coordinated clauses, the first one (nima r-rajulu) verbal, and the
second nominal.
But perhaps the most interesting is Ibn Hims second example,
where he makes the following statement regarding a-f d-dri zaydun
and a-indaka amrun:
fa-inn in qaddarn l-marfa mubtadaan aw marfan bi-mubtadain
fin taqdruhu kinun aw mustaqirrun fa-l-jumlatu ismiyyatun dtu
mah d
xabarin f l-l wa-dtu filin munin an-i l-xabari f t-tniyati wa-in
qaddarnhu filan bi-staqarra fa-filiyyatun aw bi-z-zarfi fa-zarfiyyatun
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 183
The proponents of the first option would presumably regard a-f d-dri
zaydun as the inverted version of a-zaydun f d-dr. The occurrence of
the interrogative a- in this case is irrelevant, as is the case also under
the third analysis, where the sentence is presented as an unmistakable
jumla filiyya. Indeed, positing an underlying verb like istaqarra in order
to account for the raf case of zaydun in sentences of this kind was com-
mon practice among the grammarians, as we saw in 3.2. What is really
remarkable in Ibn Hims third analysis is that it leads to the important
conclusion that under a certain analysis a sentence such as a-f d-dri
zaydun could be conceived of as jumla filiyya.
Under the second analysis, zaydun implements the function of fil
following a deleted mubtada, thus occupying a xabar position. The
adverbial/prepositional phrase, under this as well as under the third
analysis (see above), would be analyzed as an adjunct. Obviously, the
second analysis is reminiscent of the analysis of (a-)qimun zaydun
into a mubtada followed by a fil replacing the xabar, as we saw in sec-
tion 2. Note that, unlike Sbawayhi (Kitb I:239; and cf. 3.1 above), Ibn
Him does not view the prepositional phrase as occupying a mubtada
position. Rather, the mubtada in this case is an underlying participle.
Here, at any rate, a sentence whose subject is labeled fil is categorized
as jumla ismiyya.
As we have already indicated, the fourth analysis is consistent with
Ibn Hims theory of three sentence types, each defined by the pre-
dicative constituent introducing the sentence (and acting as mil upon
the second constituent). But we have already seen (3.3 above) that it
remains unclear how an adverbial/prepositional phrase can function
as a verb assigning raf to a following nominal constituent. Following
Sbawayhi, it was often argued that such a phrase may act analogously to
a verb when preceded by a supporting element such as the interroga-
tive particle a- (itimdcf. sections 2, 4.1 above). But does that in itself
warrant categorizing the construction a-f d-dri zaydun as represent-
ing a sentence type in its own right? The concept of jumla zarfiyya does
not seem to have been seriously discussed in the writings of the medi-
eval Arab grammarians. Evidently, the vast majority found it difficult to
fit the concept of jumla zarfiyya into their theory of amal. Indeed, this is
manifested even in Ibn Hims position, which does not present a-f d-
dri zaydun as a straightforward jumla zarfiyya. Rather, it makes it clear that
the actual identification of a sentence as jumla zarfiyya is essen-
tially dependent upon conceiving the adverbial/prepositional phrase as
a mil assigning raf to the following nominal. The other two types,
the medieval arabic theory of sentence types 185
6. Summary
Since the grammarians theory of sentence types grew out of, and has
always been closely related to, their theory of amal, it is not surprising
that in elaborate discussions of Arabic sentence types, particularly those
of Fris and Ibn Him, problems relating to the categorization of cer-
tain constructions were couched in terms of case assignment (amal).
The basic types of jumla filiyya and jumla ismiyya are shown through-
out to represent two types of amal: verbal tadiya and ibtid. Sentences
such as qimun zaydun and f d-dri zaydun/rajulun are shown to be
problematical in terms of amal. With regard to qimun zaydun, we have
seen that many grammarians advocated the rather awkward analysis of
mubtada+fil sadda masadd al-xabar. This was designed to deal with
the essentially nominal nature of the participle occurring sentence-ini-
tially, as well as with its verb-like behavior in this particular case. Apart
from Ibn Him who regarded this construction as an example of jumla
ismiyya, the proponents of the above analysis did not commit themselves
to any clear-cut categorization of this particular structure. Regarding f
d-dri zaydun/rajulun, the very fact that this construction displays an
adverbial/prepositional predicative constituent in sentence-initial posi-
tion, gave rise to the hypothesis that it represents a sentence type in its
own right, a jumla zarfiyya. And it comes as no surprise that this was
associated with the hypothesis that in such cases it is the adverbial/prep-
ositional phrase that assigns raf to the nominal constituent following it.
Obviously, this hypothesis and the long established istaqarra/mustaqir-
run hypothesis were mutually exclusive. In 3.3 we saw Friss attempt to
refute the istaqarra/mustaqirrun hypothesis, arguing from the theory of
amal. This was his line of defending a tripartite sentence-type system.
38
For a modern study advocating a three-type division, see Kouloughli (2002, 2124)
who argues that sentences such as f d-dri rajulun/zaydun (referred to by him as loca-
tive sentences) should be viewd as representing a sentence type in its on right, since
they exhibit a number of syntactic and semantic properties not shared by regular topic-
comment sentences.
186 yishai peled
7. References
Ibn Aql, arh = Bah ad-Dn Abdallh Ibn Aql, arh Ibn Aql al alfiyyat Ibn Mlik.
Muhammad Muhy ad-Dn Abd al-H amd, ed. n.p: Dr Sab, n.d.
Ibn Him, Mun = Jaml ad-Dn Ibn Him al-Ansr, Mun l-labb an kutub al-
arb. Mzin al-Mubrak and Muhammad Al H amdallh, eds. Beirut: Dr al-Fikr,
1985.
Ibn Jinn, Sirr = Ab l-Fath Utmn Ibn Jinn, Sirr sinat al-irb. H asan Hindw, ed.
Damascus: Dr al-Qalam, 1985.
Ibn Jinn, Xasis = Ab l-Fath Utmn Ibn Jinn, al-Xasis. Muhammad Al an-Najjr,
ed. Cairo: al-Haya l-Misriyya l-mma li-l-Kitb, 19861988.
Ibn as-Sarrj, Usl = Ab Bakr Muhammad b. Sahl Ibn as-Sarrj, Al-Usl f n-nahw.
Abd al-H usayn al-Fatl, ed. Beirut: Muassasat ar-Risla, 1987.
Ibn Usfr, arh = Al b. Mumin b. Muhammad b. Al Ibn Usfr, arh jumal az-
Zajjj. Shib Ab Janh, ed. Mosul: Ihy at-Turt al-Islm, 19801982.
Ibn Ya, arh = Muwaffaq ad-Dn Ya b. Al Ibn Ya, arh al-Mufassa l. Cairo:
Maktabat al-Mutanabb, n.d.
Jurjn, Muqtasid = Abd al-Qhir al-Jurjn, Kitb al-muqtasid f arh al-dh . Kzim
Bahr al-Marjn, ed. Baghdad: Dr ar-Rad li-n-Nar, 1982.
Muji, arh = Ab l-H asan Al b. Faddl al-Muji, arh uyn al-irb. Abd al-
Fatth Salm, ed. Cairo: Dr al-Marif, 1988.
Sbawayhi, Kitb = Ab Bir Amr b. Utm n Sbawayhi, Al-Kitb. Hartwig Derenbourg,
ed. Hildesheim and New York: G. Olms, 1970.
Zajjj, Jumal = Ab l-Qsim Abd ar-Rahmn b. Ishq az-Zajjj, Kitb al-jumal f n-
nahw. Al Tawfq al-H amad, ed. Beirut: Muassasat ar-Risla, Dr al-Amal, 1988.
Stefan Wild
Bonn
The history of the Arabic language is indelibly marked by the fact that
the Qurn has made Arabic a prophetic language with its own holy
book and a worldwide appeal. Arabic had been a mantic language in
pre-Islamic times. When the poet recited verses or when the soothsayer
uttered his sayings, reciter and listener were sure that behind his voice
there was another voice. This voice really speaking was that of a higher
power.
With the Qurn, the mantic voice behind the voice of the Prophet
Muhammad became in the believers ear the voice of the one and only
God. Muslim dogma and the consensus of the unlearned considered
the Qurn to be the direct, undiluted Arabic word of God. The status of
Classical Arabic, the standardization of Arabic including the develop-
ment of Modern Standard Arabic, the diglossia Standard Arabic versus
Arabic dialects, the nature of the Arabic vocabulary, Arabic orthography,
Arabic style and vocabularyall are unthinkable without the Qurnic
fact. The history of the Arabic language down to our times cannot be
written without constant reference to the Qurn.
Conversely, the Qurn is deeply marked by its Arabness. The Qurn
is the first literary document in Arabic. It is also the first Arabic docu-
ment to mention the Arabic language. In contradistinction to the atti-
tude of the Jewish Bible and the Christian New Testament toward their
own linguistic forms, the language of the Qurn is an important topic
of Qurnic self-reflection. While neither the Bible nor the New Testa-
ment refer to their Hebrew (or Aramaic) and Greek literary forms, the
Arabic character of the Qurn is in its self-view a cornerstone of its
divine quality.
The adjective arab in the Qurn always refers to the language, never
to a tribe or a social class. The term as an ethnic designation is also
190 stefan wild
very rare in Jhiliyya poetry.1 In the Qurn, arab refers always to the
language of the holy text. It occurs eleven times in the Qurn, and only
in Suras traditionally dated to the Middle and late Meccan period. In
six passages, the adjective arab is a qualification of the word Qurn,
a word meaning primarily recitation, reading aloud . . . (Sura 12:12;
20:113; 39: 2728; 41:14; 42:7; 43:14). The conjunction lisn arab
Arabic tongue occurs three times in the Qurn (Sura 16:103; 26:195,
46:12), and is used to describe the language of the Qurn. The conjunc-
tion h ukm arab (Sura 13:37) an Arabic judgment also refers to the
holy text, and in 41:44, in which the possibility of a Qurn ajam a
non-Arabic Qurn is dismissed, the adjective arab again refers to the
holy text. The Arabic quality of Qurnic revelation could scarcely be
more solidly established.
On the other hand, the Qurn seems indifferent to the linguistic
shape of preceding revelations. In the Qurn, the only language used is
Arabic. Arabic is also the only language mentioned by name. The Qurn
does not specify in which languages Nh, Ibrhm, Isml, Ms, s or
other prophets and messengers spoke to their peoples or in which lan-
guages their holy books might have been.
God speaks Arabic to Adam and his wife, Satan whispers in Arabic
(Sura 20:120), the angels and the jinn speak Arabic (Sura 72:115),
Moses addresses the Pharaoh, Joseph addresses the Egyptian ministers
wife in Arabic, Jesus speaks Arabic from his cradle, D l-Qarnayn and
the People of the Cavethey all use Arabic. Every single soul is made to
speak Arabic at the Day of Judgment, animals like the ant (Sura 27:18) or
the hoopoe (Sura 27:22), even inanimate entities like Hell (Sura 50:30)
speak Arabic. Everybody and everything that speaks in the Qurn must
necessarily speak Arabic, because Arabic is the only language used
throughout the Qurn.
But the intention of the text is in no way to convey that all mankind
throughout history shared and will share the same language. I do not
know of any exegete who concluded from the Qurnic accounts that
the language used between Ms and the Egyptian Pharaoh was Arabic
or that the language used between the Egyptian notables wife and her
lady-friends must have been Arabic, or that the Messiah spoke in Ara-
bicjust because the Qurn reproduces their words in Arabic. It is a
different matter for Adam and Isml (see below).
1
Cf. Agha and Khalidi: Poetry and Identity 70.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 191
On the other hand, the Qurn does mention the existence of lan-
guages other than Arabic and emphasizes that the plurality and variety
of human languages is a sign of divine grace. The divine creation of dif-
ferent languages is as important as the creation of heaven and earth:
wa-min ytih xalqu s-samawti wa-l-ardi wa-xtilfu alsinatikum
wa-alwnikum nna f dlika la-ytin li-l-limn
And of His signs is the creation of heavens and earth and the variety of
your tongues and hues. Surely in this are signs for people who know (Sura
30:22).
Even as God created man and woman, heaven and earth, he created
different colors (alwn, or: kinds of human skin) and different human
languages (cf. the enumeration in Sura 30:2025). The existence of dif-
ferent languages is one of Gods signs for those who know. Unless the
word ya is here taken to mean a portent of warning, such a view seems
difficult to reconcile with the myth of the Babylonian tower (Gen 11:
19), according to which the origin of a multitude of human languages
is divine punishment. Sura 30:22 may even be an inter-textual stab at the
narrative of the Babylonian Tower. There were, however, extra-Qurnic
traditions that preserved the motif that the difference between human
languages was due to an act of divine wrath (p. 196).
A second important element in the Qurnic linguistic outlook flows
forth from this esteem of other languages. In the course of history, God
sent each messenger (rasl) to a specific people (qawm), and this mes-
senger brought the divine message to that people in its language.
And We have sent no messenger save with the tongue of his people that he
might make all clear to them
wa-m arsaln min raslin ill bi-lisni qawmih li-yubayyina lahum
(Sura 14:4).
The primary raison dtre of the Qurn is that the Prophet Muhammads
message was in Arabic. Whereas the other prophets and messengers had
been sent earlier with a message in the languages of their peoples, who
did not speak Arabic, Muhammad is sent to the Arabs. The Arabic lan-
guage vouchsafes the understanding of the Arabic-speaking audience.
For a great part of the Qurn, the fact that this revelation was in Arabic
was the most important difference between Muslim revelation and all
previous revelation.
These Qurnic elements influenced a theological-linguistic scenario
that gave rise to a particular image of linguistic history. The claim that
192 stefan wild
One of the main issues was the origin of Arabic, an issue often framed as
the question Who was the first human being to speak Arabic? Muslim-
Arab scholarship tried sometimes to disentangle, sometimes to com-
bine and often to harmonize the heterogeneous strands of philosophical
speculation, exegetical H adt, and genealogical traditions. In many cases,
however, contradictory reports were just left standing side by side. An
extensive and useful overview of much of the Arabic material was given
by as-Suyt in his Muzhir.2 The following remarks will outline the main
lines of this colorful and often contradictory linguistic yarn.
2
Andrzej Czapkiewicz, The Views of the Medieval Arab Philologists on Language and
its Origin in the Light of Al-Suyutis Al-Muzhir, Krakow 1989. Czapkieviczs translations
are sometimes hard to understand.
3
For the difference between tawqf and ilhm, cf. J. van Ess, Theologie und Gesell-
schaft IV 325.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 193
4
Weiss, Muslim Discussions 37.
5
aktaru ahli n-nazari al anna asla l-lugti innama huwa tawdu wa-sti lh l
wahy wa-tawqf (Al-Xasis I 4041).
194 stefan wild
6
Van Ess, Theologie und Gesellschaft IV 324.
7
az-Zubayd, Tabaqt an-nahwiyyn (ed. Muhammad Ab l-Fadl Ibrhm), Cairo
1954/1373, 1 jabala kulla ummatin mina l-umami al lugatin antaqahum bih wa-
yassara lahum.
8
lugatu l-arabi asbaqu l-lugti wujdan, as-Suyt , Muzhir I 28, 4.
9
as-Suyt, Muzhir I 30, 10.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 195
people lived before the flood. Syriac resembled Arabic, but it was cor-
rupted (muh arraf ), and Syriac was the language of all people in Nhs ark
except for one man, whose name was Jurhum, and his language was still
the original Arabic. When they left the ark, ram b. Sm married one of
his (Jurhums) daughters. From them the Arabic language came down on
his offspring Aws Ab d, Ubayl, Jir Ab Tamd, and Jdis. d was
given the name of Jurhum, because he was their maternal forefather. And
Syriac stayed with the offspring of Arfaxad b. Sm until it reached Yajub
b. Qaht n. He was in Yemen. There the Ban Isml settled and the Ban
Qaht n learned from them the Arabic language.10
It is interesting to see that the term tah rf, which is the usual word
denoting the falsification of the revealed scriptures by Jews and Chris-
tians, is here used to explain a fact of imagined linguistic history : the
corruption and subsequent loss of Arabic. According to this account,
Nhs language was not Arabic, but Syriac. Arabic had survived only
with Jurhum and his tribe.
10
as-Suyt , Muzhir I 30,-6 according to Abdalmalik b. H abb.
11
Claude Gilliot and Pierre Larcher Language and Style of the Qurn. EQ 3, 109
135, especially The mythical narratives on the superiority of Arabic 118ff.
12
fa-btan qaryatan wa-sammh Tamnin fa-asbah dta yawmin wa-qad tabal-
balat alsinatuhum al tamnn lughatan ih dh l-arabiyyatu (al-Azraq, Axbr Makka,
/ed. F. Wstenfeld) vol. 1, 20.
196 stefan wild
is based on the idea that Nh and his followers originally did not speak
Arabic.
In other accounts, Ibrhm is said to have spoken two languages,
Syriac and Hebrew. When he fled from the persecution by Namrd in
Kta in the land of Babylon, his language was Syriac (lisnuh suryn).
Namrd wanted to catch him and gave order that anybody speaking
Syriac should be arrested and brought before him. But when Ibrhm
crossed the Euphrates from H arrn, God changed his language and
Ibrhm miraculously started speaking Hebrew (ibrn). He escaped
because his persecutors did not know this language.13
A further version closer to the narrative of the Babylonian Tower is
reported by at- Tabar: Namrd has a high building (sarh ) made, until it
reaches the sky. God destroys the building and on that day the languages
of people become confused from fright. They then speak in seventy-
three languages. This is why the place was called Bbil. The language of
mankind before that was Syriac.14 A different kind of etiological expla-
nation is linked to Yarub (see below section 4). The etymological con-
nection between balbala and the name Bbil is often invoked and finds
its way into Arabic lexicography.15 This connection between the Arabic
word for confusion (balbala) and the name of Bbil is prefigured in the
Bible, in which the name of the city of Babel is linked to the Hebrew
verb balal, also meaning to confuse (Gen 11:7). The number of exist-
ing languages is given in different ways. According to al-Masd, there
were seventy-two languages divided under Nhs sons: the descendants
of Sm spoke nineteen languages, the descendants of H m seventeen,
and those of Yfit thirty six.16
As far as I can see, nobody in pre-modern times ever claimed that the
prophet Ibrhm spoke Arabicalthough his unequalled importance
for the link between earlier monotheistic religions and Islam, especially
through his role in building the Kaba, would have made such a claim
attractive. Abraham is called a Muslim in the Qurn (h anf muslim
13
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt ed. Eugen Mittwoch, Leiden 1905, I:1 21, 14; a similar tradition
in Ibn Mutarrif at -Taraf, Qisas al-anbiy no. 124.
14
fa-tabalbalat alsunu n-nsi min yawmaidin mina l-fazai fa-takallam bi-taltati
wa-sabna lisnan fa-li-dlika summiyat Bbil wa-innam kna lisnu n-nsi qabla
dlika s-suryniyyata., At-Tabar, Trx I 322.
15
Lisn al-Arab s.v. bll: summiyat ardu Bbil li-anna llha h na arda an yuxlifa
bayna alsinati ban dama baatha r-rh an fa-h aarahum min kulli ufuqin il Bbil fa-
balbala llhu bih alsinatahum tumma farraqahum tilka r-rh u fi l-bild.
16
al-Masd, Murj ad-dahab, ed. Barbier de Meynard I 78.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 197
sura 3:67)but never an Arab. This claim was put forward only by zeal-
ous Arab nationalists. When in 1999 Pope John Paul II announced his
plan to visit Ur in Iraq, members of the ruling Bat -party criticized that
the Pope in his announcement had not spoken of Ibrhm as an Arab.
They argued: Ibrhm was born in the land of the Arabs and he lived
in Iraq, in the Sumerian city of Ur. When he was chased out of his place
of birth because of his monotheist creed, Ibrhm started his combative
journey through the lands of the Arabs, H arrn, Palestine, Egypt, and
Mecca . . . Combative was a favorite attribute of praise in the Bat-party.
The Bats do not expressly identify Arabic as Ibrhms languageeven
though the reader is forced to conclude that the language that the com-
bative Arab Ibrhm spoke must have been Arabic.17 Such a linguistic
myth could be elaborated. There is frequently a tendency in modern
popular Arab discourse to call Arabic what is elsewhere called Semitic,
in order to extol the importance of Arabic. The Canaanite tribes preced-
ing the Israelite settlers are then called Arab Canaanite tribes, and the
variant of Akkadian to be found in the Ebla texts is called Arabic.18 For
the claim that the Aramaic of the Nabatean inscriptions is really Ara-
bic, see below.
3. Ismls Arabic
Next to Adam, the most important figure with whom the introduc-
tion of Arabic is firmly connected is Ibrhms son Isml. In one of the
most important foundational Muslim narratives, God orders Ibrhm
to migrate to Mecca with young Isml and the latters mother Hagar.
Ibrhm builds the Kaba together with Isml. There they meet mem-
bers of the (Arabic-speaking) Jurhum tribe. Isml grows up with their
children, learns how to shoot (the bow) and to speak in their language,
and he takes a Jurhum-wife.19 Another report says, without reference to
where and how, Ismail learned Arabic: Sarah gave Hajar to Ibrhm, he
slept with her and she bore him Isml, who was Ibrhms eldest son.
His name used to be Iml which was later arabicized (wa-kna smuh
17
Amatzia Baram, Der moderne Irak, die Baath-Partei und der Antisemitismus in
Jahrbuch fr Antisemitismusforschung 12 (2003) 99119 p. 114.
18
Welt des Islams 21 /1982, 240f.
19
Ibn Qutayba, al-Marif, ed. Tarwat Uka, Cairo 1960, 34.
198 stefan wild
20
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt I/1 23, 9.
21
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt I/1 24, 16. Tottoli p. 82. Cf. Sibt Ibn al-Jawz, Mirt 310; Ibn
Askir, Trkh II 331.
22
See the comment of ibl, Mah sin al-wasil f marifat al-awil 143.
23
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt I/1 24, 21.
24
as-Suyt, Muzhir I 22, 13.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 199
Ibn Sad transmits a report that contradicts the idea that Isml was
born with Arabic and traces Arabic only to Ismls offspring. Accord-
ing to this tradition, Isml never spoke Arabic, because in his filial
piety he did not deem it permissible to act differently from his father.
According to this report, the first of his offspring to speak Arabic were
the Ban Rala bint Yajub b. Yarub b. Ldan b. Jurhum b. mir b. Saba
b. Yaqtn b. bir b. likh b. Arafxaad b. Sm b. Nh.25 Nevertheless,
the fact that Isml forgot his fathers Hebrew is expressly stated in a
tradition traced to Muhammad b. Salm:26 The first one to speak Arabic
and to forget his fathers language was Isml. Muslim Arab tradition,
therefore, agrees that Ibrhms language was not Arabic, whereas there
is disagreement on whether it was Isml who was the first to speak
Arabic and, if so, when and how Isml learned it. For the tribal aspects
of such traditions, cf. below under 4. Yarubs Arabic.
The most frequently quoted account, successful as a canonical H adt,
was, however, that Isml learned Arabic from the Jurhum tribe in his
youth (wa-shabba l-ghulmu wa-taallama l-arabiyyata minhum, i.e.,
Jurhum, s. Buxr, Sah h , Anbiy 21). He marries twice, in both cases
a wife from the Jurhum tribe. This again meant, of course, that Isml
was, strictly speaking, not the first one to use Arabic, because he had
to learn it from somebody else. In some reports, the gift of the Arabic
language is mentioned next to other privileges of Isml: the tradition-
ists report that Isml was the first one to speak Arabic, the first one to
build the h aram after his father Ibrhm, and the first one to install the
rites of pilgrimage. He was also the first to ride full-grown horses, which
before were wild and could not be ridden. Some say: Isml was the first
whose tongue God opened to speak Arabic. And when he grew up, God
gave him the Arabic bow. This report implies that God revealed Arabic
to Isml and that Isml did not have to learn it from the Jurhum.27
This report became part of Adab literature. At- Talib mentions it in his
Latif al-Marif. The first person to speak Arabic was Isml, peace be
upon him; all the Arabs came subsequently from his progeny, except for
three tribes, those of Auz, H adramawt and Taqf. He was the first to
25
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt I/1 24, 22.
26
as-Suyt , Muzhir I 32, -2.
27
al-Yaqb, Trx I 22.
200 stefan wild
ride horses, these mounts being originally wild horses which had never
been ridden before.28
There was also some concern about the fact that the long time that had
elapsed between the period in which Isml had started speaking Arabic
and the time of the Prophet Muhammad made it difficult to accept that
the Arabic language should not have changed during this interval. The
Prophet gave the answer: Ismls language had been obfuscated (daru-
sat). But Jibrl came and made me retain the language and I retained it,29
i.e. the Qurnic message saved Arabic.
In other versions, it is not only the Arabic language whose origin is
attributed to Adam or Isml, but also the Arabic script, which is in
this case imagined as written on clay tablets: The first who installed
the Arabic script, the Syriac script, and all other scripts was Adam, 300
years before his death. He wrote them in clay and baked them. When the
earth was hit by the flood, each people received its script and used it to
write. Isml b. Ibrhm received the Arabic writing.30
Some of these conflicting mythological reports are woven together
and transformed into scholarship by modern Wahhabi scholars. Taking
such accounts as factually historical, Muhammad Musta f al-Azam is
led in a recently published book31 to a re-writing of linguistic history
on a grand scale. He asks himself the question What language did the
Nabateans speak? And the answer is:
Growing up in Makkah from his earliest childhood Isml, eldest son of
Ibrhm, was raised among the Jurhum tribe and married within them
twice. This tribe spoke Arabic, and so, undoubtedly, must have Isml.
The Jurhum Arabic probably lacked the sophistication and polish of the
Quraishi Arabic, preceding it as it did almost by two thousand years.
Ibn Ushta records a statement from Ibn Abbs, that the first person to
initiate set rules for the Arabic grammar and alphabet was none other
than Isml. Eventually, Allah commissioned Isml as a messenger and
prophet, to call his people for the worship of the one true God Allah, to
28
In: C.E. Bosworth (ed.), The Book of Curious and Entertaining Information. The
Latif al-marif of al-Thalib, Edinburgh 1968, p. 40, cf. Lammens, La cit arabe de
Taif la veille de lHgire, Beirut 1922, 5768.
29
as-Suyt , Muzhir I 35, 3.
30
as-Suyuti, Itqn IV 143 quoting Ab Bakr M. b. Abdallh b. Muhammad b. Uta
al-Isbahn (d. 360) and his Kitb al-mash if after Kab al-Ahbr: cf. as-Suyt, Bugya
59; as-Safad, Wf III 347; and Nldeke GdQ II 53 and GdQ III 1 fn. 2.
31
Muhammad Musta f al-Azam, The History of the Quranic Text. From Revelation
to Compilation. A Comparative Study with the Old and New Testaments, UK Islamic
Academy, Leicester 2003.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 201
establish prayers and pay alms to the poor. Since Allah sends every mes-
senger in the language of his own people, Isml must have preached in
Arabic. Genesis credits Isml with twelve sons, among them Nebajoth/
Nabat; born and nurtured in these Arabian surroundings they must have
adopted Arabic as their mother tongue. These sons may have preserved
their fathers message by using the prevailing Arabic script; certainly, they
would not have resorted to whatever script was then current in Palestine
(Ibrhms homeland), since two generations had already lived in Arabia.
When Nabat subsequently migrated northwards he must have taken the
Arabic language and alphabet with him. It was his descendants who estab-
lished the Nabatean Kingdom (600 B.C.E.105 C.E.).
Al-Azam dates Isml and his early Arabic at around 1400 B.C.E. and
concludes: The Nabatean language and script were . . . a form of Arabic
(121).
4. Yarubs Arabic
A further source in tracing the first Arabic speaker was tribal history.
The Arabs, in their own self-view, were not only a linguistic community,
but also marked by common ancestors. Descent was a primary symbol
of a tribal community, and the self-esteem and prestige of individuals
and communities were linked to the purity of descent. The efforts of the
Arab genealogists to establish a link between living Arab tribal groups
and past forefathers were, of course, highly tenuous. The skeptical obser-
vation of Ibn H azm (d. 456/1064) that on the face of the earth there is
no one whose descent from them is verifiable did not prevent the emer-
gence of the most speculative lineages.32 By and large, the Arab tribes
claimed descent from one of two ancestors, either a North Arabic origin
32
Ibn H azm, Jamharat ansb al-arab, ed. Lvy-Provencal, Cairo 1948, 8, quoted by
EI 2nd ed. I 546.
202 stefan wild
connected to the North Arab Adnn (also to Maadd and Nizr, later
Qays) or a South Arabic origin connected to Qaht n (also called Yama-
nis, later also Kalb). Some tribes such as d, Tamd, ram, Jurhum,
Tasm and Jads were believed to have disappeared before Islam. Hostil-
ity between the offspring of Qaht n and those of Adnn emerged after
the advent of Islam in the form of the cleavage between the Ansr in
Medina and the Quray. The fact that the Prophet Muhammad belonged
to the Quray brought enormous prestige to the Adnn, i.e., the North
Arabs. The narrative that linked Isml to Arabic was counterbalanced
by the argument that Isml had learned Arabic from the Jurhum, a
South Arabic tribe. While al-Masd accepted that Isml had been
given Arabic by God, he did not deny that Yarub b. Qaht n, the ances-
tor of the Yamanis, was the first to speak Arabic. Which of the three
Arab group, the extinct Arabs, the Nizris, or the Yamanis was the first
to speak Arabic? The Nizri and Yamani groups vigorously upheld their
own claims to this honour. The Nizris held that Isml was given the
language by God, while the Yamanis contended that Isml had learned
the language from a Yamani tribe living in Mecca.33 This conflict of
claims masked a deeper social and political conflict between the two
groups. Al-Masd, while granting that Yarub Ibn Qaht n, the ancestor
of the Yamanis, was the first to speak Arabic (Murj sec. 71), believes
that Ishmael too was granted this honour by God, independently of his
association with the Yamanis.34 The tribal family trees set up by Arab
genealogists always have an agenda. When names are inserted or omit-
ted, insertion and omission usually serve a purpose. When in the list
of Qaht ns ancestors there are two new names, those of Yajub and
Yarub, inserted between Saba and Qaht n (Yoqtan) in a family tree
that is otherwise based on Gen 10, 132, this happens because these
two names fulfill two important functions. Yarub symbolizes and per-
sonalizes the change from Syriac to pure Arabic, while Yajub/Yaman
gives his name to the land Yaman. The appearance and etiological func-
tion of persons with such telling names is a common feature of Arab
genealogy.35
A tradition quoted by Yqt and traced to ad-Dnawars Mujlasa
links Bbil with Yarub and Arabic as the heavenly language: When God
33
Tarif Khalidi, Islamic Historiography. The histories of Masudi, Albany 1975, 116;
conflicting claims are set forth in Tanbh 7983 and Murj 99699.
34
Tarif Khalidi, Islamic Historiography ibid.
35
Manfred Kropp, Geschichte der reinen Araber II 379f.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 203
36
Yqt, Mujam al-buldn ed. F. Wstenfeld, I 447, 19.
37
as-Suyt , Muzhir I 31, -3.
204 stefan wild
Yaman. . . . And Yarub was the most high-minded youth in Babylon and
spoke clear Arabic, while the others spoke in confused language. 38 And
Yarub recited the following verse:
I am the youth favored by the richest gift, the happy one, well known for
his virtue. I am the son of Qaht n, the influential and rich, I spoke in
Arabic, while the people were in (linguistic) confusion. (I spoke) in the
clearest unambiguous language and in the perfect language of the king-
doms after me.
an l-gulmu d n-nasbi l-ajzali / al-aymanu l-marfu bi-t-tajammuli /
an bnu Qaht na l-hammmi l-aqyali / arabtu wa-l-ummatu f tabalbuli /
bi-l-mantiqi l-abyani gayri mukili / wa-mantiqi l-amlki badi l-kamali.
This is pure poetic self-praise in the rajaz meter as we know it from the
earliest Arabic poetry. According to this report, Yarub b. Qaht n was
the first to speak clear Arabic and turned away from the confused ver-
sion of Arabic (namatu l-arabiyyati l-mubalbalati). He let his sons greet
him with the greeting abayta l-lana (may you avoid the curse!) and
with good morning! This Arabic is not so much seen as a prophetic
language but as a heroic language spoken by a tribal noble forefather.
The hero of this poem, Yarub, praises himself for speaking pure Arabic,
a royal language of noble kings, while lesser Arab mortals used mixed
and confused languages.
In a further verse, Yarub predicts the coming of the Prophet
Muhammad:
Muh ammadu l-hd n-nabiyyu l-mursalu / li-llhi darru l-mjidi l-mus-
taqbili
Muhammad, the guide, the God-sent Prophet/ how praiseworthy is the
blessed one who is coming.
Such a tradition combined tribal history with revelation. And to round
things out, the report claims that the same Yarub was the first to recite
Arabic poetry and to put it into meters. He invented the poetic genres
and composed praise-poetry, self-praise, and love poetry.39 Earlier tra-
ditions see the Ban Hshim and the Ban Yarub in fierce competi-
tion. When the rival of the Prophet Muhammad, Musaylima the Liar,
who traced his descent to the Ban Yarub, heard of Muhammads death,
he hoped to outstrip the Prophet and is said to have recited the verse:
38
Kropp, I Arab. text 9ff.
39
Kropp 11, transl. 149.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 205
Passed away the prophet of the Ban Hshim / and rose up the prophet
of the Ban Yarub!40
As we have seen, after the advent of Islam, the unique character of Ara-
bic was extrapolated by theologians, philosophers, and genealogists back
to times immemorial. In their view, after the revelation of the Arabic
Qurn, Arabic became even more of a special language. Arabic itself,
not only its Qurnic form, was something sacred, superhuman. Yet, in a
famous description, a-fi (d. 204/820) explained the special charac-
ter of Arabic mainly by its most important hermeneutical challenge, i.e.,
its vast and ramified vocabulary. According to him, this was the primary
reason for the privileged status of Arabic:
We do not know that any man except for a prophet can claim to know the
Arabic language completely. However, nothing Arabic escapes the Arabs
collectively, so that there would be nobody among the Arabs who knows
it. The knowledge of Arabic among the Arabs resembles the knowledge
of the traditions (sunan) among the scholars of religious Law. We do not
know anybody who could claim to know all traditions, so that not a single
one would escape him. But when the knowledge of traditions of all schol-
ars is collected, the whole of tradition is found. When the knowledge of
each of these scholars is divided, something of the traditions will escape
each of them. But what escapes him will be found with someone else.41
The Prophet, who as an individual can claim to know Arabic completely,
is, of course, Muhammad. His knowledge of Arabic is superhuman. But
the Arabs collectively also know the whole language.
The Prophets own mastering of Arabic was related to the Qurnic
revelation, as well. When a man admires the Prophets rhetorical tal-
ent and says, What a good speaker you are: We have not seen anybody
speaking better Arabic than you! the Prophet answers: This is my right.
For the Qurn was revealed to me in clear Arabic.42 And the Prophet
could boast: I am the best Arabic speaker (an afsah u l-arab43 or an
40
Ibn Katr, Bidya vi, 341, quoted according to M. J. Kister, Musaylima in EQ 3
(2003) 462.
41
A-fi, Risla, ed. Ahmad Muhammad kir, Cairo 1940, 42, 8ff.
42
as-Suyt , Muzhir I 35, 6.
43
Muzhir I 209, 2.
206 stefan wild
44
Ibn Sad, Tabaqt I 113.
45
Ab t- Tayyib al-Lugaw, Martib an-nahwiyyn, ed. Muhammad Ab l-Fadl
Ibrhm, Cairo n.d. <1955>, Maktabat Nahdat Misr 6,1.
46
Muzhir I 209, 5.
47
Muzhir I 35, 4.
48
Muzhir I 10, 9.
49
Nahj al-Balgawa-huwa majm m xtrahu -arf Ab l-H asan Muh ammad
ar-Rd b. al-H asan al-Msaw min kalm Amr al-muminn Ab l-H asan Al b. Ab
T lib, ed. Subh Slih, Beirut 1982; Moojan Momen, An Introduction to Shii Islam, The
History and Doctrine of Twelver Shiism, New Haven/London 1983, 25.
divine, prophetic, and heroic arabic 207
The Arabic language celebrated its greatest triumph with the vast expan-
sion of the Islamic conquest and the concomitant expansion of the Ara-
bic language. But most Arab grammarians and lexicographers did not
see it that way. In an almost incredible volte-face, they saw the fate of the
Arabic language sealed and its purity doomed to corruption precisely
at the moment when the Muslim faith and the Qurn won over the
world:
wa-lam tazal il-arabu tantiqu al sajiyyatih f sadri islmih wa-md
jhiliyyatih h att azhara llhu l-islma al siri l-adyni fa-daxala
n-nsu fhi afwjan wa-aqbal ilayhi arslan wa-jtamaat fhi l-alsinatu
l-mutafarriqatu wa-l-lugtu l-muxtalifatu fa-fa l-fasdu f l-lugati l-ara-
biyyati.50
The Arabs did not cease to speak Arabic according to its disposition in
the beginning of the era of Islam and in the pre-Islamic past until God let
Islam prevail over all other religions. Then people entered Islam in masses
and turned to it in flocks. In Islam all separate languages and different
tongues came together and therefore corruption ( fasd) spread in the
Arabic language.
This rather anticlimactic statement marks the beginning of Arabic as
the language of an Islamic world civilization. For many an Arab gram-
marian and lexicographer, this period was at the same time the starting
point of its decadence and corruption.
7. References
Agha, Saleh Said and Tarif Khalidi. 2002/03. Poetry and Identity in the Umayyad Age.
Al-Abhth 5051, 55119.
al-Azam, Muhammad Musta f. 2003. The History of the Quranic Text. From Revelation
to Compilation. A Comparative Study with the Old and New Testaments. Leicester: UK
Islamic Academy.
al-Azraq. 1858. Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka (F. Wstenfeld, ed.), vol. 1 Axbr Makka.
Leipzig.
Czapkiewicz, Andrzej. 1988. The Views of the Medieval Arab Philologists on Language
and its Origin in the Light of Al-Suyutis Al-Muzhir. Krakow: Universitas Jagellonica
Acta Scientiarum Litterarumque CMIX.
50
az-Zubayd, Tabaqt an-nahwiyyn wa-l-lugawiyyn (ed. Muhammad Ab l-Fadl
Ibrhm), Cairo 1954, 1.
208 stefan wild
EQ 20012006 = Jane McAuliffe, ed. Encyclopaedia of the Qurn, vol. 15. Leiden:
E. J. Brill
Fischer, A. and A.K. Irvine. 1978. Kaht n. EI 2nd ed., 4: 447449.
Gilliot, Claude and Pierre Larcher. 2003. Language and Style of the Qurn. EQ 3,
109135, especially The mythical narratives on the superiority of Arabic, 118ff.
Goldziher, Ignaz. 1873. Beitrge zur Geschichte der Sprachgelehrsamkeit bei den
Arabern. Sitzungsber. d. Kaiserl. Ak. d.W. Wien, Phil-Hist.Kl. 73, 51152.
Ibn H azm. 1948. Jamharat ansb al-arab. Ed. . Levy-Provencal, Cairo.
Ibn Mutarrif at -Taraf, Ab Abdallh M. b. A. al-Kinn. 2003. Qisas al-anbiy (The
Stories of the Prophets). Roberto Tottoli, ed. Berlin: Islamkundliche Untersuchungen
253.
al-Jumah Muhammad b. Sallm 1916. Tabaqt a-uar. Joseph Hell, ed. Leiden.
Khalidi, Tarif. 1975. Islamic Historiography. The histories of Masudi. Albano.
Kropp, Manfred. 1975. Die Geschichte der reinen Araber vom Stamme Qaht n aus dem
Kitb Nashwat at-Tarab f trkh jhiliyyat al-arab des Ibn Sad al-Maghrib, hrsg. u.
bersetzt von Manfred Kropp, Bd. I: Einleitung und Text, Bd. II: bersetzung und
Anmerkungen, Diss. Heidelberg.
Loucel, Henri. 1963. Lorigine du langage daprs les grammairiens arabes. Arabica 10 I
188208; II 253281; 11 (1964) III 5772; IV 151187.
Rubin, Uri. 1990. H anfiyya and Kaba. An inquiry into the Arabian pre-Islamic back-
ground of dn Ibrhm. JSAI 13, 85112.
as-Suyt , Abdarrahmn Jalladdn. n.d. al-Muzhir f ulm al-luga. Muhammad Ahmad
Jd al-Mawl Bek, Muhammad Ab l-Fadl Ibrhm, Al Muhammad al-Bjw, eds.
Cairo n.d., 2nd ed., Dr Ihy al-Kutub al-arabiyya, vol. 12.
Tottoli, Roberto, ed. 2003. The Stories of the Prophets by Ibn Mutarrif al-Tarafi, edited
with an introduction. Berlin, 253.
. 2002. Biblical Prophets in the Qurn and Muslim Literature. Richmond.
Weiss, Bernard G. 1974. Medieval Muslim Discussions on the Origin of Language.
ZDMG 124, 3341.
INFLECTION AND GOVERNMENT IN ARABIC ACCORDING
TO SPANISH MISSIONARY GRAMMARIANS FROM
DAMASCUS (XVIIITH CENTURY): GRAMMARS AT THE
CROSSROADS OF TWO SYSTEMS?1
Otto Zwartjes
University of Amsterdam, NIAS
1. Introduction
1
This article is an elaborated version of paper delivered at the IIIrd International
Conference on Missionary Linguistics, Hong Kong and Macau, 12th15th March 2005.
The organization of the conference and participation in Hong Kong has been made pos-
sible by financial support of the Norwegian Research Council (Norges Forskingsrd)
and the Language Centre of the Hong Kong University of Science and Technology. I
have to acknowledge Kees Versteegh who inspired me to do research in the field of the
History of Linguistics and particularly Michael Carter for his valuable corrections and
suggestions. Thanks to my colleague Maria Cndida Barros, I came across the reference
to the grammar of Lucas Caballero. Research has been made possible by the Radboud
University (TCMO) where my 2 research on Pedro de Alcal started. I continued this
research topic at the University of Oslo, supported by the NFR-project OsProMil (Oslo
Project on Missionary Linguistics). I am grateful to the Rogge Library (Strngns) for
the reproduction of the MS. I gladly acknowledge Pierre Winkler for his translations
from Latin.
210 otto zwartjes
in Bengal . . . The work of Roth was a masterpiece, which does not differ
considerably from current grammars, which similarly depend on the
linguistic achievements of Indias own grammatical tradition (Hauschild
1988, 1314). In the grammars of Japanese written by the Portuguese
Jesuit Joo Rodrigues (15611634), particularly in his description of
particles and verbal endings, we can also find information concerning
the study of tenifa or tenivofa (the study of particles and verbal
endings) from contemporary Japanese scholars (Maruyama 2004, 155).
As has been demonstrated by Gregory James (2007), some missionaries
describing the Tamil language, such as Bartholomus Ziegenbalg (1682
1719), were familiar with some ancient Tamil works on grammar.
These missionaries worked under favourable conditions compared to
their colleagues who described languages, particularly Amerindian and
Austronesian, without any written tradition or an adequate indigenous
grammatical framework they could rely on.
The use of Arabic grammatical terms in the first grammar written in
Europe of vernacular Arabic, the Arte para ligeramente saber la lengua
arabiga (1505) of Pedro de Alcal (Order of St. Jerome) has been the
subject of an article written by William Cowan (1981). In de Alcals
grammar, some technical terms were incorporated in the descriptive
framework, including terms such as damir, temiz, masdar, amr and
xucla. In this article, Spanish grammars of Arabicvernacular and clas-
sicalwritten by Franciscans in Damascus and completed, copied, or
printed in Spain in the 18th century occupy our attention, particularly
the grammars of Francisco Caballero and Juan de la Encarnacin (18th
century) and Francisco Caes (17301795). Of the first we have an
unpublished manuscript, which has escaped the attention of research-
ers until today,2 and of the second a printed work has been conserved,
2
Bibliographical information concerning Francisco Caes can be found in Schnur-
rer (1811, 79, no. 113) BICRES III, and in Monroe (1970) we find some historical back-
ground. However Caes is not mentioned by Fck (1955), Dannenfeldt (1955), and
Killean (1984) and particularly the grammar of Caballero has been neglected by all.
After a century-long period of silence and total neglect, an important monograph on
Bernardino Gonzlez appeared recently, together with a facsimile edition of the diction-
ary (Intrprete arbico) and his grammar (Eptome) (Lourido Daz 2005), not long after
this paper had been delivered in Hong Kong. When the proofs were almost ready for
publication, I received a copy of this monograph, courtesy of Emilio Ridruejo. Lourido
Daz (2005, I, 2122) had traced seven manuscripts of the dictionary, and six copies
of Eptome de la gramtica rabe made by Bernardino Gonzlez pupils, probably for
their own use. One copy was completed by Blas Francisco de Salamanca in 1704, the
second by Lucas Caballero and Juan de la Encarnacin between 1709 and 1710, the
so-called Tingstadius copy. Two copies were compiled in 1719, one from the El Escorial
inflection and government in arabic 211
and the other from the University of Valencia and two further anonymous and undated
manuscripts from the Real Academia de la Historia. Lourido Daz states that all these
works were calques of that of Bernardino Gonzlez (Lourido Daz 2005, I, 13). All the
Latin grammars analysed in this article are also listed in two footnotes by Lourido Daz
(2005, I, 130 and 135) but very little importance is given to the influence of these on the
grammatical tradition of the Franciscans linked to Damascus. After having consulted
all these Latin grammars, we have come to the conclusion that the Spanish grammars
of Arabic completed by Franciscans in Damascus or in Spain were heavily inspired by
the Latin grammars, and in some cases they are Spanish calques, or translations of the
Latin examples. This is particularly evident in the grammatical examples and the use of
literally almost the same orientalising terminology, inherited from the Arabic tradition.
Thanks to the evidence of Lourido Daz study, a direct link between the Franciscans in
Damascus and Spain and the Holy Congregation of the Propaganda Fide and the San
Pietro di Montorio can now be confirmed. Juan de la Encarnacin learned Arabic from
his teacher Lucas Caballero, a pupil of Bernardino Gonzlez. The latter, in his turn, was
a pupil of the Italian Fray Bonaventura da Molazzana, who taught at the San Pietro di
Montorio and who arrived in Seville in 1693. It is known that the grammars and dic-
tionaries used at the San Pietro di Montorio were those of Dominicus Germanus and
Philip Guadagnoli, among others, and it is thus probable that Bernardino Gonzlez had
direct access to the Italian grammatical tradition. It is also important for the purposes
of this article to know that the work of Bernardino Gonzlez was also obligatory in
the curriculum for Spanish and Portuguese missionaries (Lourido Daz 2005, I, 34).
Morevoer, the Portuguese Arabist de Sousa was born in Damascus, so all these gram-
mars are thus linked and use common sources. Germanus of Silesia was educated in the
Holy Land, and was later an Arabic instructor in the El Escorial Monastery in Spain.
Although Lourido Daz monograph is without any doubt extremely important for all
those interested in the bio-bibliographical data related to Bernardino Gonzlez and his
successors, little importance is given in it to the influence of Latin sources and almost
nothing is said about possible Arabic sources, the significance of these works from the
perspective of the history of linguistics or the history of Arabic. Are these grammars to
be considered as key creative productions on the part of Spanish missionaries, or are
they nothing more than a chain in a long tradition? In the future we hope to give an
answer to this question.
212 otto zwartjes
3
Schnurrer (1811, 47, no. 72).
4
Antonius Ab Aquila (Schnurrer 1811, 50, no. 78).
5
Schnurrer (1811, 59, no. 85), or Agapito Valle Flemmarum (da Val di Fiemme).
6
I have not identified this author yet, but this could possibly be Bernardino Gonzlez,
as Lourido Daz suggests (2005).
7
Ca assi como los aljamiados (o cristianos viejos) pueden por esta obra saber el arauia,
viniendo del romance al arauia: assi los arauigos (o nueuos cristianos), sabiendo leer la
inflection and government in arabic 213
9
La declinacion de todos los nombres arauigos es vna solamente. Porque todos los
nombres arauigos son inuariables (Alcal 1505, capitulo nono).
10
In the original text, a small hamza in superscript is placed on the first vowel u.
inflection and government in arabic 215
11
Other terms not mentioned by Cowen, are jezme, translated as consonante (letra
mazjun [sic] (Corriente (1988, 34), and mdde, translated as acento (Corriente 1988,
189).
12
With this rule, the novices first build constituents with only one case [= head of
the NP], saying la tierra terra, de la tierra, terre, etc., or with two cases [= head
+ complement of the NP], as la tierra del rey, or with four and so on, as: reading the
lesson in general for the scholars of the schools, assigning the appropriate habitudo
[= grammatical form] to whatever case [= grammatical function]. The term habitudo
casualis is also used by Nepos in relation with government: Haec enim regula maxima
est in construendo [. . .] quia talem casum regit dictio qualis fuerit habitudo casualis.
(ibid.).
216 otto zwartjes
why he used these different terms. In other sections, Alcal uses abitud
as synonym of conocimientos (see also Zwartjes 1993, and 1994).
In Arabic grammatical theory a nominal sentence can be divided into
topic for which mubtada (lit. what is begun with) is normally used,
and comment (xabar), or predicate (Owens 1988, 32), or according to
Sbawayhis terminology also called mabny al-l-mubtada (what is built
upon what is begun with) (Owens 1990, 45). Mudf is the word Pedro
de Alcal uses for the genitive, which in Arabic tradition means literally
what is added, i.e. possessed (Owens 1988, 34; 1990, 104). Majrr from
the same root as jarr (see below), means pulling, or governing the -i
inflected form. Pedro de Alcal follows in his sections about the prepo-
sitions the Latin system and tries to apply Arabic terms to them, without
realizing that in the dialect he describes, case-endings are not used, and
without realizing that in classical Arabic nominal declension, there are
three inflectional vowels, the -u, the -a, whereas for the verbal inflection
the three vowels -u, -a and (zero ending) can be distinguished. Pedro
de Alcal did not take the Arabic inflectional endings as starting point,
but the Latin prepositions in alphabetic order: prepositions + accusa-
tive, prepositions + ablative, etc. and at the same time he translated the
names of these Latin terminology into Arabic:
Capitulo XXXII. De las preposiciones.
Hallamos en el Arauia todas las preposiciones que en la gramatica [latina],
y ayuntadas a essos mesmos casos, que son maful y darf (que son acusatiuo
y ablatiuo), y son las del acusativo las siguientes:
A ad apud circa circa ante longe ante [. . .]
A al aynd carib qued acbal bad cudim [. . .]
Las preposiciones del darf (que es ablativo) son las siguientes, conuiene
saber:
Con con con con en en en en
Ba bal bi bil fa fal fi fil . . .
(Alcal 1505[1883], 26).
Chapter XXXII. About the prepositions.
We find in the Arabic language all the same prepositions as in Latin gram-
mar, and they are combined with the same cases, which are mafl and
zarf (which are accusative and ablative), and those which can be combined
with the accusative are the following:
A. ad apud circa circa ante longe ante [. . .]
A al aynd carib qued acbal bad cudim [. . .]
inflection and government in arabic 217
13
Cf. Zwartjes (1994).
14
Tem is also translated as conocimiento in his dictionary (Corriente 1988, 197).
15
In his dictionary Alcal translates the word alma as (signo por) seal (Corriente
1988, 140). The seal is also used in his grammar for the article (seal de demostracin),
so this term could be the technical grammatical term, but as happens often in these
grammars, it is not always possible to distinguish between language and metalanguage.
218 otto zwartjes
The origins of the mnemonic vowel terms with and without tanwn
(the nunated forms) which expresses indefiniteness in Arabic are
unknown to me and this could be a local teaching method, not recorded
elsewhere:
minib fath a a
minib kasra i
minib damma u
minenbn fath atn an
mininbn kasratn in
minunbn dammatn un
minb sukn16
The remaining Arabic terms analyzed by Cowan are alif cequin (alif skin
silent alif ), and in his dictionary we find iarab (oracin de gramtica;
clas. Ar. irb (the inflectional endings , a, i, u (see below)17 and harf
(letra; Cl. Ar. h arf), which are not analyzed at all in the grammatical
treatise.
Summarizing the preceding paragraphs, we can conclude that in most
cases Pedro de Alcal could easily use Latin terminology, such as the
names for the cases or the imperative. The use of an exo-grammatical
term damr for the conjunct pronoun does make sense since traditional
grammar did not have precise equivalents from contemporary sources
yet. Probably, Pedro de Alcal understood very well that the conjunct
pronoun in Arabic can be used differently from the Spanish pronouns;
they can also be affixed to prepositions and nouns, for instance and
that explains probably the reason why he used the Arabic term. In the
remaining cases, Arabic terms are used for mnemonic or pedagogical-
didactical reasons. It is questionable if these terms made his teaching
16
The terms fath a, kasra and damma are not found in his grammar which gives us
the impression that Pedro de Alcal did not know them.
17
Again, we find more information in the dictionary, neglected by Cowan: iarb is
translated as declinacion de palabras (Corriente 1988, 134), which is not unimportant
because the author avoids the term noun here, since irb is used for nouns and verbs
as well.
inflection and government in arabic 219
18
Missionaries usually emphasised that the language they were learning was easy
to learn, although others label the language under description as difficult. They tried to
use the most transparent and less obscure paradigms and explanations. The reason to
re-write existing grammars was almost always because predecessors were too obscure.
Probably, the grammar of Pedro de Alcal could be perfectly understandable without
the use of Arabic grammatical terminology. The same could be said of the use of Hebrew
posodical-grammatical terms by Oyanguren de Santa Ins in his grammar of Tagalog
(1742, 208209), such as milehal (stress on the penultimate syllable, instead of the usual
ultimate syllable, in connection with stress assignment), athnach (semicolon or pause)
and metheg (one type of the several secondary accents, avoiding the loss of vowels in
pronunciation, or a sign, pointing a vowel, which usually would be reduced to schwa
but which is to be fully pronounced in this particular place). The terms atnach and
meteg are both so-called cantillation marks in the Hebrew Bible from Masoretic times.
Did the pupils of Oyanguren de Santa Ins know Hebrew, or is this pure pedantry or
snobbism?
19
The International Conference on Missionary Linguistics took place in Oslo (2003),
So Paulo (2004), Hong Kong and Macau (2005), Valladolid (2006), Mrida (Yucatn,
2007) and the sixth will be organized in vora, Portugal.
220 otto zwartjes
20
Schnurrer (1811, 88, no. 128). BICRES III, no. 84.
21
Schnurrer (1811, 16) observes that Assemani quotes from his grammar ex gram-
matical recitat, but also adds that he actually used material from Alcals dictionary
(non Grammaticae sunt, sed Vocabularii, ibid.).
22
Ioan. Gabr. Sparvenfeld. 1706. Catalogus Centuriae Librorum Rarissimorum Manu-
script.& partim Impressorum, Arabicorum, Persicorum, Turcicorum, Graecorum, Latino-
rum, &c. Upsala: John Henry Werner.
inflection and government in arabic 221
3.1 Introduction
After the foundation of a great number of missions in the East, the
importance of the Arabic language for preaching the Christian faith
continued to increase. Paul V in a papal bull dated 1610 had commanded
the various religious orders to teach Oriental languages in their colleges.
In the early 16th century, Arabic was taught in Seville at the Colegio
trilinge.24 The Franciscans decided to found colleges in Salamanca, Alcal,
Paris and Toulouse for the teaching of Arabic, Greek and Hebrew (Monroe
1970, 26). According to Monroe, Bernardino Gonzlez (c. 16651735)
composed an Arabic dictionary in Seville, which was completed by
Franciscans in Jerusalem in 1709 (Monroe ibid.), an unpublished work.
Jos de Len began to compile a new dictionary of Arabic and Bernardino
Gonzlez was sent to Damascus in order to complete his work.25 As Monroe
23
From the verbs samm to denominate, walada to give birth, at to give, ak to
complain, nad to call and qatta to cut off, to disjoin, the tenth derived form means to
deduct, which seems to be an approximate translation of auferre.
24
In this short account, there will be no space to summarize the study of languages
during the Middle Ages in Muslim Spain.
25
Franciscans had already arrived in 1233 in Damascus. Propagating the Christian
faith was not permitted by Sultan Malik al-Araf, but they took care of Europeans who
settled there. After several cases of martyrdom and imprisonment, the Cadi of the city
222 otto zwartjes
observed, the work was the most complete ever to have been composed
in Spanish after that of Pedro de Alcal. [. . .] The work of Gonzlez and
his collaborators was lost until Asn Palacios (1901) came across a copy
containing additions up to the year 1727 made by the friars of Damascus
(Monroe 1970, 27). One of the successors of Bernardino Gonzlez was
Francisco Caes who settled in Damascus at the Spanish Franciscan
College in 1757 (Monroe 1970, 28). Caes grammar of Arabic has been
printed in two different editions, a first in 1775 (Madrid, Don Antonio
Perez de Soto, and a second in 1776 (Schnurrer 1811, no. 113, BICRES
959 and 971), entitled Gramatica arabigo-espaola, vulgar y literal. Con
un diccionario arbigo-espaol, en que se ponen las voces mas usuales
para una conversacin familiar, con el texto de la Doctrina Cristiana en
el idioma arabigo.
I came across another copy from the same Franciscan tradition, com-
posed by Lucas Caballero and Juan de la Encarnacin as we can read in
the colophon, which escaped the attention of scholars who have worked
in this field. The manuscript has been identified by Magnus and Aare
Mrner in his Spanien i svenska arkiv. The title of this manuscript is Com-
pendio de los rudimentos y gramtica rabe en que se da notizia de la len-
gua verncula y Vulgar y algunas reglas de la literal Iustamente, 1709, and
in the colophon 1710 (another author, Juan de la Encarnacin, finished
the text San Diego, Seville). The work is based on Bernardino Gonzlez
as we can read in the title, and Lucas Caballero, lector actual Arabo en
el Colegio de Damasco composed (recopilado) this manuscript, which
has been donated by Johan Adam Tingstadius (17481827),26 bishop of
Strngns, Sweden, from 1803, to the Rogge library, which has belonged
administratively to the Royal Library of Stockholm since 1968.
As the titles of the grammars of Caes and Caballero demonstrate, the
language under description is not only classical Arabic, but the urban
dialect of Damascus. Apart from Alcals grammar of colloquial Ara-
bic of Granada, European scholars usually did not pay much attention
to lower registers, so the linguistic works of these Franciscans work-
granted the privilege of being able to open a public chapel and in 1668 the Francis-
cans established themselves in a Maronite church, which they left in 1719 when they
acquired a new church in the Christian Quarter of Bb Tma. The foundation of the
college where Arabic was taught dates from this period.
26
Tingstadius was a professor in Oriental languages at Uppsala. He published, for
instance in 1770, a treatise entitled Dissertatio philologica de natura et indole linguarum
orientalium communi (Uppsala: Johan Edman) and in 1794 his Dictiones arabicae ex
carmine Tograi, hebraismum biblicum illustrantes. Uppsala: Johan Edman.
inflection and government in arabic 223
ing in Damascus are of great importance. However, they were not the
only grammarians who described non-Classical registers. Antonio ab
Aquilas grammar published in 1650 is not only a grammar of classical
Arabic (ad grammaticae doctrinalis intelligentiam) but also colloquial
Arabic (ad vulgaris dumtaxat idiomatic), probably the reason why he
called the grammar Arabicae linguae novae et methodicae institutiones.
Dominicus Germanus (Germanus of Silesia; 15881670)27 composed a
dictionary in 1636 with the title Fabrica overo Dittionario della lingua
volgare arabica et italiana, copioso di voci e locutioni, con osservare la
frase delluna e dellaltra lingua (Roma. Nella stampa della Sac. Congr. De
Propag. Fide) followed three years later by his Fabrica linguae Arabicae
cum interpretatione latina et italica, accommodata ad usum linguae uul-
garis et scripturalis (Roma. Typis Sac. Congreg. De Prop. Fid.).
In 1800 a work has been completed by Franciscus de Dombay (1758
1810) with the title Grammatica linguae Mauro-Arabicae juxta vernaculi
idiomatis usum, accessit vocabularium Latino-Arabicum (Vindobonae:
apud Camesina)28 but, according to Schnurrer, this title is misleading;
although this grammar describes the common speech of the people in
the Maghreb (Arabicus sermo in Mauritania quo vulgus uti solet), he
observes that all words are good Arabic (non sunt vulgari idiomati pro-
pria, sed omnia bene Arabica) (Schnurrer 1811, 95).29
27
Germanicus was a teacher of Arabic at the mission school St. Peter in Montorio,
Rome. He assisted with the preparation of the Arab Bible, he published dictionaries,
and commentaries on the Qurn. He was teacher and translator at the court of Philip
IV of Spain.
28
I have not been able to consult this grammar yet.
29
Although this is not the aim of this paper, I wish to show just a few elements from
these sources that are important records of colloquial Damascene Arabic from the
beginning of 1700. Particularly the word lists are full of colloquialisms, but also the
grammar of Lucas Caballero has many colloquial elements, to mention a few: omis-
sion of vowels: muqatla instead of muqtala, the use of the -u- vowel as a prefix for the
imperfect tense (64), b- future suffix (p. 24), which is colloquial (in Egypt it is the present
tense). However, Caballero is not always consistent, we find both faaltu as faaltum (2
person pl.m.), the use of - instead of -na for the second person feminine singular in
taf al (= Haztu fem.) (72). It is remarkable that sometimes we find even hybrid forms,
such as antum faaltu. However, we find also classical elements, such as the use of the
feminine plural in the verbal paradigms, which is not used in colloquial urban speech
today. It is also significant that the order of the persons singular in the verbal paradigms
is not the traditional one 73v72r. Caes has 3 (masc. Sing, 3 fem. Sing, 3. plur. 2 masc.
Sing. 2 fem. Sing. 2 plur. 1 sing 1 plur. Instead of 3,3,2,2,1 (sing.), 3, 3, 2, 2, 1. I am grate-
ful to Manfred Woidich for his comments on this footnote.
224 otto zwartjes
30
It must be emphasized that missionary sources, often written in Spanish, are in
many cases the only existent sources which can give us information of vernaculars once
spoken in early ages of languages of which we only have more detailed information con-
cerning the literary or classical register. Priests understood very well that in China the
teaching of Mandarin was not so useful in regions were other dialects were spoken.
Grammars of modern Greek circulated since 1638, the Grammatica lingu grc
vulgaris was printed by Simon Portius. The first Spanish grammar of modern Greek
was composed by Pedro Fuentes, as we can read in the following quotation from the
same prologue: Por lo tocante la lengua griega ha impreso su gramatica vulgar Fr.
Pedro Fuentes observante, que residi en el Seminario de Nicosa en Chipre, y ahora est
imprimiendo la gramatica literal.
31
In their tables of the vowel system, both authors also give the names of the vowels
in Arabic script, not reproduced here.
inflection and government in arabic 225
lo mismo que decir addicion de un sonido de nun o n y biene a sonar on, an,
en vg. Racholon, Racholan, Racholen, Homo, Hominem, Hominis [. . .] pero
esto ueras mas claro en el tratado del nonbre (77 r.).
The grammarians give other names to these motions [h arakt], namely
the names which signify elevation, raising, and contraction, ar-raf ,
an-nasb, wa-l-jarr, and these motions, when duplicated, are called tanwn,
which is nunation which is the same as adding the sound of a nn, or -n,
which approximately sounds as on, an, en vg. Racholon, Racholan, Racho-
len, Man (nom.), man, (acc.), man (gen.), but this you will see more clearly
in the chapter about the noun.
Caes table resembles that of Caballero, although there are some
differences. The order of the vowels is different, Spanish translations of
the Arabic vowel terms are given, and instead of de verb inclinar we
find declinar:
(1) Secun (quietud), which has according to both the synonym chezm
(caballero), or chiasmo (Caes), (jazm) which Caballero translates
as anputacion and Caes as corte;
226 otto zwartjes
A chapter dealing with how to read Arabic without vowel signs was
appended by Caballero, not present in the grammar of Caes. Although
there are differences, both grammars are from the same tradition and
both authors (re-)formulated probably the lost version of Bernardino
Gonzlez, or quoted directly from other sources, such as Agapito Valle
Flemmarum, who almost has the same definitions as Caess, although
the vocalizations of the Arabic terms and the order is slightly different:
The Tratado III deals with the noun. Here we find sometimes some
parallels with the grammar of Pedro de Alcal, particularly since
the term seal has been used in both sources, or notificacin for the
article33 and the abitudines of Pedro de Alcal resemble much the
seales del nombre. Since colloquial Arabic nouns are not inflected
according to cases, we find in the grammars of Alcal, Caballero and
Caes equivalents of the Greco-Latin cases for didactic reasons:
Los arabes aunque en la lengua vulgar reconocen tres numeros en el nombre,
es saber: singular, dual, y plural no conocen distinction de casos. Y asi el
nombre en qualquier caso termina con una misma voz. (Caes 1775, 59).
The Arabs, although they recognize in the colloquial speech three num-
bers in the noun, being, singular, dual and plural, they do not know the
distinction in cases. And thats why the noun ends with the same sound
in whichever case.
32
The vocalization of Martelottus is slightly different: Dzhammon, Phathhon and
Kafron.
33
Pedro de Alcal uses seal de demostracin. See Zwartjes (1992).
inflection and government in arabic 227
What did these terms mean in the Arabic grammatical tradition? Before
Sbawayhi, no distinctions have been made between the vowels which
are used in classical Arabic for the declensional endings, and the other
vowels, for instance: there was no disctinction between both vowels i
in the genitive al-kitb-i. An important novelty of Sbawayhi is that
he distinguished the first i that is non-declensional, from the final i
which is declensional (Versteegh 1997, 19).
When we analyze Arabic terminology in our 18th century grammars,
the sections about the particles are even more interesting. Caes and
Caballero use both a metalanguage inherited from the Arabic tradition
that had already been developed by Sbawayhi:
These endings follow eight courses: accusative (nasb), genitive ( jarr),
nominative (raf ), apocopate ( jazm), a-vowel ( fath ), i-vowel (kasr),
u-vowel (damm), zero-vowel (waqf ). (Translation by Versteegh 1997, 36).
The main distinction is whether a certain vowel is declensional or not.
The Arabic terms used by Caballero have all to be related to the Arabic
term amal that generally is translated as governance, or dependence/
dependency, which resembles the 20th century theory of government
and binding. As explained by Owens:
228 otto zwartjes
The governor is said to govern the governed in some case or mode form
(irb):
For the nouns these forms are: u nominative (raf ); a accusative (nasb); i
genitive ( jarr);
For the verb only the imperfect verb shows mode inflection: u indicative
(raf ); a subjunctive (nasb); jussive ( jazm).(Owens 1988, 39).
Carter demonstrated in several publications (1991, 1993, 1994)dealing
with different grammatical theoriesthat the translation of technical
terms are in many cases inexact, problematic, anachronistic and can lead
to misconceptions.34 Carter argued that the basic meaning of the concept
of amal is different, stressing that the interpretation of Wei: amal
und regere: Es ist nicht recht verstndlich, wie man hier schwanken
kann. amala f kann ja doch gar nicht heien Gouverneur sein ber.
[. . .]. amala f ist ttig sein, arbeiten. The translation governor is
according to Wei an example of wishful thinking (Wunsch der Vater
des Gedankes), because the concept of governance was already widely
used in the Greco-Latin framework. A translation that brings us closer
to the original meaning an etwas arbeiten, auf etwas einwirken (Wei
1910, 384).
Particles (h urf )35 can also be defined as governors, since they can
govern cases. The subclasses of some particles can be defined in terms
of dependency, i.e. which nominal or verbal ending they govern. If a
particle (h arf ) governs a genitive, such particles are called h urf jarr
(Owens 1988, 10), for instance bi (by means of ), or min (from) etc.
In both the Compendio delos Rudimentos y Gramatica Araba of Lucas
Cauallero, as the Gramatica arabigoespaola, vulgar, y literal of Fran-
cisco Caes we find hispanicised forms of these subclasses of particles.36
At the beginning of the chapter dealing with the parts of speech, both
Caballero and Caes give us the tripartite division of the parts of speech,
which is an Arabic division, according to Caes (Pero los arabes las
34
The same happened when Romans translated Greek grammar. An illustrative
example is the term casus accusativus which is a wrong translation of the Greek term
ptosis aitiatike. It is not the anklagender Fall, but das von der Handlung Betroffene,
dasjenige, dem etwas gechieht. (L. Lersch: Die Sprachphilosophie der Alten, Bonn 1838
1841. vol. 2, 186, quoted in Carter 1993, 131).
35
H arf does not only mean particle, since it has in fact much more meanings, such
as edge, letter, sound, word. See for a detailed overview of the most important meanings
the first Appendix of Owens (1990, 245248).
36
We have not been able to consult a dictionary, which is particularly devoted to the
particles, the Diccionario de partculas rabes [s.a.], composed by Mariano Rizzi y Fran-
ceschi (18th century; BICRES III, no. 71).
inflection and government in arabic 229
37
Probably seccion, since secar means to dry.
38
Usually translated as imperfect, literally the resembling verb (Baalbaki 2004,
XIII, 23), because they resemble the nouns, since both share the same declensional
vowels (irb) -u (subject and indicative mood; and -a which is direct object and
subjunctive mood). The nouns do not have zero endings (apocopate or jussive mood
in the verbal system), whereas the nouns have the -i ending (genitive), which is not
present in the verbal paradigm.
230 otto zwartjes
cles, which they call nasbantes and chazmantes [= which co-occur with
the nasb (a ending) and those which co-occur with the jazm ( ending)].
They are called nasbantes from the verb nasaba, to put up, to plant, to fix,
because through their force, the domma [damma] of the third radical of
the verb is cut off and converted into the fath a [a ending/motion]; they
fix this radical and settles down on it, while it does not suffer any change.
The chasmantes [those which co-occur with the zero-ending] are called so
from the verb jazama, to cut off, to truncate, because these particles cut off
the vowel [motion] from the third radical, and put on this the sign sukn
[motionless, vowelless] and leave them silent or liquid.
In Chapter IV, dealing with the noun, Caes gives us three classes of
particles, charrantes, chazmantes y nasbantes:
Particulas charrantes son unas preposiciones, que antepuestas al nombre le
colocan en el caso charro, genitivo (139) [. . .] Aqui se debe advertir, como
en arabe lo mismo es de decir particula nasbante, que en latin preposicion
de acusativo, y asi antecediendo al nombre le colocan en dicho caso, [. . .]
Estas particulas manera de los verbos, admiten afixs, y rigen los nombres,
colocando el sujeto en nasbo, acusativo, y el predicado en rafeo, nomi-
nativo, de suerte, que se viene hacer una permutacion del nominativo con
el acusativo . . . (143)
the particles which are charrantes are some prepositions, which placed
before the noun, put it in the jarr [i] ending, or genitive. Here it must be
observed, that as in Arabic it is the same to call them particular nasbante,
as in Latin, prepositions which combine with the accusative, and as such
they are placed before the noun, they put it in this so-called case. [. . .]
These particles, when combined with verbs, allow affixes, and govern the
nouns, placing the subject in nasb, or accusative and the predicate in raf ,
or nominative, so that there is a permutation from the nominative to the
accusative.
Caballero uses the same classification and terminology, although his
hispanicised forms are slightly different: particulas charrantes, nas-
suantes, and chesmantes. Although in Caes description, only classical
Arabic is commented on, Caballero also dedicates a paragraph on
the particulas Chesmantes, ojo, Vulgares (particles which correspond
with the optative Utinam and other Latin forms, such as quare, quia,
quoniam, etc.).
If we compare the use of Arabic terminology in the works of Caba-
llero and Caes with those used by Erpenius, we can conclude that the
latter did not use Arabic terms so extensively. Worthy of mention are for
instance: Fatha, damma, kesra in the first book De elementis . . .. We find
a Latinized form of the term jazm: post gjezman constanter manent
inflection and government in arabic 231
(1620, 20), also used as the verb Gjezmare, gjezmant, or in the passive
form gjezmatur (47), verbum hamzatum (70). The term motiones is not
used as a translation of h arakt but it for the change a noun undergoes
if the feminine ending is added to the masculine form.39 Nunnatio is
used as well (141), but the Arabic terminology for inflectional endings
as used by the Spanish missionaries is not recorded.
39
Motio est nominis Masculini in Foemininum converse; sitque additione termina-
tionis foemininae (Chapter V).
40
Johannes Reuchlin, who published his Hebrew grammar one year after the publi-
cation of Alcals, introduces the verb dagessare: quando he uel aleph repellunt nun pas-
siue significationis, dagessatur prima ut . . . (1974 [1506] Liber III, 590). See also Geiger
(1871, 129). The presence of Oriental elements in Western grammars is ofcourse not
only present when loans are used. Translations and mistranslations produced some-
times terms which are not longer recognized as from oriental origin. An example is the
history and development of the concept of radix (root).
232 otto zwartjes
have taught me over the period of sixteen years that I spent predicating
and confessing in Arabic in the missions of Asia.
To start with the first grammar mentioned, Pedro de Alcals Arte, we
can conclude immediately that this grammar has not been the source
for the terms used for the inflectional endings. Thomas Erpenius has
been apparently used, but we observed that Erpenius reduced the exotic
grammatical terms in his grammars,41 although he maintained them in
his Latin translation of Arabic treatises written by Ibn jurrm and
al-Jurjn, which could have been also the direct sources of Caes. Ibn
jurrm was born in Morocco in 12731274 and died in Fez in 1323.
He is the author of a grammatical compendium entitled Muqaddima
al-jurrmya Mabdi ilm al-Arab where he exposes the inflectional
system of Arabic, called irb. This treatise on syntax has been widely
used until the present day and it is one of the later works downstream the
long tradition starting with Sbawayhi. The Muqaddima was known in
Europe since the 16th century.42 This work has been printed for the first
time in Europe in 1592 (Medici, Rome). A translation by Peter Kirsten
(15771640), into Latin appeared in 1610 (Breslae, 1610), followed by
a translation of Erpenius (Leidae, 1617). In 1631, another translation
appeared by Thomas Obicini (15851632).43 The Kitb al-awmil al-mia
n-nahwiyya (Book of the Hundred Regentia) of Abd al-Qhir al-Jurjn
(died in ca. 1080) has been translated by Erpenius in 1617 and published
together with the Muqaddima: Grammatica Arabica dicta gjarvmia &
libellus centum regentium cum versione Latina & comentarijs (Leidae,
1617). As we shall demonstrate below, scholars in Rome, such as Philip
Guadagnoli, knew this work. Erpenius used in his translations of these
works loans from Arabic in his specified grammatical terminology. To
mention an example:
41
In this article, we quote from the Rudimenta (1620). For a more complete analysis,
the Grammatica Arabica, quinque libris methodice explicata a Thoma Erpenio (Leidae,
1613) and the Grammatica Arabica (Leidae, 1636) have to be taken into account.
42
See his article Ibn jurrm (Encylopedia of Islam. New Edition, 3, 697), and Ben
Cheneb (1927, 381382).
43
Thomas Obicini (15851632) was abbot of the Franciscan convent at Aleppo
between 1613 and 1619 and in 1621 he returned to Rome where he founded the college
at the St Peter Convent of Montorio where arabic was taught for the missionaries who
were being prepared to spread the faith in the East. He was responsible for the supervi-
sion of the type designs of Oriental types at the Propaganda Press.
inflection and government in arabic 233
partes autem eijus sunt Rafa, Nasba, Chafda and Gjezma, e quibus convenit
Nominibus Rafa, nasba and Chafda, non autem Gjezma: verbis vero Rafa,
nasba, and Gjezma: non autem Chafda (f. 11)
However, as has been demonstrated by Fck (1955, 68), Erpenius
replaced in his own grammars, when possible, Arabic terminology by
Latin equivalents, and his Rudimenta could not have been either the
source of inspiration of Caballero and Caes either. Erpenius maintained
the Arabic terminology of the vowels:
Erpenius does not maintain the Arabic terms of the subclasses of the
particles, as he rendered them in a Latinized form in his translation of Ibn
jurrm, but obviously he attempted to fit them into the Latin model.46
If we compare the translation into Latin of Erpenius with Obicinis, we
can conclude that the latter also used the Arabic terms for inflectional
endings.47 Obicini firstly gives the Arabic term, written in the Arabic
script, then a translation is given followed by a description or paraphrase
with the purpose to explain the Arabic terms: ar-raf as elevatio, the
definition of an-nasb is accusativus, quasi patiens positum sub agente
(without translation), al-xaf is rendered as depressio, & amplectitur
44
In the left column the terms are also written in Arabic script, and in the second
column the Arabic letter b is given, together with its appropriate vocalisation.
45
Sometimes a pure and clear a as in amaba, other times mixed with an e i.e. as in
Greek as many pronounce it now, etc.
46
For instance, we find definitions such as: de syntaxi Particularum: Praepositiones
omnes tum separatae regunt genitivum f baitin . . ., instead of the terms nasbantes, etc.
Nevertheless, in his Rudimenta we still can find verbs as gjezmare (1620, f. 47).
47
Rafaa, & Nasba, & Chafda, & Gezma. At nominibus ex ijs (conueniunt). Rafaa, &
Nasba, & Chafda, non autem Gezma, Verbis ver ex eisdem, Rafaa, & Nasba, & Gezma,
non autem autem Chafdha (Obicini 1631, f. 3). Agapito Valle Flemmarum has almost
the same definition (1687, 194).
234 otto zwartjes
48
Operators can be expressed (lafziyy), and abstract (manaw). The first class are
the particles or verbs or nouns that are either actually uttered or elided but understood,
while the latter are abstract causes that do not involve uttered or restored linguistic
elelements. (Baalbaki 2004, XV, 2358). This means that elided elements can produce
effects.
49
We could not identify this Grammarian.
50
Also in other paragraphs we see direct translations in the work of Guadagnoli,
which remain close to the Arabic original, such as ignoratum, for majhl, usually
erroneaously translated as passive, opposed to cognitum for the active (marf )
(Guadagnoli, 1642, f. 255).
51
Scripsit autem eleganter admodum de dictionibus hisce, quemadmodum & de lit-
teris eruditissimus Orientalium linguarum in Leidensi Academia professor Thomas Erpe-
nius uniusquam leuasset quoq. nobis huiis secundi libri labores partem (1620, 38).
236 otto zwartjes
52
In his grammar we find Arabic terminology extensively, together with the Latinized
form, for instance the traditional Arabic classification of the consonants: Chalchiiton,
lahuiiaton, sciagiariiaton, asliiaton, natiiaton, dhalchiiaton, sciaphahiiaton, liniiaton
(1620, 35).
inflection and government in arabic 237
Variation of the final parts or extremities of the words, caused by the diver-
sity of the operators (by the different effects produced by the operators).
At the end of the 17th century, Agapito Valle Flemmarum treats the
particles in detail in his chapter entitled De syntaxi Particularum,
and particularly describes the effect they have as operators on the
inflectional system, translating al-h urf al-mila as:
4. Conclusion
demonstrated that the Franciscans were totally aware of the right con-
notations of mil although we have to admit that sometimes they use
gobierno or regimen as a synonym for efficiens or operans. Gua-
dagnoli and Martelottus gave us without any doubt the most detailed
analysis, and probably Caballero and Caes have been inspired by their
works. It was surprising that not only works of Ibn jurrm, al-Jurjn
and al-Muta rriz are mentioned by name by some of the grammarians
working in Rome, but even Sbawayhi is mentioned by name in this
relatively early period (1620).
Missionary linguistics in Rome, particularly the achievements of
scholars and teachers who published grammars in the seventeenth
century at the Polyglot Press of the Sacra Congregatio de Propaganda
Fide deserve to be studied more in detail in future. Particularly those
authors who tried to combine exo- and endo-grammatical terminol-
ogy and approaches have been innovative. How the learners of Arabic
appreciated this bridging approach is another question. Many scholars
preferred in their teaching curriculum the more Latin-based grammar
of Erpenius and his work was without any doubt a great success dur-
ing many centuries. However, I agree with Martelottus that there is no
reason to postulate that the Arabs differ from our system. We can also
say, we ourselves may differ from this Arabic language system. While
using their own terminology, which has been developed for their own
linguistic phenomena, we will make progress in the understanding of
not only the language but of the linguistic model as well.
5. References
Rodrigues, Ioo. (Rodriguez) 16041608. Arte da Lingoa de Iapam composta pello Padre
Portugues da Copanhia de Iesv diuidida em tres Livros. Com Licena do Ordi-
nario, e Svperiores. Nagasaqui: no Collegio de Iapo da Companhia de Iesv Anno.
1604 (-1608 colofon.)
Rodrigves, Ioam. 1620. Arte Breve da Lingoa Iapoa tirada da Arte Grande da mesma
lingoa, pera os que comecam a aprender os primeiros principios della. Pello Padre Ioam
Rodrigvez da Companhia de Iesv Portugues do Bispado de Lamego. Diuidida em tres
Livros. Com Licenca do Ordinario, & Superiores. Amacao: no Collegio da Madre de
Deos da Companhia de Iesv.
Roth, Heinrich. 1988[ca. 1662]. Grammatica Linguae Sanscretanae Brachmanum Indiae
Orientalis. Facsimile edition: Arnulf Camps & Jean-Claude Muller: The Sanskrit
Grammar and Manuscripts of Father Heinrich Roth S.J. (16201668). Facsimile edition
of Biblioteca Nazionale, Rome, Mss.Or. 171 and 172. Leiden: E. J. Brill.
Valle Flemmarum, Agapiti . 1687. Flores Grammaticales arabici idiomatis collecti ex
optimis quibusque Grammaticis nec non pluribus Arabum monumentis, ad quam max-
imam fieri potuit brevitatem atque ordinem revocati: Studio, & Labore Fr. Agapiti
Valle Flemmarum Ordinis Minorum S. Francisci reformatorum Provinciae Tridentinae,
in Semionario Patavino lectoris. Opus omnibus Arabicae Linguae Studiosis perutile, &
necessarium. Patavii: Ex Typographia Seminarii Opera Augustini Candiani.
Ziegenbalg, Bartholomus. 1985 [1716]. Grammatica Damulica. Qu Per Varia Para-
digmata, Regulas & Necessarium Vocabulorum Apparatum, Viam Brevissimam Mon-
strat, Qua Lingua Damulica Seu Malabarica, Qu Inter Indos Orientales in Usu Est, &
Hucusque In Europa Incognita Fuit, Facile Disci Possit: In Usum Eorum Qui Hoc Tem-
pore Gentes Illas Ab Idololatria Ad Cultum Veri Dei, Salutemque ternam Evangelio
Christi Perducere Cupiunt . . . Hal Saxonum: Litteris & Impensis Orphanotrophei.
Ed. Burchard Brentjes & Karl Gallus, Halle: Martin-Luther-Universitt Halle-Witten-
berg, 1985.
Escavy, R., M. Hernndez Terrs, A. Roldn, eds. 1994. Actas del Congreso Internacio-
nal de Historiografa Lingstica. Nebrija V-Centenario 14921992. Murcia, 14 abril
1992. Murcia: El Taller, vol. III: Nebrija y otros temas de historiografa lingstica.
Frank, Armin Paul, Kurt-Jrgen Maa, Fritz Paul, und Horst Turk, eds. 1993. bersetzen,
Verstehen, Brcken bauen. Geisteswissenschaftliches und literarisches bersetzen im
internationalen Kulturaustausch. Berlin: Erich Schmidt.
Fck, Johann. 1955. Die arabischen Studien in Europa bis in den Anfang des 20. Jahrhun-
derts. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz.
Geiger, Ludwig. 1871. Johann Reuchlin. Sein Leben und seine Werke. Leipzig: Duncker
and Humblot.
Hauschild, Richard. 1988. Notes on the Content of the Three Manuscripts of Heinrich
Roth. Arnulf Camps and Jean-Claude Muller: The Sanskrit Grammar and Manu-
scripts of Father Heinrich Roth S.J. (16201668). Facsimile edition of Biblioteca Nazio-
nale, Rome, Mss.Or. 171 and 172. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
James, Gregory. 2007. The terminology of declension in Early Missionary Grammars
of Tamil. In Zwartjes, Otto, Gregory James and Emilio Ridruejo, eds., Missionary
Linguistics III/Lingstica misionera III. Morphology and Syntax. Selected papers from
the IIIrd and IVth International Conferences on Missionary Linguistics, Hong Kong/
Macau/Valladolid, 167190.
Juynboll, W.M.C. 1931. Zeventiende-eeuwsche beoefenaars van het Arabisch in Neder-
land. Utrecht: Kemink en Zoon.
Kerkhof, Maxim, Hugo de Schepper, Otto Zwartjes, eds. 1993 Espaa: Ruptura 1492?.
Amsterdam: Rodopi.
Killean, Carolyn G. 1984. The development of Western Grammars of Arabic. Journal
of Near Eastern Studies, 43.3: 223230.
Law, Vivian. 2002. The History of Linguistics in Europe. From Plato to 1600. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Lentin, Jerome. 1997. Recherches sur lhistoire de la langue arabe au Proche-Orient
lpoque moderne. Thse de Doctorat dtat, Universit de Paris III.
Lichtenstdter, Ilse. Al-Mutarriz. Enzyklopdie des Islm, 3:847. Also New edition:
R. Sellheim, 7:773.
Lourido Daz, Ramn. 2005. Estudio preliminar. See: Gonzlez (primary sources).
Maruyama, Toru. 2004. Linguistic Studies by Portuguese Jesuits in Sixteenth and Se-
venteenth Century Japan. In Zwartjes, Otto and Even Hovdhaugen, eds. Missionary
Linguistics [I]/Lingstica misionera [I]. Selected papers from the First International
Conference on Missionary Linguistics, Oslo, 1316 March 2003. Amsterdam: John Ben-
jamins. 141160.
Monroe, James. T. 1970. Islam and the Arabs in Spanish Scholarship (Sixteenth century to
the present). Leiden: Brill.
Mrner, A.R. and Magnus Mrner. 2001. Spanien i svenska arkiv. Skrifter utgivna av
Riksarkivet, 16. Stockholm: Riksarkiv, 6061.
Niederehe, Hans-Josef. 2005. Bibliografa cronolgica de la lingstica, la gramtica y la
lexicografa del espaol (BICRES III). Desde el ao 1701 hasta el ao 1800. Amster-
dam: John Benjamins.
Owens, Jonathan. 1988. The Foundations of Grammar. An introduction to Medieval Ara-
bic Grammatical Theory. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
. 1990. Early Arabic Grammatical Theory. Heterogeneity and Standardization.
Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Schnurrer, Christianus Fridericus de. 1811. Bibliotheca Arabica. Halae ad Salam: I.C.
Hendelii.
Smith-Stark, Thomas. 2005. Phonological description in New Spain. In Zwartjes, Otto
and Cristina Altman, eds.. Missionary Linguistics II/Lingstica misionera II. Orthog-
raphy and Phonology. Selected Papers from the Second International Conference on
Missionary Linguistics, So Paulo, 1013 March 2004. Amsterdam: John Benjamins,
164.
244 otto zwartjes
Salman H. Al-Ani
Indiana University, Bloomington
1. Introduction
recitation in the Qurn. This aspect of waqf will not be covered in this
paper. The emphasis is on the phenomenon of waqf with the explana-
tion of the basic linguistic features of waqf of Modern Standard Arabic.
Previous research on waqf, in western languages, is rather limited. There
are four studies that made a basic contribution to waqf or pause. The fol-
lowing is brief account of these studies.
complete then the speech event may consist of more than one event
(H assn 1973, 270).
The case endings in the indefinite /-tun, -tin, -tan/ and the definite /-tu,
-ti, -ta/ all will be deleted in the prepausal forms. The word madrasah
school and the word al-madrasah the school both in definite and
indefinite forms will have the same endings in the prepausal forms. The
reason is that the /-h/, placed between slashes, is sometimes weakened to
the point that one really cannot even hear it. This is especially the case of
Modern Standard Arabic, read aloud or spoken by radio and television
broadcasters. I have examined and analyzed the speech segments of
several announcers and observed both the dropping off of the /-h/ and
the retaining of it. In careful delivered speeches especially of religious
nature the /-h/ is almost always retained.
(a) The case endings in the definite nouns are indicated by /-u/ in the
nominative case, /-i/ in the genitive case, and /-a/ in the accusative
case. All of these short vowels that mark the case endings are omit-
ted in waqf. The following sentences illustrate the prejunctural and
prepausal forms:
(b) When the indefinite nouns and adjectives that end in nunation,
the sound /-n/ pronounced but not written. The case endings in the
indefinite nouns and adjectives are indicated by /-un/ in the nom-
inative case, /-in/ in the genitive case and /-an/ in the accusative
case. Both nominative and genitive endings are omitted in prep-
ausal forms. However the accusative case maker is changed into an
alif /-/ that requires a special treatment. The word walad boy in
the following sentences illustrates both prejunctural and prepausal
forms.
252 salman h. alani
(c) The indefinite accusative case ending is /-an/. Also certain types of
adverbs end in /-an/. This ending is replaced by /-/ in prepausal
forms as illustrated in the table above. In the case of adverbs some
speakers retain the nunation while others replaced it with /-/.
However, in prepausal and words in isolation may be retained but
oftentimes it changes to /-/ following the normal rules of waqf. The
word id an meaning if is written orthographically either with nn
/n/ or with the alif tanwn. In prepausal form pronounced as /-/.
1. The rules of waqf on words that end in the long vowel /-/ such as
al-muh m the lawyer which is derived from a finally weak verb h am
and its imperfect yah m to defend ends in /y/. Nouns that are derived
from finally weak verbs like h am of the pattern of al-muh m always end
/-/. This category of words should not be confused with words ending in
y-n-nisbah as in words like lubnniyyun Lebanese or even with words
like zabyun deer both of these words are written in Arabic script with
/y/, however the source of this /y/ is not a final radical as the nouns
linguistic analysis and rules of pause in arabic 253
derived from finally weak verbs like h am and its imperfect yah m to
defend which ends in /y/ as a radical (Farrj, 2001, 7172).
The vowel endings of al-manqs defective are determined by the case
endings and whether they are definite or indefinite. When words of the
manqs defective are in the accusative case and indefinite they end in
/-/ in the waqf as qbaltu muh my I met a lawyer after the omitting
of the nunation. When they are definite they end in /-/ as in qbaltu
l-muh m I met the lawyer. When the manqs words are in genitive or
nominative case they end in the omitting of the final vowel /-/ as in fil-
wdin the valley and hd wd this is a valley. However when they are
definite the words of the manqs end in long vowel /-/ as in fil-wd in
the valley and hd l- wd this is the valley.
2. The rules of waqf of words that end in the long vowel /-/ such as
al-fat the youth and which are primarily derived from finally weak
verbs are called in traditional Arabic grammar al-maqsr the shortened.
The waqf on these words is always end in an alif /-/ in all three case
endings and regardless how orthographically they are written with alif
maqsrah or regular alif. What matters here is the pronunciation and
not the script.
3. Concluding Remark
It is worthwhile to mention that the rules of waqf are not always adhered
to by readers and speakers of Modern Standard Arabic. The Arabic
language for sometime has been going through processes of change.
Some readers and speakers are not using the al-h arakta-l-irbiyyah
case endings. The often heard statement that states sakkin taslam use
sukn and you will be safe reflects the state of affairs of the on going
change of the Arabic language. Therefore the rules of waqf outlined
above when considered should be used as guidelines not to be applied
in a rigorous and strict manner.
254 salman h. alani
4. References
1
It is worth defining homonymy in opposition to polysemy. Polysemy is a word
which brings together several meanings between which users can recognize a link
(Nyckees, 1998: 194); the meanings are different but related. Homonymy is distinct
from polysemy in that, in the case of homonymy, it seems impossible to re-establish a
plausible semantic relationship (Nyckees, 1998: 194) between the different meanings,
for example: flies certain insects and flies the opening at the front of a pair of trousers
or to sound to make a noise and to sound to measure the depth of waterdifferent non
related meanings.
2
Bohas and Saguer (2006).
3
That is: in a not-rigorously demonstrated manner but justified by reasons of inter-
nal coherence (see the website www.memo.fr Einstein, Albert); and accepting that you
cannot explain everything.
4
See Bohas (1997, 2000), Dat (2002).
5
This is a property of the language that was proved both formally and semantically
by Bohas and Darfouf (1993), developed in Bohas (1997), which consists in the fact that
256 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
So far, ten matrices have been accounted for; most of these have already
been subjected to in-depth studies (see footnote 14).
a binary combination {a, b} is realized in the order a+b and in the order b+a while keep-
ing the same notional invariant.
6
[labial] characterizes sounds produced with a constriction of the lips. For matrices
1, 2, 3, 6 we integrate on-going research which shows that the feature [labial] should not
be restricted by [-sonorant] (see Mansouri, 2006).
7
[voiced] Sounds produced with vibration of the vocal cords are said to be voiced
([+voiced]), whereas other sounds are said to be non-voiced ([-voiced]), see Dell (1973:
56).
8
[continuant] Sounds with the feature [+continuant] are produced without inter-
rupting the flow of air through the oral cavity, those with the feature [-continuant] are
produced with total interruption of the flow of air at the oral cavity, see Halle (1991:
208).
9
[pharyngeal] characterizes segments that the Arabic tradition calls gutturals, that
is: , h, , h , x, and q. For the problems posed by the characterization of this class, see
Kenstowicz (1994: 456ff).
10
[dorsal] characterizes sounds produced with a constriction created with the back
of the tongue between the soft palate and the uvula (velar and uvular consonants; rear
vowels).
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 257
The data on which we have based our study are to be found in the
Kazimirski, and have been checked in the Qms and/or the Lisn.
When they are based on another source, this is mentioned.
2. Explanatory methods
11
See Diab (2005) who brings a modification to the formulation of the notional
invariant of this matrix.
12
[sonorant] Sounds with the feature [+sonorant] are produced with a constriction
which does not influence the capacity of the vocal cords to vibrate spontaneously. Those
with the feature [-sonorant] have a constriction which reduces the global flow of air and
makes voicing more difficult. Thus the natural state for sonorants is [+voiced] and for
non sonorants (termed obstruents) is [-voiced], see Kenstowicz (1994: 36).
13
[lateral] A [+lateral] sound is produced by making a constriction with the central
part of the tongue while lowering one or both lateral edges so that air escapes around the
side(s) of the mouth, see Kenstowicz (1994: 35).
14
For matrices 1 to 6, see Bohas (2000), Dat (2002), for an in-depth study of matrix 6,
see Serhane (2003), Bohas and Serhane (2003), for matrix 7, see Bohas and Dat (2005),
for matrices 8 and 9, see Bohas (to be published) and for matrix 10, see Saguer (2003).
258 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
B. the fact that its etymon is the realization of several matrices: it mani-
fests the meanings of these matrices.
C. the fact that two etymonial analyses are possible, such as [nX]Y and
n[XY].
Below, we illustrate each case with an example from Bohas and Saguer
(2006).
15
We use boldface for the segments that make up the etymon.
16
We call these non ambiguous radicals.
17
Non ambiguous radical.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 259
two etymons {,r} and {r,z}. The way this blending occurs is represented
in model A:18
A
Cj Ci Ci Ck
Si Sj
Cj Ci Ck19
Si + SJ
More explicitly :
r rz
lack of milk x20 to drive a sharp object into
Si Sj
araz 1920
18
See Bohas (1997: 175f and 2000: 49).
19
The obligatory contour principle (OCP) explains the fusion of the two Ci into a
single segment. See McCarthy (1986) for the definition and various applied examples
referring to Semitic languages of this principle which forbids adjacent identical elements
at the same level. Since, OCP has given rise to a multitude of studies the list of which
would be superfluous here.
20
We use x to indicate blending.
260 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
{[+nasal], [coronal]}
Notional invariant: traction
And for this reason assumes the sense S2 to tighten, stretch out a
rope.
The first hypothesis we can formulate is that natara develops the ety-
mon: {n,t} and that for this reason, it is a realization of matrix 9:22
{[+nasal] [+continuant]}
Notional invariant: the nose
The phonetic substance of this matrix comprises, on the one hand, the
two nasals, m and n, and, on the other, the various fricatives.
21
We will propose no explanation for this sense; as we said in the introduction, we
have not yet explored all the matrices of Arabic, the notional invariant sharp is without
doubt important but as yet we know nothing of it.
22
See Bohas (to be published) for a detailed study of this matrix.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 261
23
No ambiguity.
262 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
Radical: <lvxy>
24
The most recent are those of Saguer (2000, 2002, 2002b).
25
We use prefix when l has a semantic-grammatical value and initial crement when
it does not.
26
This expresses the fact that in this form the etymon is [ly] and x is an inset
crement.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 263
27
See Bohas (2000: 108).
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 265
This enables us to establish that labaxa includes the etymon {l,b}, itself a
realization of the matrix {[labial], [coronal]} which has to strike a blow
as its notional invariant.
However, note the existence of the following set:
laxxa [lx]x : to slap somebody in the face
laxaba [lx]b : to slap somebody in the face
laxama [lx]m : to strike somebody in the face
This enables us to extract the etymon {l,x} connected, once again, to
the sense to strike a blow. The segment l is analysed as [coronal} and x
as [dorsal], so that this etymon is a realization of the matrix {[coronal],
[dorsal]}, which leads us to the conclusion that labaxa in the B sense
results from blending between two etymons {l,b} and {l,x}, a B type
blending (Bohas 2000, 50).
For sense C. = S4.+S5. to pull, bring something to oneself : S4. to
take a thing from somebody, from the hand of somebody; S5. to get
something out of somebody using trickery we shall justify an etymonial
analysis l[b]x, that is, an etymon {l,x} with an inset crement b. Indeed, a
phono-semantic relation can be established with:
In the order xl:
xalaja : to pull, attract to oneself
xal (hly) : to pull out
xalxala : to completely strip a bone of its flesh
saxala : to take, remove, ravish through trickery
xalasa : to take away, remove ravish in an instant, unexpect-
edly, to pull out
F. III : to pull something from somebody; to seize; to grab
something
F. V : to remove, take away
F. VI : to reciprocally pull out, and to pull something each
from his own side
F.VIII : to pull something towards oneself in a hurry (the same
meaning as the first item of the list with the addition
of celerity).
In the order lx :
malaxa : to forcibly pull something towards oneself seizing it
with ones teeth or hands
F. V. : to pull out, to burst e.g. the eye of a prey (birds of
prey)
F.VIII : to pull, extricate, pull out (a tooth, an eye); to pull out
of the scabbard (a sabre, etc.)
266 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
Etymons with l
salla : to pull, extract gently one object from another
salaba : to snatch something with force from somebody
salata : to extract, to pull
salaxa : to skin, to remove the skin from a sheep; to remove
ones clothes and shirt
salaba : to pull, to extract the marrow from bones
sahala : to peel, to strip bark, skin
halaba : to pull out hair, bristles, horsehair
halata : to peel something by removing the skin, bark
halada : to pull, extract, pull out something from its place
lah : to remove the inner bark of a tree, wood
lahaba : to remove the bark from a piece of wood, to strip it of
its bark
lahata : to remove the bark from a piece of wood, to peel it
laxasa F. II : to remove, to extract the purest part
halaa : to remove the flesh from the skin of a dead or bled
white animal
halaba : to take the milk, to milk
halata : to pull out, to remove in flakes
halama : to remove tinea from the skin
alaha F. II : to strip, to remove the clothes from somebody
28
This composition, [+approximant], seems too complex to characterize the class r, l.
[coronal]
This is due to the fact that, according to Yeou and Maeda (1994), the pharyngeals and
uvulars of Arabic are also characterized by the feature [+approximant]. Indeed, the con-
tinuation of our studies will enable a discussion of this point. If the gutturals do figure
in this matrix, and assuming that it may then be formulated simply as {[+approximant],
[+continuant]}, this would constitute proof that the gutturals and r, l are indeed mem-
bers of the same class: [+approximant].
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 267
Etymons with r
haraba : to strip somebody, to pillage (a caravan, a tribe)
harasa : to steal something; in fields, pastures
harada : to take, by milking, all the milk from a camel
saraqa : to steal
sar : to remove, separate, distance something from some-
body
xaraa : to attract a camel to oneself with a hooked stick
xarata : to strip of bark and make even
xarafa : to pick a piece of fruit from a tree
'araza : to pull with force
'ar'ara : to move the cork of a bottle to uncork it; to remove,
take out the cork; to pull, to pull out, to burst an eye
'araqa : to strip a bone of the flesh that was on it by eating it
'arama : to eat the flesh that sticks to the bone
'ariy : to be naked, stripped of ones clothes (cause> conse-
quence relation)
qa'ara : to pull out with the root, from top to bottom and to
cause to fall
This abundance of data, the notional domain of which has still to be
organized, is nevertheless sufficient to justify the existence of this
matrix:
[+approximant], [+continuant]
[coronal]
to bring something to oneself
This data also justifies the analysis that posits that in labaxa sense C =
S4+S5 to pull, bring something to oneself : S4 to take a thing from
somebody, from the hand of somebody; S5 to get something out of
somebody using trickery is a manifestation of this matrix.
{ ft}
nafata : to blow (on something)
{ fh}
fahh a : to hiss (snake); to hiss during sleep
fahfah a : to be hoarse
fah -F. II : to season food
fha/fawah a/ : to spread ones perfume; to smell good or bad
lafaha : to blow (of warm wind)
nafaha : to spread ones odour; to blow (of cold wind)
{ fx}
faxxa : to snore and hiss talking of somebody who sleeps;
to spread (of an aroma)
fxa/fawaxa/ : to spread (of an odour); to hiss (wind); to release
wind (of a man)
nafaxa : to blow with the mouth; to break wind
29
This sign indicates that a semantic relationship exists, here: cause>consequence.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 269
Consequently, all the senses expressed by this radical are made explicit
in the complex diagram below which constitutes its lexicogenetic tree,
and traces its phono-semantic composition, thus accounting for the
homonymy :
30
This matrix is studied in detail in Bohas (2006).
270 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
Matrix level
M6 M2 M1 M5 M8
Etymoniall evel
{b,x}1 {b,x}2 {b,l} {l,x}1 {l,x}2
labax
For S2, compare laata to print on an animal, on the neck, a mark with
hot iron, to mark it with the elements of the following paradigm:
'alata : to mark (a camel) on the neck with a transversal
mark
'alama : to mark, to distinguish by a mark, by some sign
'alaba : to mark something, either by making incisions or by
pressure
ra'ala F. II : to incise the ear of a beast to mark it
This enables us to establish the presence of a phonetic constant l and
a semantic constant to mark, thus identifying the etymon {l,' }. Let us
add the form:
laxafa : to print a large cautery, to make a large burn on some-
body
in which lx constitutes either a variant31 of l or a clue to identifying a
matrix.
31
We explain this notion the following pages.
32
Which corroborates Hurwitz earlier quoted in subsection 3.
272 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
We may relate S4 laata: to delay paying a debt, to put off its payment
to:
tla t[w]l F. II : to allow ones debtor an extension
tal [tl]w : to wait, to be waiting, to defer
talla [tl]l : to allow an extension, to give respite to ones
debtor
latat [lt]t : refusal to pay or to recognize what one owes to
somebody
The phono-semantic constant presented by the above data enables us to
identify the etymon {l,t}.
33
We use enantiosemy (i.e. reverse semantics) for words that mean something and its
opposite, such as big and small, to rent which means both to take temporary possession
for the payment of a fee and to give temporary possession for the receipt of a fee.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 273
34
The natural tendency of the speaker is to limit effort of his speech and to avoid
sharp shifts in the use of speech organs. (Lipinski, 1997, 186).
274 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
laata, which realizes the etymons: {',t}, {l,t} and {l,' }, is therefore
typical of the second level of explanation, namely identification of the
etymons. When we go on to study specific cases in the fourth part, we
will move from one of the two levels of explanation to the other. In some
instances we can link the etymon to a matrix; in others we may only link
the radical of a word to an etymon, while in others, we can provide no
analysis for the simple reason that, as things stand, identification of the
matrices and etymons is not yet complete. The objective we pursue is to
fully organize the lexicon into matrices. Is this a chimera, as some do
not fear to say? In our eyes, the best answer is provided by Darwin:
[. . .] it is those who know little, and not those who know much, who so
positively assert that this or that problem will never be solved by science.35
4. Case study
35
Charles Darwin: The Descent of Man and Selection in Relation to Sex, 4th para-
graph, quoted in Quiniou (2006); for the full text visit www.gutenberg.org.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 275
We have thus identified the matrix of which lah ana to become fond
of somebody is a realization. Let us now examine senses S2 and S3
which are clearly linked. S2 to speak Arabic badly, S3 to speak a
particular slang with somebody so as not to be understood by others.
For these senses, the analysis [lh ]n is used, in other words, the etymon is
{l,h}, which is itself a realization of Matrix 8 {[+lateral], [+continuant]}
linked to the notional invariant tongue; furthermore, we have already
seen that to speak is one of the developments of the tongue notional
invariant:
276 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
M8 M4
{[+lateral], {[consonantal],
[+continuant} [pharyngeal]}
tongue muffled voice . . .
{l,h} {h,n}
[lh ]n l[h n]
lah an
36
See for the organization of the conceptual field above at the end of subsection 3.1.
37
See Bailly (1950).
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 277
4.2 lasaa
Reorganizing the Kazimirski, the following senses can be said to be
included:
S1 to head into the interior of the land
S2 to prick somebody, to bite (of a scorpion or snake)
S3 to hurt somebody with malevolent words, with features of
satire
S4 to malign somebody
S5 F. IV to sow enmity between men
38
Tassa: F. II: to head into the interior of the land, country. The radical thus results
from the blending of the two etymons.
278 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
M8 M?
{[+lateral],
[+continuant]}
tongue
[ls] l[s]
lasa
For S1 to fit by placing one next to the other and one over the other
(e.g. stones in constructing a wall, in building), comparison with the
words below leads us to identify a common etymon {s,f } to arrange, to
organize:
saffa [sf ]f : to arrange in order
xasafa x[sf ] : to fit and join solidly
sannafa s[n]f : to compose, to make (a work, a book)
39
Emphatics are characterized by the features [dorsal], [pharyngeal], [coronal].
40
See Bohas (2000: 115117).
280 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
M8 M? M6
lasaf
41
The same remark as in footnote 28 is appropriate here. If gutturals appear to be a
part of this matrix, then they join the class of approximants, otherwise, [approximant]
will have to be restricted by the addition of [coronal].
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 281
M8 M1
{l,s} {s,b}
[ls]b l[sb]
lasaba
Let us start with S1. The radical includes l and the fricative h , and can be
a realization of Matrix 8: {[+sonorant] , [+continuant]}
[+lateral]
42
This sense is linked to this block, see below.
43
P. indicates the passive.
44
Attested in Ass al-bala.
explanation of homonymy in the lexicon of arabic 283
For S.2, the emergence of the sense to envelop undoubtedly comes from
the blending of the two etymons: lf x h f, which can be clearly seen in:
laffa : to envelop, to twist, to surround with something
h affa : to surround somebody with something, to enve-
lop with something
Is it possible to go further and identify the matrix from which these
etymons stem? Without doubt, if we take into consideration the
following data:
laffa : (also means:) to gather, to collect from all sides
daffa : to gather, to bring together47
A hypothesis defended by Cantineau (1951), amongst others, is that in
protosemitic there was a lateralized emphatic that we shall write dl. In
Bohas and Janah (2000) it was argued that this dl had split in Arabic into
45
See above subsection 3.1.
46
See the Petit Robert
47
See also: mudf d[y] f : surrounded, attacked, encircled on all sides.
284 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
two phonemes: d and l. A word bearing one meaning had thus given
birth to two words with the same sense (modulo a few nuances). Thus
we would have:
daffa laffa
{[labial], [coronal]}
Notional invariant: to strike a blow
Loss, harm comes under the heading B.3,48 global consequence, as in:
h afata : to destroy, to lose
talifa : to perish
48
See Bohas (2000: 79).
49
See Bohas (2000: 50).
286 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
M8 M1 M3 M7
lah af
5. Conclusion
6. References
50
We find in The Legend of Alexander: For the Sun is the servant of The Lord, which
interrupts its course neither day nor night. This idea that the stars are in the service of
God seems to date back at least to Bardesane (born in 154): Neither the Sun, nor the
Moon, nor the other beings which are superior to us in any thing have received power
over themselves, they are on the contrary subject to a law and, consequently, they do
what they have been ordered and never anything else. The Sun never says I shall not
rise at the given hour, nor the Moon I will no longer have phases, I will neither wax nor
wane, . . . All these creatures are servants and remain subject to a law: they are instru-
ments of the wisdom of The Lord, Who is infallible. (See Teixidor 1992).
288 georges bohas and abderrahim saguer
Louis Boumans
University of Nijmegen
1. Introduction
I would like to start this paper with some terminological notes. I use
the dichotomy community language versus superimposed language
to refer to the typical unequal social-economic status of the bilingual
speakers languages. These terms refer to local as well as global power
relations and their sociolinguistic consequences. For instance, whether
in Portugal, Brazil or the United States, Portuguese speaking people
learn English in order to gain access to valuable information and upward
social mobility, i.e. education, media and employment.
I will use the term socially dominant for the language the individual
speaker is most exposed to in her daily life. This could be either the
community or the superimposed language, depending on the local situ-
ation. Thus English is more likely to be socially dominant for a particular
Portuguese/English bilingual member of the Portuguese community in
the US, while Portuguese will be socially dominant for most bilinguals
living in Portugal.
The terms matrix language and embedded language are grammati-
cal notions referring solely to local syntactic units of analysis in bilingual
speech. The higher order constituent is the matrix in which lower order
constituents are embedded. In mixed sentences higher and lower order
constituents are in different languages. In most instances the community
language functions as the matrix language and superimposed language
elements are embedded. However, the reverse occurs in a minority of
cases so the terms should not be confused.1
1
Since the early 1990s, Carol Myers-Scotton has been the most influential promoter of
the insertion approach to code-switching and the terms matrix and embedded language.
292 louis boumans
There are three ways in which foreign verbs are integrated in the matrix
language, two of which are common. One is the complete morphologi-
cal integration. Some basic form of the foreign verb, typically the verb
stem or the infinitive, is treated as the verb stem of the receiving matrix
language, and verbal categories of the latter are expressed by matrix
language morphology. Gloss (1) is a Moroccan Arabic/French example
showing the French verb stem montr- (from montrer [m
~tre] to show)
with an Arabic prefix and suffixes.2
(1) wa adi y-montr.i-w-l-ek . . .
Q FUT 3-show-PL-to-2SG
Are they going to show you . . .? MA3/French (Wernitz 1993, 308)
The insertion of foreign verb stems without overt morphological inte-
gration in matrix languages lacking verbal morphology, such as various
Austronesian languages (Van Staden 1999) can be considered as a sub-
category of the morphological integration strategy, even if the integra-
tion is not overtly expressed by ML morphemes.
I concur with the fundamentals of her original Matrix Language Frame (MLF) model
(Myers-Scotton 1993), except for the definition of the matrix language. In my view, all
syntactic constituents function as a matrix for lower-order constituents, whereas in the
MLF model only the Complementizer Phrase functions as a matrix. I refer to earlier
work for more details on this approach to code-switching (Boumans 1998, Boumans
and Caubet 2000, Boumans 2002).
2
The vowel i is not a proper suffix. Embedded French verbs are modelled on a class
of Arabic verbs ending in a vowel. This vowel is subject to a/i ablaut. Cf. Caubet (1993),
Boumans (1998), and Boumans and Caubet (2000).
3
The following abbreviations are being used: in the main text: MA Moroccan Arabic;
in the glosses to numbered examples: 1,2,3 first, second, third person; ACC accusative;
AGR agreement; ART article; AUX auxiliary; DEF definite article; FUT future tense;
IMPF imperfective; INF infinitive; M masculine; NEG negation; PASTPART past parti-
ciple; PL plural; PROGRPART progressive participle; PRT preterit; REL relative clause
marker; SG singular.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 293
Why do speakers opt for one strategy rather than the other? The two
common strategies in particular, morphological integration and peri-
phrastic constructions, allow us to compare the languages and linguistic
situations involved.
verb forms with the final /i/ of the prefix conjugation (imperfective) of
a class of MA verbs.
Dutch infinitives typically end in an unstressed suffix -en that is pro-
nounced as a schwa. It is not obvious whether this makes them phono-
logically less similar to the MA finite verb in /i/ than French infinitives.
Firstly, MA phonology does not allow for the schwa in open syllables.
This may lead Moroccan listeners to ignore word-final schwas in Dutch,
and interpret the infinitives as consonant-final. Alternatively, however,
Moroccans may interpret the Dutch final schwa as a full front or back
vowel. Both tendencies can be observed in the speech of Moroccan
learners of Dutch.
Moreover, the vocalic ending in French verbs cannot be decisive,
since Spanish, Italian and English verbs are morphologically integrated
in North African varieties of Arabic in the same way as French verbs.
Many of these Romance and English infinitives end in a consonant.
Arabic/Spanish language contact is still common in the (formerly)
Spanish occupied northern parts of Morocco (cf. Heath 1989, Her-
rero Muoz-Cobo 1996). Cohen (1912) notes interesting observations
on the Jewish dialect of Algiers, where the Spanish (or Lingua Franca)
infinitive ending -ar is even extended to embedded French verbs. E.g.
refuzarit from French refuser [rfyze] in (8). Numerous verbs of Italian
and English origin are found in Maltese, another variety of Maghribian
Arabic (Aquilina 1965 [1987], Camilleri 1994, Mifsud, 1995).4 The stem
extension -ja- in Maltese verbs of English origin, as in (10), is a reflec-
tion of the Sicilian ~ Italian infinitive suffix -are.
(7) frin-ar-t ~ frin-ar.i-t
brake- INF-1SG ~ brake- INF.STEM EXTENSION -1SG (Sp. frenar)
I braked Tetouan Arabic/Spanish (Heath 1989, 184)
(8) refuz-ar-it
refuse-SPANISH INF-1SG (Fr. refuser)
I refused Jewish Arabic of Algiers/French (Cohen 1912, 432)
(9) ti-ppartiipa-w
3-participate-PL (It. partecipare)
you (pl) participate Maltese/Italian~ Sicilian (Camilleri 1994, 437)
4
As a matter of fact, the type of verb integration illustrated in (1) does not occur in
the Middle Eastern varieties of Arabic. Instead the periphrastic construction is more
common in that region.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 297
(10) ni-bbli.ja-ha
1-bleach.STEM EXTENSION-3SG
I bleach it Maltese/English (Camilleri 1994, 443)
Thus, verb stems from various embedded languages and with diverse
phonological characteristics can be morphologically integrated into
Moroccan or Maghribian Arabic, and phonology does not seem to be an
explanation for the periphrastic construction in the case of MA/Dutch.
A second way in which the embedded language might influence the
selection of the verb integration strategy is the use of periphrastic verb
constructions in the embedded language itself. Following this line of
thought, the bilingual MA/Dutch periphrastic construction could be
inspired by periphrastic constructions with doen to do in standard or
non-standard Dutch.5 Again, the comparison with the other language
pairs speaks against this hypothesis. Periphrastic constructions with a
do verb are much more common in English than they are in Dutch,
while their abundance in French and Spanish may be similar to that in
Dutch.6 Therefore, the occurrence of do constructions in monolingual
Dutch likewise does not explain why the periphrasis strategy is chosen
to insert Dutch verbs in MA matrix clauses.
5
Jacomine Nortier and Roeland van Hout made this suggestion when we discussed
this paper at the SS14 workshop on borrowing in Gent, April 4, 2002, and on earlier
occasions.
6
With the exception of certain infrequent constructions, do-periphrasis in Dutch is
associated with non-standard regional varieties or child language. Cf. Nuijtens (1962,
15457), Giesbers (1984), and Cornips (1994).
7
One could argue that the morphological integration of French verbs is found both
in North Africa and in the North African diaspora in Francophone Europe and Can-
ada. In this particular case, however, code-switching strategies that were already estab-
lished in the homeland have simply been maintained in the diaspora.
298 louis boumans
In order to shed some light on this issue and to test the intensity of
contact hypothesis, the following two sections survey verb integration
in two additional language pairs for which both integration strategies
are attested: Greek/English and Portuguese/English. In both cases the
influence of English has been described for immigrant communities in
Anglophone countries as well as in the Greek and Portuguese speaking
homelands.
4. Greek/English
4.1 Greece
The morphological integration of Italian verbs consists of adding Greek
suffixes to the Italian infinitive in -are.8
(11) It. posare to pose
It. schizzare to sketch
Mainland Greek/Italian (Van Dijk-Wittop Koning 1963)
8
The authors on loanwords and codeswitching in Greek make use of different writ-
ing and spelling conventions. The spelling of the source publication is retained in the
examples cited here.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 299
(15)
/parkaro/ to park
/manadzaro/ to manage
/triparo/ to trip
Mainland Greek/English (Apostolou Panara 1991, 50)
Interestingly, the recycling of a foreign verb marker like the Italian
-are to mark verbs from a third language is yet another example of how
bilingual experience influences the way in which speakers treat words
from foreign languages. Note the close parallel with -ar in the Jewish
Arabic dialect of Algiers (8), and the -ja stem extension after English
verb stems in Maltese (10).9
Most sources on loan verbs in Modern Greek mention only this
-ar- extension with complete morphological integration of the foreign
word. However, Apostolou Panara, while asserting that verbs all adapt,
i.e. are morphologically integrated, mentions that in some cases, along
with the single lexeme we attest a periphrasis with the Greek verb /kano/
(to do, to make) preceding a noun or a gerund (1991, 50), cf. the exam-
ples in (16). A few verbs occur exclusively as part of the periphrastic
construction (17), whereas the periphrasis is judged ungrammatical in
most cases (18).
(16) /flertaro/ besides /kano flert/ to flirt
/manadzaro/ besides /kano manadzing/ to manage
/stokaro/ besides /kano stok/ to stock
Mainland Greek/English (Apostolou Panara 1991, 50)
9
In Dutch a similar situation obtains with the French infinitive marker -er [er] (Tref-
fers-Daller 1994), which is sometimes used for English loanwords as well, e.g. formatt-
er-en to format.
300 louis boumans
4.2 Cyprus
Cyprus has been under British rule for more than eighty years, during
which English was the language of administration. First, from 1878 on
Britain administered the island in agreement with the Ottoman Empire.
Then Cyprus was annexed by Britain when the Ottoman Empire enters
into World War I on the side of Germany, and subsequently the island
became a British Crown colony under the British rule. In 1960 Cyprus
gained independence, and (Modern Standard) Greek became the lan-
guage of administration. The English language remained influential
through the tourism industry and the large international community
on the island.
There are a number of studies dealing specifically with the influence
of English on Cypriot Greek. Papapavlou (1997) cites a list of English
loan words found in written sources and tape-recorded speech. His list
includes 23 verbs in the -aro conjugation. He makes no mention of the
periphrastic construction.
(19) flrdro to flirt
rejistrro to register
riskro to take a risk
arcro to change (money)
akhro to check (inspect)
Cypriot Greek/English (Papapavlou 1997)
Similarly, Evripidou, also on the basis of written sources and recorded
speech, lists 19 English-origin Cypriot Greek verbs, all of them inte-
grated in the -aro class (2001). Goutsos discusses Greek/English code-
switching among members of a middle-class Cypriot family in Limassol
(2001). This study differs from the other ones, as Goutsos does not list
English loan words but rather focuses on the discourse functions of
language choice in the conversations. He does not comment on inte-
grated verbs of the -aro conjugation. He does cite three instances of the
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 301
10
In Table 7.7 on p. 212 of Muyskens book the words jno and kno have been
reversed.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 303
There is no such overlap in the examples cited for the periphrastic con-
struction with kmno (mainland Greek kno).11 This indicates that the
morphologically integrated verbs found in London may well have been
coined in the more monolingual setting in Cyprus. As noted above,
to move is probably not even of English origin. This is a fur-
ther indication that in the Cypriot diaspora, the periphrastic construc-
tion replaces morphological integration as the most productive strategy
for the incorporation of new English verbs. The chances are that the
same development has taken place in the American Greek community
studied by Seaman (1972).
5. Portuguese/English
I have been able to trace surprisingly few studies on English loan words
in Portuguese, whether European or Brazilian. Compared with Greek,
there are also few studies on Portuguese speaking communities in
Anglophone countries. The picture that arises from the available data is
approximately the same as for Greek.
5.1 Portugal
The website of the Instituto Superior Politcnico de Viseu in Portugual
hosts a short list of English loanwords in Portuguese, compiled by two
students and their English teacher (Queiroz, Rodrigues and McKenny
1999, accessed June 2002). The authors are not explicit about their data
sources, except that visitors of the web page are invited to contribute
observations. As it concerns a Portuguese project, however, I assume
that most of their sources are likewise of Portuguese, rather than Brazil-
ian, origin.
Their list of English loan words contains four verbs integrated in
the Portuguese conjugation class ending in -ar (28), in addition to the
11
Apostolou-Panara, Goutsos, Gardner-Chloros and Zarpatea cite 14 different Eng-
lish verbs in the periphrastic construction. kmno wash is shared between Goutsos and
Zarpatea. kmno use is cited in the papers by Gardner-Chloros and Zarpetea. But these
two papers must be based on (partly) the same data. I infer this from the fact that the
example
very busy I know that you have (are) very busy is cited in both
(Gardner-Chloros 1992, 128; Zarpatea 1995, 578).
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 305
5.2 Brazil
Kennedy (1971) and Harmon (1994) quote a number of English verbs
occurring in Brazilian dictionaries and other written sources. All are
integrated into the so-called first conjugation class ending in -ar:
(30) chutar to shoot [ball game]
drenar to drain
ranquear to rank
treinar to train
Brazilian Portuguese/English (Kennedy, 1971)
Harmon does not mention the construction with fazer. Kennedy cites
just one example of a somewhat enigmatic periphrastic construction:
fazer o footing, translated in English as take a stroll.
306 louis boumans
6. Discussion
The data from North African varieties of Arabic in contact with Euro-
pean languages suggest that diaspora communities are more inclined
to use the periphrastic alternative for incorporating foreign verbs. The
studies on Greek and Portuguese in contact with English do not unam-
biguously confirm this. Morphological integration as well as periphras-
tic constructions are reported for all contact situations, whether in the
Greek and Portuguese speaking countries or in the respective immi-
grant communities in Anglophone countries.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 307
7. Conclusions
In nearly all cases, foreign verbs are combined with matrix language
inflection in either of two ways: they are morphologically integrated and
inflected with ML affixes (if any), or they are embedded in a periphrastic
construction with an inflected ML verb. Some MLs, such as Magribian
Arabic, Portuguese and Greek, allow for both solutions. A comparison
of Magribian, Portuguese and Greek bilingual communities suggests
that the periphrastic integration of foreign verbs is favored in situations
of more intense contact with the superimposed language.
8. References
Aquilina, J. 1965 (1987). Teach Yourself Maltese. Valetta: Hodder and Stoughton.
Backus, A. 1996. Two in One: Bilingual Speech of Turkish Immigrants in the Netherlands.
Tilburg: Tilburg University Press.
. 2001. Synchronic Register Variation in Monolingual and Bilingual Turkish (project
description).
Boumans, L. 1998. The Syntax of Code-switching. Analysing Moroccan Arabic/Dutch
Conversations. Tilburg: Tilburg University Press.
. 2000. Periphrastic Verb Constructions in Moroccan Arabic/Dutch Code-switch-
ing. In A. Fenyvesi and K. Sandor, eds. Language Contact and the Verbal Complex of
Dutch and Hungarian. Working Papers of the 1st Bilingual Language Use Theme Meet-
ing. Szeged: University of Szeged, Teacher Training College, 6784.
. 2002. Repetition Phenomena in Insertional Codes-witching. In A. Rouchdy, ed.
Language Contact and Language Conflict Phenomena in Arabic. London: Curzon,
279316.
, and Caubet, D. 2000. Modelling Intrasentential Code-switching: a Comparative
study of Algerian Arabic/French in Algeria and Moroccan Arabic/Dutch in the Neth-
erlands. In J. Owens, ed. Arabic as a Minority Language. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter,
pp. 11380.
Camilleri, A. 1994. Language contact between Maltese and English: code-switching
and cross-linguistic influence. In D. Caubet and M. Vanhove, eds. Actes des premires
journes internationales de dialectologie arabe de Paris. Paris: INALCO, 43149.
Cohen, M. 1912. Le parler arabe des juifs dAlger. Paris: H. Champion.
Contossopoulos, N.G. 1978. Linfluence du franais sur le grec: emprunts lexicaux et
calques phrasologiques. Athnes: s.n.
Cornips, L. 1994. De hardnekkige vooroordelen over de regionale doen+infinitief-
constructie. Forum der Letteren, 35.4, 28294.
De Reuse, W. 1994. English Loanwords in the Native Languages of the Chukotka Pen-
insula. Anthropological Linguistics, 36.1, 5668.
El Aissati, A. 1997. Language Loss among Native Speakers of Moroccan Arabic in the
Netherlands. Tilburg: Tilburg University Press.
Evripidou, D. 2001. Lexical Borrowing: A Study of English Loanwords in the Greek Cypriot
Dialect. Lancaster: Lancaster University.
Gardner-Chloros, P. 1992. The Sociolinguistics of the Greek Cypriot Community in
London. Plurilinguismes, 4, 11236.
Giesbers, H. 1984. Doe jij even lief spelen? Notities over het perifrastisch doen. Mede-
delingen NCDN, 19, 5776.
Goutsos, D. 2001. A Discourse-analytic Approach to the Use of English in Cypriot
Greek Conversations. International Journal of Applied Linguistics, 11:2, 194223.
Harmon, R.M. 1994. Aspectos lingsticos dos emprstimos em portugus. Hispania,
77:3, 463469.
Hartley, A.H. 2001. Loanwords in Modern Nautical Greek. (2002).
Hasselmo, N. 1969. On Diversity in American Swedish. Svenska Landsml och Svenskt
Folkliv, 92, 5372.
Haugen, E. 1950. The Analysis of Linguistic Borrowing. Language, 26:2, 21031.
Heath, J. 1986. Hasta la Mujerra! and other Instances of Playful Language Mixing in
Morocco. Mediterranean Language Review, 2, 1136.
. 1989. From Code-Switching to Borrowing. A Case Study of Moroccan Arabic. Lon-
don: Kegan Paul International.
Herrero Muoz-Cobo, B. 1996. El rabe marroqu: aproximacin sociolingstica. Alme-
ra: Universidad de Almera.
Igla, B. 1991. On the Treatment of Foreign Verbs in Romani. In P. Bakker and M. Cor-
tiade, eds. In the Margin of Romani. Gypsy Languages in Contact. Amsterdam: Inst.
ATW, Univ. Amsterdam, 505.
the periphrastic bilingual verb construction 311
Kennedy, J.H. 1971. The Influence of English on the Vocabulary of Brazilian Portu-
guese. Hispania 54:2, 327.
Khubchandani, L.M. 1968. The Gender of English Loanwords in Sindhi. In B. Krish-
namurti, ed. Studies in Indian Linguistics. (Professor M.B. Emeneau sastipurti volume).
Poona: Deccan College, 18088.
Lontos, S.S. 192526. American Greek. American Speech, I, 30710.
Malkiel, Y. 1986. A Spanish Conjugational Model Superimposed on Portuguese. Medi-
terranean Language Review 2, 5166.
Mifsud, M. 1995. Loan Verbs in Maltese. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Muysken, P. 2000. Bilingual Speech. A typology of Code-Mixing. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Myers-Scotton, C. 1993. Duelling Languages. Grammatical Structure in Codeswitching.
Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Nortier, J. and Schatz, H. 1988. Van nwoordwisseling naar ontlening, een vergelijk-
end onderzoek. Forum der Letteren, 29, 16178.
Nuijtens, E.T.G. 1962. De tweetalige menseen taalsociologisch onderzoek naar het
gebruik van dialect en cultuurtaal in Borne. Assen: Van Gorcum.
Pap, L. 1949. Portuguese-American Speech. New York: Kings Crown Press.
Papapavlou, A. 1997. The Influence of English and its Dominance in Cyprus: Reality or
unfounded fears? Journal of Mediterranean Studies, 7:2, 21849.
Queiroz, A., Rodrigues, J. and McKenny, J. 1999. Emprstimos da lngua inglesa para a
portuguesa. English loan words and phrases in Portuguese. Escola Superior de Edu-
cao de Viseu. 2002.
Seaman, P.D. 1972. Modern Greek and American English in Contact. The Hague:
Mouton.
Swanson, D. 1958. English Loanwords in Modern Greek. Word, 14, 2646.
Tamis, A. 1986. The State of the Modern Greek Language as Spoken in Victoria. Mel-
bourne, University of Melbourne.
Thomason, S.G. and Kaufman, T. 1988. Language Contact, Creolization and Genetic Lin-
guistics. Berkeley: Univ. of California Press.
Treffers-Daller, J. 1994. Mixing Two Languages. French-Dutch contact in a comparative
perspective. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Van Dijk-Wittop Koning, A.M. 1963. De continuteit van het Grieks: onderzoek naar de
herkomst van de woordvoorraad van het Nieuwgrieks. Zwolle: W.E.J. Tjeenk Willink.
Van Ness, S. 1994. Die Dimensionen lexicalischer Entlehnungen im Pennsylvanien-
deutschen von Ohio (USA). Zeitschrift fr Dialektologie und Linguistik, 61.3,
27997.
Van Staden, M. 1999. Where does Malay end and Tidore begin? In R.A.C. Dam, ed.
Perspectives on the Birds Head of Irian Jaya, Indonesia. Proceedings of the conference
Leiden, 1317 October 1997. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 691716.
Wernitz, C.J. 1993. Bedingungen und Voraussetzungen fr Sprachwechsel. Eine Untersuc-
hung zum Sprachwechsel bei bilingualen Marokkanern in Frankreich. Frankfurt: Peter
Lang.
Zarpetea, P. 1995. Code-switching and Lexical Borrowing (loanwords) in the Speech
of Three Generations of Greek Cypriots in London (Harringey). Studies in Greek
Linguistics. Proceedings of the 16th Annual Meeting of the Department of Linguistics.
Thessaloniki: Aristotle University, 57687.
FAULA, FAILA, FAALA :
DISPERSION ET RGULARITS SMANTIQUES
DANS LES TROIS SCHMES SIMPLES DU VERBE ARABE
Joseph Dichy
Universit Lumire-Lyon 2
1. Introduction1
1
Je reprends ici, sous une forme largement revue, le chapitre 3 de mon cours de pr-
paration lagrgation darabe du Centre national denseignement distance (CNED),
2002 et 2003. Par souci dexplicitation, jai prsent quelque peu en dtail le cadre concep-
tuel ncessaire au traitement de cette difficile question, et conserv des dfinitions ou
des indications qui pourront paratre videntes, mais ne le sont pas ncessairement.
Ce travail doit beaucoup au cadre thorique et aux travaux de Jean-Pierre Descls,
ainsi quaux sminaires que nous avons anims, et continuons danimer ensemble,
depuis 2001, sur les valeurs associes en contexte aux formes verbales en arabe et en
franais. Je remercie galement les membres de son quipe de recherche, notamment
Brahim Djioua, pour de nombreuses et fcondes discussions.
2
La convention qui prvaut dans la tradition linguistique arabe dsigne ce que nous
appelons les consonnes radicales 1, 2 et 3 (de la racine smitique) respectivement par
f, et l.
3
Ainsi pour les grammaires en langues occidentales : Neyreneuf et Al-Hakkak (1996,
3542) signalent des nuances de sens . . . pour chaque forme drive, mais non pour
les verbes simples (id., 2829). De mme, les descriptions consacres par Blachre et
314 joseph dichy
4
Les termes daccompli et inaccompli, dachev et dinachev ou de perfectif et imper-
fectif, pourtant reus, comportent un problme, celui de dsigner la forme morpholo-
gique par un terme dnotant lune des valeurs aspectuo-temporelles que cette forme
peut prendre en contexte. Do le choix de dsigner ces paradigmes verbaux par leur
nom arabe ou par le trait morphologique qui les caractrise. Ainsi, le md (tradition-
nellement accompli), dans lequel le morphme de personne prcde la base du verbe,
correspond ici au suffix ; le mudri (traditionnellement inaccompli), dans lequel ce
morphme prcde la base, est dsign du terme de prfix (cf. Moscati, d. 1964, 1312 :
prfix-conjugation vs suffix-conjugation).
316 joseph dichy
Selon Moscati, d. (1964 : 122), qui se situe dans la perspective des tudes
smitiques compares, lantiquit de ce schma vocalique trois ter-
mes en arabe est confirm par quelques-unes des manifestations les plus
anciennes du groupe smitique du Nord-Ouest, cest--dire, par lamorite,
lougaritique, et les gloses de Tell Amarna . . .6 Dans cette reconstruction,
comme le souligne Roman (loc. cit.), les schmes sont toujours identifia-
5
Voir sur ce point Cantineau (1950) ; Roman (1983 II : 897900 ; 2005, 33), qui voit
dans la premire voyelle la marque de la diathse (subjective ou objective) ; Fleisch
(1957 ; 1968, 246 ; 1979) ; Larcher (1996 ; 2003, 2628). Nr ad-Dn (2002, 185186)
signale des traits tardifs, dans lesquels la forme fuila est considre comme un qua-
trime principe (asl), i.e., un quatrime schme du verbe simple, et non une forme de
la conjugaison (comme dans , m. en 643/1245, arh al-Mulk : 30).
6
The antiquity of this threefold vocalic scheme in Arabic is confirmed by some of
the oldest manifestations in North-West Semitic, i.e. Amorite, Ugaritic, and the Tell
Amarna glosses. In the prefix-conjugation the variation in the second vowell is at least
partly paralleled : u or i corresponding to a, and a to i, while u generally remains (Mos-
cati, d. 1964, 122).
faula, faila, faala 317
7
Sur le statut pistmologique de cette notion dans la tradition linguistique arabe
318 joseph dichy
mdivale, et notamment chez Ibn Jinn (m. en 393/1002), voir Guillaume 1984. La
liste et les combinaisons des causes de transformation (il peut y en voir plus dune dans
une racine donne) ont t prsents sous une forme modlise dans Dichy (1993) et
Ammar et Dichy (1999, 3134).
8
Voir par exemple Ibn Xlawayh, m. en 370/981, Laysa f kalm al-arab Point ne
se trouve dans le langage des Arabes . . . (sous-entendu hormis, lexception de), chap.
10 ; az-Zajjj, m. en 337/949, Jumal : 398 (plus cohrent que le prcdent). Sur le statut
de la classe h asiba/yah sibu, notamment chez Ibn Jinn, m. en 392/1002, cf. Guillaume
(1984, 427433).
faula, faila, faala 319
9
Cf. Sbawayhi (Kitb IV : 38), ainsi par exemple que az-Zamaxar (Mufassa l, 277
279). Lintransitivit des verbes dtat est rappele notamment par Wright (189698,
vol. I, 3638) ou Fleisch (1957 ; 1979). Pour lhbreu, voir par ex. Gesenius-Kautzsch-
Cowley (1910, 4143) ou Joon (1923, 4041).
faula, faila, faala 321
respondre aux verbes daction ? Et que dire des paires akala u manger,
de schme faala vs. ariba a boire, de schme faila, ou ra a voir, vs.
samia a entendre ? La rponse consistant poser une catgorie inter-
mdiaire ou moyenne (Marcel Cohen 1929 ; Joon 1930 ; Fleisch 1957),
qui concerne au premier chef le schme faila tout en incluant des verbes
en faala, ne rsout que trs partiellement le problme. Les processus de
glissement smantique entranant le passage dun verbe daction un
verbe dtat, sils ont donn lieu quelques fines observations,10 nappor-
tent pas non plus de solution de porte gnrale. Mais le principal pro-
blme, comme la section 4.3 lillustrera, est que lapparente transparence
de la notion de verbe daction aura masqu la complexit des donnes
et la forte dispersion smantique du schme faala. On verra dans la
suite de ce travail quil nest de fait pas ncessaire de recourir aux verbes
daction pour dcrire les verbes en faala, malgr lintrt que prsente
par ailleurs cette notion.
Passons maintenant la dfinition des proprits fondamentales
ncessaires lanalyse des schmes simples : lagentivit (section 3.2), les
notions de procs, dvnement, de processus et dtat (sect. 3.3), celle de
verbe moyen ou de diathse interne (sect. 3.4).
10
Cf. par exemple pour lhbreu, Joon 1923, 41, pour larabe, Larcher 2003,
2728.
11
Cf. Roman (1990, 4243 ; 1999/2005, B-2.3.2). La dfinition ci-dessus de lagenti-
vit est en partie diffrente. Cf. galement lanalyse de Fleisch (1968, 116117), qui pose
une bipartition du verbe arabe : 1 le verbe agent (le sujet tant considr en tant
quagent) ; le verbe de qualit (le sujet tant simplement le qualifi), et distingue, dans la
premire catgorie lagent pur et simple de lagent intress.
322 joseph dichy
12
Certains des exemples donns dans ce travail existent aussi avec des formes corres-
pondant dautres schmes du verbe simple, quelquefois avec le mme sens. Ces autres
formes ne sont pas reprises ici, malgr lintrt quet reprsent la discussion.
faula, faila, faala 323
La sous-catgorie (a) inclut des verbes des trois schmes et les sous-cat-
gories (b) (d), des verbes des schmes faila et faala. Ces exemples, qui
anticipent par leur classement sur la suite de lexpos, montrent que la
proprit dagentivit, malgr limportance qui est la sienne dans la des-
cription smantique des schmes simples, ne peut, elle seule, consti-
tuer le principe qui en permettrait le classement.
saqatat al l-lard elle est tombe par terre (quil sagisse dune per-
sonne ou dune chose) ;
darasa r-rasmu la trace (du campement) sest efface : lagent est ici le
vent du dsert. (Ce thme est classique dans la posie arabe ancienne ;
324 joseph dichy
13
Le terme de procs ne se traduit pas directement en anglais. Comrie (1985, 5),
Lyons (1978/1990, 3.4) ont recours au terme de situation pour recouvrir les tats dune
part, les vnements et les processus de lautre.
14
Mais voir aussi Comrie (1976, 1985), Lyons (1978/1990), ou, diffremment, la syn-
thse de Maingueneau (1994). La thorie des invariants cognitifs du langage et des pri-
mitives smantico-cognitives de J.-P. Descls est sous-jacente aux analyses prsentes
ici, notamment : lide que les primitives sont des oprateurs abstraits dtermins par
des proprits formelles, lhypothse selon laquelle elles sont ancres sur la perception
et laction, ainsi quun nombre important de points qui dcoulent de ces conceptions
(Descls 1990 ; 1994 ; Descls et Guentchva paratre). Le lecteur familier de ces tra-
vaux notera enfin que le terme de schme est employ ici la manire des travaux
arabisants et smitisants. On distinguera donc cet usage de celui des schmes sman-
tico-cognitifs (Descls, 1990 ; Abraham, 1995 ; Descls et al., 1998).
faula, faila, faala 325
3.3.1 vnement
Laspect vnement [. . .] est lexpression dune occurrence qui apparat
sur un arrire-fond stable [. . . et] tablit une coupure entre lavant v-
nementiel (pas encore) et laprs vnementiel (ne plus). La dure de
lvnement est donc borne gauche par un avant et droite par un
aprs. Cet aprs peut concider avec un tat engendr par lvnement,
ou tat rsultatif (Descls 1994, 7375).15 Les exemples ci-dessous (verbe
concern en gras) illustrent quelques proprits fondamentales de las-
pect vnement :
3.3.2 Processus
Laspect processus exprime un changement saisi dans son volution
interne. Tout processus exprime ncessairement un changement initial
(. . .) qui indique le dbut du processus. Le processus peut tre dcrit
15
Je fais dans ce travail un usage gnrique (ou hypronymique) du terme dtat rsul-
tatif. Ce dernier inclut ici ltat rsultant, qui est par ailleurs trs utile pour lanalyse des
valeurs aspectuo-temporelles en contexte, par exemple pour la description de ltat-pr-
sent, concomitant lacte dnonciation (Descls, 1994, 73). Ce choix, limit au prsent
travail, est d au fait que les valeurs smantiques associes aux familles morphologiques
constitues par les schmes ne sont pas sensibles cette distinction contextuelle.
326 joseph dichy
comme une succession dtats. Il peut, selon le cas, sorienter ou non vers
un terme explicite, qui correspond alors au dernier tat du processus ou
tat rsultatif (Descls 1994, 7580). Exemples :
16
Ainsi, le dictionnaire glose lexpression raifa l-ina, mot--mot siroter un rci-
pient comme en aspirer le contenu jusquau bout (al-Mujam al-Wast : racine /r--f/) ;
de mme, ariba l-ina boire un rcipient correspond ariba kulla m fhi en boire
tout le contenu (Ilys et Nsf 1995, 164).
17
Comparer avec la dfinition de Maingueneau (1994, 64) : Les tats . . . nont ni
dbut, ni fin, ni milieu, ils ne supposent ni agent ni changement (ex. Luc est paresseux).
la diffrence de Comrie (1976, 1985), Lyons (1978/1990), Descls (1994) et du prsent
travail, cet auteur noppose pas tat, vnement et processus.
faula, faila, faala 327
Ainsi, h azina a tre ou devenir triste (de schme faila, adjectif cor-
respondant : h azn) est traditionnellement cit comme exemple de
qualit temporaire ou transitoire.18 Il rfre toutefois une qualit
durable dans les noncs suivants : fa-h azina il xiri umrihi Et il
fut triste jusqu la fin de ses jours ; inna lladna man . . . l xawfa
alayhim wa-l hum yah zann Ceux qui ont eu foi . . . aucune crainte
18
Ce verbe est cit par Caspari-Uricoecha pour illustrer un tat transitoire et passa-
ger ou bien une proprit ou une qualit qui naffecte lobjet du verbe que pendant peu
de temps (1881, 32) ; par Wright, comme illustrant a temporary state or condition,
or a merely accidental quality in persons or things (189698 I : 30) ; par Brockelmann
(1948, 35) comme exemple de verbes exprimant toujours une qualit ou une situation
accidentelle ou temporaire (Die Form faila steht durchweg fr zufllige, vorberge-
hende . . . Eigenschaften und Zustnde) ; ou Boormans (1967, 10), comme dcrivant un
tat passager.
328 joseph dichy
19
Les proprits de lagentivit ne relvent pas dinvariants linguistiques, mais de la
reprsentation du procs vhicule par le vocabulaire de chaque culture. Ainsi, dans la
culture arabe mdivale, on peut, soit (a) se montrer avare envers quelquun dans une
situation donne, ou (b) tre avare par nature ( f t-tab) : cf. par exemple la prface du
Kitb al-Buxal Livre des avares dal-Jhiz, m. en 255/868 ; semblablement lavarice est,
lpoque de Molire considre comme pouvant tre inscrite dans le caractre de celui
qui, comme Harpagon, est un avaricieux. Le premier cas (a) est exprim au moyen du
verbe pleinement agentif baxila a al se montrer avare envers qqun, et le second (b),
par le verbe dagentivit neutralise baxula u tre un avaricieux (lavare est le sige du
vice inscrit dans sa nature).
faula, faila, faala 329
Ces donnes montrent que la notion dtat rsultatif est loin daller de
soi. Elles appellent deux remarques gnrales :
saimtu taklifa l-h ayti . . . je suis las des fardeaux [dont nous charge]
la vie (Muallaqa grande ode du pote prislamique Zuhayr b. Ab
Sulm, 46e vers) : la forme conjugue au suffix (mot--mot : jai t
ou je fus las . . .) engendre ltat rsultatif tre las.
Les exemples donns en (b), qui portent sur des processus, mritent un
mot dexplication : lachvement du processus parvenu son dernier tat
constitue lui-mme un vnement (Descls, 1994, 72, 7780) :
(a) Dans les verbes dtat aussi on pourrait dire que le sujet est le lieu du
procs, mme si lon voit bien quil ne peut en tre lacteur. Les verbes
dtat, dans lesquels lagentivit est neutralise, nont pas de diathse, et
ne constituent en aucun cas une sous-catgorie du verbe moyen. Cette
20
A propos de la notion de verbe moyen en arabe classique, outre M. Cohen (1929),
Joon (1930), Cantineau (1950) et Fleisch (1957 ; 1968, 116117), comparer la descrip-
tion ci-dessus avec P. Larcher (1995, 2956 ; 2003, 2226) ou, pour larabe dialectal gyp-
tien, de C. Audebert (2002).
336 joseph dichy
21
Je fais mienne ici une suggestion de Jean-Pierre Descls, communication orale.
22
Il est intressant de noter titre de comparaison que Sbawayhi considrait que
la transitivit fait entrer un verbe dans le chapitre des actions visibles ou audibles ( f
bb al-aml allat tur wa-tusma Kitb IV : 6). Cette description est reprise dans le
commentaire dal-Srf (en note de la mme page) et dans Ibn Ya, arh al-Mufassa l
VII : 157.
faula, faila, faala 337
Dans les faula valeur dtat caractristique, le procs tat est, comme
on la vu, dagentivit neutralise. Ces verbes sont, comme il est attendu,
intransitifs.23 Exemples (hors glissement smantique de type tre x o
devenir x) :
qabuh a u tre qabh laid (valeur physique ou morale) ; h asuba u
tre h asb noble, de haute naissance ; h aluma u tre h alm clment ;
sabuh a u tre sabh brillant, radieux (visage) ou beau, joli (garon,
personne) ; katufa u tre katf pais, dense.
Faula est le schme simple le plus stable dun point de vue formel. Nous
avons vu (figures 1 et 2) que la voyelle de sa deuxime consonne radicale
demeurait inchange au paradigme du prfix (mudri). Ce schme est
aussi le plus stable smantiquement. Sa valeur de base, ltat caractristique,
est toutefois lobjet dun glissement de sens qui lui est troitement cor-
rl, le changement et lacquisition dtat ( 3.3.3.b et 3.3.4 ci-dessus).
23
Cf. Sbawayhi : Il nexiste pas dans le langage des Arabes de verbe transitif en
faula (laysa f l-kalm faultuhu mutaaddiyan Kitb IV : 38).
faula, faila, faala 339
On observe, travers les usages illustrs par cet exemple et ceux qui
ont t analyss plus haut, que la valeur smantique tre x incluse dans
celle de ltat caractristique se trouve trs souvent ralise en contexte
comme un changement dtat (devenir x). Ce changement a, son tour,
la proprit dengendrer un tat rsultatif. Un tel phnomne nest nulle-
ment propre larabe. On peut comparer, au moins partiellement, avec
les exemples suivants, qui sont emprunts au franais :
Dans les deux cas, les prdicats tre beau et tre notre anctre paraissent
incompatibles avec un contexte qui leur assignerait un commencement
ou un terme. Or les marqueurs temporels maintenant et dsormais
prsents dans ces exemples assignent aux procs un dbut, ce qui a pour
effet doprer une translation des prdicats verbaux ci-dessus de la cat-
gorie de ltat vers celle du changement et de lacquisition dtat. Cest
comme si lon disait : tu es devenu beau (maintenant que tu as les che-
veux coups) et Lucie est devenue lanctre de lhumanit (depuis sa
dcouverte et les recherches qui ont suivi).
hum kuram ils sont gnreux ; dans cette phrase, karm, plur.
kuram, est ladjectif assimil associ au verbe dtat caractristique
karuma u ;
(a) hum tlibn ils sont en train de demander/ils ont demand
ou (b) hum matlbn ils sont demands ; tlib et matlb sont les
24
Pour les deux valeurs de base des participes (dachvement et progressive), com-
parer avec Roman (1990, 3940). Pour une analyse dveloppe de la valeur smantique
des participes en contexte et notamment du progressif terme spcifi ou non, voir
Dichy (2002/2003, 5.2.2). En ce qui concerne la relation morphologique entre certains
schmes et ladjectif assimil ou le participe actif, comparer la discussion mene ici avec
Larcher (2003, 2526).
342 joseph dichy
Cette division entre dune part les verbes dcrivant un tat et dots dun
adjectif assimil et de lautre les verbes auxquels sont associs des par-
ticipes, rencontre toutefois un problme. Au chapitre consacr ladjec-
tif assimil (sifa muabbaha), az-Zamaxar (Mufassa l : 230) associe
celui-ci la valeur smantique dimmutabilit man t-tubt (qui renvoie
ce qui est tbit immuable, tabli en quelque sorte hors nonciation du
temps). Il oppose cette dernire la valeur doccurrence dans le temps
man l-h udt, valeur quil associe aux participes. Or il nillustre pas
ces derniers par des verbes dcrivant des vnements ou des proces-
sus (comme je lai fait ci-dessus avec talaba u demander), mais par des
verbes associs un adjectif dtat caractristique. Le premier exemple
donn est celui de h sin, qui correspond un participe actif de h asuna u
tre beau (adjectif dtat caractristique h asan). Az-Zamaxar souligne
la valeur doccurrence dans le temps man h udt de la forme h sin en
insrant celle-ci dans les phrases :
(a) soit du glissement de sens qui permet ces verbes, lorsque leur sens
premier est celui de verbes dtat, de prendre celui de lacquisition dtat
(glissement tre x o devenir x),
faula, faila, faala 343
Les quatre exemples cits par az-Zamaxar relvent de ces deux cas.
Si h asuna tre beau relve de la premire catgorie, on a vu qual-Mu-
barrid, cit au 3.3.3.b, considrait karuma comme ayant une valeur
dacquisition dtat, et que le dictionnaire de Hans Wehr-Cowan oscillait
entre la valeur de base attribuer chaque verbe. La valeur attributive
se distribue, comme on la vu, sur les verbes relevant tant de (a) que de
(b). Il apparat clairement, en consquence, que lon ne peut rduire les
valeurs smantiques du schme faula au seul sens de verbe dtat : il sy
ajoute lacquisition dtat.
Le schme faula est relativement peu frquent dans les textes, notamment
en arabe littraire moderne. On lui prfre sans doute les constructions
adjectivales correspondantes. Cela ne signifie nullement que ce schme
soit sorti de lusage ou en voie de disparition, comme le montre lexemple
de daufa ci-dessus, emprunt la presse actuelle. On trouve galement
assez souvent dans la prose contemporaine des emplois de construction
impersonnelle, la faveur, pour ainsi dire, de lagentivit neutralise :
l yah sunu an . . ., il ne convient pas que . . . [Yawm., 79, 18] ; yajduru,
il convient, suivi de an ou dune forme infinitive . . .
25
Les critres qui permettent, interdisent ou restreignent lapparition de limpratif
ou du passif en arabe ont t prsents dans Ammar et Dichy (1999, 1920).
344 joseph dichy
On rencontre dans les verbes du schme faila tous les degrs dagenti-
vit (pleine ou partielle) ou labsence de cette proprit (non agentivit,
agentivit neutralise), ainsi que les diffrentes formes de transitivit ou
de son contraire. Do la partition des sens associables ce schme qui
a t observe par les auteurs qui se sont attachs le caractriser.26 La
valeur la plus gnrale est celle de verbes moyens ou de diathse interne
(au sens revisit prsent plus haut), ce schme comportant en outre un
nombre limit de verbes associs un adjectif dtat caractristique.
Il y a quatre grandes catgories smantiques de verbes en faila, dis-
tingues principalement au moyen des proprits dagentivit et de tran-
sitivit.
26
Outre M. Cohen (1929) et Joon (1930), voir notamment : Fleisch (1979, 220
suiv.) ; Ammar et Dichy (1999, 2324).
faula, faila, faala 345
27
Voir notamment : Sbawayhi, Kitb IV : 17 ; az-Zamaxar, Mufassa l : 278. La syn-
thse ci-dessus provient de mon propre examen des donnes.
28
Rappelons que dans xfa, yaxfu craindre, dalternance vocalique i/a, la 2e
consonne radicale w est lobjet de transformations en fonction de la voyelle qui la suit
et la prcde immdiatement, la diffrence des verbes de 2e radicale w ou y dont on
trouve ici des exemples.
346 joseph dichy
La valeur smantique de base des verbes prsents en (c), (d) et (e) est
celle de lacquisition dtat, la diffrence des verbes des sous-catgories
(a) et (b). Dans leur sens de base, les premiers sont donc non agentifs, et
correspondent des verbes mdio-passifs.
Tous les verbes de cette catgorie ne sont pas associs, dans les diction-
naires, un adjectif assimil. Dans le cas des deux derniers exemples
ci-dessus, il est noter que le participe actif est attest, mais avec une
diffrence de sens du plus grand intrt pour la distinction entre les
valeurs smantiques du participe actif et celles de ladjectif assimil (ci-
dessus, 4.1.3) :
Le Munjid al-lua l-arabiyya l-musira (2000) donne lexemple de
anqaztu riqan jai sauv un noy (racine /-r-q/), et Roman : l
takul hd t-tama fa-innaka mridun in akaltahu Ne mange pas
de cette nourriture, car tu seras malade si tu en manges (1999, 71,
daprs le Lisn al-arab, XIIIe s., racine /m-r-d/).
29
Il existe un second adjectif assimil, mixfar grande timide : associ ce dernier,
xafirat tre une grande timide relve des verbes valeur dtat caractristique, dans
lesquels lagentivit est neutralise.
30
Dans des cas tels que slim ladjectif assimil est dit, dans la grammaire arabe tra-
ditionnelle, prendre la forme (sa) du participe actif. Autres exemples : yis dsespr,
bis misrable, mhir adroit, habile (artisan) . . .
faula, faila, faala 349
On notera enfin que la relation entre le verbe et, soit un participe actif,
soit un adjectif assimil, est lexicalise (et non compositionnelle, comme
elle ltait sans doute aux plus anciennes poques de la langue arabe) : on
doit recourir aux connaissances lexicales pour la construire, et non aux
seules connaissances grammaticales ou une dduction partir du sens
du verbe.
31
Cf. Roman (1990, 4243), qui dcrit lagentivit partielle comme une agentivit
ractive.
350 joseph dichy
Reprenons cette analyse en classant les verbes de schme faala selon les
grandes catgories prsentes plus haut. On a :
32
Lagentivit est susceptible de varier selon que le sujet grammatical rfre un
humain (qil) agissant intentionnellement ou non, ou un non humain (ayr qil).
Avec un sujet grammatical non humain, ou humain, mais dpourvu, dans le contexte,
dintentionnalit, zahara ou warada sont des verbes non agentifs. Un autre exemple (du
schme faila cette fois) est dans Yawm. (16, 15) : fa zafira n-nawmu bi-jufn, le som-
meil triompha de mes paupires. Dans cette phrase, le verbe zafira perd le trait dagenti-
vit quil aurait avec un sujet grammatical humain, et devient non agentif (le sommeil ne
disposant daucun contrle sur le procs, dont il nest dailleurs pas lagent). En revanche,
waqaa tomber demeure non agentif, que le sujet soit humain [Yawm. 16, 12] ou non
humain [Yawm. 16, 20 et 32, 17].
352 joseph dichy
33
Les verbes de parole du schme simple sont en arabe des verbes diathse externe.
Le passage une diathse interne se fait au moyen de schmes augments incluant ce que
Roman (1990 ; 1999/2005) appelle le morphme-cho t voir Ammar et Dichy (1999,
2728) ; Dichy (2002/2003, 4.2). Exemples : sala a interroger [schme simple, verbe
diathse externe] vs sala an interroger, questionner (qqun) sur, puis tasala an sin-
terroger sur [schme augment incluant le morphme-cho, verbe diathse interne] ;
qla u dire [schme simple, verbe de diathse externe] vs qawwala attribuer (des paro-
les) qqun, puis taqawwala prtendre, allguer (au profit, dans lintrt, en faveur de
soi-mme) [schme augment incluant le morphme-cho, verbe de diathse interne].
34
Sbawayhi indique quil ny a presque pas de verbes en faula de 2e et troisime radi-
cale identiques (ou redoubls, mina t-tadf Kitb IV : 3637). Ibn Xlawayh (Laysa . . . :
27), signale labsence de verbes redoubls en faula, lexception des deux cas de labba u
(dj cit par Sbawayhi, loc. cit.) et azza u avoir peu de lait (dit dune chvre).
35
Malgr lindication cite, on trouve dans le dictionnaire dal-Fayrz bd trois
autres verbes : azza (3e pers. fm. sing. azuzat) u voir (pour une chvre) son lait dimi-
nuer, avoir peu de lait (adj. azz), ainsi que damma (1e pers. damumtu) u devenir ou
tre trs laid, repoussant (adj. damm), et fakka (1e pers. fakuktu) u, se montrer ou tre
354 joseph dichy
Toutefois, il ne sagit pas dune rgle oprant dans les deux sens : tous les
verbes concaves ou redoubls de schme faala ne relvent pas, il sen
faut de beaucoup des verbes adjectif dtat caractristique. Les exem-
ples de samala u devenir ou tre rigide ou sec et de fasada i et u voir
4.3, exemples (a) montrent quil existe galement un certain nom-
bre de faala adjectif dtat caractristique qui ne relvent daucune des
deux catgories formelles que lon vient dindiquer. Leur sens de base est
toutefois celui de lacquisition dun tat caractristique plutt que celui
de verbes dtat.
stupide ou faible, ces deux derniers verbes pouvant galement tre dalternance i/a. Cf.
aussi Ibn Xlawayh, Laysa . . . : 73 (note de lauteur).
faula, faila, faala 355
36
Toutefois, la diffrence des exemples emprunts larabe et lhbreu, le sens
physique de plonger intransitif et moyen cit ici comporte en franais un ajout
smantique (ide de plongeon), les donnes attaches ce verbe tant relativement
complexes. On a, par exemple, soit : plonger dans la piscine de son jardin, soit plonger
les mains dans leau froide du bain, mais on ne peut plonger (= faire un plongeon) dans
son bain . . .
356 joseph dichy
sens diathse externe porter (un objet . . .) devient, avec une dia-
thse interne : porter [un enfant], devenir ou tre enceinte.
Le verbe wasala i joindre, unir une chose une autre (avec la prp.
bi-) est, dans son sens premier, diathse externe ; il est transitif un
double objet (de manire, respectivement, directe et indirecte). Au
sens de tre uni quelquun par un lien de parent, damiti . . . et de
frquenter assidment quelquun, lagent est en mme temps lun des
deux objets du procs : le verbe est alors diathse interne et transitif
( un seul objet).
Toutes les relations ci-dessus sont bijectives (ce qui est reprsent par
une flche deux ttes ). Il est peu vraisemblable quun tel systme ait
jamais exist en ltat, car, en sus dinluctables transformations morpho-
phonologiques, des glissements smantiques dune catgorie lautre et
divers effets de figement se sont ncessairement fait jour ds les toutes
premires poques de la langue. Un tel glissement est dj perceptible,
dans la figure 3, dans le fait que les verbes adjectif dtat caractristi-
que peuvent se raliser comme des verbes dacquisition dtat, qui sont
mdio-passifs. Or les verbes en faila peuvent galement correspondre
des mdio-passifs. Cest donc plus une reconstruction hypothti-
que du principe qui gouverne ces relations qu une reconstitution dia-
chronique que ce schma nous convie. Ce principe est reconsidrer
de deux points de vue : il masque larbre conceptuel des notions qui le
sous-tendent ( 5.2) ; il est mis en dfaut par les grandes lignes de glisse-
ments smantiques ou de modifications formelles observables dans les
schmes simples ( 5.3).
faula, faila, faala 359
diathse diathse
interne externe
(d) tous les verbes diathse externe sont inclus dans le schme faala ;
(e) les verbes adjectif dtat caractristique sont en contrepartie repr-
sents dans les trois schmes ;
(f) les verbes moyens et mdio-passifs sont rpartis entre les schmes
faila et faala (dans le schme faula, les verbes dacquisition dtat
sont mdio-passifs).
Les deux relations (a) et (d) sont de la forme tous les . . . sont . . . ; la rela-
tion (b) est du type presque tous les . . . sont . . .. Ce qui prcde peut tre
reprsent par la figure suivante :
Conventions :
7. Rfrences bibliographiques
Fleisch, Henri. 1957. tudes sur le verbe arabe. Mlanges Louis Massignon. Institut
Franais de Damas. 153181.
. 1968. Larabe classique. Esquisse dune structure linguistique. Beyrouth : Dr al-
Machreq.
.1979. Trait de philologie arabe vol. 2. Beyrouth : Dr al-Machreq.
alyn, Musta f. 1912. Jmi ad-durs al-arabiyya. 19e d. revue par Muhammad A.
an-Ndir. Beyrouth, al-Maktaba l-Asriyya, 1994, 3 vols. en un.
Guillaume, Jean-Patrick (1984), Quelques aspects de la thorie morpho-phonologique
dIbn Jinn. propos des verbes glide mdian. In G. Bohas et J.-P. Guillaume, ds.
tude des thories des grammairiens arabes. I. Morphologie et phonologie. Institut fran-
ais de Damas. 338490.
Ilys, Jzf et Jirjis Nsf. Mujam ayn al-fil. Beyrouth : Dr al-Ilm li-l-malyn, 1995.
Joon, Paul. 1923. Grammaire de lhbreu biblique. Rome : Institut pontifical, rd.
1965.
. 1930. Smantique des verbes statifs de la forme qatila (qatel) en arabe, hbreu et
aramen. Mlanges de lUniversit Saint Joseph, XV : 1, 332.
Larcher Pierre. 1995. O il est montr quen arabe classique la racine na pas de sens et
quil ny a pas de sens driver delle. Arabica XLII. 291314.
. 1996. Drivation lexicale et relation au passif en arabe classique. Journal asiatique
284, 2. 265290.
. 2003. Le systme verbal de larabe classique. Aix-en-Provence : Publications de
lUniversit de Provence.
Leeman-Bouix, Danielle. 1994. Grammaire du verbe franais, des formes au sens. Paris :
Nathan.
Lyons, John. 1978/1990. Smantique linguistique, trad. fran. de la 3e d., revue et corri-
ge de Semantics II, Cambridge University Press (1978). Paris : Larousse, 1990.
Maingueneau, Dominique. 1994. Lnonciation en linguistique franaise. Paris : Hachette.
Moscati, Sabatino, d. 1964. An Introduction to the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic
Languages. Phonology and Morphology. Wiesbaden : O. Harrassowitz (2e d., 1969).
Al-Mujam al-Wast. 1973. Ibrhm Ans, Abdalhalm Muntasir, Atiyya as-Sawlih,
Muhammad X. Ahmad, eds. Le Caire : Dr al-Marif, 2e d. (1e d. 1960).
Al-Munjid f l-lua l-arabiyya l-musira. 2000. Subhi H amw, d. Beyrouth : Dr al-
Mariq.
Neyreneuf Michel et Ghalib Al-Hakkak. 1996. Grammaire active de larabe. Paris : Livre
de Poche.
Nr ad-Dn, Ism. 2002. Abniyat al-fil f fiyat Ibn al-H jib. Beyrouth : Dr al-Fikr
al-lubnn (1e d. 1982).
Qabbwa, Faxr ad-Dn. 1998. Tasrf al-asm wa-l-af l. Beyrouth : Maktabat al-Macrif,
3e d.
Roman, Andr. 1983. tude de la phonologie et de la morphologie de la koin arabe. Mar-
seille : Jeanne Laffitte, 2 vols.
. 1990. Grammaire de larabe. Paris : P.U.F. (coll. Que sais-je ?).
. 1999/2005. La cration lexicale en arabe, ressources et limites de la nomination dans
une langue humaine naturelle. Presses Universitaires de Lyon, 1999. 2e d. revue et
augmente, Presses Universitaires de Lyon et Universit de Kaslik, 2005.
a-artn, Rad. 1912. Mabdi al-arabiyya. Beyrouth : Imprimerie catholique (1e d.).
Sylvestre de Sacy, Antoine. 1831. Grammaire arabe lusage des lves de lcole spciale
des langues orientales vivantes. Paris : Imprimerie royale (2e d.). Rimpr. photomca-
nique. Paris : Institut du Monde arabe, 2 vols. s.d.
Versteegh, Kees. 1997/2003. The Arabic Language. New York : Columbia University Press,
1997. Trad. arabe : Al-lua al-arabiyya, trxuh wa-mustawaytuh wa-tatruh,
trad. Muhammad a-arqw. Le Caire : Al-Majlis al-al li-t -taqfa, 2003.
. 2004. Meanings of speech. The category of sentential mood in Arabic grammar.
In Joseph Dichy et Hassan Hamz, ds. Le voyage et la langue, Mlanges en lhon-
faula, faila, faala 365
Everhard Ditters
University of Nijmegen
1. Introduction
1
Feature names and feature values are represented in the text in Italics. We use two
types of features: inherent and inherited features. The former represents the intrinsic
semantic value of the entry concerned. The latter follows as modifier the entry it modi-
fies according to language dependent concord and agreement rules.
2
We use the term disambiguation for attempts to obtain a single and most probable
syntactically and semantically correct analysis of input data in an automated processing
environment.
3
Language phenomena such as homonymy, polysemy and even antinomy should
also be controlled by means of adequate featuring.
368 everhard ditters
4
We distinguish between concord and agreement and reserve the latter to describe
regular patterns in relationship between an explicit agent and its predicate in a ver-
bal sentence (Sv) involving gender (Ditters 1992, 169, n. 13; Kihm 2006, 1415; cf. also:
Bahloul 2006, 4348). We use the term concord for feature-value sharing within the
noun phrase (NP) between the head and its modifiers, as well as in the nominal sentence
(Sn) for the marked relation between the topic and comment, involving, if applicable,
definiteness, gender, number, and case.
5
We are definitely not trying to introduce a formalized dynamic description of the
Arabic concept of the world. We rather follow a static semantic approach using finite
enumeration of pertinent (static) semantic features. See also subsection 4 below.
6
For coherency within our description, we adopt Sbawayhis inventory of 29 Arabic
consonants (Hrn 1982, 4, 431).
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 369
7
To be elaborated upon later at syntax level when speaking about: tri-, bi-, mono-,
and intransitive verbs or the reduction to a one-argument realization used to uniquely
emphasize the semantic load of the verbal entry ; and at the semantic level while speaking
about: semantic feature hierarchy; the minimal and the maximal realization of comple-
ment structure; compulsory and optional complement structure realization; case roles;
and verb sub-categorization.
8
For other applications such as information retrieval (IR) or text-summarizing
(TS), we use a Dependency Grammar (DG) approach since it appears to express more
adequately semantic properties in terms of nodes and relations between nodes (Ditters
and Koster 2004).
9
Only recently we decided to include al-Saffr (1979) in our research for his seman-
tico-syntactic features in Case-Grammar terms.
10
For more information about the AGFL formalism, now in its 2.4th Windows ver-
sion, see Koster (1991) and www.cs.ru.nl/agfl. For more information about the formal
description of Arabic, see Ditters 1992; 2003a; 2003b; and forthcoming.
370 everhard ditters
nlp. The acronym refers to Affix Grammars over Finite Lattices.11 The
parsers generated by the system are top-down recursive backup parsers
(Koster 1974, Meijer 1986), based on non-deterministic concepts and
the unification-principle (Nederhoff 1993). The agfl-formalism is
part of the family of two-level grammars: a context-free grammar is
augmented with set-valued features for expressing agreement between
syntactic categories. The formalism is, in principle, suited for describing
morphological and syntactic structure, as well as finite semantics in
terms of animate, concrete, human, volition and many others.
We discuss feature-sets at morphologic ( 2), syntactic ( 3), and
semantic level ( 4). We end with a conclusion ( 5) and a list of
references used ( 6).12
2. Morphology
11
Here, the term affix, a variable with a finite set of values, has to be taken in its for-
mal and not in its linguistic sense.
12
Within the morphological, syntactic and semantic sections, we use the traditional
Arabic language parts-of-speech (POS) differentiation into noun, verb and particle as
headings for the subsections. In these subsections we only discuss the, for us, relevant
features.
13
Cf. Sbawayhis tri-partition (Hrn 1982, 1:12) and the subdivision of POS into 7
classes by alSq (1977, 214).
14
Cohen (1970, 49 ff.) has been one of the first to describe, for automated Arabic lan-
guage processing, a frame of mostly three, sometimes four and rarely five, consonants or
semi-consonants filled with a combination of vowels (including the absence of a vowel
at a certain slot) expressing semantic differentiations to the global meaning of the conso-
nantal root combination. Elements of a small subset of the phoneme inventory are used
to produce other derivates of the base frame, whether of the category verb, noun or
adjective, with their own specific variation on the global meaning of the consonantal
root combination.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 371
2.1 Verbs
Assigning morphological features and feature values to verbs, we
account for: the realization of finite verb occurrences on the basis of
number and place of the root consonants (radical, r1,16 r2, r3, and less
frequent: r4 and r5); the realization of the vowel (a, i, u) of the second
consonant (C2) of the base (Stem I) verb realization in perfect and mood
aspect (vowperf, vowimperf ); and the realization of prefixed or infixed
vowels (vow or sukn).
Morphological features, attached to elements of a finite verb realization
at syntactic level (see also 3.1 below), affect values concerning: aspect,
tense,17 voice, person, gender and number. For the description of a finite
15
Cf. Fleisch mainly used three, sometimes four, features to define the elements of
the consonantal system, which ends up in a 28 u 4 matrix (1961, 1:5665) or a 16 u 5
matrix (1968, 19); Versteegh (2001, 20) used a 9 u 6 matrix; Saad (1982, 6) used a 7 u
9 matrix for the consonants and a 4 u 2 matrix for the vowels. See also the phoneme
featuring of Bohas and Saguer (2007, 255 ff.) in this volume.
16
A listing of the Arabic phonemic (consonant and vowel) system is given in the lexi-
cal module(s). For analysis purposes, a single description of the r1 suffices. For genera-
tion purposes, features describing occurrence incompatibilities between an r1, r2 and r3
(r4, r5) should be provided for.
17
As Badawi et al. (2004, 362 ff.) do, we distinguish between a perfect and a non-
perfect (mood) value of the feature aspect of the verb. In combination with modal and
temporal verbs and/or adverbials a complete range of temporal and aspectual differen-
tiations (tenses) can be described (see on aspect and tense also Eisele 2006, 195201;
Bahloul 2006, 506; and Reese 2006, 5053).
372 everhard ditters
verb form of the so-called weak verbs with alternative realizations in its
conjugation, a variable verbtype accounts for alternative verb realizations.
To account for the differentiation in base and derived stems we use the
feature derivation. With that we can list, in the form of a context-free
metagrammar, the following feature names or non-terminal affixes
(in capital letters) with their finite-set of values or terminal affixes (in
lower case), connected to a finite verb form:18
ASPECT :: perfect; MOOD.
MOOD :: indicative; subjunctive; jussive; imperative.19
TENSE :: temporal; modal.
VOICE :: active; passive.
PERSON :: first; second; third.
GENDER :: feminine; masculine.
NUMBER :: singular; dual; plural.
VERBTYPE :: r1r2r3; r2=r3; r1=w; r1=y; r2=a; r2=w;
r2=y; r3=w; r3=y; r1=w, r3=y; r2=w, r3=y;
r1=hamza; r2=hamza; r3=hamza.
DERIVATION :: base; DERIVED.
DERIVED :: ii ; iii ; iv ; v; vi; vii; viii; ix; x.
RADICALS :: three; four; five.
R1 :: alphabet.
R2 :: R1.
R3 :: R1.
R4 :: R1.
R5 :: R1.
VOW :: vowel; sukn.
VOWPAT :: VOW.
VOWIMPERF :: VOW.
VOWPERF :: VOW.
18
We will use the following conventions for the formal description of features and
the finite-set of values at the second level of description which closely follow the AGFL
convention:
feature names are written in upper case;
feature values are written in lower case;
the rewrite symbol is a double colon ::;
a single left-hand entry is rewritten in one ore more feature names
and/or feature values at the right-hand side;
alternative realizations at right-hand side are separated by a semicolon;
options in the right-hand side are separated by a vertical bar;
a rule will be closed by a period ..
19
The archaic energetic-1 and energetic-2 finite verb forms are not accounted for in
our formal description of Modern Standard Arabic.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 373
2.2 Nouns
Features, at the morphological level assigned to elements of the category
noun, concern variables such as: person, gender and number.20 For the
description of nominal plural building, it is worthwhile to differentiate
between an external and internal formation. Besides person, gender and
number, the feature case is a pertinent part of the declension system,
in Modern Standard Arabic closely connected with the type of
declension.
For the description of a differentiation in base and derived stems for
deverbal nouns (active and passive participles, infinitives, nouns of
time, place, doing an action once, or referring to instruments used in an
occurrence), we use the feature derivation. By means of morphological
base rules, we describe the subset denominatives of the category noun,
such as: individuality nouns, multitude nouns, vessel nouns, relation
nouns, abstract quality nouns and diminutives.21
The feature variable determination with values as definite, indefinite
or morphologically neutral is another inherent or inherited (at syntax
level) characteristic of elements of the category noun. Elements of
the sub-classes demonstratives, personal pronouns, proper nouns, and
relative pronouns are inherently definite. Elements of the sub-classes
indefinite and interrogative pronouns definitely possess an inherent
indefinite value.
As far as the definite article is concerned, we follow Wrights inter-
pretation of the Arabic grammatical tradition in describing this article
on the basis of its deictic and not of its generic value as a sub-class of the
demonstratives.22 Furthermore, elements of the sub-classes adjectives,
common nouns, elatives, numerals, and quantifiers may, or may not,
receive a definite or an indefinite value depending on their function
and occurrence in phrases at syntax level. So we list the following
morphological feature rules for a noun:
CASE :: nominative; NOMINATIVE.23
DECLENSION :: invariable; diptote; triptote.
20
Since identical looking feature values are attached to distinct non-terminal names
(different category labels), we can reuse these feature names without any risk for unde-
sired ambiguities.
21
Cf. Wright 1974, 1:109177.
22
Cf. Wright 1974, 1:264270. See also Fleisch 1961, 1:339347.
23
The AGFL formalism allows for the use of logical markers such as +, -, and others
in combination with feature names and values.
374 everhard ditters
2.3 Particles
According to the traditional description24 of particles we may distinguish
between: adverbs, conjunctions, interjections, and prepositions.25 A formal
description should include:
PARTICLE TYPE :: ADVERB; CONJUNCTION;
INTERJECTION ; PREPOSITION.
2.3.1 Adverbs
A for us still useful sub-categorization of adverbs, at morphological level,
is that in invariable, as far as case marking is concerned, and bound and
free forms, as far as the orthographic representation is concerned.
ADVERB :: bound; free; invariable.
2.3.2 Conjunctions
As far as the coordinating particles are concerned, a distinction should
be made in cumulative and selective particles because of the importance
of number value in concord and agreement phenomena at syntax level.
We then divide the selective particles into: alternative, consecutive,
explicative, exclusive, inclusive, restrictive, and successive elements.26 This
sub-categorization will be extensively used at the next higher level of
description.
24
Cf. Wright, 1974, 1:282296.
25
CF. Badawi et al. 2004, 174219; Cantarino, 19745, 2:253 ff.; El-Ayoubi et al. 2003,
1:2, 275460.
26
Cf. Ditters 1992, 222228.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 375
2.3.3 Interjections
Elements of this sub-section of particles, rather close to discourse and
formalized language use, can, as far the morphological level is concerned,
be divided into vocatives and exclamations.27 However, we also have to
decide whether or not proverbs and frozen expressions should be
lodged among the interjections and labeled as adverbs or adverbials at
syntax level. In any case we also like to mention here the category of
formulaic greetings.28
INTERJECTION :: vocative; exclamation; f-expressions; proverbs;
greetings.
2.3.4 Prepositions
The standard differentiation of prepositions at this level is into a primary
and a secondary group. The secondary group consists of an open set of
noun-derived entries, marked for their function by means of a definite
accusative case value and, at syntax level, engaged in a construct state-like
link with the prepositional complement, itself marked with genitive case
value (NPgen). The primary group comprises a finite-set of non-derived
entries, some of which are, in their orthographic representation, directly
bound to the prepositional complement while others are unbound.29
PREPOSITION :: PRIMARY; secondary.
PRIMARY :: bound; unbound.
27
A still poorly described domain of frozen or set expressions like: greetings, insults,
proverbs and similar insertions should be included here. Cf. Bergman 2007, 136137.
28
Cf. Elzeiny 2007, 202207.
29
Cf. El-Ayoubi et al., 2003, I:2:574592.
376 everhard ditters
3. Syntax
30
As mentioned in 1, a particle phrase could be subdivided into a prepositional
phrase (PP), an adverbial phrase (ADVP), an interjectional phrase (IP), and (to remain
consistent) a conjunctive phrase (CP), or a complement clause (CCL).
31
Distinct concord and agreement phenomena mark a productive syntactic (and
semantic) distinction between a nominal and a verbal sentence type in MSA. Discourse
sensitive emphasis on the topic agent should be maintained, side by side with the pos-
sibility of emphasizing the action performance of, sometimes, the same agent in typical
VSO-oriented approaches. Cf. Ditters 2001, 3137.
32
The optional occurrence of a particle, like inna with an emphasizing semantic load
and governing its complement by an accusative case value, only represents an alternative
realization within the base structure.
33
An alternative topic realization is a CCL (complement clause), introduced by the
emphatic particle inna, governing the head of the following NP in the accusative case.
34
A sub-class of the nouns is constituted by different subsets of adjectives. We should
add the adjective phrase (ADJP) with a nominalized adjective in head position as pos-
sible alternative for a head or modifier function in the sentence.
35
For detailed structural descriptions of phrases in MSA, see Ditters 1992, chapters
III and IV, and for a formal description of sentence structures see Ditters forthcoming.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 377
In Figure 1a are listed the function slots within the sn, as well as the
categories able to fill these slots. One may easily see how many different
realizations of a nominal sentence are accounted for in this diagram
where alternatives are represented within square brackets and optional
elements within parentheses.
In Figure 1b are listed the function slots within the sv, as well as the
categories able to fill these slots. One may easily see how many different
realizations of a verbal sentence are accounted for in this diagram
By means of variables as predicate-subject match (psmatch) and topic-
comment match (tcmatch) we describe regular patterns in concord and
agreement between the elements involved in a sv or sn, checking at the
same time the matching of a verb-argument-1 relation as well as the
compatibility of the elements involved in a topic-comment occurrence. In
the same way we control the occurrence of other argument realizations
of a verbal entry by means of a predicate-object match (pomatch).
36
The AGFL-formalism allows for free sequence variation at any level of description (this
means for us: at function and category level) of entries within the formal description and
processing. Therefore we do not need to list all mathematically possible realizations.
37
An alternative realization in the form of a CCL filler in a topic slot, as recorded from
Classical Arabic data (Qurn 2:184): an tasm (topic) xayrun la-kum (comment),
is, for its poor frequency in modern text data, not accounted for in our formal descrip-
tion of the Sn.
38
We include this alternative realization to account for an absolute negator-head
combination in topic position (see below 3.2).
39
In our formal description of Modern Standard Arabic we also include under the
variable name CCL the protasis (the condition posed) in conditional and hypothetical
sentences.
378 everhard ditters
Fillers VP [ADVP]
[CCL]
[NPacc]
Figure 3 [PP]
40
Within the grammatical tradition grammarians spoke about: mutaaddin (transi-
tive) and ayr mutaaddin (intransitive), further differentiated into and complemented
with: maf l bi-hi (direct object), maf l mutlaq (absolute object), maf l f-hi (object of
time or place), maf l la-hu or li-ajli-hi (object of cause or reason), maf l maa-hu (con-
comitative object), hl (circumstantial object), tamyz (object of specification). Cf. Sba-
wayhis al-Kitb. Hrn, 1:3454, 297310, 367384; see also Fleisch 1968, 177185.
41
We mention briefly: incomplete verbs (al-af l an-nqisa), the verbs of hope (af l
ar-ra), the verbs of beginning (af l a-ur), the verbs of the heart (af l al-qulb),
the verbs of praise and blame (af l al-madh wa-d -d amm), the verbs of approxima-
tion (af l al-muqraba), and the verbs of esteem (af l at-tafdl). Cf. a.o.: Ayoub 1980;
Cuvalay 1994, 1996; see also Wright, 2:4752.
42
The negation of the perfect aspect by means of the particle lam followed by a finite
verb form in the jussive or the negation particle lan governing a finite verb form in the
subjunctive.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 379
43
Ditters 1992, 286 ff.
44
We prefer the term transitivity, with the values: intransitive, transitive, bi-transitive
and tri-transitive to the term valency or valence since the latter is less apt to determine
non-optional core meanings.
45
A complement clause (CCL) introduced by the particle an or anna.
46
In de form of an NPacc or an indefinite adjective phrase marked for accusative case
value (ADJPindef,acc).
47
With the variable name verbal-extension we describe, in our formal grammar, the
occurrence of co-referential verb clusters, sometimes called auxiliaries, such as: incom-
plete verbs (kna or laysa, to be(come) or not to be); inceptive verbs (badaa, to begin
and the like); continuity verbs (istamarra, to continue and the like); anticipation verbs
(kda, to be on the point and the like). Cf. Haak 2006, Badawi et al. 2004, 422 ff.
48
A prepositional complement clause (PCCL) introduced by a preposition followed
by the particle an or anna.
380 everhard ditters
Combined with an explicit agent in the form of a npnom, the finite verb
realization immobilizes into a 3rd person singular realization liable to
vary in gender value.
For monotransitive verbs with a direct object in the form of a npacc, in
arg-2 position, this argument will assume the arg-1 position in case of
a passive voice value of the verbal head. The same holds for bitransitive
or tritransitive verbs: the first npacc direct object will assume the arg-1
position in case of passive voice realization.
We may summarize the verbal complement structure in Modern
Standard Arabic in two tables. The first matches the features form,
function, and transitivity against the number of possible completive argu-
ments. Together with the semantic load of the verbal entry concerned,
we have the actors for the predicate-subject (psmatch) and the predicate
object matching (pomatch).
adopt, in the next section ( 3.1), Saads work (1982, 2026) in a Case
Grammar perspective for Classical Arabic.
Some of the features linked with a lexical verbal entry are listed
below:
AGREEMENT :: +human; human.
[PSMATCH :: ]49
[POMATCH :: ]
TRANSITIVITY :: intransitive; MONOTRANS; BITRANS;
TRITRANS.
MONOTRANS :: acc; prep.
BITRANS :: acc2; accprep; prep2.
TRITRANS :: acc3; acc2prep; accprep2; prep3.
49
These rules will be discussed later.
50
For example: a masdar in head function with a subjective complement in the slot
for postdeterminer (NPgen) and an objective complement in the slot for COMPL (NPacc),
both realizations in the form of a suffixed pronoun thus realizing a postdet and a
compl function: hubb--h = love-mine-her my love for her.
51
In Figure 3 we have included neg among the reciprocally exclusive function rea-
lizations. However, here we underline the incompatibility of a predet and a postdet
in a np. Cfr. the examples in Cantarino 1974, I:114; 1975, II:220222), Badawi et al.,
2004, 464466. El-Ayoubi et al. (20012003, I:12) do not mention a neg; neither in the
Vorfeld der Nominalgruppe, nor in the Nachfeld der Nominalgruppe.
382 everhard ditters
Only (de)verbal nouns (those marked with acc, or acc2 for transitivity) as
well as some nominalized adjectives in head-position may occur with a
compl.53 Other relationships and dependencies concerning definiteness,
person, gender, number, and case, will be discussed below.
3.2.1 Definiteness
Elements of the noun subsets proper nouns and personal pronouns have
the value definite for definiteness with consequences for post-modifying
elements at constituent and sentence level. Elements of the noun-subsets
indefinite pronouns and interrogative pronouns have the value indefinite.
Common nouns, (de)verbal nouns, and nominalized adjectives receive
their value for definiteness by the occurrence of a predet or a postdet
modifier.
3.2.2 Person
Only elements of the noun subset personal pronouns vary in their value
for person ranging from first, second to third, while varying in number
and case feature values. All elements of other noun subsets bear the fixed
value third for the feature person.
3.2.3 Gender
Occurrences of the subsets proper nouns, personal pronouns, and common
nouns possess a lexically given value for the feature gender, whether this
52
Ditters 1992, 163 ff.
53
For a more detailed discussion about adjectives in the context of the ellipsis of the
head of an NP and of nominalized adjectives see Ditters (forthcoming).
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 383
3.2.4 Number
The singular and plural realization of elements of the subsets proper
nouns, personal pronouns, and common nouns are given lexically. A
dual number value realization is normally the result of the application
of a grammar-rule except for the personal pronouns. Only infinitives or
masdars always have a singular number value. Apparent evidence to the
contrary is caused by the exploitation of masdars for the creation of an
abstract lexicon.
3.2.5 Case
Case is a syntax dependent application feature. Its values (nom, gen, and
acc) are related to the function the element concerned has at phrasal or
higher levels of linguistic description. A null-value for case, any other
ambiguity concerning diptotic np-head occurrences, and gender issues
for a first person realization have to be disambiguated beyond phrasal
and sentence levels of description.
3.2.6 Trash
Earlier we mentioned feature-clusters. In some of them nps are involved
(concord, agreement, ps-match, po-match, and tc-match). In this section
we discuss the occurrence of a noun in the head-position of a phrase at
syntax level. Feature values of such a noun should be capable to match
with elements occurring within the same constituent or with feature
values of heads of other constituents within a given context.
Summarizing some conclusions at this point, we list the following
formal rules connected with a lexical noun entry at syntax level:
384 everhard ditters
54
These rules will be discussed later.
55
The so-called TMA (tense, mood and aspect) auxiliary particles have been discussed
by Kinberg (2001). See also Eisele 2006.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 385
ADVP
56
Cf. El-Ayoubi et al. 2003, I:2, 275460, and 406. Badawi et al. 2004, 161174.
57
In the discussion about the NP we already mentioned the use of an accusative NP
(NPacc) for adverbial purposes.
58
Ditters 1992, 210 ff.
59
Cf. El-Ayoubi et al. 2004, I:2, 284 ff., and Wright 1974, I:282 ff.
386 everhard ditters
A good basis for a discussion about semantic features in the next section
certainly is the sub-categorization of prepositions into: time, place, and
ideal (or manner) features (Wright, 1974: II:129). With corpus based
evidence, forwarded by Cantarino (1974, II: 262 ff.) and El-Ayoubi
et al. (2004, I, 2:466 ff.) we are able to further differentiate this sub-
categorization of prepositions into features values:64
PREP :: IDEAL; PLACE; TIME.
IDEAL :: adversative; benefactive; causal; COINCIDING;
comparative; content; discourse; explicative; final;
HYPOTHETIC; instrumental; measure; modal;
partitive; possessive; specification; substitution.
COINCIDING :: comitative; simultaneous.
HYPOTHETIC :: concessive; conditional.
PLACE :: destination; direction; local; partitive; position.
TIME :: direction; partitive; temporal.
60
Cf. El-Ayoubi et al. 2004, I:2,574.
61
Cf. El-Ayoubi et al. 2004, I:2,584 ff.
62
Ditters 1992, 213 ff.
63
Not to confuse with the inflectional phrase as in the Government and Binding
approach (cf. Fassi Fehri 1993, 16 ff.).
64
See also Badawi et al. 2004, 167 ff.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 387
A few comments may make this scheme more transparent. The line
of slots tells us about the compulsory function of an ip head (i-head)
with an optional tail in case of a discontinuous realization like w-h,
be it for Modern Standard Arabic a bit archaic, as in wzaydh Woe
upon Zayd! (Badawi et al., 2004:37). It further mentions the optional
occurrence of a premodifier (prem) or a complement (i-compl) of
the i-head. In the filler-section alternative realizations are listed, also
comprising a possible sv-sadv combination as man yaqtul yuqtal Who
kills will die killed. For this reason we included the term clause in the
heading of this subsection.
65
Cf. Firanescu 2007, 7981.
66
Cf. Bergman 2007, II:136137.
388 everhard ditters
3.3.4.1 Coordination
The compulsory head-function in the cp is realized by an element of
the subset coordinators of the conjunctions. An example of an optional
premodifier would be the narrative connector wa preceeding the
adversative coordinator lkin but (Badawi et al., 2004:555). The com-
pulsory complement function may be realized by a variety of alterna-
tives (Figure 7).
CP
3.3.4.2 Subordination
The compulsory head function in a complement clause is realized by
an element of the subset subordinators, which may contain a null value,
for example, in caseof the occurrence of a purposive li followed by a
verb with a subjunctive mood value. In our formal grammar of Modern
Standard Arabic, the compulsory complement function may vary
between a sn and a sv.
67
The conjunctive head may be empty is case of asyndetic coordination (Badawi
et al. 2004, 539 ff.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 389
The variables and features we like to retain for the conjunctive phrase or
clause are:
CONJUNCTION :: COORDINATING ; SUBORDINATING.
COORDINATING :: cumulative; SELECTIVE.
SELECTIVE :: adversative; alternative; consecutive;
disjunctive; exclusive; explicative; inclusive;
restrictive; successive.
SUBORDINATING :: circumstantial; consequential; SINGLE-
CLAUSE; DOUBLE-CLAUSE.
SINGLE-CLAUSE :: comparative; complemental; purposive;
locative; temporal.
DOUBLE-CLAUSE :: CONDITIONAL; temporal.
CONDITIONAL :: possible; real; unreal.
4. Semantics
68
In that case we can speak of a prepositional complement clause (PCCL).
69
We refer to the general domains of machine translation and information retrieval,
still using the basics on static semantics of Yngve (1966). See also Koster (2004).
390 everhard ditters
TABLE 3
Levels Features
morphology morphological
morpho-syntactic
syntax syntactical
syntactico-semantic
semantics0 semantical0
static-semantical
semantics1 semantical1
dynamic-semantical
semantics 2 semantical2
etc.
70
The fine-tuning of this matching occurs in the cyclic process of testing the descrip-
tion on new text data. Moreover, this matching produces optimal results when unifica-
tion provides contextual information. A sequence as min tahtihi remains ambiguous as
long as the anaphor hi is not disambiguated in context.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 391
4.1 Verbs
In our formal description of Modern Standard Arabic for automated
analysis purposes, individual lexical verbal elements have to provide
information about:
4.1.1 Transitivity
Within the framework of the diinar-project72 verbal entries have been
compiled according to the number and the syntactic realization of their
arguments. In this way the verbal lexicon is first split up in intransitive and
transitive verbs. The transitive verbs are then further divided into: mono-,
bi- or tri-transitive verbs. Finally, these verbal entries can be divided
into sub-categories governing a direct object(s) (npacc or ccl), and/or a
prepositional object (pp or pccl). A further differentiation concerns the
lexical realization of the preposition (ppli, ppmin, ppan etc.).
What is still missing in this approach is the semantic dimension as,
for instance, Levin (1993) did for English.73 She compiled 49 verb classes
with sub-categories. The members of each sub-class share the general
meaning of the class as well as a number of syntactic characteristics. So,
the members of the sub-class 10.2 of banish verbs (Levin 1993, 123):74
71
Cf. Hoogland 1993; El-Gemei 2006, 434439.
72
Information about the DIINAR lexical database can be found at: http://catalog.
elra.info. Information about DIINAR-MBC can be found at: http://sites.unin-lyon2.fr/
langues_promodiinar/accueil.htm.
73
See also Levin & Rappaport Hovav 1996.
74
These members are: banish, deport, evacuate, expel, extradite, recall, and remove.
392 everhard ditters
TABLE 4
arg-4 arg-3.2 arg-3.1 arg-2 arg-1 entry
manner destination source object agent
75
A vertical bar | here denotes alternatives in subscript variables and features.
76
The feature alternatives loc and pos comprise a physical location as well as a social
function.
77
An optional explicit agent has the same feature values as the implied agent
78
The object of this entry is typically realized by the collective nouns army, troops
or alternatives.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 393
4.1.2 Collocation
At this point we question the way of featuring specific verbal head-advp,
verbal head-np, and verbal head-pp combinations resulting in a, for the
combination, specific semantic value. The problem is that the matching
of the individual feature values of the elements involved does not neces-
sarily point to the semantic value of the combination. A cheap solution
will be to list this kind of combinations as they are in the lexicon.
79
The row abbreviation has been inserted to introduce names of variables within
a representation of the complement structure of verbal complement structure in case
frame terms.
80
We prefer to differentiate between a +human object (= patient) and a human
object.
394 everhard ditters
TABLE 5A (cont.)
arguments 1 2 3 4 5 6
81
Saads (1982, p. 20) suggestion for an alternative realization form (animate) to
describe astronomical bodies and semi-autonomous machines, gets a more elegant
foundation in Dichy (2005).
82
A vertical bar | here denotes alternatives at form level.
83
The co-referentiability between an Agent and more than a single other case role
remains to be studied.
84
An implicit subject of a finite verb form is always present or is neutralized and
overruled by an explicit agent.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 395
85
Abdul-Roaf only lists 8 case roles and does not employ the term Patient. Therefore
396 everhard ditters
4.2 Nouns
At the end of the introduction we stated that the formalism for automated
processing is suited for describing morphological and syntactic struc-
ture, as well as finite semantics in terms of animate, concrete,
human, volition and many other. At the morphological and syntactic
level we already discussed a number of features attached to elements
of the category noun. Besides that, the differentiation of relevant
prepositional features in time, place, and ideal presupposes a matching
with corresponding features attached to the head of a prepositional
complement, in casu a noun. The question is: how to make an inventory
of the minimum number of required semantic noun features, and how
to set up the organization of this inventory.
A frequently used approach consists in the drafting of a conceptual
semantic tree. Hartmann (1974, 169) used Moravcsiks (1970) conceptual
tree starting with the node countable for her Transformational Gene-
rative Grammar of Arabic. Muhtaseb (1988, 65 ff.) developed (far too)
detailed conceptual trees describing the subject and action hierarchy for
his Natural Language Understanding System (NALUS). More recently,
Dichy (2005) proposed a conceptual tree of three layers starting with
concrete, using two other basic features: animate and human. This
tree generates the lexical categories: person, animal, perceptible
entity, and idea or non-physical experience. By a transfer of some
features, characteristic for +animate and +human entities, to animate
and human entities by assignment of specific values as intention,
+volition, or +motion, Dichy also generates the derived categories:
it is not yet clear how to harmonize his co-referential pairs Agent = Object (Ai=POi) and
Agent = Experiencer (Ai=Ei) with the set of 12 case roles of Saad.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 397
4.3 Particles
Concerning the vocatives we would like to discriminate at the semantic
level between occurrences related to +human and +animate, and human
entities. We prefer to further differentiate the exclamations into sub-
categories expressing: agreement, commands, dissent, enthusiasm, sorrow,
surprise, presentations, and quantitatives.
For our purposes it is meaningful to divide the group of adverbs by
means of a variable advtype into elements expressing: manner, place,
86
If an explicit agent (arg-1) is marked for +human, there is full gender matching
between predicate and subject, otherwise (if human), there is partial gender matching,
i.e. the verbal entry matches gender values with a subject marked for singular or dual
number, but it receives feminine gender value with plural subjects.
87
A NPnom,+human in the topic position of a Sn triggers full gender and number matching
with elements, liable for such a matching, in comment position.
88
In the case of a NPacc patient or object of a finite verb form marked for passive
voice.
89
In the case of a ADJPnom, NPnom or VP occurrence in comment position.
398 everhard ditters
5. Conclusion
90
We are here dealing with the interrogative adverbs hal and a marking Yes-No
questions.
91
A number of refinements to this description has been effectuated on the basis of
El-Ayoubi et al. 2003, 275460.
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 399
FIGURE 9
concrete +
animated +
human +
adult +
male +
determinated +
6. References
Abdul-Raof, Hussein. 2006. Case Roles. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. EALL, vol. 1,
343347.
Ayoub, Georgine. 1980. Af lu l-qulb en arabe standard: lments pour une analyse.
In Bohas, Georges, ed. tudes Arabes: Analyses Thories. 1980, 1, 154.
Badawi, Elsaid, Michael Carter and Adrian Gully. 2004. Modern Written Arabic: A
Comprehensive Grammar. London and New York: Routledge.
Bahloul, Maher. 2006. Agreement. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. EALL, vol. 1, 4348.
. 2006. Copula. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. EALL, vol. 1, 506511.
Bergman, Elizabeth. 2007. Frozen Expressions. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. EALL,
vol. 2, 136137.
Bohas, Georges and Abderrahim Saguer. 2007. The Explanation of Homonymy in the
Lexicon of Arabic. In Ditters, Everhard and Harald Motzki, eds. Approaches to Arabic
Linguistics Presented to Kees Versteegh on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday. Leiden:
E.J. Brill, 255289.
Cohen, David. 1970. Essai dune analyse automatique de larabe. In Cohen, David, ed.
tudes de linguistique smitique et arabe. The Hague: Mouton, 4978.
Cuvalay, Martine. 1994. Auxiliary Verbs in Arabic. In Elisabeth Engberg-Pedersen,
Lisbeth Falster Jakobsen, and Lone Schack Rasmussen, eds. Function and Expression
in Functional Grammar. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 265283.
Cuvalay-Haak, Martine. 1996. The Arabic Verb: A Functional Grammar Approach to
Verbal Expression in Classical and Modern Arabic. PhD-thesis. Amsterdam: University
of Amsterdam.
Dichy, Joseph. 2005. Spcificateurs engendrs par les traits [anim], [humain],
[concret] et structures darguments en arabe et en franais. In Bjoint, Henri and
Franois Maniez, eds. De la msure dans les termes. Hommage Philippe Thoiron.
Travaux CRTT, Lyon: Presses Universitaires de Lyon, 151181.
Ditters, Everhard. 1992. A Formal Approach to Arabic Syntax: the Noun Phrase and the
Verb Phrase. PhD thesis Nijmegen University. Nijmegen: Luxor.
. 2001. A Formal Grammar for the Description of Sentence Structure in Modern
Standard Arabic. In Kaufman, Morgan, ed. Workshop Proceedings: Arabic Language
Processing: Status and Prospects, CRNSUniversit des Sciences Sociales Toulouse,
France, 3137.
. 2003a. Non-coinciding Phrasal Heads. In Chu, Hsing-Wei, Jos Ferrer, Tran
Nguyen, and Yuongquan Yu, eds. Proceedings of the Joint International Conference
featuring as a disambiguation tool in arabic nlp 401
Mushira Eid
University of Utah
1. Introduction
* An earlier version of this paper was presented at the Center for the Advanced Study
of Language (CASL), University of Maryland, College Park, June 1, 2006.
1
Personal letters, for example, may be written in dialectal Arabic. In Egypt, cer-
tain literary genres are also written in Egyptian Arabic including plays, poetry, and a
few biographies (Awad 1965; El Assal 20022003). There is also one novel written in
Egyptian (Musharrafa n.d.). The practice of including some form of dialect in literature
mixed with fush is a relatively common practice, particularly when it involves dialogue
(Cachia 1990, 5975, chapter four The use of colloquial in modern Arabic literature;
Eid 2002).
404 mushira eid
tion and is also spoken in some formal contexts ( fush lit: eloquent,
literary/standard). The two varieties differ in linguistic form, manner
of acquisition, function or use, and social meaning/value. The definition
of diglossia as it was first presented by Ferguson (1959) is given in (1).
1. Diglossia is a relatively stable language situation in which, in
addition to the primary dialects of the language (which may include
a standard or regional standards), there is a very divergent, highly
codified (often grammatically more complex) superposed variety,
the vehicle of a large and respected body of written literature, either of
an earlier period or in another speech community, which is learned
largely by formal education and is used for most written and formal
spoken purposes but is not used by any sector of the community for
ordinary conversation (Ferguson 1959, Word 15:336).
The definition in (1) presupposes a relationship based on separation,
both linguistic and cultural, of the two varieties fush and dialect. It also
reflects the official discourse and predominant attitudes toward them.
Because of its being the language of divinity and heritage in Islam, the
fush is considered the language of high culture and prestige whereas
the dialects are local, highly divergent, and often not mutually intelli-
gible, at least at the outset. Fush is also considered a unifying force, the
pan-Arab national language, in the words of Shawqi Daif (2001) luat
ub al-umma jamcan the language of all the peoples of the [Arab]
nation, whereas the dialects represent the daily language of a single peo-
ple . . . understood only by its people hence divisive. (Quoted in Bous-
sofara-Omar 2006, 108; see also Haeri 2003 for further discussion.)
Social, political, educational, and technological changes in the 20th
century have brought about change in the relationship between the two
varieties, particularly in their contexts of use, their market value, and
their social meaning. Accessibility to fush increased, for example, due
to changes in the educational system. In Egypt the availability of free
public education through high school and higher education increased
the number of people who can use both varieties. Contexts in which
fush is used increased as well, the broadcasting media as a spoken con-
text for fush being one.2 As a result, the media serves as a liberating
force: by providing contexts that are not restricted to one variety, the
2
The media are often criticized for allowing the dialects to creep into domains origi-
nally reserved for fush . Such intrusions will eventually dismantle the ties that bond
the peoples of the umma [Arab nation] (Shawqi Daif 2001, cited in Boussofara-Omar
(2006) op. cit.). The broadcasting media, however, are not a domain originally reserved
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 405
for fush . The statement must therefore be applicable to Arabic in the written media,
e.g. newspapers.
3
Eid (2004) shows that interviews and panel discussions from al-Jazeera are at times
conducted completely in fush , but they may include dialectal features depending on
speaker, topic, and degree of interaction. The programs analyzed, however, were limited
to different forms of political discourse.
406 mushira eid
4
Following the transcription requirements for this volume, long vowels are repre-
sented as single segments / /. For reasons that have to do with syllable weight and
identification of minimal word, to be explained below, these should be understood as
sequences of two identical vowels /aa ee ii uu oo/.
5
The opposite, however, is not true. Not all words with sibilants, for example, in
Egyptian have a corresponding interdental fricative in fush ; some words may have a
sibilant in both, e.g., fush : sam sky and Egyptian sama.
408 mushira eid
Finally, lexical differences between the two varieties come from dif-
ferent sources. The examples in Table 1 illustrate two of such areas.
Some differences are the result of word usage, the association of a mean-
ing with two different lexical items, one considered fush usage and the
other Egyptian as, for example, anf and manaxr nose. Other differ-
ences are phonologically-related as, for example, the difference between
indi and andi I have. Because fush and Egyptian are varieties of the
same language, it is expected that an overwhelming majority of lexi-
cal items would be shared. Table 1 provides examples of words that are
identical in both varieties, e.g. kitb book and fannn artist. I refer to
such words as ambiguous or unspecified to mean non-distinct, or not
specified, as to language variety. I use the term both for words that
include features from both varieties, i.e. hybrid forms.
1.2 Hybridity
A hybrid is something that is mixed, and hybridity is simply the mix-
ture. The term has its origin in biology.6 In linguistics it refers to a word
parts of which come from two different languages. The term has become
central to major theoretical discussions among the discourses of race,
post-colonialism, identity, multiculturalism, and globalization. In theo-
ries of cultural studies, it is understood as recognition of two identities
or a mixture of identities but also as a refutation of assimilation into
a dominant culture. Bakhtin, for example, defines hybridity [hybridiza-
tion] as a mixture of two social languages within the limits of a single
utterance, an encounter, within the arena of an utterance, between two
different linguistic consciousnesses, separated from one another by an
epoch, by social differentiation, or by some other factor (1981, 358). The
term has also been used in relation to mixed language varieties that
result from code-switching among bilinguals (Hinnenkamp 2003).
In Arabic hybrid or intermediate forms, as they are sometimes called,
include features from both varieties fush and dialect and, therefore,
they cannot be clearly identified as belonging to one or the other.7
Table 2 illustrates Arabic hybrid forms with examples selected from the
6
It comes from the Latin: hybrida, a term used to classify the offspring of a tame sow
and a wild boar.
7
See Schulz (1981, 8789) for a discussion of hybridity versus mistakes.
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 409
2. Styles
8
Alternatively, sibilant pronunciation may be considered ambiguous, or shared by
both varieties. The high frequency of sibilant pronunciation in fush contexts, e.g. read-
ing, speeches, and recitation of literary texts, supports this view. This pronunciation is
not permitted in recitations of the Quran, however.
9
Labov has a fourth style D: word lists, which is relevant as an elicitation technique
but not applicable to natural conversations as represented in these programs.
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 411
Segment 2 read by Fouad Duwara in the Haqqi program has a few more
ambiguous lexical items; more importantly, however, is the Egyptian
pronunciation of the years 1962 and 1970. This is common in readings,
for example, of the news and on-the-air commentaries as is the case of
this reader, who is also reading on-the-air. Otherwise, fush is main-
tained throughout in vowel patterns, e.g. h wal not Egyptian h wil, and
other pronunciation differences.
Segments 35 are samples from Haqqis speech. The first, segment 3, has
all the characteristics of a reading style, although Haqqi was not read-
ing. The segment has all the features characteristic of fush including
case markers, vowel patterns, etc. and no features of Egyptian. It also
includes only a few words (6 total) unspecified for variety ( fann art, sir
struggle, maa with, zaman time, bir transient, and xlid immortal).
Art for me [is] a dramatic moment. I say that art [is] a struggle with
time, that it wants to capture the transient to preserve it, a struggle with
death. And despite this when [when] you stand in front of a painting
you feel that this transient, this immortal that you immortalized, is only
transient.
negative ma- in malh, the word wayyit, and the pattern in baladna,
not baladina the expected fush pronunciation.
The segment also includes a relatively large number of words unspec-
ified for variety (27), almost equal to those specified for fush (26), and
a minimal (6) specified for Egyptian. This segment also includes the
hybrid form /bataammal/, reflecting and perhaps also constructing the
Egyptian and day-to-day context of the discourse. 10
10
The hybrid form bataammal in this segment and yumassilu in segment 5 are
excluded from the count in each case for the obvious reason: each has features of both
varieties.
414 mushira eid
The speech samples from Haqqi demonstrate that in this speech style
features from Egyptian are consistently much lower in frequency than
those from fush as well as those unspecified for variety. One sample
(segment 3) has no features of Egyptian and includes almost all the
characteristics of a reading style.
What, one might ask, would explain such differences? Topic is a very
likely explanation. In segment 4 with the most fush , Haqqi speaks
about art and what it means to him: a topic that lends itself to fush but
more importantly, a topic he has written and lectured about through-
out his long career.11 In segments 5 and 6 the topic shifts to relatively
more personal topics and situations: his hobbies and his experiences as
a government official, respectively. The style shifts accordingly. The last
segment includes the most dialectal features, perhaps because it is also
the one most related to everyday events and behaviors as a result of his
comments on government employees. This is not to say that it is neces-
sary that Egyptian be used in this case. Other segments in the program
show Haqqi not resorting to Egyptian under similar circumstances. In
fact, these two segments are the only ones in his speech sample that
include any features of Egyptian.
11
In an earlier segment Haqqi talks about the short story and the essay, stressing that
the purpose of the former is to entertain the reader (imt giving pleasure to) and the
latter is to inform (ilm) the reader.
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 415
are specified for fush .12 She receives a one-word answer in Egyptian,
which she follows up with a question in clearly marked Egyptian syntax,
indicated by the WH-question word h what, and unmarked lexi-
cal items: kn and in-natga. Her question generates another collaged
response from A. Mansour, a response that is predominantly Egyptian
(16), minimally fush (2), with unmarked items in between (7).
12
The fush in her first question (segment 6) is the result of a quoted proverbial
statement.
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 417
13
Since Schmidt (1974) very few studies, if any, have addressed the role of the lexicon
in Arabic mixed varieties and problems in the identification of lexical items by variety.
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 419
Phonological
q~ 70 4 20 61
t ~ t ~ s 4 20 3 16
d / d ~ d / d ~ z/z 29 21 2 30
diphthong ~ long vowel 20 3 2 10
TOTALS 123 48 27 117
72% 28% 19% 81%
Syntactic
Relative markers 9 1 0 10
Demonstratives 12 0 4 15
Negatives 6 1 10 20
Complementizer 20 0 5 13
TOTALS 47 2 19 58
96% 4% 25% 75%
Morphological
Passive (u-i, u-a ~ it-) 13 0 9 6
Stem IV: a-fal pattern 13 0 7 9
TOTALS 26 0 16 15
100% 0% 52% 48%
OVERALL TOTALS 196 50 62 181
80% 20% 26% 74%
100
80
60
40
20
0
Egyptian Fush Egyptian Fush
Pronology 28 72 81 19
Syntax 4 96 75 25
Morphology 0 100 48 52
Haqqi Mansour
14
The analysis of hybrid words in the speech samples of Haqqi and Mansour has not
been completed.
15
I adopt McCarthys and Princes (1990) definition of a minimal word in Arabic as
consisting of at least two moras.
422 mushira eid
smaller but sizeable percentage (14%) marked as fush . The major dif-
ference between the two styles is the proportion of the lexicon allot-
ted to the predominant variety by comparison to the unspecified lexical
items and to those marked for the non-dominant variety. In Mansours
style the discrepancy between the dominant and non-dominant variety
is not as marked, partly because the contribution from the unspecified
component of the lexicon is stronger than it is in Haqqis style (41% to
23%, respectively). And while the proportion of lexical items from the
dominant and non-dominant is higher in both styles, the difference is
much larger in Haqqis sample than it is in Mansours, 74% to 3% in the
former and 45% to 14% in the latter. A graphic representation of these
results is provided in Figure 2.
The graphic view in Figure 2 suggests a relatively more balanced
distribution in Mansours style than in Haqqis. The graph represent-
ing Haqqis style looks as though one component is suppressed (Egyp-
tian), another is allowed some presence (the unspecified), but the third
is asserted as an overpowering presence ( fush ). In Mansours there is
not one single category that is overpowering, but there is one ( fush )
less represented than the othersan unequal participant perhaps.
The graphic view also suggests that the linguistic boundaries are more
clearly defined in Haqqis style than they are in Mansours. For Haqqi
the domain is no doubt fush ; Egyptian may creep in only slightly, if
necessary. For Mansour, the domain is more inclusive.
The ambiguous, or unspecified, lexicon serves to mediate the differ-
ence between the two varieties. It creates a shared, or an in-between
space, consistent with the two distinct codes. In doing so, it contributes
to this linguistic collage by allowing smooth transitions from one code
to the other, thereby blurring the distinction between the two. Hybrid
forms, I would add, serve a similar purpose: they can be heard and
interpreted as one, the other, or both varieties. The result is a style that
does not sound too colloquial (dialectal) or too literate ( fush )a
balancing act that allows each speaker to accommodate the situation
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 423
60
40
20
0
Haqqi Mansour
Egyptian 3 45
Fusha 74 14
Both 23 41
and create personas and identities that are sufficiently separate yet simi-
lar enough to be still viewed as one.
The question remains as to why these two speakers, both highly edu-
cated, intellectuals and writers, would choose styles so different from
each other in what appears to be very similar context: one conform-
ing to a great extent to the predominant (official) discourse of separa-
tion ( fush for public, formal contexts) and the other nonconforming
through its extensive use of Egyptian. The answer to this question
requires a more detailed analysis of the interviews themselves includ-
ing contexts and topics of conversation as well as speakers purpose in
communication.
3. The Interviews
follow certain rules, usually set ahead of time, regarding procedure and
at times topic as well. An interview on radio or television is in addition a
public performance intended to create the semblance of a conversation
whose purpose is to convey information to the audiences and to enter-
tain them as well. The ultimate success or failure of such an interview
depends on how the performance is staged and how participants interact.
In this section I describe the two interviews selected for this study
in terms of three components that define an interview: set-up, infor-
mation, and interaction. I relate these aspects of the interviews to the
styles identified above and to speakers linguistic choices and purpose in
communication.
3.1.1 Set-up
Both interviews take place on-location outside the studio in the homes
of the interviewees. In the Mansour program, the interview is conducted
outdoors by the swimming pool with the interviewer and interviewee
seated across a small table. In the Haqqi program, the interview takes
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 425
place inside his home. Some scenes are shot in his study, others in his
living room, around the dining room table, or in the entry hall.
3.1.2 Format
The Mansour interview adopts a question-answer format and is hosted
by Sanaa Mansour, an experienced interviewer and host of numer-
ous programs on the ESC including Good Morning, Egypt.16 In the
Mansour program she performs the interviewer role, asking the ques-
tions and directing the flow of conversation through topic introduction,
follow-up, commentary, and interruption where necessary. From this
perspective, the format of this interview is the conventional interview-
er-interviewee. But it actually is far from being so, as will be shown
below.
In the Haqqi program there is no interviewer on the screen. The
questions are not aired, only responses and comments. The program
also includes other participants: Haqqis daughter Nuha, his French wife,
and two of his colleagues, Fouad Duwara and Mohammad Rumeish; the
former is a critic and the latter a writer, as per information projected on
the screen. Both are friends and colleagues who had worked with Haqqi
during his term as editor of al-Magalla.
Despite the difference in format (one-to-one vs. multiple participa-
tion), one participant in each program performs the role of commenta-
tor and topic introducer. In the Mansour program this role is performed
by the interviewer, Sanaa Mansour, and in the Haqqi program by his
colleague, Fouad Duwara. In performing these roles they read short seg-
ments, thus illustrating the non-conversational reading style.
3.1.3 Textuality
Both programs rely on the visual, for entertainment and for reinforce-
ment of information. Images related to the topics under discussion are
often projected on the screen during the conversations. In the Haqqi
program, for example, close ups of paintings appear as Haqqi talks
about gifts he received during his visit to China as director of an Egyp-
tian film festival and about the significance of animals in Chinese art as
illustrated in the paintings. Likewise, pictures of the movie stars Fatin
16
To my knowledge, interviewer and interviewee are not related despite the same
last name.
426 mushira eid
Hamama and Omar Sharif are projected on the screen as Haqqi talks
about Fatin Hamamas popularity among Muslims in China. Pictures of
Yehya Haqqi himself, sometimes a younger Haqqi, also appear on the
screen showing him standing by a car in Paris, for example, as Rumeish
narrates a story about Haqqis trip to Paris to undergo a surgery.
In the Mansour interview, pictures of his books are projected on
the screen when a specific book is mentioned as happened with h awla
l-lam fi 200 yawm (Around the World in 200 Days); likewise images
of newspaper articles or quotes appear on the screen when mentioned
in the conversation. Each segment begins with scenes illustrating the
topic to be discussed with the interviewers voice-over introducing the
segment. To introduce the last segment on the intellectuals and the cafs
they frequented, for example, scenes of Cairo streets with various shops
were shown during the introduction. Later in this segment, scenes of
the Brazilian coffee shop, A. Mansours favorite, were shown when the
interviewer mentioned it in her questions. Pictures of Kamel El Shenawi,
Taha Hussein, Tawfiq al-Hakim, and Abbas al-Aqqad also appear at dif-
ferent points during the program as their names are mentioned.
This interweaving of materials from different text typesvisual, musi-
cal, writtenmakes both interviews multi-textual. It serves to create a
collage bringing into the main text of the interview other sub-texts and
sub-effects that contribute to the voice or voices represented in each
interview and ultimately influence the style speakers choose to adopt
when speaking in their voice and the voices of others.
3.1.4 Topics
Both interviews can be described as reminiscences, reflections on the
lives and times of these two professionals. Consequently the topics in
both interviews revolve around the personal and the professional.
In the 35 minutes available from the Mansour interview the discus-
sion is divided into four distinct segments. The first segment is personal
dealing with his views on such matters as having children and the nega-
tive stance he has taken towards women. The second revolves around
his life experiences as a journalist/writer, including reflections on his
relationship with leading intellectuals of his time (Kamel El Shenawi,
Taha Hussein, Abbas al-Aqqad, and Tawfiq al-Hakim). The third is
focused on his hectic (perhaps antagonistic) relationship with Abbas
al-Aqqad, and the fourth on cafs frequented by various intellectuals
including himself, a phenomenon the interviewer refers to as taqfat
a-ri (Street Culture).
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 427
3.1.5 Voice
A major difference between the two interviews involves the issue of
voice: who speaks about what and in whose voice. Despite the differ-
ence in set up noted above, the two interviews are multi-voiced, but in
17
Duwara is included here although his speech style, other than reading, is not dis-
cussed in this article.
428 mushira eid
different ways. We hear Haqqi and Mansour speak in their voice, both
physically and metaphorically. They speak primarily in the I, not the
we, since neither is there to represent a group or organizational identity.
Mansour tends to represent others more so than Haqqi. When he speaks
in the name of the young generation of writers of his time, for example,
he speaks in the we. Haqqi brings in other fush voices by remembering
lines of classical Arabic poetry, for example, and reciting them for the
audience on the screen.
The one-to-one set up in the Mansour interview makes him the only
speaker, the interviewer being the other. Through these two speakers, we
hear other voices as well. The interviewer Sanaa Mansour speaks in her
own voice when, for example, she expresses an opinion, makes a com-
ment, or asks a question. But she also brings into the interview Man-
sours voice from the past by quoting his public pronouncements and
published views, at times challenging and questioning them, at other
times allowing him to elaborate and narrate. In so doing, she merges
the past and the present thereby adding to the multi-textual collage of
this program a time-based dimension. Although Anis Mansour speaks
in his voice, he brings in the voices of others through his narration. In
the story-telling segments of the interview, for example, he quotes and
reports the speech of others; we hear them but only through Mansours
voice and his perspective.
Through the multi-person set up in the Haqqi program, we hear and
see four other people, in addition to Haqqi, speak about his life and his
accomplishments. Haqqis comments, however, are limited to Haqqi the
professional: his views on the arts and his track record as an editor and
government official. This public persona is reinforced by his two col-
leagues, who provide their perspectives on Haqqi as a public figure, a
colleague, and a friend in the profession. Projections of Haqqis private
persona are left to his wife and daughter. As a result, the program as a
whole maintains the boundaries between the two personas: they remain
mostly separate as they come in different voices. Perhaps because of this
separation, segments dealing with the personal/private in this interview
are interspersed with those dealing with the professional/public allowing
the two to merge into one unified whole through program production.
by the main figure in each of these programs are very different. This dif-
ference is communicated through the speakers voice, i.e., the language
that expresses the persona. The style differentiation described above can
be viewed as representations of speakers voices. In this section I discuss
in relatively more detail the persona being created in the interviews,
relating it to topic, speakers voices, and the interview as a whole.
The Haqqi interview maintains the boundaries between the per-
sonal and the professional and, perhaps as a result, between fush and
Egyptian. The set-up and production of the program helps maintain
the boundaries by assigning participants in the program different roles
in the construction of Haqqis overall Persona. Haqqi himself addresses
only the professional, either as his own choice or as that of the producer;
his fush -based speech style reflects this choice. Others interviewed in
the program speak to the personal as, for example, his daughter Nuha,
or to both the personal and professional as does his colleague Meleish;
their styles vary accordingly and appear to be closer to Mansours than
they are to Haqqis.
The focus on the professional with Haqqi allows him to express
his views on literature, art, and literary criticism and to reflect on his
accomplishments in the public sphere as an intellectual, a government
official, and editor of a literary journal. He expresses his views on the
short story, for example, as an art form whose primary purpose is to
entertain, or give pleasure to, the reader (imt al-qri) as opposed to
the essay whose purpose is to inform (ilm). The voice we hear is Haqqis
throughout: his views on art, broadly defined to include literature, fine
arts, and performance arts, recollections of his three years administra-
tive experiences as Director of the Arts Department in the Ministry of
Culture, and his role as editor of al-Magalla. His voice is complemented,
and at times reinforced, by other participants. Haqqis reflections on his
role as editor of al-Magalla (that he made lots of friends through this
job) are picked up in both Rumeish and Duwaras comments. They talk,
for example, about Haqqi as being dedicated to his work and supportive
of other writers. Rumeish recalls his first meeting with Haqqi to submit
for publication his first short story, while Duwara comments on Haqqis
dedication as a journal editor and his travels to solicit manuscripts for
the journal.
On the personal, or private, domain Haqqi briefly mentions his
hobby of collecting canes from all over the world. He describes, and
shows the audience, a few of his favorite canes and explains how his
choice is often determined by his mood. His conclusion to this segment
430 mushira eid
relates the practice of using canes to the public domain, explaining how
it used to be a practice among ministers and politicians but is now a
thing of the past. All other aspects of his private persona are left for
others to project. His daugther, Nuha, speaks of Haqqi as a father and a
professional, merging the two identities a little. She gives the audience a
glimpse of Haqqi the writer and the public speaker through her eyes as
his daugther. She describes his eloquence as a speaker and the ease with
which words come out of his mouth when he speaks; but apparently
they dont come as easy when he writes. Nuha describes how more diffi-
cult and time-consuming writing is for him, comparing the writing pro-
cess to a complicated child birth (wilda mutaassira). She projects him
as a kind and nurturing father, describing their promenades in Maadi,
where he would urge her to observe the beauty in nature and to listen
to the birds, and their walks in Paris, where they would frequent art
museums. She contrasts his perspective of himself versus her perspec-
tive of him. While Haqqi says he is old at 80, she sees him as a young
man (b) still, more knowledgeable than anyone in her generation. A
more detailed description of his private life is left to his French wife to
construct for the audience. She speaks in French with a voice over in
Arabic, thus adding one more voice to the many voices in the program.
His wife describes their life together, their walks in Maadi and in Paris,
their visits to museums, and his eating habits (eats very little). As these
life events are narrated, we see the two of them at times sitting at the
dinner table, other times in their living room or in his study, and at
times joined by their daughter. His colleague Rumeish provides a com-
bined personal-professional account, for example, in his narration of
how Haqqi cancelled plans for surgery in Paris to return via Libya to be
with the Egyptian people during the 1967 war.
In the Haqqi program, then, the boundaries between personal
and professional identities are maintained as a result of participants
(assigned) roles in this overall construction of Haqqis identities. This
allows Haqqi to speak in his fush -based style and maintain the public
image he has created for himself throughout his career, a supporter of
the fush and its heritage. From this perspective the Mansour interview
is very different.
The Mansour program, unlike Haqqis, does not separate the profes-
sional and the personal. The boundaries between them are fuzzy, or
blurred, making the two identities appear merged into one entity, a col-
lage of the personal and the professional created primarily by Mansour
himself with the help of the interviewer. Since this program is set up
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 431
The analysis presented in this article suggests that the media provides
a hybrid context whose purpose is to inform and entertain. Using the
arabic on the media: hybridity and styles 433
5. References
Awad, Luws. 1965. Mudakkirt tlib bita (Memoirs of a Student on a Study Abroad
Mission). Cairo: Muassasat Rz al-Ysuf.
Bakhtin, M.M. 1981. The Dialogic Imagination. Texas: University of Texas Press.
Bassiouney, Reem. 2006. Functions of Code Switching in Egypt. Evidence from mono-
logues. Leiden and Boston: Brill Academic Publishers.
Boussofara-Omar, Naima. 2006a. Diglossia. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. Encyclopedia
of Arabic Language and Linguistics, vol. 1, 629637.
. 2006b. Neither Third Language nor Middle Varieties but Arabic Diglossic Switch-
ing. Zeitschrift fr Arabische Linguistik/Journal of Arabic Linguistics 45:5580.
. 2004. Diglossia as Zones of Contact in the Media. Al-Arabiyya 37:101130.
Cachia, Pierre. 1990. An Overview of Modern Arabic Literature. Edinburgh: Edinburgh
University Press.
Eid, Mushira. 1982. The Non-Randomness of Diglossic Variation. Glossa. 16:1.
5484.
. 1988. Principles for Switching Between Standard and Egyptian Arabic. Al-Ara-
biyya 21, 5180.
. 1992. Directionality in Arabic-English Code-Switching. In Aleya Rouchdy, ed.,
The Arabic Language in America: A Sociolinguistic Study of a Growing Bilingual Com-
munity. Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 5071.
. 2002. Language is a Choice: Variation in Egyptian Womens Written Discourse.
In Aleya Rouchdy, ed., Language Contact and Language Conflict in Arabic. New York
and London: Routledge Curzon, 203232.
. 2004. Media Performances as Discourse Events. Arabic Media and Public Appear-
ance Forum, Center for the Advanced Study of Language (CASL), University of Mary-
land, College Park, June 810, 2004.
Haeri, Niloofar. 2003. Sacred Language. Ordinary People. New York: Palgrave Mac-
millan.
Hinnenkamp, Volker. 2003. Mixed Language Varieties of Migrant Adolescents and
the Discourse of Hybridity. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development
24:1&2.
Mejdell, Gunvor. 2006. Code-Switching. In Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. Encyclopedia of
Arabic Language and Linguistics, vol. 1, 414421.
Muarrafa, Musta f. n.d. Qantara allad kafar. Cairo: Muassasat T ibat al-alwn
al-muttahida.
Schmidt, Richard. 1974. Sociostylistic Variation in Spoken Egyptian Arabic: A re-exami-
nation of the concept of diglossia. Ph.D. dissertation, Brown University.
Schulz, David. 1981. Diglossia and Variation in Formal Spoken Arabic in Egypt. Ph.D.
dissertation, University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Versteegh, Kees et al., eds. 2006. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics, vol. 1.
Leiden and Boston: Brill Academic Publishers.
THE USE OF MORPHOLOGICAL PATTERNS IN
ARABIC GRAMMARS OF TURKIC
Robert Ermers1
s-Hertogenbosch
1. Introduction
1
r.ermers@hccnet.nl, P.O. Box 2176, 5202 CD, s-Hertogenbosch, Netherlands.
2
For the sake of brevity here referred to as morphological patterns.
436 robert ermers
most of them describe a state of mind or a quality (cf. e.g. Wright 1986,
I, 30, see also Versteegh 1992). Verbs with the same verbal pattern have
similar predictable morphological derivations, such as the formation of
the verbal noun masdar. For verbs of the type faula one possible form
of the masdar is falat e.g. karmat kindness. In regard to nouns of
the same pattern the forming of the plural is predictable in the same
way, the pattern filat may have the plural form fawil, e.g. qidatpl.
qawid base. Frb (d. 350/961) writes in his Dwn al-Adab that plu-
ral forms, derived from a pattern which usually yields such plurals, are
not included as entries (I:87). Also more or less predictable is the fact
that the pattern falat may refer to abstract nouns which are not usually
pluralized (similar examples in Irtif I 7397). In this respect the gram-
marians also indicate augmented radicals in Arabic patterns, e.g. af ala,
iftaala, istaf ala, in which -, -t-, and -st- are augmented radicals which
add a specific meaning to the root.
Another obvious motive for collecting words in the same pattern, is
that this is handy when writing poetry. Words with the same pattern can
easily be used in rhyme schemes (cf. also Wild 1965, 66).
The use of morphological patterns thus appears to have two basic
objectives. The first is to determine which consonants in a given word are
basic and which are augmented, or more precisely: to determine which
ones are the basic radicals in a given word. This is for instance important
in establishing a words etymology. In the second place the pattern is
used for illustrating paradigmatic patterns, such as verbal conjugation,
the building of regular plural forms and some types of declension, in
which consonants (e.g. /w/ in /-uwna/ [m pl] and alif /"/ in /-a"t/ t [f
pl] are assigned special meanings (cf. Versteegh 1985). The scope of this
article is limited to the first objective.
For Turkic the general advantage of bringing together words with
similar patterns is evident too, but the morph(ono)logical arguments
do not apply. In Turkic languages meaningful elements usually have the
form of suffixes to a given stem, never infixes or prefixes, e.g. kas cut!,
kas-d he cut (3sg pt), kas-i-d they cut together, and qul slave
qul-lar slaves, qul-juq little slave, qul-juq-lar little slaves, etc. From a
given vowel sequence or consonant pattern no predictions as to plural
and verbal conjugations can be made and the same is true for words that
bear certain suffixes.3 In Arabic grammars of Turkic languages, some
authors make reference to morphological patterns too.
3
If we disregard the consonant assimilation and vowel harmony, that is.
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 437
In the Arabic linguistic tradition the meaningful patterns are the basis
for the arrangement of lexicographical dictionaries. One important
work in this respect is Frbs (d. 350/961) lexicographical work Dwn
al-Adab (cf. Wild 1965, Haywood 1965). The pattern is also used in
Arabic grammars of Turkic. Especially, the Dwn Lut at-Turk (hence-
forth Dwn) compiled by the 11th century scholar Mahmd al-Kar
is set up in the same way as Frbs work (cf. Ermers 1999a, 19).
On top of the division in patterns, Kar, like Frb, uses a pri-
mary categorization of eight chapters (each of which is named Kitb
book), the final two (i.e. 7 and 8) being additions to Frbs division.
This superdivision reflects a primary interest in a morphological and
perhaps an orthographical arrangement. One item that is reflected in
the headings is the position of the glides, the socalled weak consonants,
and other non-regular consonants, such as hamza ().
The division of Dwn is as follows:
In this last chapter of his book Kar must have had in mind the cluster
/-ydt-/ in /tiydtiy/ he turned down, which includes the suffix -t for 3sg
past tense, which is the way Turkic verbs are given throughout Dwn.
Each chapter is further subdivided in separate sections on nouns and
verbs respectively. The more than 6700 entries are further collected in
minor paragraphs, often under a heading that contains a given morpho-
logical pattern (cf. Dankoff and Kelly 19825, Auezova 2005). Kar in
438 robert ermers
total lists some 109 main patterns, some of which contain subdivisions,
in total 143 patterns (see scheme 4 in appendix). The number of patterns
in Frbs Dwn al-Adab is much higher, about 1677.
Another scholar who deserves mention in this respect is Ab H ayyn
al-Andalus (d. 1345), who in his Kitb al-Idrk li-Lisn al-Atrk lists a
large number of meaningful morphological patterns according to which
in his view Turkic words are being construed. He mentions 91 nominal
patterns and 44 verbal ones (Idrk 101:10104:16), a total of 135. One
reason which makes it interesting to have a close look at Ab H ayyns
views on Turkic is that they can easily be compared to those on Arabic
through his oeuvre on Arabic grammar and Quranic exegesis. One of
his most prominent works on grammar is Irtif ad-D arab min Lisn
al-Arab, whose setup bears a strong resemblance with Idrk. In Irtif
(I:2072) there is a similar, but much more lengthy and elaborate sec-
tion on morphological patterns.
4
Wild (1965, 37) mentions a similar distinction in Kitb al-Ayn between mustamal
used and muhmal not used, litt. neglected.
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 439
In scheme 1 and 2 Ab H ayyn describes nouns, the verbs being dealt
with at the end of the section (103:13). Note that in the second listing (cf.
scheme 2) Ab H ayyn is more consequent in holding to the sequence
a-i-u, which seems to evolve, than in the first. Further, it seems that
some of the patterns are incomplete, for example, the nominal pattern
fu-: there is no form fuil* which completes the set (16, 17). Likewise,
there is only one nominal triradical pattern that starts with fi . . . (18),
where one would expect three, the other two being fiul* and fial*. In
the third place, there is no noun that is formed according the pattern
fuil* (22,23). In sum, only four patterns appear to be lacking from this
overview. Nevertheless, it is easy to invent more patterns which would
fit in this triradical scheme, e.g. fual*, fual* and fual*.
5
Between parentheses the original sequence in Idrk.
440 robert ermers
The rules are, at least so it seems, not applied systematically. In the first
place augmented radicals are not reflected in the pattern and conversely,
radicals are presented in such a way that one thinks that they are con-
sidered augments. Ab H ayyn dedicates a large section to augmented
radicals (Idrk 111:17116:13), in which he incidentally investigates
the etymology of some compounds (Idrk 103:12), but the augmenta-
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 441
tion is not reflected in patterns in the way this is regularly done in the
Arabic linguistic tradition. The nouns and verbs he cites as belonging
to a given pattern are not analysed further in terms of basic radicals.
For example, "usurmaq fart could be analysed as fuul-maq*, since it is
an obvious derivative of the verbal stem "usur-. The same holds for the
noun ta arjuq sack, for which the pattern faal-juq* could be posited
(Idrk 103:2,5). Instead the former is attributed the pattern fuullal, and
the latter faallul, the regular way of dealing with hexa- and heptaradical
words, but neither of which gives any clues as to the status the radicals
of the respective suffixes possess.
Ab H ayyns formulates his goal in arranging words according to
patterns as follows: It is necessary to study the structures of each of
them, so that the primary radical (al-h arf al-asl) may be distinguished
from the augmented (zid). Only then can the primary radical be com-
pared with the primary radical and the augmented radical with the
augmented radical, (Idrk 104:15, translation Ermers 1999b). In our
introduction we already briefly touched upon the importance of being
able to differentiate between original radicals and augmented ones, e.g.
in af ala, iftaala, istafala, mafalat. The augmented radicals are called
h urf al-man particles of meaning (cf. Versteegh 1995, 120). One
would expect the Turkic augmented radicals in a similar way to be indi-
cated in the pattern, e.g. faal-dir* causative, faal-il* passive, faal-in*
reflexive form.
Kar takes a similar position in his Dwn. Much in the same way
Ab H ayyn does in Idrk he discusses in a separate section the aug-
mented radicals for nouns and verbs (Dwn 1316). In the nouns he
deals with the glides and hamza only, e.g. tar bag, "adir stallion,
along with -n, as in bazn /baza"n/ hammer, in which the added
meaning of the consonant alif /"/ is not obvious. The augments in the
verbs are dealt with in more detail. Kar mentions as many as eleven
augmented consonants, i.e. 1. alif, 2. t, 3. r, 4. s, 5. , 6. q, 7. k, 8. l, 9. n, 10.
l (lm-alif), 11. y, all of which are added because of [certain] mean-
ings ( fa-kull wh idin minh tuzd li-man, Dwn 14:2). Here we
suffice with a few examples, e.g. t in its causative meaning for the tran-
sitivity of the verb (li-t-tadiyat al-fil, 14:5) in "ari-t-t he dried, which
basic form is (asluhu) "ar-d it dried up. Another example is s, which,
according to Kar, expresses the meaning of wishing to carry out
that action/verb (man at-tamman li-iqmat dlik al-fil, 14:10 ), e.g.
suv "ij-a-sa-d he wished to drink ("ij-) water (suv). The -s- is also used
when the action of the verb is not actual (wa-lam yakun wuq dlika
442 robert ermers
6
Perhaps for this reason Ab H ayyn does not include -d in his references to Tur-
kic verbs; he applies the patterns to the stem only, e.g. fu for "ub kiss!, fal for tart for
weigh!.
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 443
rises in the air (EDT7 [520] te), and qujr /qujnka"r/ ram. In
these nouns , which in both words is represented by /-nk-/, counts for
two consonants, e.g.:8
pattern 1 f a l1 a l2
pattern 2 f a n a l
Turkic t a n k u j
Other arguments for this reasoning are in the first place the fact that
according to the morphological pattern the augment is /-n-//-k-/
being perhaps more basiceven though Kar does not specify to
which one of both patterns the nouns in fact belong. In the second place
nouns like taik /tankik/ air and saak /sank1ak2/ cup and suuk /
sunk1uk2/ bone (Dwn 604) are considered to have a doubled con-
sonantif we take into consideration the directly preceding heading.
On a phonological level this suggests that /-k-/ is considered a separate
consonant, whereas from a morphological point of view it is probably
regarded as more basic than /-n-/. All this points to the assumption that
n and k are regarded as separate consonants.
In spite of this, nouns that are quite comparable to those above, like
taut (Dwn 603) /tankut/ name of a Turkic tribe and suqur /sunk-
qur/ falcon, kaa /kanka/ advice are assigned a triradical pattern of
the type faal, faul, fail.
pattern f a u l
Turkic t a nk u t
In those instances /--/ corresponds with the cluster /-nk-/; this never-
theless appears to be a more general morphology for words with .
In Dwn there are a few instances in which the problem is the other
way around: augments are made explicit when there is no apparent need
for it. The preceding case of fanal may represent such an instance, since
there is no apparent augmented meaning. A speculation along these
lines is that, perhaps Kar in fact was in doubt as to which pattern
to use here, so he wrote down both. Other examples are the pattern
faland that is applied to such nouns as udrund selected and afdind
7
EDT, here and henceforth, refers to: Etymological Dictionary of Pre-Thirteenth-
Century Turkish (Clauson 1972).
8
Clauson in EDT apparently supposes that, in view of the number of radicals, /-n-/
alone must stand for , whilein his viewa superfluous /-k-/ (for g) is added, which
results in the erroneous form teg.
444 robert ermers
collected (Dwn 84). If we for both nouns take /-l-/ in fal-and as the
final consonant of the stem, which seems to be the case, it follows that
the paradigmal suffix or augment must have the form -nd. The pro-
jected stems then must be udr-* and afd-* respectively.9 Here we have
a similar problem as in regard to the pattern fiinl, which we discussed
earlier. If instead Kar considered /-l-/ as the first consonant of the
suffix, one would have expected him to propose the pattern fa-dand*,
because otherwise the occurrence of -d- and -r- on the position of /-l-/
is not accounted for.
Kars discussion of the few internal augments in nouns he gives
is interesting too. Here the augments are placed between the radicals of
the stem, e.g. fawal for yuwlij lambswool (Dwn 456), fayal for nouns
like qaymaj lambswool (Dwn 522), both of which are considered
triradical. In these cases /w/ and /y/ respectively again, are presented
as augments, quite comparable to /y/ in fuayl, a regular Arabic pattern
for diminutives, e.g. fulays small coin (< fils). But the meaning of the
inserted glides here is quite unclear. If the comparison to fuayl would
hold, this suggests that these would be etymologically related to forms
like yulij* and qamaj*, which could not be found. In view of the fact
that the augment in these instances does not seem to carry a particu-
lar meaning, one could argue that the pattern faalal, or perhaps faalil
would have served as well, and the question remains why Kar did
not apply them here instead of proposing the insertion of augments.
There seems to have been a general degree of confusion as to the
applicability of morphological patterns in other works as well. Talmon
(1997, 172) in this respect notes that an authoritative source like al-Xall
(d. 791/175?) in his Kitb al-Ayn is not very consequent in the use of
patterns either: muatft, which according to one view takes the pat-
tern (wazn) of mufalt, and according to another mufalat. A similar
example, still according to Talmon, is andawat, which belongs to two
patterns: fanalat and faallwat. Some consonants, especially hamza, alif,
ww, y and nn are sometimes referred to as basic (asl) and others
as non-asl. In Irtif we came across a similar discrepancy, sanbitat a
period of time is assigned the pattern falatat, but Ab H ayyn acknowl-
edges that others apply fanalat instead: it is said that its pattern is . . .
9
Only in the first case this agrees with EDT [70] dr-, whereas for the second Clau-
son suggests evdin- pluck [7].
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 445
If we apply the patterns fal /faa"la"/ (1) and fal /faa"luw/ (2) to
kuk /kuiyka"/, in which /f-/ stands for /k/, /--/ for /--/, etc., the fol-
lowing scheme emerges:10
pattern 1 f a a '' l a ''
pattern 2 f a a '' l u w
Turkic k u i y k a ''
The application of either pattern suggests that -y- is not basic, but
inserted as an augment between -- and -k-. The goal here is of course
obvious: lengthening of /i/, but -y- is still not accounted for as a mean-
ingful augment. B is placed in the main division, the Book of words with
a glide as a middle radical out of these.11 If -y- is not considered a mean-
ingful augment, it must be an instance of prosodic lenghtening. This
same Book starts, as expected, with nouns like th th /ta"h/, but they
10
We will discuss below the fact that the vowels of the schemes do not correspond at
all with those in the Turkic, and that /-"-/ is apparently realized as y, and /-w/ as ".
11
If we correctly interpret dawt at-taltat, cf. Dwn al-Adab I 76,80.
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 447
7. The glides
/"/ ( alif), /w/ and /y/, are considered consonants. For example, bbun
door is derived from a projected form /ba1wa2bun/* of which the under-
lying pattern is /fa1a2lun/, by replacement of /w/ by //, which results
in /b1aa2bun/*, and a subsequent elision of /a2/: /ba1bun/. Even though
glides are used as instruments for indicating lengthening of the preced-
ing vowels, they are not considered vowels themselves. In this way, alif
(/"/), whose only function is expressing lengthening of /a/, is a con-
sonant as well. The glides, like a number of other consonants (e.g. /"/,
/n/, /t/, etc.), can be inserted or prefixed as augments. For example, the
verbal form qtala he battled is, according to the Arabic grammatical
tradition, derived from qatala he killed by inserting an alif /"/ accord-
ing to the pattern /fa"ala/, rather than by lengthening /a/ (cf. Bohas
1982, 168).
This does not mean that the concept of lengthening does not exist. In
a practical sense the concept of long vowel does exist in Arabic gram-
matical theory, but in the analysis a sharp distinction is made between
meaningful augments on the one hand, i.e. the insertion of phonemes,
and prosodic lengthening, i.e. lengthening for non-phonemical reasons
(ib) on the other. Or, in other words, the analysis of a given word is
based on the question whether a given long vowel is the result of either
ziydat (meaningful addition, or insertion) or of ib (prosodic length-
ening). If we think further along the lines of Arabic linguistic reasoning,
there is hardly a plausible reason to give for reflecting prosodic length-
ening in orthography. This is especially true for lexicography. Prosodic
lengthening typically occurs when the word is put in a context, not in
isolation and it is made explicit in poetry, not in regular prose.
The question of how to interpret lengthened vowels is also an issue in
our source material on Turkic languages. Ab H ayyn starts his expos
on this problem with the uniradical nouns s water, which he writes as
/suw/, and y /ya"/ bow, j /jiy/, moist (?). His almost casual remark
that the semiconsonants (h urf al-liyn wa-l-madd) [w], ["] and [y] form
no part of the root (asl, 101, 12), but rather arise from lengthening
of the vowels (nawi an ib al-h arakt) now gains importance. In
the case of s, y and j, Ab H ayyn says, not f /fuw/ or y /fa"/ is
intended, but rather fu+ and fa+, respectively (in which we use + for
prosodic lengthening). In this respect qis (qisa") short too must be
ranged under the pattern fia+. In spite of all this, the author still pro-
duces the patterns fal for words like barj all, faal for taraz scales
(see the patterns 418 in the listing given above). In these patterns the
glides, which, according to the author, here serve to indicate prosodic
morphological patterns in arabic grammars of turkic 449
8. Summary
consonants are usually attributed a special meaning, such as, e.g., causa-
tivity or diminutive, which is added to the root. Furthermore, based
on the pattern words that contain glides, such as bbun can easily be
reconstructed in terms of regular patterns (*/bawabun/). An additional
motivation for lexicographical interests appears to have been bringing
together words with the same or a similar pattern. This comes in handy
for writing poetry, since words with the same pattern can be used in the
same rhyme scheme. Surprisingly, the two sources we examined, Diwn
Lut at-Turk (11th century) and Kitb al-Idrk li-Lisn al-Atrk (14th
century) hardly use Turkic meaningful consonants and suffixes in com-
bination with the patterns, even though the authors are clearly aware of
them. This appears to be a general feature of lexicographical works: the
patterns seem to be applied more or less arbitrarily. In Dwn Kar
goes one step further, in that he roughly indicates the position of the
vowels in a given pattern by means of /a/, while at the same time in those
instances he deals with words with u, and i, .
9. Appendix
Book II, Kitb as-Slim (160406): words having all sound consonants
Nouns (Dwn 172) (28) fal, ful, fil, (29) faal, faul, fail, (30) fil, (31) fl,
(32) fal, fal, fal, (33) fal, fal, fal, (34) faln, fuln,
filn, (35) fal, (36) faln, faln, (37) faanl, (38)
fulul, (39) falal, fall, fulal,
V? (40) falil, V? (41) faalal, faall, (42) fulul, (43) fulund,
(44) faalal, (45) faalln,
VI (46) falall, (47) faalalal
Verbs (Dwn 305) III (48) faal-d
IV (49) falal-d
V (50) faalal-d
Book III, Kitb al-Mudaf (406445): words containing a geminate or two identical
consonants
Nouns III (51) faal
IV (52) fall
V (53) faalal
Verbs III (54) faal-d (Dwn 415)
IV (55) falan-d
Book IV, Kitb al-Mitl (445493): words with an initial weak consonant, y or w
Nouns III? (56) fal, ful, fil (Dwn 447), (57) faal, faul, fail, (58)
falal, (59) fawal, (60) fal, (61) fal, (62) fal, (63) faln,
(64) faln, (65) faanl
IV (66) falal, fall, (67) falil, (68) faall
V (69) faalal, (70) faaln, (71) falalin (Dwn 468)
Verbs (72) faal-d (Dwn 473)
IV (73) falal-d
V (74) faalal-d (Dwn 491)
Book V, Kitb D awt at-Talta (493535): words with a medial weak consonant, i.e. y,
w or alif
Nouns (75) fal, ful, fil (Dwn 494), (76) faal, (77) fil, (78) fal,
(79)
fal, (80) fal, (81) faln, (82) fayal, (83) falil
V (84) faalal (Dwn 523)
Verbs (85) faal-d (Dwn 526), (86) falal-d (Dwn 529)
Book VI, Kitb D awt al-Arbaa (535599): words having a final weak consonant
Nouns (87) faal, faul, fail (Dwn 540), (88) fil, (89) fal, (90) fal,
(91) fall
VI (92) falal, (93) faalll (Dwn 552)
Verbs III (94) faal-d (Dwn 565)
IV (95) falal-d, (96) fal-d, fal-d, fal-d
V (97) faal-d, V (98) falal-d (Dwn 597)
452 robert ermers
Book VIII, Kitb al-Jam bayn as-skinayn (622638): words containing clusters of
consonantal sounds, does not refer to morphological patterns.
SCHEME 4 MORPHOLOGICAL PATTERNS EXPLICITLY
MENTIONED IN DWN
10. References
Jan Hoogland
Nijmegen University
1. Introduction
1
The whole process of compiling has been described on the project site (www.let.
ru.nl/wba).
456 jan hoogland
The source language units can be divided in simple words (lexical units),
compound words and expressions. Compounds in Dutch are simply
written together as one word and consequently have to be entered as
independent lemmas in the dictionary.
This article limits a comparison of translations for simple words
from various bilingual dictionaries, since it turned out difficult to find
unambiguous translations in English, French or German for Dutch
compounds. The lack of those translations as a starting point for a
comparison of Arabic translations would result in data that would be
difficult to compare with each other.
2. Definition of description
TABLE 1 (CONT.)
Dutch English French German
Al Mawrid English-Arabic
Oxford, Doniach English-Arabic
El Mounged English-Arabic
Al-Kamel Al-Kabir French-Arabic
Al Manhal French-Arabic
Schregle German-Arabic
Van Mol Dutch-Arabic
ouwel wafer | )
}~ 1
HWK 1
ribbel rib, cord w- >" k
rif reef - V
5 q! J (
riposteren riposte Jc 9B " ) -
roe rod } -4
j q! '
rog ray qjn: W 1 K O"
trampoline trampoline } J K5n !
transcriberen transcribe 1 #
&> Jc
7
1 # + >=
traumatisch traumatic Jc LK : = Jc ! 5 " AS T !
TABLE 3A (CONT.)
TABLE 3A (CONT.)
TABLE 3B (CONT.)
DU_LU Eng_LU FA_Kamil FA_Manhal GA_Schregle DA_Mol
gniffelen snigger
>>>6 h>>Q hg vZ 3 v"
1>( Js:
log guest eLQ '>! e>sQ esQ eLQ
vsa
logement lodging 34>= mn6 34>>= v! mn6 34<
(house) }
lommerd pawn shop qb1>> is" 7( hr" eL ij"
7!) Ib1 hr"
+"! eL qb1
o:"@ qb-
J@ !
(1:
loods pilot a }~- W1! W1! }~- >W1! >W1!
(nautic) rs:( +L
loops in heat/ .2) +o, .a
season (: .- (s)
s
lotgenoot partner (in
>>>6 ha1>>W
>n(a As6- qY19
misfortune 15 >b
/ adversity)
>>a1>>>W
>>>"
>>>>6
ouderwets old- q! 4 9 w1> q! w1> &>>{ AL'
fashioned AL' w12 va va 1T!
aw +" A>>>s' hT!)
- w1> (J9 L"
ouvreuse usherette :{! JrL! !{) * J
yz! ] !{ yzC
:L@ j( @# -p W1
-p W- (v($ q!#
{!
ouwel wafer 1j6 4 }~19 m>9-
JLg JL" (ia>>>>>l)
ribbel rib, cord PQ 2W PQ
= w@1
@# .=$)
(vX q! w-~
rif reef eL- J: 1) J: J>E # .>W J>dW
( :1 2W 19 [
( %{ Ja1 (1O[
C
464 jan hoogland
TABLE 3B (CONT.)
DU_LU Eng_LU FA_Kamil FA_Manhal GA_Schregle DA_Mol
riposteren riposte - J{1>>l - @$
H>9 H>_b &>{ - (J{@)
>p! H>_" J:2 Jr"
(eL~ w-[C
.jp9)
roe rod (" a ' >5'
rog ray L h=-@ qjn:>>>>>W
1 Dn:W s 1>>O>"
?x(# R$)
(. . . Ja1
trampoline trampoline 4:! K
kn!
transcriberen transcribe - 1X - 1X d! >>>M
traumatisch traumatic
>Q-
>1>X
>1X >>>d!
>"
>>Q-
>"
>>Q-
Some remarks need to be made in relation to these values. For the sake
of clarity examples for each of these 6 categories will be presented. These
examples are taken from Table 3 a and 3b above.
All other values (16) imply that the word occurs as an entry in the
source language of the dictionary heading the column.
and an explanation comes with the neologism. See the examples of value
6 below.
3. Interpretation of Table 4
lexical gaps in arabic: evidence from dictionaries 467
There are five Dutch words that were translated with a description in
most dictionaries in which they were included:
lommerd / pawn shop 6: 222366
lotgenoot / partner in misfortune 3: 224
ouwel / wafer 6: 222245
rif / reef 7: 2255666
470 jan hoogland
4. Conclusion
5. References
Joost Kremers
University of Cologne
1. Introduction
1
The same nominal forms can also have non-event meanings, making them result
or simplex event nominals, in Grimshaws terms. These lack the argument and event
structure of the corresponding verb, and have no systematic meaning relation to it. See
Fassi Fehri (1993) and Kremers (2003) for some discussion. Traditionally, these nouns
are not called masdars.
476 joost kremers
2
If one or both of the arguments are not expressed, e.g. in Johns singing, the gerund is
no longer a complex event nominal, but rather a simplex event or result nominal, which,
as Grimshaw (1990) shows, have markedly different properties.
masdar formation 477
This fact can be accounted for if we assume, as Abney does, that gerunds
start out as V projections, and change into an N projection somewhere
along the way. Until the point where the change takes place, arguments
can be licensed through case, but after the change, only nominal licens-
ing mechanisms (s and of ) are available. Once the change has taken
place, it cannot be undone, which accounts for the impossibility of (2).
The analysis is supported by the observation that (1bc) allow adverbs
but no adjectives, while (1a), the purely nominal gerund type, allows
adjectives but no adverbs:
(3) a. Johns constant/*constantly singing of the Marseillaise
b. Johns *constant/constantly singing the Marseillaise
c. John *constant/constantly singing the Marseillaise
The analysis that Abney proposes assumes that there is an affix -ing,
which attaches to a verbal category, changing it into its corresponding
nominal category. It can attach at three levels: at V, creating an N, at VP,
creating an NP, and at IP, creating its corresponding nominal projec-
tion DP. Crucially, -ing is not a head, i.e., it does not project a syntactic
phrase of its own. It just attaches to a projection, changing its category.
The tree structures that Abney proposes are the following:
(4) Ing-of:
DP
Johns D
D NP
N PP
sing
478 joost kremers
(5) Poss-ing:
DP
Johns D
D NP
-ing VP
V PP
sing the Marsaillaise
(6) Acc-ing:
DP
-ing IP
John I
I VP
V DP
sing the Marsaillaise
Ackema and Neeleman (2004) retain the idea that what is different about
the different gerund structures is the level at which the nominalizing
3
Abney notices this problem himself. In order to solve it, he argues for an elaboration
of X theory, which basically makes a distinction between below X0 and above X0 syntax
which is not altogether convincing.
masdar formation 479
affix attaches in syntax. However, they place this idea in the context of a
much broader theory on word formation, which enables them to show
what exactly it means for an affix to attach to different levels of projec-
tion. Before we look at how they deal with gerunds, it is necessary to
discuss some of the aspects of their theory.
4
The third mapping principle is Quantitative Correspondence which states that no
element in the morphosyntax is spelled out more than once.
480 joost kremers
5
The notation F(X) refers to the phonological structure onto which the syntactic
structure X is mapped. It is equivalent to the slash notation /x/ that Ackema and Neele-
man use, but in my opinion less confusing. I define it as in (i):
(i) a. D(X): the subtree that has X as root
b. F(X): the phonological material onto which D(X) is mapped.
masdar formation 481
6
Note that I use a hyphen here in the affix /-ist /. In Ackema and Neeleman's original
formulation, this is not necessary, because the mapping rule explicitly mentions the stem
and with that, the position of the affix with respect to the stem. In my reformulation,
some way is needed to indicate that the affix is actually a suffix. Note also that although
I use a double arrow in (14), this is not meant to indicate that this is a one-to-one map-
ping; the phonological form /-ist / does not always signal an agentive noun, cf. words
such as communist, guitarist. Here, Ackema and Neelemans formulation may seem to
have an advantage, since their equivalence is one-to one. As explained in footnote 30,
however, this is not the case in every kind of idiosyncratic mapping rule that we need.
482 joost kremers
7
That is not to say that the attachment is completely free. Some requirements do
apply. Since er saturates the external argument of the verb it attaches to, it cannot attach
to a VP of which the external theta role has already been assigned.
8
I have ignored the diminutive suffix -je here. Although it is attached to the noun
veld phonologically, morphosyntactically, it attaches to the entire structure. (It is not the
field that is small, but the madcap.) See Ackema and Neeleman (2004) for details.
masdar formation 483
John D
D NP
VP AFFIX
Adv VP
constantly V-ing DP
9
The same conclusion is reached by Yoon (1996).
10
Ackema and Neeleman do not specify to which levels of projection the affix
attaches in English, they only do this for Dutch nominal infinitives. I simply assume that
English behaves the same. Note, by the way, that Ackema and Neeleman only discuss
Ing-of and Poss-ing, not Acc-ing. I assume the reason for this is that Acc-ing is more
likely a participial structure than a nominal one, as argued also by Reuland (1983).
11
Note that this situation would obtain if we were to assume that -ing is the nominal-
izing affix.
484 joost kremers
A realization with the /affix/ after the object DP would comply with
Linear Correspondence, but would violate Input Correspondence,
because the /affix/ can no longer attach to /singing/.12 However, on the
assumption that the /affix/ has no overt form, neither Input Correspon-
dence nor Linear Correspondence applies (or they apply vacuously),
and hence no mapping principle is violated.13
4. Arabic masdars
12
Note, by the way, that it is really immaterial whether we assume that the affix
adjoins to the left or the right of the VP. We would run into the same problems with the
adverbial constantly.
13
The analysis makes a strong prediction: if the nominalizing suffix is overt, a dever-
bal noun cannot assign accusative to its object if this object follows the verb. Ackema
and Neeleman show facts from Norwegian and Quechua that suggest that this predic-
tion is borne out.
masdar formation 485
14
Somewhat unexpectedly, however, masdar+li can be modified by adverbial
phrases:
(i) aqlaqa-n -ntiqd-u -r-rajul-i bi -istimrrin li -l-mar-i
annoyed-me criticizing-nom the-man-gen with the-persistence tothe-project-gen
the mans constantly criticizing of the project annoyed me
As suggested in Kremers (2003), this may be due to the fact that the adverbial in (i) is
a PP.
486 joost kremers
15
There are some quadriliteral roots, and there are categories that can be considered
biliteral roots. These will not be discussed here.
16
Prosodic here refers to the prosodic hierarchy (Selkirk 1980, Truckenbrodt in
press), i.e. the hierarchy of prosodic constituents that constitute a phrase, i.e. Utterance >
intonational phrase > phonological phrase > prosodic word > foot > syllable > mora. For
the present discussion, only syllables () and mor () are relevant. A syllable consists
of an onset (the initial consonants) and a rhyme (the vowel and any final consonants).
The onset is extramoraic, the rhyme contains either one mora or two, for light and heavy
syllables respectively. A light syllable is represented as , i.e. a syllable of a single mora,
while a heavy syllable is represented as . In Arabic, the first mora of a syllable is always
associated with a vowel. The second mora can be associated with a consonant or with the
same vowel as the first mora, when this vowel spreads (i.e. when it is long).
17
The third syllable in a form such as kataba he wrote is not part of the template.
Stems in Arabic always have a final extrametrical consonant (McCarthy and Prince
1990a), and it is usually the third root consonant which fills this position. This con-
sonant normally resyllabifies when an ending is added, in this case the -a of the third
person masculine singular.
masdar formation 487
The same goes for the second consonant, although it rarely happens in
the verbal system that it appears in a coda. In the nominal system, this
is not uncommon, however:
(21) root: /f l/
a. fa.a.l to do
b. fi.l action, act
Note that (21) shows that a root does not even specify whether two con-
sonants appear in the same syllable or not. This is solely specified by
the prosodic template of the particular stem formed from the root in
question.
Table 1 lists the perfective stem and masdar forms of triliteral verbs.18
18
As discussed by Wright (1981), Classical Arabic had alternative masdar forms for
most verb stems. Nonetheless, the forms in Table 1 are the standard forms, which is why
I confine myself to them here.
488 joost kremers
In this table, the capitalized consonants KTB belong to the root, any
other non-capitalized consonants are stem affixes.
Looking at Table 1, one quickly notices that one particular vowel pat-
tern dominates the masdar forms: /i/, although on some occasions
(when the corresponding verb stem has a long vowel, such as in III and
XI), the /i/ is also long, yielding //.
Some more analysis is possible, though. McCarthy and Prince (1990a)
argue that the last vowel in a verbal form is always short in finite forms
and often long in non-finite forms (masdars, but also passive partici-
ples of stem I, and some deverbal instrumental nouns). They therefore
analyze vowel quantity of the final vowel as a template suffix indicat-
ing (non-)finiteness. With that modification, the masdar is no longer
marked by /i/ or //, but simply by /ia/, with vowel length deter-
mined by other factors. We can therefore say that the Arabic masdar
contains two morphemes: a nominalizer with the form /ia/, and a non-
finite suffix -.
This template suffix, - for finite forms and - for non-finite forms,
combines with a base stem template, which is monosyllabic.19 So the
stem I template for finite forms exists of the stem base - plus the finite
suffix -. The stem II template is formed from the stem base - plus
the finite suffix. In addition to these morphemes, stems can also have a
prefix, such as the ta- in stems V and VI, n- in stem VII and st- in stem
X, etc.20
We can now analyze a form such as /infil/, the masdar of stem VII
of the root /fl/, as containing four distinct morphemes: the consonantal
root, the stem VII marker, the non-finite marker and the nominalizer:
(22) root: /f l/
stem VII: (n)
nominalizer: /ia/
non-finite: -
Putting these together requires that we analyze phonological structure
as consisting of several layers, or autosegmental tiers (Leben 1973). The
basic tier is the segmental tier, which contains the segments (phonemes)
19
Although it may contain a detransitivizing prefix /n-/ or /t-/, as in stems VII
and VIII, which consists of an extrametrical consonant that resyllabifies into a coda
position.
20
The stem VIII infix -t- is analyzed as a prefix as well, after which a metathesis rule
swaps the initial consonant and the prefix.
masdar formation 489
The top row in (23) represents the syllabic tier: the first two syllables
are given by the stem VII marker. The first syllable is extrametrical (it
is later syllabified by the insertion of an epenthetic /i/), and its coda
position is filled by the /n/. The third syllable is the non-finiteness suf-
fix, which is heavy (i.e. has two mor), as indicated. The final syllable
is again extrametrical, and is added by default, since every Arabic stem
ends in an extrametrical syllable.
The bottom row represents the segmental tier. Crucial is of course
the question how the various slots in both tiers are associated with each
other. The initial /n/ is straight-forward: the stem VII marker speci-
fies that it is associated with the first (extrametrical) syllable. Just as
straightforward is the final root consonant /l/. Because a stem must end
in an extrametrical syllable, the third consonant must always take this
position.
The remaining segments, /f/ and // of the root, and /a/ and /i/ of
the nominalizer, are associated through the principle of Left-to-Right
Association (Leben 1973). The root consonants fill the coda positions of
the second and third syllable, and the vowels of the nominalizer fill the
peaks. Because the third syllable has an additional mora, and because
there is no segmental material anymore to fill it, the vowel /a/ spreads to
the second mora, which results in a long vowel.
Most of the masdar forms can, mutatis mutandis, be analyzed in this
manner: for the masdar forms of stems IV and VIIXV, all that needs to
change in (23) is the stem template.21 As is clear from Table 1, however,
21
Note that the masdar of stem IX /iKTaBB/ is formed on the base of the underlying
form /iKTaBaB/. The gemination of the third root consonant is the result of deletion of
the /a/, a common process in this context.
490 joost kremers
things are different for the remaining forms: they appear to be quite
idiosyncratic. In spite of the apparent complexity, however, we can show
that they all make use of the same stem template that the corresponding
verb forms use. Where they differ from other masdars is the form of the
nominalizer and the non-finite morpheme, which is sometimes absent.
Let us look at the various forms. First, masdars V and VI have an
idiosyncratic nominalizer, that takes the form /au/ rather than /ia/.
They also lack the non-finite morpheme , since the forms are not
*/taKaTTB/ and */taKTB/. Here, we can either say that they have an
idiosyncratic non-finite marker -, or that the lack of a second syllable
in the template causes not just the stem affix but the entire verbal stem
template to be used as a basis for the masdar. Either way, we obtain the
same result:
(24) stem V/VI: -
t
nominalizer: /au/
I will assume that the nominalizer does not associate with the prefixed
syllable in the stem template. Therefore, the /a/ of the nominalizer asso-
ciates with the second (heavy) syllable of the stem template, and the /u/
with the third. Presumably, the /a/ of the first, prefixed, syllable is a copy
of the /a/ of the second syllable.22
Stem II masdars can be dealt with in a similar way. On the face of it,
the stem II masdar does not seem to be formed on the template of the
stem II verb, as it contains a prefix /ta/ which the verbal template lacks,
and its vowel pattern is /ai/, not /ia/, as the default nominalizer speci-
fies. Furthermore, it does not show gemination of the second consonant,
which seems typical for the verbal template.
However, McCarthy and Prince (1990b) observe that Arabic pho-
nology does not distinguish between CVV and CVC syllables: all that
counts is their prosodic status as heavy syllables. The templates of stems
II and III (and likewise stems V and VI) are therefore identical: their
first syllable is , without any specification how the heaviness of the
22
One fact that supports this assumption is that Classical Arabic had an alternative
masdar form for stem V verbs, namely /tiKiTTB/. On the assumption that the vowel
in the prefix is a copy of the vowel in the next syllable, this form is completely regular:
it contains the masdar morpheme /ia/ and the non-finite suffix , as indicated by the
fact that the final vowel is long.
masdar formation 491
t a i
The first syllable here has two mor because this is specified in the stem
II template, and the second syllable has two mor because it is the non-
finite suffix. The vowel /i/ cannot be associated with the second mora of
the first syllable because Arabic does not allow two vowels in a single
syllable.23 When the root is intercalated into the template, the second
mora of the first syllable can be associated with the first root consonant.
The second root consonant can be associated with the onset of the sec-
ond syllable, and, as usual, the last consonant is associated with a (newly
created) extrametrical syllable. At the same time, the /i/ associated with
the first mora spreads to the second, creating a long vowel:
(27)
()
t a k t i b
23
Long vowels and diphthongs are either the result of lengthening or because the sec-
ond mora is filled by a semi-consonant, not because two vowels end up in one syllable.
492 joost kremers
In this way, we can derive the stem II masdar by just assuming an idio-
syncratic nominalizer, in the same way that we have analyzed stem V
and VI masdars.24
The stem III masdar is quite idiosyncratic as well. Its form is
/muKTaBa(t)/, where the final /-a(t)/ is the regular feminine ending.
This masdar is a so-called masdar mmy or m-masdar. The m-masdar is
an alternative masdar formation found in Classical Arabic, in which the
feminine form of the passive participle is used as masdar. This masdar
formation has mostly disappeared, but in stem III, it is the dominant
one.25 I will not go into the details of participle formation in Arabic
(see McCarthy 1981 for some discussion), but like masdar formation,
it is templatic, with an /m-/ prefix that marks the participial form and a
vowel pattern that indicates voice.
Summarizing, we can say that there is a regular nominalizer /ia/,
which applies in the majority of cases. This affix is combined with a non-
finite suffix . Stems II, V, and VI have an idiosyncratic nominal-
izer, and stem III has an idiosyncratic masdar formation. Stems V and
VI lack the non-finite suffix, and instead get a default as second syl-
lable. Lastly, stem I masdars are all idiosyncratic. In the next section, I
will discuss the syntactic and phonological processes that underlie the
masdar formation in more detail, and discuss the mapping rules needed
to account for them.
24
Note that the /ta/ element in the masdar morpheme is not a prefix, contrary to the
/t/ element in stem V and VI forms. If it were, a form /taKaTTB/ would result. Instead,
it must be part of the nominalizer.
25
Classical Arabic had three other stem III masdars, /KiTB/, /KTB/ and /KiTTB/,
but none of these were as common as the m-masdar.
masdar formation 493
(28) DP
D NP
MASDAR VP
Subj V
V Obj
However, on the assumption that masdar is subject to Linear Corre-
spondence, the mapping to phonology would violate at least one map-
ping principle. The reasoning is identical to the one discussed in section
3.2 for the English gerund constructions. masdar attaches to the VP, so
Input Correspondence requires that /masdar/ attaches to /v/. Doing so
would violate Linear Correspondence, however: masdar is external to
the VP, but having /masdar/ attach to /v/ leaves it internal to it, as it then
occupies a position between /subject/ and /v/.
The analysis that made this configuration unproblematic for English,
saying that the nominalizing /affix/ is phonologically null, is not avail-
able for Arabic. As we have seen above, the Arabic masdar formation
uses an overt nominalizing morpheme. Another possible solution that
easily comes to mind is to adjust the structural relations in the tree in
such a way that masdar and its intended host V are adjacent, so that /
masdar/ can attach to /v/ without violating Linear Correspondence.
Such structural rearrangement obviously implies movement. As
argued in many works (e.g., Ritter 1991, Kremers 2003), in possessive
constructions in Arabic and Hebrew (of which (28) is one, because the
494 joost kremers
26
Of course, there is no N head in (28), so we would have to assume that V moves
to D.
27
Note that the entire solution would be impossible if /masdar/ were a suffix: the
object would then always end up between /v/ and /masdar/, no matter where V moves
to.
masdar formation 495
(29)
NOML
NOML N-FIN
This is a morphological structure, which is then inserted into the syn-
tactic structure at the position of the masdar affix:
496 joost kremers
(30) DP
D NP
masdar VP
noml Subj V
vii root
I assume that the V head is composed of the root and the verb stem
marker, here stem VII. The masdar affix, as indicated, is composed of
the nominalizer and the non-finiteness suffix. When the tree in (30) is
mapped onto phonology, Input Correspondence will make sure that
F(masdar) is properly associated with F(V). The formation of the
masdar form /infil/ will then proceed as described above.
Note that whether a syntactic element is subject to Linear Correspon-
dence is not a function of its morphological form alone. F(V) itself con-
sists of autosegmental morphemes, but cannot be exempt from Linear
Correspondence: the entire masdar form consist of autosegmental mor-
phemes, and at least one of them must be subject to Linear Correspon-
dence, otherwise the form could not be linearized with respect to the
other terminal elements in the structure. The natural assumption is that
the root, which is not a syntactic affix, unlike all the other morphemes,
is this element. Note that the root is a phonological affix, because it can-
not form a stem of its own. Syntactically, however, it is not, because it
does not require adjunction to a structure of a specific category. This
syntactic difference between the root and the other elements is presum-
ably the result of a semantic difference: the root is a lexical item (in the
traditional sense of the word) and as such member of an open semantic
class. All the other morphemes are functional or derivational, and part
of closed semantic classes. It therefore seems reasonable to assume that
members of open classes must always be mapped onto the segmental tier
in some way, and are thus always subject to Linear Correspondence. The
masdar formation 497
28
Note that this means that V must move, because masdar constructions have the
order NSO. At first sight, it might be tempting to argue that the NSO order is derived by
spelling out the masdar in the position of masdar, but this would not work for masdars
that license their objects with the preposition li: the analysis states that in such masdars
the masdar affix attaches to V rather than VP, which would predict a surface order of
SNO for such constructions. The actual surface structure is NSO, however, the same as
for masdars that assign accusative.
29
The stem V rules obviously also apply to stem VI, and, although not discussed
here, to the second quadriliteral stem as well. The rule may in fact refer not to the stem
templates but to some other property: as McCarthy and Prince (1990b) discuss, these
three verb stems share properties with each other that are not found in other verb stems,
indicating that they form a class of their own. Presumably, the mapping rules refer to
this class.
30
I mentioned in footnote 6 that Ackema and Neelemans formulation of idiosyn-
cratic mapping rules cannot be read as a one-to-one mapping in all cases. (32) is one
such case. Ackema and Neelemans rules differ in that they mention the phonological
form of the host as well as of the affix. But doing that in (32) would still not establish
that a form consisting of F(prt.pass.f)+F(III) is equivalent to a stem III masdar, as it
could (obviously) also be a feminine passive participle of a stem III verb. Note that this
is indicative of a general asymmetry between syntax and phonology : a syntactic struc-
ture is always mapped onto one particular phonological structure, but a phonological
structure may have more than one syntactic equivalent. In other words: phonological
structures can be ambiguous.
498 joost kremers
I will not go into the formation of the participle here. What is relevant
is the fact that an idiosyncratic mapping rule of the form in can exists.
Rather than specifying the phonological material that the syntactic
structure under consideration is mapped onto, the rule specifies a dif-
ferent (morpho)syntactic form whose phonological mapping must be
applied.
5. Conclusions
6. References
Abney, Steven. 1987. The English Noun Phrase in its Sentential Aspect. PhD thesis, MIT:
MIT Working Papers in Linguistics.
Ackema, Peter and Ad Neeleman. 2004. Beyond Morphology: Interface conditions on
word formation. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Borer, Hagit. 1999. Deconstructing the construct. In Kyle Johnson and Ian Roberts,
eds. Beyond Principles and Parameters. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers,
4390.
Eid, Mushira and John McCarthy, eds. 1990. Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics II.
Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Fassi Fehri, Abdelkader. 1993. Issues in the Structure of Arabic Clauses and Words. Dor-
drecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Grimshaw, Jane.1990. Argument Structure. Cambridge, Mass: The MIT Press.
Jackendoff, Ray. 1997. The Architecture of the Language Faculty. Cambridge, Mass: The
MIT Press.
masdar formation 499
Andr Roman
Lyon
1. Introduction
1
Le symbole est la peinture dune mtaphore.
502 andr roman
pour les dduire les unes des autres, il ny en peut avoir de si loignes
auxquelles enfin on ne parvienne, ni de si caches quon ne dcouvre. Et
je ne fus pas beaucoup en peine de chercher par lesquelles il tait besoin
de commencer : car je savais dj que ctait par les plus simples et les plus
aises connatre.
Au contraire [des sceptiques] tout mon dessein ne tendait qu massurer,
et rejeter la terre mouvante et le sable, pour trouver le roc ou largile.
Et remarquant que cette vrit : je pense, donc je suis, tait si ferme et si
assure, que toutes les plus extravagantes suppositions des sceptiques
ntaient pas capables de lbranler, je jugeai que je pouvais la recevoir, sans
scrupule, pour le premier principe de la philosophie que je cherchais.
Ce problme du premier point de lapplication dune mthodologie,
Ferdinand de Saussure lvoque dans une question, Unde exoriar ,
Do commencer ? (2002, 281). Sa question nest pas, semble-t-il, une
citation. La langue latine, dans laquelle il la formule, est la langue de la
premire voie qui sest ouverte lEurope, la voie romaine.2 La langue
latine est la langue de la culture europenne.
2
Voir R. Brague, 1992.
3
Al-Maydn cite dans son Majma al-Amtl 2 : 291, n3958, ladage : m l-insnu
law l l-lisnu ill sratun mumatta latun aw bahmatun muhmalat .
4
Il ne sagit pas ici des capacits physiologiques de lhomme, ses capacits auditives,
articulatoires, car celles-ci ne portent que sur les sons que lhomme doit entendre, doit
produire comme il parle, et non pas sur la grammaire de la langue.
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 503
1.2 Mthodologie
Lexemple de Descartes incite rechercher dabord une mthodologie.
La premire esquisse de la mthodologie requise peut se rsumer dans
les deux oprations suivantes :
classer ;
dfinir.
5
Les langues ngro-africaines ont un systme de classes nominales qui repose
sur une rpartition des tres et des objets et, postrieurement sans doute, des abstrac-
tions en un certain nombre de catgories , in Les langues du monde, 2, 740741.
6
On a soutenu avec vraisemblance que la tradition grammaticale arabe avait
emprunt la casuistique le cadre gnral de sa dmarche (Carter 1972, particulire-
ment). Versteegh (1980, 1114 ; 1993, 3336) a replac cette hypothse dans une per-
spective plus assure.
504 andr roman
2. Sbawayhi
Les dfinitions donnes par Sbawayhi (al-Kitb, I : 12) des trois parties
du discours sont brves : 9
[La particule] est [dans la langue] pour un sens qui nexiste ni par le nom,
ni par le verbe. Le nom, cest homme, cheval.10 Le verbe, ce sont les
7
Schuler (1990, 252) a pu prsenter la dmarche gnrale de la plaidoirie dune
cause, de sa premire position sa dernire position dprcatoire , sur un algo-
rithme exactement binaire.
8
Voir infra les dfinitions des parties du discours donnes par Sbawayhi dans son
Kitb. De mme al-Frb, lun des plus minents et des plus clbres philosophes
musulmans [. . .] surnomm le second matre, le premier tant Aristote [. . .] , mort
Damas, en 339/950, dans son Ih s al-ulm, p. 5. Le nom h add, singulier de h udd,
signifie communment limite et manire . Il a, chez Sbawayhi, o il est un terme
de mthodologie, gard son sens de manire (Troupeau, 1976, s.v. h add). Cest, sem-
ble-t-il, dans le Kitb al-h udd du grammairien et philosophe mutazilite ar-Rummn,
mort en 394/994, quil a pris, suivant sa pente, le sens de dfinition . Semblablement, le
terme orismos, dfinition , employ par Aristote, est rapprocher de horos, bord .
9
Voir sur la dfinition des parties du discours Versteegh (1995, 2242).
10
Certains manuscrits du Kitb, la somme de la tradition grammaticale arabe
naissante, livre imparfaitement dit, ajoutent mur h it).
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 505
11
La constatation que les modus nexistent que dans ou par les res.
12
Un autre grand grammairien, Ibn Fris, mort Rayy en 395/1004, a, dans son livre,
as-Sh ibi f fiqh al-lua wa-sunan al-arab f kalmi-h, reproch Sbawayhi, p. 85,
davoir, pour le nom, donn non pas une dfinition mais des exemples (tamtl).
Lui-mme a retenu, comme tant plausible, la dfinition suivante : Le nom est ce qui est
implant sur le nomm comme on le mentionne et qui lui reste attach. , dukira l an
badi ahli l-arabiyyati anna l-isma m kna mustaqirran al l-musamm waqta dikri-ka
iyy-hu wa-lziman la-hu wa-hd qarb . Mais cette dfinition nest rien dautre que la
reconnaissance du fait que le nom est rapport immdiatement au nomm, cest--dire
sans le truchement du systme de la langue.
13
En fait plusieurs particules sont analysables ; exemple la ngation, /law/, du mode
rel, faite de la ngation /l/ et du morphme /w/ (< /u/) du mode rel ; voir A. Roman
1998.
506 andr roman
3. Discussion
14
Les systmes matriels qui composent le monde, dune part, sont ouverts, la
diffrences des systmes linguistiques ; dautre part, la combinatoire qui structure les
systme linguistiques est binaire voir infra , tandis que les combinatoires multiples
qui structurent les systmes matriels sont n-aires, avec n suprieur 2 .
15
La proposition de Thom, rapporte dans Petitot, Entrevue avec Ren Thom, est,
senzaltro, plus pittoresque. J.P. : Votre hypothse est [. . .] que les actions archtypales
comme capturer, prendre, couper, lier etc. sont devenues par ritualisation les matrices
de toutes les structures syntaxiques R.T. : Oui. Elles ont captur les structures plus
complexes. La meilleure preuve cest quil nexiste pas de verbes de valence suprieure
quatre. Cest la rgle des phrases de Gibbs . Ce passage ici repris de P.M. Lavorel 1980 :
I, 475).
16
G. Mounin, 1960, a recens, semble-t-il, toutes les dfinitions de la phrase. Aucune
nest opratoire. G. Kleiber, 2003, qui rfute le nouveau dcoupage du discours en clauses
et en priodes, concde qu on a tout gagner tenir compte de la dimension mmori-
elle introduite par Berrendonner, qui tait totalement absente des analyses tradition-
nelles et dont la nouveaut consiste montrer que les relations de discours narticulent
pas deux segments textuels, mais un segment textuel et une information en mmoire
discursive . Mais comment voir une pice de la langue dans cette dimension mmori-
elle ou dans la priode dfinie hypothtiquement comme une unit ergonomique
(A. Berrendonner, confrence, Lyon, 23.10.2003) ?
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 507
17
Sens secondaires : secrtaire, crivain .
18
Dans le Kitb, asl dsigne le principe (dune loi de la langue), ltat primitif dun
h arf (i.e. dun son de la langue) hors de tout conditionnement ou encore dun schme
qui est donc non anomal. Dans le Sh ib (29), le asl englobe ce qui traite de la constitu-
tion de la langue (mawd al-lua), de sa materia prima (awwaliyya), de sa construc-
tion (mana) puis des rgles suivies par les Arabes dans leurs communications (rusm
al-Arab f muxtabti-h), des ressources multiformes de lloquence (iftinn) qui sont
leur disposition sur les deux modes rel (tah qq) et figur (majz).
19
Ibn Fris est original par sa proposition, qui semble tre sans autre exemple dans la
tradition grammaticale arabe, dune saisie totalisante de la langue. La langue est, dans le
Sh ib, prsente, dentre de jeu, dune part, dans son plan gnral et, dautre part, dans
sa double relation un Dieu crateur et la crature humaine que ce Dieu a dou dune
parole qui est la matrice de sa pense.
508 andr roman
Dans toutes les langues du monde, les racines apparaissent comme les
squences de phonmes ou, sinon, de syllabes,20 qui chanent les units
de nomination des entits et des expriences que lhomme a inventes
dans le monde : /katb/, /kitbat/, /aktubu/, /ktib/, /maktab/ . . .
Les racines qui regroupent les entits, les expriences, reconnues par
lhomme comme des units parentes, sont la premire nomination de
ces entits, de ces expriences.
Les racines sont leur premier tablissement dans les langues.
Le premier rle des racines est de leur donner dans les langues une
forme et une dimension telles que les langues puissent les manier.
Le nombre des lments qui composent les racines doit rpondre
cette exigence de maniabilit.
Les racines, condition de leur maniabilit, ne compteront que quel-
ques lments. Cest l une premire rduction, trs forte, impose par
les langues la nomination du monde.
Une deuxime rduction ncessaire est ralise par labstraction qui
aboutit donner, en effaant leurs diffrences, des entits diverses un
mme nom commun , des expriences diverses un mme verbe
commun .
Les racines, porteuses de ces sens abstraits, cest l leur deuxime
rle, devront compter, chacune, assez dlments pour satisfaire aux
besoins de nomination des entits et des expriences que lhomme veut
nommer.
Dans les langues smitiques, les racines des noms communs et des
verbes communs comptent, rgulirement, trois consonnes parce
que la combinatoire de trois consonnes est la premire combinatoire
mme de produire en nombre suffisant les arrangements qui seront
leurs signifiants.21
20
Les langues smitiques sont les seules avoir construit leurs systmes de nomina-
tion sur des racines de consonnes. Les langues tons les ont construits sur des racines
de voyelles. Les autres langues, sur des racines de syllabes. Les systmes de nomination
des langues smitiques et des langues tons vont se rorganisant sur des racines de syl-
labes.
21
Manifestement, les racines produites par la combinatoire de deux seules consonnes
sont en nombre insuffisant. Les racines produites par la combinatoire de trois consonnes
sont, par contre, en nombre plus que suffisant. Ce sont donc ces racines que la langue
arabe a utilises, rgulirement, dans son systme de nomination. Jamais elle na utilis
dans son systme de nomination de racines de deux consonnes. Les racines de qua-
tre consonnes, secondaires, C1C :2C3C4, ont t inventes dans les formes du verbe
racines de trois consonnes et modalit ditration ; le signifiant de cette modalit tait
la longueur de la deuxime consonne, C :2 ; cette consonne longue a t rinterprte
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 509
Ce nombre trois , suffisant, est un nombre trs bas. Il est donc satis-
faisant.22
4. laboration en schmes
4.1 Schme 1
Il est incontestable :
comme une consonne double ; cette consonne double a, par dissimilation dabord, donn
naissance deux consonnes diffrentes ; exemple : /faqqaa/ > /farqaa/, craquer qqc. .
Naissance dun nouveau paradigme. Quant aux racines de cinq consonnes, ce sont des
chimres. Voir Roman, 2005, le chapitre Une brve histoire de la langue arabe .
22
Il est remarquable quune morphologie de larabe toute construite sur des racines
de deux seules consonnes est possible. Mais elle ne suffirait pas aux besoins de la nomi-
nation. Au demeurant la nomination smitique, par racines de consonnes, a succd
une nomination par racines de syllabes, dj nombreuses ; voir A. Roman, op. cit., loc. cit.
23
En ralit, ces wazn, ces schmes sont produits en trompe-lil par le sous-sys-
tme syllabique de la langue. En effet, ses deux seules syllabes, CV et CVC, produ-
isent mcaniquement des squences rgulires ; mais chacune de ces squences nest le
plus souvent que la figure dun sens global, la figure dune unit de nomination constru-
ite sur une racine syllabique, cest--dire sur un radical .
510 andr roman
dun cas dans les autres units de nomination (la voyelle /u/ dans
chacun des exemples donns) ;
que jamais une consonne na un signifi modal ou casuel.
Ces constatations suggrent un premier schma de la langue arabe :
CCC V
24
est pour racine ; C , pour consonne ; V , pour voyelle .
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 511
CV C.CV
CV.C VC
Cette disjonction, ds lors que les consonnes et les voyelles peuvent tre
utilises indpendamment les unes des autres, permet effectivement
lattribution systmatique de tches diffrentes aux consonnes et aux
voyelles.
Cest ainsi que sest trouve constitue la structure fondamentale de la
langue arabe, des langues smitiques.26
Cette raison syllabique trouve, la rgularit de son effet implique
la rgularit du plan gnral qui a t suppos.
Systme Systme
de nomination de communication
5. Systme de nomination
5.1 Le temps
Dans lensemble des units du systme de nomination, quel lment
choisir qui serait susceptible de lordonner ? Le temps, sans doute.
En effet, le temps est essentiel aux expriences. En consquence il est
essentiel aux langues. Cest grce sa saisie et sa mmoire du temps,
25
En franais, diffremment, les paires { aorte vs porte }, { pote vs porte }
opposent une voyelle une consonne ; en franais, consonnes et voyelles peuvent occu-
per, dans les formes, les mmes positions.
26
Invitablement, les consonnes et les voyelles, disjointes par le sous-systme syl-
labique, sont conjointes dans les syllabes mais les racines slectionnent dans les syllabes
les consonnes qui sont radicales.
512 andr roman
[+ temps] vs [ temps]
27
Le nom commun na pas t dtach de lespace. Il tait concret. Ou, plutt, son
caractre concret, ainsi dsign, par hypallage, est apparu quand lhomme a invent des
entits abstraites, des entits dtaches de lespace et par l-mme du temps, partir
donc, chaque fois, dun modus. Mais ce modus rifi, ce nouveau nom, reconnu comme
le nom dune entit noccupant aucun espace, ce nouveau venu, dsign comme un nom
abstrait , par la mme hypallage, na pas t signifi comme tel par un nouveau mor-
phme : la langue, pour le discriminer na invent aucun morphme dnotant la prsence
ou labsence de lespace dans les entits nommes par ces noms. Aussi la premire langue
aura-t-elle t vocale, le geste tant une criture sur un espace suggr, sur une donne,
donc, non prise en compte par la systmatique de la langue.
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 513
28
Ibn Fris, as-Sh ib, p. 3839 : inna l arab-a [. . .] l t-ajmau bayna skin-ay-ni
wa l t-abtadiu bi skin-i-n .
29
Voir Ibn al-Anbr, Al-Insf f masili l-xilf bayna n-nahwiyyna l-basriyyna wa
l-kfiyyn vol. I, chapitre XXVIII ; al-Frb, op. cit., p. 6. ; Fleisch, 1979 : 149 ; 1995.
514 andr roman
2 1 1 2
/katab + t a/ vs /t a + ktub(u)/
Tu as crit vs Tu cris
/katab + t a/ vs /katab + t i/
Tu as crit (homme) vs Tu as crit (femme)
30
Banal , qui se met la disposition de tout le monde , Littr.
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 515
31
La proto-consonne */c/, occlusive medio-palatale sourde, se transformera en per-
dant, par lnition, son occlusion : */c/ > *// > // > /s-/ > /h/ > /-/ ; ou, sa sourdit : */c/ >
*/
/ > /y-/ /-yy/. Seules les consonnes qui sont affectes dun tiret sont encore employes
dans la langue arabe historique en tant que pices de son systme. La branche sourde est
termine par locclusive glottale // qui a remplac, contre-courant, la constrictive /h/
dont elle est issue. En effet // est moins diffrente que /h/ des voyelles devant lesquelles,
gnralement, elle se trouve. Quant /yy/, cest la mme consonne vocalique /y/, mais
elle a t allonge pour assurer sa dfense contre les conditionnements des voyelles car
elle est toujours, en fin de forme, en position intervocalique ; /y/, diffremment, est tou-
jours en dbut de forme.
32
Lhomophonie de certaines racines monoconsonantiques est annule par leurs dis-
tributions diffrentes.
33
la diffrence de /m/, dans /m-aktab/, de /t/, dans /kitba-t/ (chacun de ces deux
morphmes appartient la forme dans laquelle il se trouve), /n/, est une autre unit
de nomination en fonction dexpansion annective de /maktab/. Unit de nomination
non spcifie, /n/ est la tte du paradigme des expansions annectives, spcifies, de la
langue arabe ; /maktab-u-n/ signifie, littralement, bureau dun lieu indtermin >
un bureau ; do lidentification traditionnelle de /n/ comme un article indfini ;
do son nom traditionnel, tanwn, cest--dire nounation , prsence de /n/ .
34
Exemple dans /kayfa/, Comment ? . Ce modus gnral, concurrenc par les deux
modus tre et faire tait sans emploi ; il a t cr par le jeu des oppositions binaires
constitutif de la langue. Il nexiste que dans /kayfa/.
35
Exemples dans les verbes de paradigmes / + af ala/ et /(i)s + taf ala/ : / + ahadta/,
Tu as fait que qqn tmoigne ; /(i)s + tahadta/, Tu as fait que toi-mme sois tmoin .
36
Exemple : /m + aktab i + yy/, bureaucratique ; littralement : tre bureau .
37
Exemple : */allh - u + m/ > /allh + u/, Allh.
516 andr roman
38
Exemple : /a + ayx-u/, Cheikh !
39
Exemple : */allh - a + / > /allh + a/, Allh !
40
Exemples dans le verset II :280 : /fa nazirat-u-n il maysarat-i-n/, Alors attendre
le temps [quil faudra] jusqu ce que [le dbiteur] soit dans une aisance [suffisante] .
41
Navement, une entit peut tre perue comme universelle si elle est apparat tou-
jours prsente. Sa prsence constante implique sa prsence partout. Luniversalit ainsi
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 517
Les langues ne peuvent donc garder les res hors du temps et elles ne
peuvent davantage garder les modus hors des res. Il faut donc que, dans
le discours, elles accouplent les res et les modus.
Le premier couple {res modus} construit le noyau de chaque phrase
structure.43 Ses deux composantes sont ainsi relies, lune lautre, ipso
facto, par une relation intrinsque, biunivoque, galitaire : .
cette relation biunivoque, galitaire, de dclaration du lien, indis-
sociable, entre deux units de nomination,44 sopposent, ventuellement,
deux relations univoques, les deux seules relations mme dentrer en
opposition avec elle :
[BIUNIVOQUE] [UNIVOQUE]
Les trois relations ainsi dfinies, ds lors quelles sont les seules relations
possibles, sont communes toutes les langues.
Ds lors quelles sont communes toutes les langues, le systme quel-
les constituent est universel.
Ainsi le systme de communication sest tabli pour toutes les phrases
de toutes les langues du monde sur le plan suivant :
extensions
+
{e (+... )} {e (+... )}
extensions
{x (+ e . . . ) } {y (+ e . . . ) }
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Ont t constates :
dans le systme de nomination,
la prsence dune structure radicale dans les units flchies ; lab-
sence de structure radicale dans les units amorphes ;
la prsence du temps dans les modus ; labsence du temps dans les
res ;46
45
La tradition grammaticale arabe na pas reconnu les modalits de mode.
46
Cette opposition, fondamentale, {res vs modus} nest plus vivante dans les langues
historiques.
520 andr roman
[SIGNIFIANTS] [SIGNIFIS]
[NOMINATION] [COMMUNICATION]
[TEMPS]
[RACINES] +
syllabes
47
La relation biunivoque, , est d opposition dans le systme de nomination ; elle
est de dclaration dans le systme de communication.
48
Ouille ! , sil faut un exemple, ne peut que crier une douleur de linstant.
Ouille ! ne peut crier le souvenir dune douleur passe, la crainte dune douleur future.
mthodologie linguistique : organisation de la langue 521
9. Conclusion
49
Les langues se sont constitues, par pas de deux , chaque signifiant propos
par le systme des sons trouvant, ventuellement, son signifi . Exemples de pas
de deux : C1V1C2C3 est le schma des res ; C1V1C2V2C3 est le schma des modus ;
C1uC2C2R3 est objectif ; C1aC2V2C3 est subjectif ; V2 = /u/, si le sujet nest que le lieu
du modus ; V2 = /a/, si le sujet produit le modus par son action ; V2 = /i/, si le sujet
produit le modus par sa raction ; si le sujet produit le modus par son action, la transitiv-
it ainsi ralise est soit afficiente, alors V1 = /a/ ; soit dficiente, alors V1 = // . . . Jeux
dopposition qui produisent les diffrences ncessaires mais aussi jeux analogiques qui
produisent les paradigmes ncessaires et, parmi eux particulirement, les jeux iconiques
qui mlent les analogies abstraites et les analogies concrtes ; exemple : laspect achev est
signifi par lordre {C - CCC} des racines ; laspect inachev par lordre inverse, {CCC
- C}.
522 andr roman
[SIGNIFIANTS] [SIGNIFIS]
[NOMINATION] [COMMUNICATION]
[TIME]
[RACINES] +
syllabes aspects
10. Rfrences
Gert Borg
Nijmegen University
1. Introduction
The actual situation of the foreign learner in the Arab world is not very
helpful either: if he or she gives the impression of being able to speak
some Arabic, the addressee may well decide to speak a higher variety
of the language out of politeness and respect, or start rattling in ver-
nacular assuming that for a foreigner to speak MSA would imply even
more strongly that he or she has an easy command of lower language
levels. As a result the linguistic confrontation between native speaker
and foreign language learner in the Arab world is hardly ever a natural
process.
Nevertheless the gifted and dedicated learner of Arabic can achieve
astonishing results in mastering this complicated linguistic situation.
Diglossia of course has some consequences for the teaching process
of the Arabic language; fundamental choices have to be made. Do we
teach Modern Standard Arabic, one of the modern dialects or some
kind of mix between the two? Must this mix be presented synchronic-
ally or should it be taught diachronically, in this case leaving open the
question with which variety of Arabic to begin.
528 gert borg
The political sympathy of the editors lies apparently with the Kifya
popular movement in Egypt.
The most significant feature of this magazine is its use of two lan-
guage levels in various ways: contributions in MSA, others in Egyptian
colloquial (mmiyya) and some with a mixed use of language.
I conducted a basic round of questioning about the opinion of the
reading public and the following image emerged: it is immensely popu-
lar, also in circles that are not intended, like 14 year old school girls and
their mothers, who appreciate the easy reading of this magazine. Some
readers however regret the use of colloquial whichin their opinion
hampers children in learning real Arabic, but they enjoy the reading
nonetheless.
In a lecture at the Netherlands-Flemish Institute the Egyptian lin-
guist Madha Doss emphasized, that the editors of this magazine use
Egyptian colloquial, not because they do not know how to write MSA/
fush they actually seem to publish in MSA elsewherebut that they
choose to use colloquial according to the character of this particular
magazine.
To illustrate the use of modern colloquial in Egypt and to give an
impression of the purposes for which it is used I selected one issue of
this magazine to be discussed here: nr. 8, published in August 2005.
2.1 Fragment 11
Let us first have a look at a contribution that is purely in MSA. It is the
beginning of a contribution entitled: ahr al-irhb al-aswad2 . . . black
month of terror, about the terrorist attacks in London and the murder
of the Egyptian Ambassador in Iraq:
(yawm al-irhb al-aswad) kna hd huwa l-unwn ar-ras li-jardat
al-ahrm as-sdira sabh yawm al-juma [blank] yliy wa-knat
al-jarda bi-hd al-unwn turu il l-ah dt al-irhbiyya llat waqaat f
l-yawm as-sbiq, h aytu knat iddat infijrt qad waqaat f qalb al-sima
al-bartniyya london mdiya bi-h ayt al-aart wa-kna tanzm
al-qida f bild al-rfidn qad alana an qatl as-safr al-misr f l-irq
hb arf . . . ,
1
By the nature of this contribution many quotes are from texts in which it is not
always clear whether the Arabic should be understood as MSA or mmiyya. Therefore
the transliteration may sometimes be inconsistent.
2
Cf. pp. 1011. All loose page numbers refer to this specific issue of Ih n.
530 gert borg
Up to this point the choice of language and register may have been dic-
tated by the source that is quoted, al-Ahrm, but after this the article
continues:
ill anna al-irhbiyyn lam yaktaf bi-hd al-yawm li-l-qiym
bi-hajamtihimi llat stamarrat tiwl ahr yliy mustahdifah (sic: h)
amkin mutafarriqa min al-lam. Fa-qad istayqaza al-misriyyn sabh
yawm as-sabt 23 yliy amalan f l-istimt bi-ajzt at-tawra qabla an
yufja bi-anna bosla at-tafjrt al-irhbya qadi ttajahat il madna
arm a-ayx al-misriyya . . . (the author turns to the recent terrorist attacks
in Egypt).
In his own words the editor continues the language and register as set
by the caption, referring to the terrorist attack in Sharm el-Sheikh. The
remaining part of this article is more of the same, a language register
that I would qualify as just above the level of average Media Arabic. The
level even rises a little towards classical in a context in which the editor
compares these erring groups of Muslims ( firaq islmiyya dlla) with
the Xawrij, quoting extensively from H adt and Qurn.
The choice of language in this contribution is quite predictable:
2.2 Fragment 2
The Ih n-editor al-Alf conducts an interview with an elderly man who
is fishing from the kbr ag-gmia. The photographer he has with him
is named Huseyn.
ajba h usayn f taraddud la, mi hanistann li-h adde m samaka titla.
ibtasam ar-rajul wa-ml li-yaftah antatah wa-axraj minh samaka
ka-annah muidda xiss san li-t-taswr wa-abakah f xutt f as-sinnra
wa-rh yahuzzuh h att tazhar ka-annah sh iya wa-btilab amm
al-kmr
(Huseyn refuses to wait to shoot his photographs because of the failing
light:) No, were not going to wait till a fish pops up. The man smiles
and turns to his bag, producing a fish as if prepared for the photo, hooks
it to the rod again and starts shaking it till it looks like its alive, playing
for the camera
how to be kool in arabic writing 531
2.3 Fragment 3
A truly remarkable article is wijha nazar,3 point of view, a contribu-
tion physically surrounded on its page by a quotation from the Qurn:
rabban l tuxidn in nasn aw axtan . . . (Q. 2/286). The title of
this contribution is y rabb . . . anta rif (O Lord, You are aware . . . )
qla llh: wa-id saalaka ibd ann fa-inn qarbun ujbu dawata
d-di id dan (= Q. 2/186) y rabb anta qarb minn, lh ana bad
annak? y rabb anta rif kulle h ga, wa-rif (q)adde h ana muhtglak
wa-rif (q)adde h gahl wa-duf byixalln abad annak wa-amil h gt
tzaallak aw mamal al-h gt ell turdk aw amilh bass mi bi-t-tar(q)
a ell turdk. Ana rif ana (q)adde h wih i mak, wa-rif enna l-h gt
wi-niam ell anta addthl akbar min ayye h ga a(q)dir amilh
alanak, lh ba(q) l-whid byistashal ennuh yamil (q)alle h ga wa-
huwa fkir ennuh kedah xals amal kull al-matlb? . . . lh al-duny dalma
kedah quddm al-wh id wa-lh al-h ayt saba? Ana mi rif wa-mah ad
rif lh kulle h ga btih sa l f l-duny btih sa l kedah lh . . . I feel guilty about
all my wrongdoings in the light of your benevolence, o Lord, and I dont
understand the world anymore . . .
This text is very personal in tone, it is a monologue with God, almost
like a prayer and it is in mmiyya throughout, except verbal forms like
turdk.
What we have here is a religiously inspired text, in the context of
Qurnic Arabic, but written for a purpose that isapparentlybest
served in colloquial.
2.4 Fragment 4
H ukkm l yahbna amrk, an article about world leaders who defy
the US and its politics,4 is also mainly in MSA and Media Arabic. Typical
markers for this second type of Arabic are for instance passages like:
3
Cf. p. 18.
4
Cf. pp. 2526.
532 gert borg
2.5 Fragment 5
Announced as a grain of seriousness (h abba jadd) we find another
contribution in MSA on the daring subject of the role of sex in matrimo-
nial relations: m hiya h udd al-alqa l-h amma bayna l-azwj? 6 (what
are the boundaries of the intimate relationship between married part-
ners?). With captions like an-nazar il awrat az-zawja (looking at your
naked wife), h urriyyat al-wad al-jasad atn al-jim (freedom of body
positions during intercourse), it does not shy away from daring subjects.
The whole article is written in MSA except for some anonymous reac-
tions by boys (ray a-abb) and girls (amm l-fatayt fa-tah addatna
ka-t-tl). These reactions follow separate patterns:
5
The use of the verb dahaba is extremely rare in Media Arabic: compare the Nijme-
gen Arabic corpus by Jan Hoogland.
6
Cf. pp. 2829.
7
A typical masdar for mmiyya, not found in classical and MSA dictionaries, but in
Badawi-Hinds.
8
A typical mmiyya word.
how to be kool in arabic writing 533
2.6 Fragment 6
A constant mix between MSA and colloquial is a contribution by Yumn
Bassiouni, called al-istina bi-mumatti ln kmbrs min ajl az-ziyrt
ar-rasmiyya,9 calling in extra representatives at official visits for help,
a hilarious story about the hiring of extra patients to accommodate
the official opening of a hospital wing for children on the 4th floor of
the Ab R Academic Hospital. The first line of this story is indica-
tive for its mixed character: wa-alan uakkid annahu mi mugarrad
kalm, hunka mitln h adat muakka ran yuakkidn al mawd
al-istina . . . to make sure that its not only a rumour, here you have
two examples that occurred recently, confirming the topic of calling
in . . . .
From a linguistic point of view the use of mmiyya in this article is
interesting: a remarkable colloquial factor is the use of mmiyya con-
junctions instead of MSA ones: apparently this contributes to the fluent
style of writing:
. . . h att az-zar (!) byitl alan yith att f makn ziyra rasmiyya tnya
(for li . . . )
. . . wa-lkin inn al-mawd yawsal (for lkinna)
. . . wa-alan uakkid . . . (for li . . .)
. . . - zayye m binf f t-tilifizyn(for kam)
. . . kullu deh wa-l-umr m zlat tabd tabiyya li-l-ya . . . (for hd
wa-)
9
Cf. p. 31.
534 gert borg
The mmiyya can also be used to indicate direct speech without using
quotation marks. Doing this makes the scene lively and realistic, because
we can hardly do anything else than picturing the usual hanger around
in such buildings, all the more so because typically the floor that is said
to be still closed is the floor that was meant to be inaugurated from the
beginning:
. . . f d-dr ar-rbi ell lissa muftatah nuh . . . on the fourth floor that
they didnt open yet.
2.7 Fragment 7
Ih n apparently did some investigative research into the behavior of
female singers on the various MTV-like channels and the impact it has on
the audience in an article with the title man tufaddil min al-muanniyt?,
Which of these singers do you like most?.10 Some youths give their
commentary in which the choice of language seems significant for
emphasizing the point of view. A conservative 23 year old boy says:
masxara al-an ntija an s ahwl al-mujtama wa-laysat al-sabab fh
wa-l-ns mudnibn h aytu annahum hum yuajjin tilka al-an . . . the
cause of those ridiculous songs is the deterioration of society, not the other
way around; people have to blame themselves because they are encourag-
ing these songs . . .
A 25 year old girl sounds a bit more committed:
al-fdiy klb ba isff wa-axjal min muhadat qanawt al-an amm
wld video-clips are just pulp; I feel embarrassed to watch them when
my father is around
This 24 year old girl is very dismissive:
hirt hd az-zamn asbah na yulinna an anfusihinna f t-tilifizyn f
akl fdiy klb the whores of this age have come to express themselves
through the video-clip
And this 27 year old girl sounds critical:
law nrakkaz al urbitn mumkin namil h gt original bass al-Arab
(ih n yan) dyn if we concentrate on our Arab identity we could come
up with something original, but the Arabsthat means weare lost
10
Cf. pp. 3233.
how to be kool in arabic writing 535
and with these attitudes the language variety shifts correspondingly from:
MSA to
popular (mmiyya)
MSA
street wise (mmiyya)
popular (mmiyya)
2.8 Fragment 8
Walid Irfas contribution is a review of Paulo Coelhos book The Zahir,
which was popular at the time. The language level chosen for this article
is close to Classical Arabic.
2.9 Fragment 9
A special page is reserved for reviews of DVDs. These are all in MSA. The
writer, Marwn Qadr, also comments on the Broadcast and Television
Festival in July 2005.11 On this subject his criticism is harsh: wa-ka-da
kull al-qimn alayhi (sc. al-mahrajn) faal al-mahrajn faalan daran
min h aytu t-tanzm wa-l-iftith wa-l-xitm . . . as usual with all organiz-
ers the festival failed completely in organization and during opening and
closing sessions. Only once Qadr deviates slightly from MSA: muzam
ad-duyf wa-l-mutarikn lays . . . , most guests and participants were
(plural) not . . . , but this is far from abnormal in Media Arabic. When
11
Cf. pp. 3637.
536 gert borg
2.10 Fragment 10
In an article with the title bsbr axdar m yisw12 (a green passport
isnt worth anything) Yumn Bassiouni complains about the first class
treatment visitors to Egypt receive from the authorities if they carry for-
eign passports. As witnesses to this practice she cites a few personal sto-
ries, parts of which are in mmiyya. One account is by Mohamed Sami
(22) who traveled in Egypt in the winter season with a relative of his
who carries an American passport:13
ya ibn xlat f amrk wa-ndiran m yat il misr . . . . . wa-kunn
rjina min xarga14 bi-l-layl mutaaxxir(!) jiddan . . . wa-awqafan ad-
dbit wa-kna kik(!) fn li-anna ibn xlat kn lbis rt f izz al-bard!
wa-awdaha muhammad anna ad-dbit akka f annahum mutatn
h ga muxaddara muxalliyhum mi h ssn bi-nafsihim wa-lbsn kedah,
xssa tan wa-anna lukna qarbih f l-arab mi salma wa-sammam ad-
dbit annahum yatl a al al-qism. al-h ga l-wah da ell anqadatn
annan gibn li-d-dbit gawz safar ibn xlat al-amrk wa-hadadnhu
annan hanatakh f s-sifra l-amrkya an al-bahdala ell h asalit/hasalat
la-n wa-bi-t-tl mumalat ad-dbit itayyarat tamman wa-tadar kitr
alan m namil makil! . . . yan ibn xlat lamm kn byistamal
al-bsbr al-masr maa dalika d-dbit , m la r s mumla wa-awwal
m azhar bsbruh al-agnab kn lahu al-ihtirm a-add wa-l-adab f
l-mumala
my cousin lives in the US and rarely comes to Egypt . . . we were return-
ing from Kharga very late at night . . . and a policeman stopped us and
12
Cf. p. 41.
13
Passages in colloquial are in italics.
14
Written is xurga which seems improbable.
how to be kool in arabic writing 537
2.11 Fragment 11
In the first lines of the contribution tanfsah15 (reassurance?) we find a
remarkable blend of MSA and mmiyya:
Kun Anta. Ql iraf nafsak dah ahamm wa-asab wa-aktar al-ns
l yarifn!! Amm d h ga arba kulle m inn abuss f bitqat arif ana
mn wa-ahdat at-taxarrug wa-ahdat ag-g wa-al-bsbr . . . Be your-
self. They say: Know yourself. That is the most important and the most
difficult thing, while most people dont!! That is something strange: every
time I look at my ID I know who I am . . . , my degree, my army card and
my passport . . .
But then the mmya takes over almost completely:
Huwa deh ana wa-l deh elli itfarad alayy enn aknuh . . .
Amil ell inta yizuh . . . yiz arabiyya bi-rmt bitru mayyah (unzur
namdaj 2)16 yiz tilab mazk! Yll nirh ri muh ammad al bukra
mumkin yigibak gtr wall darabkah . . . yiz tiqr!?wa-llhi fikra mi
batt laindin maktabt fh kull al-mawdt ell titxayyilh, mamak
fuls?! inzil sq17 al-ezbekya fa (!) al-ataba . . .
That is me and not the one who imposed on me that it is me . . . Do what-
ever you want . . . You want a car with remote control that sprays water (see
15
Cf. p. 42.
16
Referring to a photograph.
17
The text reads sr, but that seems improbable.
538 gert borg
example18 2). You want to play music!19 Lets go to Muhammed Ali Street
tomorrow. Maybe youll like a guitar or a darabukka . . . you want to read
sure, not a bad ideawe have bookshops with all subjects that you can
imagine, you dont have money?! Go to al-Ezbekiyah and Ataba.
In this fragment MSA is used for the general introductory remarks; the
more subjective fictitious monologue is in colloquial.
18
Example refers to a photograph accompanying the text.
19
Mark the calque for azaf.
20
Cf. pp. 4450.
21
Cf. p. 6.
22
These lists seem to be provocative to me; please go ahead and say gurnn!
23
Badawi-Hinds mentions both but apparently prefers batramn, a glass or plastic
jar with a lid, a jam jar.
how to be kool in arabic writing 539
4. Orthography
6. References
Hinds-Badawi: Hinds, Martin and El-Said Badawi. 1986. A Dictionary of Egyptian Ara-
bic: Arabic English. Beirut: Librairie du Liban.
Ih n, sawt jl bi-h luh. 2005. August issue.
Nijmegen Arabic Corpus: a collection of MSA texts from the written media compiled by
Everhard Ditters and Jan Hoogland.
HELLO, I SAY, AND WELCOME! WHERE FROM,
THESE RIDING MEN?
ARABIC POPULAR POETRY AND POLITICAL SATIRE:
A STUDY IN INTERTEXTUALITY FROM JORDAN1
Clive Holes
University of Oxford
1. Introduction
1
The present paper is based on data gathered in the course of a field-based investiga-
tion into the practice of Bedouin poetry in Jordan and Sinai, involving the collection of
poetry composed over the last 50 years, and particularly over the last 20, direct from the
poets themselves. The fieldwork was carried out by Dr Said Salman Abu Athera, a Bed-
ouin originally from Beersheva but now resident in Jordan, and the translation, glossing
and annotating of the poems was done by me. Our book Y Kundlzza Rys! Politics
and Popular Poetry In the Contemporary Arab World is to be published by Brill in 2007.
544 clive holes
2
In Egypt, in the mouths of the settled farmers and town-dwellers of the Nile valley,
arab is a term of opprobrium, signifying backwardness and stupidity; but for the Sinai
Bedouin, resentful of the power over their lives which the settled population of Egypt
now exercises, these farmers and town-dwellers are contemptuously referred to as ban
firn the sons of the Pharaoh, an insult that alludes to their supposed slave origin and
habit of subservience.
3
Poetry was collected from poets fitting all these descriptions in the course of the
present project.
4
A good example is the poetry of the illiterate Unz Ab Slim at-Turbn of south-
ern Sinai, considered by many the premier Bedouin poet of the region, who spent many
years in Egyptian prisons for smuggling offences, and died in his 80s in 2000.
546 clive holes
One of the Jordanian poets from whom we have collected a large number
of unpublished poems, though many of them have circulated by word
of mouth and on cassette, is Ghassn Surr a-baylt (Ab Surr).
Ghassn was born in az-Zarq, north Jordan, in 1954, the son of the
paramount sheikh of the al-Uwayst section (ara) of the Ban H asan,
a north Jordanian tribe. He now lives in a large house in al-Mafraq. He
describes his social background with the tongue-in-cheek epithet ladu:
an abbreviation of l filh wa l badu neither cultivator nor nomad, a
term used to describe people historically of Bedouin origin who are now
fully settled. Ghassn was the eldest son in his family, with seven broth-
ers. When his father died, he was around 14 years old. His father left him
virtually nothing (300 JD), having sold off or squandered almost all the
family wealth. As a result, Ghassn was forced to leave school immedi-
ately and find work to support his siblings and mother. At that time, in
the late 1960s, the Iraqi army still had units in Jordan following the 1967
war with Israel. This presented opportunities for smuggling. At that
time the Iraqi army was using Russian weapons and ammunition, but
the Bedouin in Iraq still carried British weapons from the days of Brit-
ish influence before the revolution of 1958, just as the Bedouin of Jordan
still did. When Iraqi units rotated home, the young Ghassn would sell
them British weapons and ammunition, which they smuggled across the
border and sold on at a profit to Iraqi Bedouinthere were no border
checks on troop movements. This ammunition and weapons smuggling
subsequently broadened into a more extensive illicit tradecigarettes
and other goodsand extended also to Syria, which was a much nearer
border. By the early 80s, as a young man, Ghassn had begun to travel
regularly to West Germany and the countries of the eastern bloc, from
where he brought back cars and other goods to sell in Jordan. Eventu-
ally, the profits from this enabled him to buy land and start businesses,
including supermarkets. He is now, at around 50 years of age, a rela-
tively wealthy man. That is the bare bones of Ghassns journey from
childhood rags to adult riches. He is at pains to point out that none of
what he owns and has achieved was through family influence, but rather
through thirty years of his own efforts and honesty with business part-
ners: what he has achieved has been, as he put it, bi s-sadga wa l bi
l-garba (through friendship and not through family ties).
arabic popular poetry and political satire 547
a crust and making ends meet that they have no time to think about any-
thing else, and if they do they get distracted and lost.
The words of the original song (Ghawnmah 2002, 1501) are by Rashd
al-Kln. A famous Jordanian gypsy singer and rebec player of the time,
Abdh Ms (19271977), made them famous by putting them to
music. Ms was well known for his popular nationalistic songs prais-
ing the army, national heroes, and the Hashemite dynasty, as well as
sentimental ditties for religious occasions. Ghassn takes many of the
original lines of Abdh Mss song and, while preserving the original
meter and rhyme scheme, alters the words to provide a series of poetic
snapshots of the state of Jordan in the early 1980s. The effect of insert-
ing such material into the structure of the song, whilst at the same time
preserving much of the original bombastic phraseology, is pungently
satirical and bathetic. The impact of Ghassns poem on a local audience
depends precisely on the fact that Mss song from an earlier, more
confident period of Jordanian history was so well known to ordinary
Jordanians from its frequent airing in the local media.
Rashd al-Klns original words are as follows: 5
5
Each verse of the poem is divided into two hemistiches, all the opening hemis-
tiches as a group, and all the closing hemistiches as a group, being metrically identical,
and each group having a different rhyme, -n (or -n) for the opening hemistiches and
-lah for the closing ones. This is a common arrangement. Unfortunately it is almost
impossible to imitate in an English translation, so I have rendered the poem into English
rhyming couplets, with fourteen syllables to each hemistich, and tried to be as faithful as
possible to the meaning and tone of the original.
6
A standard Bedouin greeting.
7
dir pl dr ruthless, remorseless.
8
Lit aggression < CLA ad.
arabic popular poetry and political satire 549
9
salf pl salfn brave, swaggering. Cf. Musil 1928, 561 salf a strong gust of wind, Clas-
sical Arabic salif vainglorious, boastful.
10
I.e. protect us.
11
kr pl. kiyr custom, habit. Cf. Bailey 1991, 451.
12
mgana woman wearing a guna = womans black head covering reaching down to
her behind.
13
nay sadness, dejection. < Classical Arabic n-w-. Cf. na bi l-h iml to groan under
a burden.
14
lafa (yilfi) come, arrive.
550 clive holes
15
saff cartridge magazine or clip of a firearm.
16
g l pl. gln side, direction.
17
saly blazing volley (of shots, cannon fire).
18
Sc. m clouds. The change to n is a poetic licence to maintain the rhyme.
19
I.e. fighter pilots.
20
xawa to plunge, dive.
21
Lit: None tasted safety that went in their direction.
22
Normal Bedouin term for enemy.
arabic popular poetry and political satire 551
4. Text comparison
23
Lit: ditches, i.e. defensive trenches.
24
taks (in construct phrase and when suffixed takst-) pl. taks car, limousine (as
well as taxi).
552 clive holes
u h ayy wizrat il-il il alh agatn And salute the High Price Ministry
bi d-dn! thats saddled us with debts!
rab it-tawbig h agar u amwl Theyre the ones in stone-built
sayylah condos, with their liquid cash
assets!
u ym id-dgt wn rh in-nim Where did they go, now times are
wn? hard, those brave heart lads with
pride?
rabi il-kaff l-h umur wi l-ugul The ones who wear red head-cloths,
mayylah . . .? head-ropes slanting to the side . . .?
(lines 14)
with Ghassns:
y marh ab, y hal, mnn Hello, I say, and welcome! But now
il-bal min wn? wheres this scourge come from?
agbal aln l-il y maba Price rises came upon us, and
igblah! 25 theyve hit us like a bomb!
h inn gh id-duwal w il We act like world-class donkeys,
nartad bi l-bn26 with our cruel fate content,
wa l-kull rd l-gr h att Each one of us accepts abuse, even
-aham xlah27 those of high descent.
wa l-amr tanfdah lin u min We do as we are ordered to; its
drn xann not our place to ask,
wa l-gir sr ar-rabb wa r-rh Money rules our lives; our souls are
fadw lah mortgaged to that task.
wa s-samt krin lin wa Keeping quiets second nature; we
a l-h agg m nin dont stick up for peoples rights,
wa l-h agg min il-mursil28 Our rights we beg from minions,
wallah m nnlah then give back without a fight.
(lines 14)
25
< y m ab igblah lit: how awful its coming!
26
= w illi nartadi bi l-bn those who are content with adversity.
27
Ironically echoing the sentiment of the popular Bedouin saying dawwir li wil-
dik xl find a maternal uncle for your son, i.e. find a brave man and marry his sister
because the bravery will run in the family. Nowadays, the poet is saying, the once noble,
independent Bedouin are ordered about by moral pygmies, and money has become the
yardstick of a persons worth.
28
mursil servant, messenger-boy.
554 clive holes
the widow, and all other ordinary Jordanians can expect no protection at
all; on the contrary, they have become the targets of (economic) attack:
awmrah mh add a rah Hes got his orders ready, and he lets
yirm ala l-gln fly to each side,
saly l-awmir raad u A thunderous volley of memos,
alt gattlah death-dealing stuff inside!
the orders in this case being those of the Prime-Minister Mudar Badrn
to raise the price of the basic necessities of life beyond the point where
they can afford them.
The original song concludes (lines 815) with a stirring picture of the
derring-do of the Jordanian army and air force; the corresponding lines
in Ghassns poem depict a sleazy world of fawning senators selling off
the national patrimony, accepting bribes, lining their own pockets, and
hanging around night-clubs and brothels (Ghassns lines 1117):
arabic popular poetry and political satire 555
il-wisk lah wi l-z lah Hes got his whisky, young roast
wa li h sbah ha-l-girn lamb, hes got our money too,
wa -aab b h amdullah The people feed on wheat-chaff
m yiba nxlah29 and just thank the Lord they do.
fawwad ard l-arab He gave away our tribal lands to
li s-sr luh ahrn folk just two months here,
li l m yinirif ammah To people with no lineage, no
u l yinirif xlah pedigree thats clear.
u h ayy wizrat il-il il And salute the High Price Ministry
alh agatn bi d-dn! thats saddled us with debts!
rab it-tawbig h agar Theyre the ones in stone-built
u amwl sayylah condos, with their liquid cash assets!
din yxk30 u sin31 Were lost, my brother, wander-
wn il-harba wn? ing . . . oh where is our escape?
u h litn b hal-balad By God, the nations state is dire:
wallah mi h lah no order here, no shape.
wisiln dr il-h add min To blame? Our sheikhs an
xn wa l-n32 senators; the mess were in is foul:
ill ala abwb id-dant33 They spend their time in sleazy
inmr gawwlah dives, like panthers on the prowl.
l yiurrak kubr i-anab Dont be fooled by big moustaches,
wa l-fard maa mitn guns with double cartridge clips,
bi d-dabdaba34 yibd u bi l-madh What they write begins with
yinh maglah weasel words and ends with
flattering quips.
iyh tt lah gu ww z-zarf Our rulers slip them money, in
h ukkmn girn brown envelopes its brought,
u min agal hal-girn yanh ar Theyd kill their kids to get one, slit
lak iylah their throats without a thought.
29
nxla poor quality wheat left after sieving.
30
A so-called bi-polar address form, also common in Eastern Arabian dialects. See
Yassin 1977.
31
s to wander, go aimlessly from one place to another. sin u din were wandering
lost. Cf Classical Arabic sa to scatter (people, things).
32
I.e. a member of the maglis il-ayn the Senate, all appointed by the King.
33
I.e. brothels and drinking dens.
34
dabda b to talk meaninglessly or ambiguously, utter weasel words.
556 clive holes
(line 18)
win xilsat il-arkt, yallah But when the battles over, and the
is-salmah situations calm,
itxalln il-wh id min id-dill You lot will mess things up again;
h ltah h lah youll do us yet more harm!
(line 20)
Ghassns poem is four lines longer than the original, and the formal
correspondences of the original lines to those of Ghassns version (i.e.
where Ghassns lines mimic the diction of the originals) are as follows:
agbal aln l-il y maba Price rises came upon us, and
igblah! theyve hit us like a bomb!
2 h inn gh id-duwal w il We act like world-class donkeys,
nartad bi l-bn with our cruel fate content,
wa l-kull rd l-gr h att Each one of us accepts abuse,
-aham xlah even those of high descent.
3 wa l-amr tanfdah lin u min We do as we are ordered to; its
drn xann not our place to ask,
wa l-gir sr ar-rabb wa r-rh Money rules our lives; our souls
fadw lah are mortgaged to that task.
4 wa s-samt krin lin wa a Keeping quiets second nature; we
l-h agg m nin dont stick up for peoples rights,
wa l-h agg min il-mursil wallahOur rights we beg from minions,
m nnlah then give back without a fight.
5 h ayyhum iyx il-arab il So salute our Arab leaders, on
takstuh bi antnn their cars two aerials fixed!
rab it-taks l-h umur wa Theyre the ones who drive red
d-daym bi iglah limos, head-ropes full of despots
tricks!
6 y mgana bi n-nay zd dum O wife who grieves in widows
il-n weeds, weep on, the futures
bleak,
zd dum il-as a l-xadd Weep yet more tears of sorrow,
sayylah let them trickle down your cheek.
7 rh n-nim u madaw, l Our gallant lads have gone for
tafrah y zn good, theres nothing left to
cheer,
b syf il-h arb u m dall They sold their swords off long
xayylah ago; their horsemen disappeared.
8 kull nadil h kim bihum h ukm Now any numb-skull scoundrel
il-and i-n treats them like his abject tools,
u xall wgh il-balad bi s-sg Makes porters out of highborn
attlah men who once this country
ruled.35
35
The reference is to Mudar Badrn, the Jordanian Prime-Minister of the time. There
is also a whiff here of a sense of lse-majest: Jordanians of pure Bedouin descent regard
the Badrn family, which has its roots in urban Syria, with disdain.
558 clive holes
9 awmrah mh add a rah yirm Hes got his orders ready, and he
ala l-gln lets fly to each side,
saly l-awmir raad u alt A thunderous volley of memos,
gattlah death-dealing stuff inside!
10 saww tnakit il-kz36 bi h dd A jerry-can of kerosene put up to
dnrn two JD,37
wa a h sb g in-ns titkt ar To make his stacks of cash pile
amwlah up, the people go hungry.
11 il-wisk lah wi l-z lah wa li Hes got his whisky, young roast
h sbah hal-girn lamb, hes got our money too,
wa -aab b h amdullah m The people feed on wheat-chaff
yiba nxlah and just thank the Lord they do.
12 fawwad ard l-arab li s-sr luhHe gave away our tribal lands to
ahrn folk just two months here,
li l m yinirif ammah u l To people with no lineage, no
yinirif xlah pedigree thats clear.
13 u h ayy wizrat il-il il And salute the High Price
alh agatn bi d-dn! Ministry thats saddled us with
debts!
rab it-tawbig h agar u amwl Theyre the ones in stone-built
sayylah condos, with their liquid cash
assets!
14 di n yxk u sin wn il- Were lost, my brother,
harba wn? wandering . . . oh where is our
escape?
u h litn b hal-balad wallah By God, the nations state is dire:
mi h lah no order here, no shape.
15 wisiln dr il-h add min xn To blame? Our sheikhs and
wa l-n senators; the mess were in is foul:
ill ala abwb id-dant inmr They spend their time in sleazy
gawwlah dives, like panthers on the prowl.
16 l yiurrak kubr i-anab wa Dont be fooled by big
l-fard maa mitn moustaches, guns with double
cartridge clips,
bi d-dabdaba yibd u bi l-madh What they write begins with
yinh maglah weasel words and ends with
flattering quips.
36
A twenty-litre jerry can of kerosene, used for cooking on primus stoves.
37
I.e. (in 1982) very expensive.
arabic popular poetry and political satire 559
38
Nowadays, it is quite common for the poet, without a trace of irony, to describe
the qualities of a modern steeda Toyota Landcruiser, for instancein terms similar
to the ways a fine riding camel would once have been described: its strong chassis, its
smooth gear-change, its fine performance, etc. See, e.g., Kurpershoek 1999:110114 for
examples from Najd. We recorded similar descriptions of cars in Bedouin poetry from
Sinai.
39
Kurpershoek 1999:3134.
40
These pet names are often given by the Jordanian Bedouin to dogs (rather like
Rex and Rover in English). In the poem they are insultingly applied to the pet rulers
of unnamed Gulf States who, in the poets view, treacherously provided bases for the
Americans at the time of their invasion of Iraq.
41
And speaking in a Texas accent, which I have tried to imitate in my translation!
arabic popular poetry and political satire 561
Another character who has had poems put in his mouth by this poet
is Saddam Hussein, in prison in Iraq, but stillpoeticallyshaking a
defiant fist a the Americans. And to George Galloway, founder and sole
representative of the UKs Respect political party, he has dedicated a
typical piece of Bedouin madh , praising Galloways opposition to Tony
Blair and what the poet sees as his dogged, unpopular but heroic sup-
port for the Iraqi people.
Popular poetic commentary on contemporary events such as has
been exemplified in this paper is nothing new: its just that the focus
has broadened. Before the birth of the nation state in the Arab World,
and even in the period since, Bedouin tribal poetry was one of the main
means by which partisan communal sentiments could be articulated. A
good example of this was a dispute between the H uwt t, a Jordanian
tribe, and the Ban Atiyya of Saudi Arabia, which rumbled on into the
late 1980s in the form of an extended poetic debate of claim and counter-
claim. The dispute centred on Tubayq, an area in the far southeast of
Jordan which the Jordanian government ceded to the Saudis in 1964
in return for a stretch of Red Sea coastline which would enable Jordan
to improve its naval facilities away from the prying eyes of the Israelis.
Initially, this exchange of land and redrawing of the border caused no
problems, and the H uwt t on the Jordanian side continued to drive
their animals to seasonal pastures on the Saudi side, exactly as they had
always done. They incidentally benefited from the fact that many goods
were cheaper in Saudi Arabia, and border controls were lax or non-exis-
tent. A number of events, however, changed all this. During the Jordan-
ian civil war of 1970, Russian machine guns became easily available, and
enterprising H uwt t began a lucrative smuggling operation into Saudi
Arabia. Drugs were also smuggled in. This led to a clampdown by the
Saudis, and the blacklisting of many H uwt t. Then, after the shock-
ing siege of the grand mosque in Mecca by Islamic fundamentalists in
1979, the Saudis put even stricter border controls in place. One measure
562 clive holes
was the digging of a ditch, 3m wide by 3m deep along the border with
Jordan in Tubayq. No camel or car could cross it except at designated
control points situated far apart. H uwt t who had been used to driving
their animals 10 miles to pasture were now faced with driving them 100
miles to find the nearest border post and 100 miles back again. Customs
controls became much stricter. A system of registration documents
was introduced for the family members who moved with the migrating
flocks. There were cases of H uwt t mothers who had given birth while
in Saudi Arabia being detained there because, when they tried to return
to Jordan, the number of family members did not correspond with
the number on the registration document. There were intimate body
searches of all females at the border checkpoints. This was bad enough
for the socially conservative Bedouin, but it also closed off the last
avenue for smuggling. On the other hand, the Jordanian borders
remained open to Saudis without let or hindrance, a fact that caused
huge resentment. This unequal treatment, coupled with what was per-
ceived by the Jordanian Bedouin as the central governments lack of
economic help to the people of the south, was one of the factors that
precipitated rioting in Maan and Al-Jafr in 1989.
A well-known H uwt poet, Barrk Dish Ab Tyih, wrote several
emotional poems about the dispute that the Ban Ati yya, on the Saudi
side of the border, did not like. Ban Ati yya poets replied with poems
which were recorded and passed back to the H uwt t. The initial skirm-
ish might have ended there. However, it was followed by a long and
insulting poem from a young H uwt poet, Nad Tmn Ab Tyih. The
poetic tit-for-tat then escalated, with ten poems by Ban Atiyya poets in
reply, releasing much pent-up personal vituperation. This caused an out-
raged reaction among the H uwt t, who had always regarded the Ban
Atiyya as inferior to themselves. Seventy years ago, the result would
undoubtedly have been a tribal war; on this occasion, the dispute was
finally defused in 1990 by mediation, and the signing of an agreement
that neither side would write any more poems on the subject of Tubayq.
The key point here is that poetry was, and is, regarded by the Bedouin
as a suitable vehicle for airing important issues of the moment, rather
than a letter to the provincial governor, still less lobbying a remote and
seemingly uncaring central government.
arabic popular poetry and political satire 563
5. References
Abdel-Malek, Kamal. 1990. A Study of the Vernacular Poetry of Ah mad Fud Nigm.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Abu Athera, Said Salman and Holes, Clive. Forthcoming 2007. Y Kundlzza Rys!
Politics and Popular Poetry in the Contemporary Arab World. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Abu-Lughod, Lila. 1986. Veiled Sentiments: Honor and Poetry in a Bedouin Society.
Berkeley: University of California Press.
Bailey, Clinton. 1991. Bedouin Poetry from Sinai and the Negev. Oxford: OUP.
Booth, Marilyn. 1990. Bayram al-Tunisis Egypt: Social Criticism and Narrative Strate-
gies. Exeter: Ithaca.
Ghawnmah, M. Abdh Ms: Ridan wa-Mubdian, Amman, Dr al-Kind, 2002.
Ibn Khaldn, tr. Rosenthal, Franz. 1958. The Muqaddimah. An Introduction to History.
London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.
Ingham, Bruce. 1986. Bedouin of Northern Arabia: Traditions of the l-D hafr. London:
Kegan Paul International.
Kurpershoek, P. Marcel. 1994. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia I: The
Poetry of al-Dindn. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
. 1995. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia II: The Story of a Desert
Knight. The Legend of lwh and other Utayba heroes. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
. 1999. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia III: Bedouin Poets of the
Dawsir Tribe. Between Nomadism and Settlement in Southern Najd. Leiden: E.J.
Brill.
. 2002. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia IV : A Saudi Tribal History.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
. 2005. Oral Poetry and Narratives from Central Arabia V : Voices from the Desert.
Glossary, Indices, and List of Recordings. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Landberg, Carlo le Comte de. 1901. tudes sur les dialectes de larabie mridionale.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Meissner, Bruno. 1903. Neuarabische Gedichte aus dem Iraq. Mitteilungen des Semi-
nars fr orientalische Sprachen zu Berlin VI. 57125.
Musil, Alois. 1928. The Manners and Customs of the Rwala Bedouin. New York: Ame-
rican Geographical Society.
Socin, Albert. 19001. Diwan aus Centralarabien. Leipzig: Teubner.
Sowayan, Saad Abdallah. 1985. Nabati Poetry: The Oral Poetry of Arabia. Berkeley: Uni-
versity of California.
Wallin, Georg August. 1851. Probe aus einer Anthologie neuarabischer Gesnge in der
Wste gesammelt. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft 5. 123.
. 1852. Probe aus einer Anthologie neuarabischer Gesnge in der Wste gesam-
melt. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlndischen Gesellschaft 6. 190218, 369378.
Yassin, M.A. 1977. Bi-polar terms in Kuwaiti Arabic. Bulletin of the School of Oriental
and African Studies 40. 297330.
NOTES ON THE DIALECTS OF THE LGT AND H AMD AH
OF SOUTHERN SINAI
Rudolf de Jong
ACLC, University of Amsterdam
1. Introduction
The subject of this contribution1 is the dialect of the Lgt (or Ulayqt),
a bedouin tribe who live in the western central part of southern Sinai
(see map below).2 In addition, notes on the dialect of the H amda h have
been included. Some texts recorded among the Lgtwith additional
information in footnotesmay serve for further illustration.
The H amda h are only few, and are often regarded as a clan (or fam-
ily) of the Lgt, although various sources claim that they were present
in Sinai before the Lgt.3 We shall see that there are some notable dif-
ferences between these two varieties of speech.
1
With great pleasure I dedicate this contribution to Kees Versteegh. My dedication
is with deep respect for his stature in our field of Arabic Studies, with gratitude for the
inspiring thoughts he has shared with our community and with fond memories of the
(too few) occasions I had the honor to work with him.
2
The material used for this article was collected in the framework of my own research
into the bedouin dialects of southern Sinai. This project is funded and supported by The
Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research (abbreviated in Dutch as NWO) and
the Amsterdam Center for Linguistics and Communication (ACLC) at the University
of Amsterdam. I am sincerely grateful to both organizations, as I am thankful also to
Manfred Woidich for his advice and support during my researches. I am no less grateful
to my desert guideand now dear friendId Abuw Silm (al-Atra at-Turbniy), who
has been my ally in this project and without whose contributions this research would
not have been possible.
3
Murray (1935, 291), for instance, writes that the H amdah [. . .] are now only about
twelve tents strong, and live mostly near Serabit el-Khadim and Bir Nasb, where they are
reckoned as part of the Aleiqat. For the location of Sarbt al-Xdim, see Google Earth
at (appr.) 29 00 05 N33 28 01E.
At -Tayyib (1997, 480481) mentions that the H amdah joined the Lgt under the
Lgiy x at that time (A.D. 1914) Mdaxxal Slmn of the Lgiy clan named Awld
Silmiy. Von Oppenheim (1943, 162, 164) writes that the H amdah were angegliedert to
the Olkt (in his transcription).
On the webpage http://members.nova.org/~lroeder/alegat.htm (authored by Larry
Roeder), under History of Hamada, it is reported that the H amdah [. . .] probably
[joined the Alegat] shortly after the capture of Nuweiba. We do know that from then
until the 1880s this was a sub-tribe (or section) of the Alegat. Then in 1880 internal
566 rudolf de jong
politics forced a split when the Hamada requested permission to live under the protec-
tion of the Muzeina. By 1935, they had become integrated enough in Muzeina affairs to
be considered an integral part of that tribe.
4
See Bailey 1985, 48. For more information on subdivisions of this tribe, their xs,
history, territories, etc., see at -Tayyib 1997, Part 2, 475489.
5
Such numbers are of course approximations.
6
Sarbt al-Xdim, some 40 kilometres east of Abuw Znmah (on maps usually
spelled as Abu Zinima), is famous as the site of turquoise mines operated since early
pharaonic times, and the temple of Hathor, which is the only pharaonic temple built
outside Egypt proper. See also the webpage about the Sinai at http://www.arcl.ed.ac.uk/
arcx/remot esense/sinai/.
7
Also in Wdiy Isla. The Lgt are reported to form an alliance in Sinai with the
and Mznah, see At -Tayyib (1993, 705) and Bailey (1991, 5). At- Tayyib (1993,
H amdah
706) reports that their territory stretches from ar-Ramlah to Wdiy arandal. One of my
own Lgiy informants mentioned these areas too, but said their drah stretches up until
the area named ar-Rynih, north of Rs Sadr. For a map locating their (there transcribed
as Algt) drah, see Bailey (1991, 4).
8
Wdiy s Sahaw, mntigit Mbajjmah, Br anNasb and Wdiy Lihyn were mentioned
to me by a Lgiy informant as parts of the H amdiy drah.
9
Abbreviations: Ah = Ah aywt, Tr = Tarbn, H w = H wtt, Db = Dbr (see remark
below), Ty = Tayhah, Lg = Lgt, Bd = Badrah, Jr = Jarjrah (see remark below),
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 567
1.1 General
In the course of the ongoing research into the dialects of southern Sinai,
a picture has been emerging in which dialects of southern Sinai appear
to constituteto an as yet undefined degreea homogeneous group.
This group is typologically related to the dialects of group II in the north
of Sinai: that of the Agylah, andeven more clearly sothat of the
Samnah.10
As a group, the dialects in the south stand separate from the dia-
lects of group I, or the Negev-type of dialect (to which the dialects of
the Ah aywt and Tarbn belong, and also those of the Tayhah and
Jarjrah).11 The southern group also shows important differences with
the dialect of the Mznah, who live in the eastern part of southern
Sinai and its southern tip.12 We shall see that of the two dialects treated
here, H amdi y appears to have the most in common with this southern
Sinaitic group, while Lgiy occupies a position typologically somewhat
nearer to group I.13
2. Phonology
2.1 Consonants
As bedouin dialects spoken in southern Sinai, the phoneme inventories
of Lgiy and H amdi y do not hold many surprises. As far as consonan-
tal phonemes are concerned, all three interdentals /t/ , /d/ and /d/ (the
latter as a reflex for both *d and *d) are present. A voiced and unaffri-
cated /g/ reflects Classical Arabic *q and a voiced affricate /j/ reflects *j
2.2 Vowels
As for vowels, phonemic opposition of short vowels /i/ and /u/ is as lim-
ited as it is in other bedouin dialects of Sinai, but the minimal pair Xidr
male given namexudr green (c. pl.) will isolate these vowels as sepa-
rate phonemes in Lgiy and H amdi y. Finding a minimal pair to isolate
/a/ as a phoneme is not a problem in Sinai; for Lgiy a pair like xa he
enteredxu enter! works like in any other Sinai bedouin dialect.
Long vowel phonemes are //, // and //, and additional (uncondi-
tionally monophthongized diphthongs *ay and *aw) // and //. Result-
14
The opposition is about as widely used in Lgiy as it is in other dialects of southern
Sinai. In H amdi y, however, the suffix -kiy is also used instead of -k for the 2nd p. f. sg.,
while V(C)uk (CC-uk) is regular for the 2nd. p. m. sg. in both H amdiy and Lgiy.
15
The spelling here with triple t is for the sake of morphological transparency. The
pronunciation is, however, not noticeably different from doubled t (IPA [(t)]). See also
fn 90.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 569
16
Abuw lHl, lit. The Sphinx, but here as a folk etymology for The Blue Hole, which
is a popular dive site about 12 km north of D ahab.
17
This must have developed in analogy to such variation as luh (~ much less frequent)
lh to him. Comparable forms (alh and alh) were also recorded in the dialect of the
Tarbn of the north and that of the Rmlt (respectively), see De Jong (2000, 181).
570 rudolf de jong
18
See gad, Bailey (2004, 457) (glossary).
19
See (spelled shaour) webpage http://www.saudi-fisheries.comArabic/fish_
product_2.htm
20
In other dialects h amlah is used in the meaning of clan, see Blanc (1970, 114).
21
a no longer appears at the surface as a, but as i. This i, however, is not dropped
in open unstressed syllables (e.g. iribt, not ribt for I drank, the latter of which can
be heard e.g. in the dialect of alAr, see De Jong (2000, 515)), and is therefore to be
regarded as still underlying |a|, see also following fn.
22
In Negev dialect, on the other hand, the |a| reappears as a in closed syllables, e.g.
arbit she drank, cf. Blanc (1970, 134).
23
In closed syllables however, underlying |a| does indeed reappear as a, e.g. yinbstu w
they rejoice, yittfgin they (f.) agree. Notice that in the dialect of alAr, this vowel i is
also underlyingly |i|, which may be concluded from its elision in a form like yniwkil it
is eaten and (not ynwikil), see De Jong (2000, 521).
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 571
As for ordering of rules, the rules for elision stress and anaptyxis are
executed in that same order, i.e. like in other bedouin dialects of Sinai.
3.1 Stress
A sequence CaCaC is usually stressed CaCC in Lgiy, while H amdi y
much more regularly stresses CCaC. The article is often stressed in
both dialects, as in lCaCaC (e.g. ljimal the camel, lmutar the rain,
llah am the meat, aar the hair), but is in a limited number of cases
unstressed in H amdi y alCCaC, e.g. alfrah the wedding ceremony,
ilnam the goats, ilbsal the onions. Comparable stress patterns occur
24
Raising of final in the pronominal suffix -h in neutral environments appears to
occur at random; I have not been able to discover a pattern.
572 rudolf de jong
in the perfect forms of verbal measures VII (or n-1) and VIII (or 1-t):
they tend to be stressed inCCac and iCtCaC in H amdi y, but nCa-
CaC and CtaCaC in Lgiy, while both varieties stress ynCiCiC and
yCtiCiC. Examples are (Lgiy) nkabas, ynkibis be jinxed, stawa,
ystiwiy become ripe/cooked (H amdi y) inbsat, ynbisit rejoice and
ittfag, yttifig agree.25
25
Notice that group II (i.e. the dialects of the Samnah and Agylah) dialects in the
north have stress patterns inCCaC, yinCCiC. On the intermediate position between
groups I and II in the north of the stress-type inCCaC, ynCiCiC, see De Jong (2004,
159).
26
See remarks below.
27
Comparable forms with vowel-initial suffixes were heard in group I, see De Jong
(2000, 105).
28
See De Jong (2000, chapters IIII, 2.4).
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 573
4. Morphology
4.1.1 Pronominals
The personal pronominal for the 3rd person masc. pl. in Lgiy and
H amdi y is hum m a, while h in Lgiy and huwwa in H amdi y tend to
be used for the 3rd person masc. sg.29 The suffixed form of the 3rd p.
masc. sg. is -u(h) in both dialects. The 3rd p. m. pl. pron. suffix is usually
-huw in Lgiy, but -hum in H amdi y. Both dialects have hinna and -hin
for the f. pl.
The 2nd person masc. pl. is often intum in H amdi y, but intuw in
Lgiy, the latter of which is also heard in southern Sinai dialects farther
east. Similarly, the suffixed pronominal directly elicited in H amdi y was
-kum, while I only heard -kuw in Lgiy, the latter of which is also heard
in dialects farther to the east. Both dialects have intin and -kin for the
f. pl. The 2nd p. sg. suffixes -k and -k, which are typical for many south-
ern Sinai dialects,30 are also present in H amdi y and Lgiy.
Like almost all dialects of Sinai, Lgiy and H amdi y have stressed 1st
p. c. sg. suffixes -n (obj.) and - (poss.).31
29
Some central and eastern dialects of southern Sinai have huwwa for the m. pl.,
while h is used for the masc. sg.
30
See De Jong (2004, 163164).
31
See Blanc (1970, 130131), De Jong (2000, 675, map 38) and ibid. (2004, 163, with
remark *** on 164165).
574 rudolf de jong
In other cases, the article il- is much more likely to be used (though
al- occurs in such positions as well), e.g. ilwild the boys, issin the goat-
skin (used for churning butter), iddims the stone, ilkibdah the liver,
iddinya the world.
In stressed positions (i.e. in Lgiy), the article is almost invariably
al- (or assimilated allomorphs with initial a-), e.g. ssa h an the bowl,
ljimal the camel, ssalag the hunting dog, lh atab the firewood and
a h a the morning, but ti (~ mati) the winter.
dd
Apart from assimilating to sunletters, l of the article will also often
assimilate to j, e.g. jjimal the camel, ajjawlig the carpets, ijjihhl the
youngsters.
32
In this respect, Lgiy differs from dialects of the Negev, where one will hear (also)
gahawat(+), but gahawithin, see Blanc (1970, 142). Other dialects in Sinai show yet
other ways of treatment of T in gahawah-forms, see De Jong (2000, various chapters,
3.1.10.3). Treatment of T in Lgiy is much like what was described for Smniy (i.e.
the dialect of the Samnah) of group II in the north, see De Jong (2000, 279280).
33
Notice that the form is not arabiyytk! Contrast with the form arabiyythum listed
above.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 575
lects, but in our dialects discussed here the first p. c. singular is included
in this rule (so that in measure 1 of regular verbs the 1st p. c. sg becomes
homophonic with the m. sg. imperative form), e.g. iktib I write, udr ub
I hit and arab I drink, but also ugm I rise, il I carry, anm I sleep
and jiy I come.34
Another characteristic of bedouin dialects in the south of Sinai
(including Mzniy), though not of all, is the apocopation of 2nd p. masc.
sg. forms of tertiae infirmae verbs. This occurs in all measures (indi-
cated in Roman numbers here), e.g. in Lgiy: (I) tim you go, (I) talg
you find, (II) tsaww you make/do, (III) tlg you find, (IV) tit you give,
(V) taa you have dinner, (VI) talg you meet (with),35 (VIII) titir
you buy and also (with shortened base vowel) tij (~ tjiy) you come.
In a similar fashion, masc. imperatives of tertiae y verbs are usually
apocopated, as in the examples ijr run, ans forget, saww do/make!, it
give! etc. Also when suffixes are appended, the apocopated forms are
used, e.g. ansuh forget him!, sawwha make it (f. sg.)!, ituh-yyh give it
to him! and itwarrh-iyyh you show her to him.36
Lgiy may not very convincingly be part of the group I or Negev dialect-
type (as illustrated below in a comparison with the group I dialect of
the Tarbn around Rs Sadr, who are the northern neighbours of the
Lgt), but it is still nearer to group I than H amdi y.37 In this respect the
34
Forms like atlub and aktib (like in dialects of northern Sinai, see De Jong (2000,
3.2.1.2 of chapters 1V)) were also recorded, but the forms with vowel harmony in
the 1st p. c. sg. turn out to be much more regular than I had previously noticed (contrast
De Jong (2004, 166), where only atlub and aktib are listed).
35
Another feature typical of many southern Sinai dialects is the reduction of initial
tt- (> t-, sometimes erroneously referred to as a haplological drop of ta-) in ta- initial
measures (V and VI).
36
The origin of such apocopation may lie in a reasoning by analogy (extrapolation
leading to paradigmatic levelling within the verb system): if forms like e.g. imperfect
tgudiy and tkitbiy (or imperative gudiy and kitbiy) are fem. forms for the 2nd per-
son singular, and the forms tugud and tiktib are used for the 2nd p. sg. masculine, then
dropping the -iy ending from a 2nd p. f. sg. forms like e.g. titiy will yield the form for
the 2nd p. masc. sg.: tit.
37
Largely illustrating Murrays remark (1935, 263 f, see fn. 13 above). The dialect of
the Tarbn of Rs Sadr (not very different from other varieties of Turbniy) is taken
here as representative for group I (or Negev-type) dialects. For the latter type, see Blanc
(1970) and De Jong (2000, chapter 1).
576 rudolf de jong
Phonology
phoneme */k/ /k/ and /k/38 only /k/
allophones of /j/ [d] ~ often [] [d], rarely []
diphthongs *ay, *aw // and // phon. conditioned ay
and aw
raising of a preceding middt maddt
(extreme) raising *- () ti, lai tiy, laiy
velariz. in pl. of katr ktar (no velarization) ktr (velarized)
Parts of Speech
Article and relative al-/-il & alliy / illiy only al- & alliy
pronoun
Demonstratives: singular m. (h)da, f. (h)diy m. hda, f. hdi y
coll., plural dill (ih) (~ hdil)(Lg) hdal
/ hd
l
dill (ih) (~ hdl
)
(H m)
Negated pronoun 3. sg. mh, mh (~ mha) mh, mh (~ mha)
Pronoun suffix 3. m. sg -uh -ah /-ih
3. m. pl. -huw (Lg), -hum -hum
(H m)
2 m. sg. C-uk C-ak
2 f. sg. V(C)-kiy, CC-ik39 invariable -kiy
Suffixed prepositions muh mah
ilh (Lg), ilh (H m) alh
fh, f uk fah, fak
Verb impf. 1st p. c. sg. iktib, udrub,
arab, aktib, adrub,
arab,
ugm, uxu, etc. agm, axu, etc.
Apocopated impf. 2 m. sg. tim, talg, tlg timiy, talga, tlgiy,
tit, taadd, etc. titiy, taadda, etc.
38
But this phonemic opposition is not as widely used in Lg.
39
This is not entirely certain; my H amdiy informant produced btk your (f. sg.)
house, but also naxal tkiy your (f. sg.) date palm.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 577
6. Conclusion
7. References
40
Verb forms with final -m were only recorded during direct elicitation. Such forms
also occur in group II of the north, see De Jong (2000, 298299).
578 rudolf de jong
8. Texts
The speaker is a member of the Lgt, who was 38 years old at the time
of recording. He was born in Sarbt alXdim (about 40 km east of
Abuw Znmah) in the area called ar-Ramlah, where he had lived until
his 29th. He has had no school training. (S) = Speaker of Lgiy, (R) =
interviewer.
8.1.1 Transcript
1. (R) hatkallimni fi sayd ilarnib? 2. (S) a:ywah. alarnib dilleh41 . . . fi
nnahr bitnm. fi nnahr . . . bitnm m btarta.42 3. ibtarta ar h
billl . . . ugb almaarib . . . ibtusrub. iza nymah fi h ajr, fi ajarah . . .
41
dill (-ih) is the c. pl. demonstrative pronoun for near deixis. Notice the absence of
velarization.
42
The single negation m + verb form is regular.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 579
8.1.2 Translation
1. (R) Are you going talk to me about hunting rabbits? 2. (S) Yes. These
rabbits . . . they sleep during the day. They sleep during the day and they
dont graze. 3. They only graze at night . . . after sunset. They run out,
if they sleep in the rocks, into the bushes . . . They run out at night to
look for food. 4. They keep running . . . grazing till the morning, (all
the time) until daybreak. Daybreak, (after that its) over, just before the
sun rises . . . 5. It looks for a bush . . . it looks for a mountain, it looks for
anything, and goes (in) there to sleep. 6. Hell tell you the rabbits are
asleep. The rabbits in the forenoon, which is the morning . . . you seize
them . . . while they are asleep. 7. They find their tracks, they find its tracks
near this bush, near that bush. 8. And they follow its tracks . . . until they
come to . . . its sleeping place.
8.2.1 Transcript
9. fh . . . ns ibyulgutha . . . b duh. iw fh ns biyannin alhe. biyannin
alha yaniy bitkn imh47 ash . . . igsayyreh. 10. ibrn kdiy . . . hda
ym ffa48 nymah fi ajarah, iyannin alha w yuxbutha b ilash . . . 11.
iw linnha49 tbbah fhe.[. . .] iw fh ns . . . induh salg. 12. ssalag hda
43
a l: assimilation of initial t to follwing d in tdall.
dd
44
Such prosodic lengthening of the vowel is often used to indicate the long duration
of time.
45
dd u rr, see fn 43.
46
The suffixed preposition l: (sg.) 3.m. luh, 3.f. lha, 2.m. luk, 2.f. lkiy (~ seldom lik),
1.c. lay ~ l and (pl.) 3.m. lhum , 3.f. lhin, 2.m. lukum, 2.f. lkin, 1.c. lna.
47
The suffixed preposition m(i): (sg.) muh, mih h a, muk, mik (~ frequent mikiy, i.e.
like in group I), m and pl. mih h um , mih h in, mikum , mikin, mina.
48
ffa: fha one of many examples of assimilation of h to a preceding voiceless
consonant.
49
The particle linn or lann is often used to present a sudden or unexpected turn in a
narration, see Blanc (1970, 145).
580 rudolf de jong
8.2.2 Translation
9. There are people who seize her with the hand, and there are people
who take aim at it. They take aim at it, that is, theyll have a small stick
with them. 10. Of two spans of the hand (in length) . . . this (person)
when he sees it asleep in a bush, he creaps up on it and hits it with the
stick. . . . 11. And lo it (i.e. the stick) hits it (i.e. the rabbit). And there
are people who have a hunting dog. 12. This hunting dog will make it
jump around. The hunting dog makes it jump around. 13. And he has
taught it . . . with the hunting dog . . . the hunting dog keeps following it
closely . . . until it grabs it. 14. He wont eat it until it has brought it to its
master. His master then slaughters it, this rabbit. 15. And there are peo-
ple who take good aim at it with the stick, which he throws. And there
are people who seize it. 16. Hell have his cloak with him, (or) his jacket
with him, or something, (and) when he sees it in the bush, he throws it
at it and seizes it. This is (what they do with) the rabbit.
8.3.1 Transcript
17. (R) iw fh bardu h . . . biysawwuw faxx? (S) biysawwuw. alfaxx da
grayyib, alfaxx da grayyib byistagduw50 alh nns mi zamn. 18.
igrayyib byistagduw a lfaxx. yibnh,51 w iyh uttu w fh . . . iyh uttu w fh
giirit52 birdagneh, iyh uttu w fh ayyi h jah lfaxx. 19. iw h btjiy a
53
rhtuh . . . hda byibnh ar ugb almaarib. ym lanam tidw iy, w
alh all dwa xals . . . m f h all, ibyibnh. 20. m byibnh fi nnahr.
50
A measure X (or ista-1) verb of the root q-d-y: istagda, yistagdiy (ala) take up as a
new habit by following an example.
51
yibnh lit. they build it, here they set it (i.e. the trap).
52
giirit: a bukara-form of girit.
53
da wa, yidwiy
go home in the evening, see Stewart (1990, 214) (glossary). In
Turbniy this verb is measure IV, e.g. albant midiwyt the girls are going home (just
before sunset). The root d-w-y
is probably related to CA d-w- light; using the last day-
light to go home.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 581
8.3.2 Translation
17. (R) And are there . . . (people) who make a trap? (S) Yes, they do.
This trap is (a) recent (thing), this trap is something recent, which
people have imitated, not people of the old days. People have started
copying the (method of hunting with a) trap. They set it, and they place
in it . . . they place the peel of an orange in it, they put anything in the
trap. 19. And it (the rabbit) is attracted to its smell. This (person) sets it
only after sunset. When the small cattle come back home. And when it
has come back home . . . thats it . . . there is no small cattle (left roaming
around), (then) they set it. 20. They dont set it during the daytime. And
besides this they set it in summer . . . the time when the acacias bloom,
when the acacias have fruit57 and stuff. 21. They also set it next to the
acacia tree. There is fruit that falls down. It comes normally in summer,
the month of July, the months of June and those of summer. 22. There
is fruit that falls from the acacias, (so) youll find rabbits going to the
acacias all the time.
8.3.3 Transcript
23. ibyibnuw lha fa . . . alfaxx f-assiyylah diy, iw kamn fi ssiyyl d k,
fi ttalah58 diy byibnuw lhin. 24. iw yulugtha f- alfaxx . . . yulgutha
min ragabatta min . . . min rjilha min h jeh. 25. assu bih ym yjiy l
alfaxx iw lannha malgtah. 26. iw fh ns ibyugud . . . igrayyib lha . . . fi
lll . . . yasma xabit alfaxx. 27. ym ytulguh byasmauh (R) aywah . . . (S)
54
fi irg, litt. in the root (of) has been grammaticalized as a preposition meaning
next to (presumably next to some standing object), also e.g. fi irg alh tah next to the
wall.
55
Assimilation of bitrawwih + diy.
56
talgha: apocopated 2nd p. m. sg. imperfect of the verb ligiy, yalga find, followed by
suffix -ha.
57
Lane (1863, part 1, 195): [. . .] the fruit of the talh [or acacia gummifera, which is
of the trees called idh] [. . .]
58
talah (with t!) is a water course between two mountain peaks, and can be used as
a pass between mountains.
582 rudolf de jong
8.3.4 Translation
23. They set a trap for it in (under) this acacia, and also in those (other)
acacias, in this watercourse they set (traps) for them. 24. and they catch
it in the trap. . . . they catch it by its neck . . . by its leg . . . by something. 25.
In the morning, when he comes to the trap, there it is, caught. 26. And
there are people who sit (and wait) . . . near it . . . at night . . . hell hear the
snapping of the trap. 27. When it releases hell hear it . . . (R) Yes . . . (S)
and he knows that the trap caught it . . . (and) he seizes it . . . at night 28.
and there are people who set it . . . and they go away to a far place61 . . . like
five kilometres, ten kilometres (and) in the morning he comes (back) to
it. 29. When he comes to it, lo, lo, it has caught it. That is the rabbits.
30. As far as these gazelles are concerned, not all people hunt them.
These gazelles dont come down to the lower areas, (they stay) only in
the mountains . . . 31. (R) You have to go up . . . (S) You have to hunt them
in the far mountains . . . Gazelles. 32. And gazelles, when they smell
you, they jump away from where they are. 33. When they smell your
scent. . . . that is, if you come down with the wind and he smells (you),
thats it, he gets away from you. These are the gazelles, 34. which are the
ibex and all these things. This . . . this is where a person catches them.
59
See fn. 49.
60
The (superscript) anaptyctic vowel is voiceless.
61
bld lit. land, here place.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 583
8.4 Snakes
8.4.1 Transcript
62
35. (R) fh bardu h, rif fi ddd? (S) iddd allafiy? (R) aywah . . . (S)
allafiy dilleh . . . hda l . . . ayyi insn ibyuktilhe. 36. hdiy ygl luk
almzyeh, in kaltuk bidduk,63 ir kn64 daktr walla bidduk, aza
f-albarr kamn m h waluk daktr ir kn insn h wiy. 37. fh ns
f-larab . . . biykn h wiy. [. . .] fh hwytuh xabit, iw fh ihwytuh lah s,
alliy hda biyrudd assamm. 38. hda ddd, alliy h lagrab . . . assa fr diy-
m m dl . . . iw fh lfiy . . . alliy h . . . h tti bn. hda la . . . hda lam kaltuk
r kn insn h wiy walla daktr. 39. fh ns katr mtuw minha. imn
alamaliyyah diy. (R) mi ssamm . . . (S) mi ssamm, hda ssamm . . . 40.
(R) tab w ilh wiy biysawwiy h? (S) alh wiy biyrudd issamm . . . biyrudd
assamm . . . 41. (R) kf biysawwiy? (S) alh wiy byaxabtuk xabit . . .
yaxabtuk . . . talat xabtt . . . ib rguh . . . (R) ib rguh . . . (S) hda biyruddd
assamm. lamma trawwh addaktr, aw mumkin kamn m . . . m trawwh
addaktr ihwytuh jiyydeh, bitkaffiy xals. 42. hda b innisbah la . . . la
lagarab65 w alfiy w atti bn . . . w alh jt dillah.
8.4.2 Translation
35. (R) Are there also . . . do you know about creepy crawlies? (S) Vipers?
(R) Yes. . . . (S) Yes, these vipers . . . these . . . anyone will kill them. 36. This
one will say to you the advantage, if it bites you, you need, by necessity
a doctor or you need, if it is in the desert, and there is also no doctor
around (you), a hwiy person. 37. There are people among the bedou-
ins . . . who are hwiy. Hitting is part of his hwiy-activity, and licking is
part of his hwiy-activity, which brings back (i.e. out of the body) the
poison. 38. This is the creepy crawly, which is the scorpion, this yellow
one with a tail . . . and there is the viper . . . which is the snake. This one,
when it bites you, you need a hwiy or a doctor. 39. There are many
people who died from it, from this business. (R) from the poison . . . (S)
62
dd (n.u. -ih, pl. ddn) is used for any crawling animal, like snakes, scorpions, and
lizzards.
63
bidd, rather than widd (as in group I), is used to express want or need. Here it us
used to express necessity from the perspective of the speaker, like English should, as in
he should see a doctor, see De Jong (2000, 239).
64
The context calls for words like ayr kn. In the recording I hear what has been
transcribed above, but perhaps it should read (strongly reduced) er kn.
65
ag araba bukara form for agrab.
584 rudolf de jong
From the poison, this poison. 40. (R) Okay, and what does the hwiy do?
(S) The hwiy brings back the poison, he brings back the poison . . . 41.
(R) how does he do it? (S) The hwiy gives you a good slapping. He slaps
you three times . . . with his saliva. . . . (R) With his saliva. (S) This brings
back the poison until you get to the doctor, and its also possible that
you dont (have to) go to the doctor. If his hwiy-work is good, thats
enough, thats it. 42. This in reference to the scorpion and the viper and
the snake . . . and these things.
8.5.1 Transcript
43. (S) lwalad . . . lwalad biygm . . . aza srih . . . biyf albint . . .
44. (R) bifha wn? (S) biyfha fi masrah h a w h srh ah b anamhe. 45.
jabatuh . . . iw h l . . . biygm . . . biyxarrf um m uh, h m biyxarrf ubh,
biyxarrf um m uh. 46. ummu h bitxarrf ubh. bitgl lwalad . . . ryid bint
ifln . . . imn larab iliflniyyah. . . . 47. biygm ubh . . . biyrawwih l ub
ha . . . iw . . . biyrawwih l ubha w biyxarrfuh. 48. w um m uh . . . bitrawwih
l um m albint, iw bitxarrifhe. gl abuw lbint mh maxatbeh . . . iw bin-
jawwizkuw . . . hda fh kalm tniy. 49. gl abuw lbint maxatbeh66 . . .
hda fh kalm. gl abuw lbint kamn yizha walad ammha . . . hda
fh kalm tniy. 50. iw fh ns biyffa . . . min tanabh.67 tanabh alliy
induh biyf bint ibtijbuh . . . biyxarrf um m uh. 51. biygl ana yz ilbint
lifln diy. 52. bitrawwih l um m ha w bitxarrifha w tasalha w itgl h
lbint maxatbah walla bint ass ibnt walla kidiy walla kidiy . . . 53.
bitxarrifha. baadn ubh . . . biyrawwih l arrijjl . . . abuw lbint . . . iw biyx-
arrfuh. 54. biyxarrfuh gl h biyjawwzuk xals albint mh maxatbah,
iygl luk xals. 55. iza lbint isayyrih biygl luk xalluk ugub sanah.
xalluk ugub xamis t-uhur, xalluk ugub sanatn . . . 56. biygm byadbah
alhe . . . biyjb tuh gl luh xalluk ugub sanah, sanatn . . . albint
isayyrih. 57. biygm biyjb tuh w yadbah h a. dabah h -ath algasalah.
58. min ym ath lgasalah xals irif hdiy h rumtuh, ib sinnt All h w
rasl-ath . . . gsalatuh . . .
66
maxatbah, gahawah-form of maxtbah.
67
tinb, tanaba member of the same encampment, see Stewart (1990, 273274,
glossary).
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 585
8.5.2 Translation
43. (S) The boy . . . the boy then goes . . . when he is out herding . . . he sees
the girl . . . 44. (R) Where does he see her? (S) He sees her in her herd-
ing place where she is herding her goats. 45. If he likes her. . . . and in
case. . . . he then goes . . . and speaks to his mother. He doesnt speak to his
father, he speaks to his mother. 46. His mother speaks to his father. She
says The boy wants (to marry) so-and-sos daughter . . . from so-and-sos
family . . . 47. His father then goes to her father . . . and . . . he goes to her
father and speaks to him. 48. And his mother . . . goes to the girls mother,
and speaks to her. If the father of the girl says she is not engaged . . . and
we will marry her into your family . . . (then) theres more talk. 49. If the
father of the girl says Shes engaged . . . (then) there is a talk. If the girls
father says Her cousin also wants (to marry) her, (then) theres more
talk. 50. And there are people who see her, of their neighbours . . . one
of his neighbours that he has sees a girl that he likes . . . 51. hell (then)
speak to his mother. Hell say I want (to marry) so-and-sos daughter.
52. She goes to her mother and speaks to her and asks her and she says
the girl is engaged or she is still an unbetrothed virgin or thus or thus...
53. After that his father speaks to her . . . he goes to the man . . . the girls
father, and he speaks to him. 54. He speaks to him. If he says that hell
marry the girl you, she is not engaged, hell say to you okay. 55. If the
girl is young, he says to you wait (until) after one year, wait (until)
after five months, wait (until) after two years. 56. He then slaughters
for her. He gets his sheep, if he says to him wait (until) after one year,
two years . . . the girl is (still too) young. 57. He then brings his sheep
and slaughters it. When he has slaughtered it, then they have betrothed
her.68 58. From the moment they have given him his twig, thats it, he
knows that this (girl) is (going to be) his wife, in the tradition of God
and His Prophet69 they have given him . . . his twig.
68
ath gasalah, lit. they have given him a twig. The twig is given to the groom in
betrothal ceremonies, who is then mxid gasalatha holding her twig, i.e. she has been
betrothed to him, see Bailey (1974).
69
The phrase b sinnt Al l h w rasluh in the tradition of God and His Prophet may
often be heard in additionused almost as an excuse in pre-emptionto the descrip-
tion of traditions, of which the islamic origin is doubtful (or non-existent).
586 rudolf de jong
8.6.1 Transcript
59. iw h l . . . gm xallha w ugub sanatn . . . zabbat70 lh atab, iw jb
idda byih , iw jb ibyt aar. 60. iw azam anns, iw gl lhuw lfarah
ind . . in All h jjimah jjyah jjimah lliy drha, iw banna lbyt . . . ym
alxims . . . assu bih . 61. iw sawwa. . . . atta h wiy. iw juw anns d kull
wh id ib h amltuh.71 kull wh id ib tuh . . . kull wh id ib h amltuh
w h rumtuh muh. 62. ym alfrah ind ifln [linna] imrawwh n
nah da ruh, kull wh id ib h amltuh. iw rawwah uw, iw ugub salt
alasir kamn . . . dabih . 63. dabah iw saww-laa. iw fh ns bitsaww-
alfitr . . alfarh 72 . . . arrjl w alih ra yyim biysawwin. 64. iw gassam . . . kurr
rijjl 73 firh ah iw h iggtuh lh amatuh fha . . . gassam alhuw . . . kullhuw.
65. iw ugm a74 bat iam baadn . . . ugub salt i . . . h awalha . . .
gm at iddah h iyyih.75 66. fh ns bitsawwiy dah h iyyih, iw fh ns bissaw-
wiy marbah.76 67. almarbah lliy h arrafh iy.77 w iddah h iyyah-lliy
h . . . alxumus. iddah h iyyah kull wh id biygl min induh . . .
8.6.2 Translation
59. And then the situation is . . . he leaves her be,78 and after two
years . . . he arranges the firewood, and brings animals for slaughter, and
brings tents. 60 And he invites people, and says to them the wedding
party is at my house, God willing, coming Friday, Friday next week
and he has set up the tents on Thursday . . . in the morning . . . 61. And
70
Although z as a phoneme is rare (and marginal as such) in Sinai bedouin dialects
(the current reflex for both *d and *d is interdental emphatic d), it is regular in lexemes
(loaned from MSA or Cairene Arabic) like zabbat , yzabbit arrange; do properly (Stew-
art (1990, 285286, glossary) transcribes z), n(i)zm system and z(u)rf circumstances,
see De Jong (2000, 60).
71
Although h amlah is listed by Blanc (1970, 114) in the meaning of clan, in dialects
of other tribes it means animal led to a festive occasion to be slaughtered as a present
for the host.
72
farh , sg. firh ah large flat (and thin) round bread baked on the sj.
73
kurr rijjl: assimilation of kull rijjl every man.
74
ugm a: assimilated ugb + ma.
75
dah iyyah a type of bedouin dance, see Bailey (1991, 436, glossary). During
dah iyyah, men stand in a line, while women dance in a line opposite to them.
76
In a marbah older men stand in a square facing each other.
77
It was later explained to me that the rafh iy is a dance unlike marbah: during
rafh iy, in which younger people take part, the boys will sing their rhyme, while the
girls dance in front of them (one at a time, often while holding a stick), which is much
more in line with the meaning associated with the root r-f-h , greet (new spouses) in
Hava (1982).
78
The verbal perfect forms used by the speaker have here been translated into imper-
fect forms.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 587
he has prepared the food (to be served before the wedding ceremony),
and the people have come, everyone with his slaughter animal, everyone
with his sheep. Everyone has his slaughter animal and his wife with him.
62. On the day of the wedding ceremony with so-and-so we go over
(to him) and bring him over. Everyone (goes) with his slaughter ani-
mal and goes, and also after afternoon prayer . . . (there is) slaughtering.
63. He slaughters and prepares dinner. And there are people who make
flat (unleavened) bread . . . farh . . . the men and women make them.
64. And he distributes . . . (to) every man a flat bread and his portion in
which there is his meat. . . . he distributes it to them . . . all of them. 65.
And after the sun has set, after that . . . after the evening prayer . . . round
about it (i.e. that time) . . . the dancing starts. 66. There are people who
do a dah iyyah, and there are people who do marbah. 67. The marbah
is the same as the rafh iy. And the dah iyyya is . . . the clapping of hands.
(during) The dah iyya everyone says his own lines (of poetry) . . .
8.7.1 Transcript
68. hda xams t-infr aarah . . . xamistar nafr biysawwuw, w
arraggsah h urmah wih dih . . . ibturgus alhuw. hda b innisbah l
addah h iyyeh. 69. w almarbah hdiy . . . m . . . biyrawbuw fh ar anns .
. . ijjihhl79 . . . alliy hinna lbant . . . ibyrugsin . . . w ilwild. 70. ijjihhl hdil
biysawwin . . . almarbah. 71. assmir da biysawwh ar aiyyb. anns
alkibir hdil bysumruw. ibysumruw a jl . . . ismuh smir. 72. amma
ddah h iyyah hdiy . . . biysawwha . . . kitr . . . fi Sna nih biysawwha
wjdah ddah iyyah. 73. ym alfar[h awt], iw ym azzawyir, iw ym
ald . . . biysawwuw ddah h iyyah. hda h . . .
8.7.2 Translation
68. This, five, ten . . . fifteen persons do this, and the dancer is one
woman . . . who dances before them. This as far as the dahiyyah is con-
cerned. 69. And this marbah . . . only young people take part in the
marbah . . . which is the girls . . . who dance . . . and the boys. 70. These
youngsters take part . . . in the marbah. 71. In the smir only older peo-
ple take part. These old people take part in the smir. They do a smir
on the fringe (of the main festivities) . . . it is called smir. 72. As far as
this dahiyyah is concerned . . . they do it . . . a lot . . . Here in Sinai they do
it a lot . . . the dahiyyah. 73. When there are weddings, and when there
79
jhil lit. ignorant is commonly used in Sinai for young or child.
588 rudolf de jong
are visits (to sheikhs tombs), and when there is the feast . . . they do a
dahiyyah. Thats it . . .
8.8.1 Transcript
74. (R) w alars . . . w al . . . (S) ilurs fi lbt (R) fi lbt . . . 75. (S)
ywah . . . alurs . . . itsawwiy zzaffih humma , iw jbha b ilarabiyyt iw
waddha . . . albt. 76. alurs hadiy btugud saba t-iyym, iw h fi lbt.
77. m btatla minnuh wala biyhiddh bt alfrah . . . mabniy . . . 78. sabi
t-iyym mn ajjimeh . . . l ajjimeh. 79. iw h gdih80 lars . . . batnuh . . . iw
irssa indaha. l(a:) jjimah jjyih. 80. ajjimah jjyih ssawwiy sib,
dabah luh h tn . . . 81. kamn h idi r alliy yiz yah da r,81 w alliy
mh yiz mh yiz . . . 82. iw ugub kidiy diy[t] waddha druh.
aza druh . . . hlih . . . waddha-yyha. mh hleh druh, iw h l . . . 83.
bitrawwih ind ummh a. ibtasrah ib anamha. 84. lam biysawwiy druh,
iw h l . . . iw hdiy h rumtuh induh. 85. hda b innisbah l ijjawzeh zayy
kidiy.
8.8.2 Translation
74. (R) And the bride and the groom. (S) And the bride is at home (R)
At home . . . 75. (S) Yes . . . the bride, they organise a wedding procession.
And they have brought her with cars and brought her over to the house
(tent). 76. The bride spends seven days (while she is) in the tent. 77.
She does not go out of it (i.e. the tent), nor do they take it down the
wedding tent . . . stands (lit. is built) 78. For seven days from Friday till
Friday. 79. And she sits inside it, the bride . . . while her groom is with
her. (all the time) until the next Friday. 80. The next Friday you celebrate
the weeks feast, he slaughters one or two sheep (for himself) . . . 81. And
also whoever wants to attend is present, and whoever does not want,
does not want . . . 82. And after that he then takes her to his house. If
his house is . . . ready, he takes her to it. If it is not ready his house, 83.
then the situation is. . . . she goes to her mother. She takes her cattle out
to graze. . . . 84. When he prepares his house, then the situation is . . . and
this is then his wife with him. 85. This is with reference to the wedding,
like this.
80
in gdah is quite high; when in neutral environmentsin the CCiC pattern
of the active participle tends to be realized near IPA [:].
81
he is present, notice the absence of the gahawah-syndrome here.
yah dar
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 589
8.9.1 Transcript
86. (R) bardu h alars ibturud? (S) ha? (R) fh ns biygluw inn alars
ibturud . . . (S) ibturud. iza mh rydtuh . . . ibtuurud innuh. 87. itgl
mn yztuh tgtir, tudxul ibyt bid . . . an um m ha w ubha tgtir
bad . . . 88. itgl mn yztuh. biyjbha luh tniy w biy . . . asil min
ym mh yiztuh turud . . . marra h marrtn taltih xals lzim
iytallighe . . . xals mh yiztuh. 89. hdiy lars. hda mitjaww . . .
mxidha asib . . . hda lzim iytalligha . . . 90. yiztuh, ibtugud imn
awwil l turud wala h jeh. 91. min ym yizt lwalad da xals. hda
lars . . . biysawwiy btuh, aza ind um m uh, aza ind arbnuh, aza ind
nasbtuh . . . taba art. 92. irt ind awwil ma jawwazh. aza gluw
la lzim tuskun indina . . . xals, biysawwiy btuh induhuw.
8.9.2 Translation
86. Does the bride flee as well?82 (S) What? (R) There are people who
say that the bride flees . . . (S) She flees. If she doesnt want him . . . she
flees from him. 87. She says I dont want him, she goes away and
enters houses83 far away . . . from her mother and her father, she goes far
away . . . 88. She says I dont want him. They bring her back to hem again
and he . . . because when she does not want him she flees . . . Once, twice,
three times, and thats it, he has to divorce her . . . Thats it, she doesnt
want him. 89. This is the bride. This one (man) married . . . has taken
her by force . . . this (person) must divorce her . . . 90. If she wants him,
shell sit with him from the start and wont flee or anything. 91. When
she wants the boy, thats it. This groom . . . sets up his house, be it with his
mother, be it with his clan, be it with his kin (of fathers side) . . . accord-
ing to the stipulations. 92. Conditions (that were agreed on) from the
moment they married him (to her). If they say No, she has to live with
us . . . then thats it, he sets up his house with them.
82
With some tribes it was customary for the bride to flee from her groom, see Murray
(1935, 182183).
83
The verb daxal, yudxul here actually means to enter a house to seek refuge (i.e. as
a daxl).
590 rudolf de jong
8.10 Agriculture
8.10.1 Transcript
93. (R) bardu h . . . anns ibyazrauw batt x? (S) ibyazrauw batt x . . . 94.
wagt lmatar fh ns ibyazrauw batt x . . . -lmatar. (R) kf biysaw-
wiy? (S) biysawwiy saddeh . . . imsawwayih min zamn . . . 95. ibyah aritta
-jjimal . . . ym lmatar biytx . . . iw biynaggitha . . . 96. (R) b ilijml, b
iljamal, fh fard? (S) aywah byah aritta . . . hda l algamih . . . 97. (R) iw
fh fard walla bitgluw h? (S) aywah, farid . . . farid . . . (R) iw alha bg?
(S) aywah, marbtah f-ljimal . . . iw msikka . . . arrijjl mn-wara. 98.
hda . . ibyah arit l algamih . . . hda . . . h ittih l algamih , iw xalla h ittih
l al . . . l albatt x. 99. albatt x da . . . nggatuh b ilfs. 100. bizruh fi jam-
buh, iw yah afir ingr a tl b ilfs iw h biynaggit. 101. albatt x hda
indma tili diy byatla -lmatar. min ym assaddih ruwynih byatla.
ibyunur . . . 102. biytaabbak fi baadu h biysr batt x wjid . . . bass
anniswn m tjh wala h add . . . 103. min ym ibybudruh biygtruw
annuh [ba] a jl. ibynkibis 104. in nkabas bz84 albatt x. hda . . . l
albatt x. 105. w algamh hda . . . ibyatla ym rabbna biyrd. 106. algamh
hda lliy binsawwiy minnuh l . . . addagg w alh l da, hda h. w attibin
. . . alliy h biyjbh l ajjml . . .
8.10.2 Translation
93. (R) Do people also grow watermellons? (S) They grow watermel-
lons . . . 94. At times of rain, there are people who grow watermel-
lons . . . on rain (water). (R) How does he do (it)? (S) He makes a dam . . . It
was made long time ago . . . 95. He ploughs it with the (plough drawn
by a) camel . . . When the rain falls . . . and he sows it. . . . 96. (R) With
camels, with the camel, is there a plough? (S) Yes, he ploughs it . . . this
wheat . . . 97. (R) And is there a plough, or what do you call it? (S) Yes, a
plough . . . (R) And with a (large trumpet-shaped) funnel on it? (S) Yes,
tied to the camel . . . and holding it . . . is the man at the back end. 98. This
(man) ploughs for (sowing) the wheat, a piece (of land) for the wheat,
and he leaves a piece (of land) for the . . . for the watermellons. 99. These
watermellons, he sows them with the hoe. 100. He keeps his seed by his
side, and he digs holes with the hoe while he sows.85 101. These water-
84
bz, ybz go bad is a loan from Egyptian; therefore z.
85
Lit. let drip, here in the meaning of dropping one or two seeds in a hole at a time.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 591
8.11.1 Transcript
107. (R) bardu h indukuw rh iy? (S) ha? (R) walla bitgluw , rh iy walla
rh h? (S) arrh h . . . [. . .] arrh h lliy h btath an algamih . . . hda-smha87
rh h h ajr . . . 108. (R) aywah. w alh urmah alliy btath an? (S) aywah
lh urmah btath an, iw fh irjl ibyath anuw. 109. (R) aywah, biysawwuw
? (S) biysawwuw fh ns ibyath anuw . . . aldra h. aldra h hdiy biysaw-
wuw minha . . . biysawwuw minha . . . libbih. 110. (R) ismuh ? ildra h?
(S) aldra h88 hdiy biysawwuw minha libbih. allibbah hdiy biysawwha
mn aldra h . . . ibyath anha a rh h.
8.11.2 Translation
107. (R) Do you also have hand mills? (S) What? (R) Or what do you
say? rh iy or rh h? (S) hand mill . . . The hand mill which grinds the
wheat . . . this is called the stone hand mill . . . 108. (R) Yes. And it is the
woman who does the grinding? (S) Yes, the woman does the grinding,
and there are men who grind (as well). 109. (R) Yes, what do they do?
(S) They do, there are people who grind . . . the sorghum. This sorghum
from which they make . . . they make libbah89 from it. 110. (R) What is
it called? ildra h? (S) From this corn they make the libbah. This libbah
they make it form the corn . . . they grind it on a hand mill.
86
Interestingly, saddah here means the area covered by water, rather than the bar-
rier blocking the water or dam itself.
87
ismha (with Cairene type of stress) instead of simha.
88
In group I dialects the form is more typically dra () (or with velarization marked in
the interdental, dr a()) and with article ddr a , see De Jong (2000, 82). For a remark on d
as a reflex for *d, see De Jong (2000, 332333).
89
Stewart (1990, 245, glossary) lists libbih as a small round of bread. A libbah, often
in other dialects referred to as gurs, is what men typically prepare themselves when they
are travelling, and women are not present. It is baked in glowing embers in clean sand.
592 rudolf de jong
8.12.1 Transcript
111. an l makn wala h jah byath an . . . w jjimal kamn, aza induh
jiml walla . . . jamaln walla burn, 112. aza m f h urmah fdy ih...
int ibtath an . . . biddi90 . . . biddi. biddi . . . yaniy aldra h . . . itxallha
mi dagg . . . itxallha majrih jari. 113. hda l alburn . . . l azzamil . . .
itain.91 hda kull ym . . . lzim tujuru lhin . . . imn aldra h diy. 114.
algamih hda . . . hda byath aninnuh duriy a rh h . . . dagg . . . dagg hda
zuwwdeh. 115. itdibb almazwad . . . alh l hda . . . addagg imn algamih .
aldra h hdiy . . . l alburn biyjirha. 116. [kull ym] hda lh l ulitta
btath an algamih , w ibtath an aldra h, iw kulluh. wi . . . w attibin hda . . . l
ijjml a tl. m biyath anh walla h jih bass ibyidirsh daris . . . ibydir-
suw lgamih minnuh . . . iw biywaddh a lj[l] . . . 117. (R) iw byidirsh b
h? fh lh ah kidiy walla . . . (S) aywah . . . (R) ismuh h? (S) fh ns ibydir-
suh bi l . . . b jjimal . . . biysawwiy luh madrs, ibydirsuh. 118. iw fh ns
halh n ibyidirsh b lmakan. (R) rif kilmit ilhjal?92 (S) alhjal . . . (R)
bitgl yaniy alhjal? (S) aywah . . . [. . .] alhjal hda biysawwuw minnuh,
ibydirsuw minnuh b jjimal. iw ar insn rif iysawwh . . .
8.12.2 Translation
111. Because there were no machines or anything, he grinds . . . and also
the camels, if he (a man) has a camel or . . . two camels or (more) cam-
els. 112. If there is not a woman free (to do it) for them . . . you grind . . .,
you grind coarsely, you grind coarsely. You grind coarsely . . . that is, the
sorghum . . . you do not turn it into flour . . . but you turn it into coarsely
ground corn. 113. This is for the camels . . . for the camels . . . to feed them
(at dinner time). This (you do) every day . . . you have to coarsely grind
(some) of this corn for them (i.e. the camels). 114. This wheat . . . this they
(f.) grind normally on the hand mill . . . flour . . . flour, this is (for) provi-
sions. 115. You fill the sack . . . (in) this case . . . with flour from wheat.
This corn is for the camels, they grind it coarsely . . . 116. [Every day] This
90
ddi, assimilated dd < td in tdi; da, ydi grind corn coarsely, see Stewart (1990,
211, glossary).
91
tain: an apocopated 2nd. p. m. sg. form (ta) of measure 2 verb aa, yaiy
feed dinner, with initial h- of the suffix -hin (camels are usually referred to in the f. pl.)
assimilated to the preceding voiceless consonant. The spelling here with triple is for
reasons of morphological transparency. The pronunciation is, however, not audibly dif-
ferent from doubled (IPA [( :)]).
92
hjal: a threshing board with sharp stones in its underside, on which the man
stands while it is being pulled by a camel.
dialects of the lgt and h amd ah 593
is how it goes (lit. its situation), you grind the wheat, and you grind the
corn, and everything. And this straw . . . goes (lit. is) straight to the camels.
They dont grind it or anything, they only thresh it properly. They thresh
the wheat from it . . . and they put it aside . . . 117. (R) And with what do
they thresh? Is there like a (wooden) board, or . . . (S) Yes . . . (R) What is
it callled? (S) There are people who thresh it with . . . with camels. . . . hell
make (for himself) a threshing floor. 118. And there are people now-
adays who thresh it with machines. (R) Do you know the word hjal? (S)
the hjal. . . . (R) Do you call it a hjal? (S) Yes . . . [. . .] This hjal (people)
do with it, they thresh with it with camels. And one has to know (how)
to do it . . .
CLASSICAL AND COLLOQUIAL ARABIC ARCHAISMS
Alan S. Kaye
California State University, Fullerton*
1. Introduction
* Shortly after Alans untimely death we received the proofs of his article. In deep
respect we insert his paper in this volume as it was at his passing on in appreciation for
what he contributed to our common field of interest (the editors).
1
This was originally presented to the joint session of the 216th meeting of the Ameri-
can Oriental Society and the 34th annual North American Conference on Afroasiatic
Linguistics on March 17th, 2006, in Seattle. I am thankful for the stimulating discussion
by the audience participants. I also wish to express my gratitude to Vit Bubenik, Gideon
Goldenberg, Wolfhart Heinrichs, Bob Hoberman, Jonathan Owens, Adrian Mcelaru,
Gary A. Rendsburg, Judith Rosenhouse, Aaron D. Rubin, Avi Shivtiel, Laurence J. (Taw-
fiq) Surfas, Rainer Voigt, and Bill Young for useful comments on a preliminary version.
2
According to Koehler and Baumgartner (1958, 466) and (1998, 466), this spelling
occurs 466 times in the Old Testament, while the plene spelling <lw> occurs only 35
times. Gary A. Rendsburg [p. c.] notes that the plene spelling occurs especially in Jer-
emiah, and that there are more instances of the interrogative and presentative /hall/
spelled plene than there are defectiva.
3
Let me comment on the notion of a pho(a)ethematic glottal stop, which occurs
in some Arabic dialects in final position; e.g., /mia/ he went. These are clearly inno-
vations within Arabic (noted by the medieval Arab grammarians as well) and are pa-
ralleled by similar occurrences in Neo-Aramaic dialects (thanks to Bob Hoberman,
p. c.). Neo-Aramaic /la/h/ is paralleled by Israeli Hebrew /lo/ and, in many ways, by the
English voiceless unreleased bilabial stop in yep and nope.
596 alan s. kaye
4
Hebrew refers to Biblical Hebrew unless otherwise noted.
5
The problem of stress is not a relevant consideration here and its discussion is thus
left unmarked. Let me take up the matter of the Hebrew final graphemic glottal stop.
Could this merely be an orthographic convention to distinguish two common words:
no, not and to him, originally spelled <lh> (= Classical Arabic <lh>), making it homo-
graphic to to her, and later spelled <lw>? The answer is clearly in the negative, since the
Proto-Semitic form contained a glottal stop.
6
Cf. Proto-Semitic ra head > Classical Arabic ras colloquial Arabic rs =
Hebrew r and Proto-Semitic *kas = colloquial Arabic ks = Hebrew ks (spelled with
aleph), although Gideon Goldenberg remarks that Anton Spitaler thought the glottal
stop in the last example was a hypercorrectiona theory that I find farfetched. Bob
Hoberman [p. c.] also notes the Hebrew verbs ymar he will say and ykal he will eat,
etc., that are spelled with aleph but where its phonetic realization as a glottal stop disap-
peared. Let me hasten to add that when it comes to a glottal stop, it is important to point
out that Hebrew /yir/ he will see retains it, whereas Classical Arabic /yar/ he will
see does not. Cf. Israeli Hebrew /lo/ absolutely not!. Although it is conceivable that the
glottal stop might go back to Proto-Hebrew times, it is much more likely that the latter
form is evidence of history repeating itself. Although the final glottal stop in this word
may originally be due to sound symbolism (cf. English yep and nope that are marked for
informal register, corresponding to more formal yes and no), the fact remains that it is
Proto-Semitic. Proto-Hebrew glottal stop in final position disappeared only to surface
again in Israeli Hebrew (see below) as a result of a linguistic cycle to give the root struc-
ture more than a mono-consonantal baseas a kind of Systemzwang. This is parallel to
Modern English ask < Old English aks, which is also once again the form (aks) in several
modern English dialects.
Concerning the Israeli Hebrew development, Judith Rosenhouse [p. c.] notes that it
seems to be a recent phenomenon and appears to be restricted to young adults, espe-
cially females, and seems to indicate abruptness or vehemence, particularly as an answer
to a yes-no question in order to stop someones nagging. When I suggested that this
might be a result of colloquial Arabic influence on Israeli Hebrew, she replied that this
was not possible, since it was used by native speakers of Hebrew who do not have direct
contact with Arabic speakers. Still, I pose the following question in rebuttal: does one
have to have direct contact to have influence? Bob Hoberman [p. c.] notes that the final
glottal stop in Israeli Hebrew is older than Rosenhouse thinks and it is not restricted to
just young adults and females, and is not mainly confined to nagging. Arabic full
investigation of this is, in my view, a desideratum.
7
The form with the geminated l actually gives a tri-consonantal body to this root: ll.
classical and colloquial arabic archaisms 597
8
The Ugaritic spelling with a glottal stop is erroneous, although Koehler and Baum-
gartner (1998, 466) cite it. Gideon Goldenberg [p. c.] informs me that the spelling with
aleph was originally postulated by G.R. Driver; however, others thought that this was a
verb meaning to be weakened or gleaming.
9
See Koehler and Baumgartner (1998, 45).
598 alan s. kaye
10
There are other prepositions in the Semitic languages which clearly have bi-con-
sonantal roots, such as Hebrew m- from < *min (Koehler and Baumgartner 1998, 535)
usually assimilated to the former form, and Hebrew al on < ly.
11
Jonathan Owens notes [p. c.] that the hamza was a post-hoc addition to Arabic
orthography, which is why the orthographic rules relating to it are so complicated.
12
Gideon Goldenberg [p. c.] comments that in early Modern Standard Arabic (e.g.,
Blq Press, Cairo), fully vocalized Modern Standard Arabic was printed with the hamza
sign on the alif only when the glottal stop is phonemic, such as in urdu I want. He
maintains: The rule to write the hamza where the glottal stop is a positional alternant
was adopted by the Egyptian Ministry of Education, then became rather popular.
classical and colloquial arabic archaisms 599
outputs of the development. Bob Hoberman [p. c.] suggests that /a/ >
// was only in closed syllables where the // was the syllable coda. The
relative chronologies of the various sound changes are also important
factors to consider affecting vowel quantity.
13
The Biblical Hebrew data in Section 2.0 of this essay have been taken from Koehler
and Baumgartner (1998), an updated and revised version of Koehler and Baumgartner
(1958). These 40 roots offer the evidence from other Semitic languages of roots ending
in aleph, corresponding to Proto-Semitic */la/ no, not.
14
It makes little difference whether this happened in Proto-Hebrew or a pre-Hebrew
dialect.
15
It is important to point out that the aleph is pronounced in various conjugated
forms of tertiae-aleph roots; e.g., /b
/ they entered, /y
b/ they will enter.
600 alan s. kaye
6. /h/ he
Classical Arabic /huwa/ but Bedouin Arabic /h/. Cf.
the // in Geez /wt/ (Koehler and Baumgartner
226). /h/
she works the same as /h/. Cf. Geez /yt/. Koeh-
ler and Baumgartner (1998) do not cite Bedouin Arabic
*/h/, but it probably exists (Koehler and Baumgart-
ner 226). Koehler and Baumgartner (226) reconstruct
Proto-Ethiopian Semitic */hatu/ he and */hati/
she. Gideon Goldenberg [p. c.] notes that Qumranic
Hebrew /ha/ he and /ha/ she parallel the Classi-
cal Arabic forms with /-a/.
7. hb /nhb
/ hide oneself
Classical Arabic /xabaa/ hide (Koehler and Baum-
gartner 270)
8. /h
g
/ shame; confusion
Classical Arabic /xajaa/ look ashamed (Koehler and
Baumgartner 275)
9. /h
t
/ miss the mark
Classical Arabic /xati a/ make a mistake; sin Wehr
(1974, 245)
Koehler and Baumgartner (1998) cite Classical Arabic
/xati ya/. Ugaritic /xt /, Biblical Aramaic /xt
/, Old
South Arabian /xt/, Geez xt (Koehler and Baum-
gartner 288)
10. /h
l
/ fall ill
Classical Arabic /xalaa/, Old South Arabian /hl/ fall
ill (Koehler and Baumgartner 298). Gary A. Rends-
burg [p. c.] notes that this root is a by-form of /hly/
become weak (Koehler and Baumgartner 300) =
Middle Hebrew and Jewish Aramaic /hl/.
11. /hm
(h)/ sweat; butter
Ugaritic /xmt/; Jewish Aramaic /xm
()/ (Koeh-
ler and Baumgartner 308)
12. /y
re/ fear
Ugaritic /yr/ (Koehler and Baumgartner 399); Avi
Shivtiel [p. c.] adds Classical Arabic waraa to repel,
listed in Lane Vol. 8 (1893, 2933).
13. /k
l
/ restrain; keep from
classical and colloquial arabic archaisms 601
21. /m
r
/ feed
Classical Arabic /maria/ agree with (of food), Ugaritic /
mr/ (Koehler and Baumgartner 563)
22. /mass
/ Masu
= /masu/ name of a North Arabian tribe (Koehler and
Baumgartner 570)
23. /n
/ half done
Classical Arabic /na/ be raw, uncooked (especially of
meat) (Wehr 1974, 1014) (Koehler and Baumgartner 570)
24. nb denominative of /n
/ prophet
Classical Arabic /nuba/ prophecy, /tanabbaa/ (Form
V) to prophecy (Wehr 1974, 937) (Koehler and Baum-
gartner 586)
25. nd drive (cattle); detach, remove from
Geez nd drive cattle
26. /n
/ lift up
Classical Arabic /naaa/, Phoenician, Moabite, Ugaritic
/n/, Old South Arabian /n/, Geez ns (Koeh-
ler and Baumgartner 638) Biblical Hebrew /nm/
clouds; damp; fog, Classical Arabic /na/ hovering
clouds (Koehler and Baumgartner 638)
27. /n
/ lay claim; lend
Middle Hebrew ny, Classical Arabic /nasaa/ grant
credit (Wehr 1974, 959) (Koehler and Baumgartner
638)
28. /s
l
(h)/ participle /msull
m/ be paid pointing to sl
Classical Arabic /salaa/ pay promptly (Koehler and
Baumgartner 658)
29. /pl/ miracle
Classical Arabic /fal/ good omen (Koehler and Baum-
gartner 759)
30. /pr/ zebra16
Classical Araic /fara/ wild ass; onager (Wehr 1974, 701).
The Akkadian cognate is purmu. (Koehler and Baum-
gartner 775). Vit Bubenik [p. c.] states that Akkadian
par mule is closer phonologically than is purmu.
16
Although Koehler and Baumgartner (1998, 775) translate zebra, this is erroneous
for onager (thanks to Wolfhart Heinrichs and Gary A. Rendsburg for this correction).
classical and colloquial arabic archaisms 603
3. Conclusion
The basic thesis of this work is to affirm that Classical Arabic should
stop being referred to as the preserver of all, or nearly all, original Proto-
Semitic phenomena. This paper suggests that certain Classical Arabic
forms are indeed secondary, as e.g., /l/ no discussed above. Consider
also Classical Arabic qalb heart < * lbb heart. The latter root is also fully
preserved in Classical Arabic lubb heart = Hebrew leb and Akkadian
libbu < Proto-Semitic *libbu (= Proto Afro-Asiatic */lib-/ ~ */lub-/ (Orel
and Stolbova 1995, 362). Moreover, Egyptian ib supports Proto-Semitic
*libbu, while the vocalism in Classical Arabic lubb can be explained as
the result of regressive labial assimilation. Thus, Classical Arabic q- in
qalb is a remnant of a prefix of some kind or root determinative17 used
in an old Arabic dialect or an earlier Semitic language antedating Clas-
sical Arabic (cf. Classical Arabic qadima or qadama to gnaw; compress
the lips (Wehr 1974, 544 < damma bring together further suggestive of
q- as a root determinative of some kind). Additional comparisons along
the lines of the present investigation of Classical Arabic and colloquial
Arabic dialects with other Semitic languages will undoubtedly further
17
Harsusi /helbb/ and Mehri /hewbb/ have /h-/ before the root /lb/ heart, which is
apparently lost in Soqotri /elbeb/ and Sheri /b/. Mokilko (East Chadic) /ulbo/ heart
looks as though it displays */q/ > //, as occurs in many eastern Arabic dialects.
classical and colloquial arabic archaisms 605
4. References
Hinds, Martin and El-Said Badawi. 1986. Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic: Arabic-English.
Beirut: Librairie du Liban.
Kaye, Alan S. 1972. Arabic /iim/: Arabic Synchronic and Diachronic Study. Linguistics
79, pp. 3172.
. 1976. Chadian and Sudanese Colloquial Arabic in the Light of Comparative Arabic
Dialectology. The Hague: Mouton and Co.
Koehler, Ludwig and Walter Baumgartner. 1958. Lexicon in Veteris Testamenti Libros.
Leiden: E.J. Brill. (Abbreviated Koehler and Baumgartner 1958.)
. 1998. A Bilingual Dictionary of the Hebrew and Aramaic Old Testament. Leiden:
Brill. (Abbreviated Koehler and Baumgartner 1998.)
Lane, Edward William. 1893. An Arabic-English Lexicon. London: Williams and Nor-
gate. (Reprinted 1968, Beirut: Librairie du Liban.)
Madina, Maan Z. 1973. Arabic-English Dictionary of the Modern Literary Language. New
York: Pocket Books.
Moscati, Sabatino, Anton Spitaler, Edward Ullendorff, Wolfram von Soden, eds. 1964.
An Introduction to the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages (Porta Lin-
guarum Orientalism). Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.
Orel, Vladimir E. and Olga V. Stolbova. 1995. Hamito-Semitic Etymological Dictionary.
Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Sobelman, Harvey and Richard S. Harrell, eds. 1963. Arabic Dictionary of Moroccan
Arabic. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press.
Wehr, Hans. 1974. A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic. 3rd ed. by J. Milton Cowan.
Ithaca, N.Y.: Spoken Language Services.
DO THEY SPEAK THE SAME LANGUAGE? LANGUAGE USE
IN JUBA LOCAL COURTS
Catherine Miller
IREMAM-CNRS of Aix en Provence, France
1. Introduction
languages, the local speakers (Nubi people from Uganda or Kenya and
all Sudanese Southerners) are expected to speak what the linguists have
described as Juba Arabic and Ki-Nubi. This is what is happening for
example in the case of language tests applied to asylum seekers in a
number of European countries. If somebody claims to be a Southern
Sudanese but speaks an Arabic variety close to Northern Sudanese col-
loquial varieties instead of the Juba Arabic described by the linguists,
he cannot be a true Southerner. Asked to provide some counter-exper-
tises, I realized that the way of speaking of these doubtful Southerners
was sometimes rather similar to some cases I recorded long ago in some
local courts of Juba, with well-attested Southerners!
In many contexts, most Sudanese Southerners constantly shift from
a more Creole level of Juba Arabic (or basilectal level) to a level more
influenced by Northern Sudanese Colloquial Arabic (mesolectal level).
The coexistence of different levels of Juba Arabic was first highlighted by
U. Mahmud (1979), who applied the Creolistic concepts of continuum
and basilectal and mesolectal varieties to describe the variation found
in the verbal system. I dedicated a number of papers to emphasize the
degree of variation and diversity included under the generic label of
Juba Arabic (Miller 1984, 1987, 1989).
In the continuum approach, each pole (basilectal/mesolectal) is char-
acterized by a number of specific features (isoglosses), while the inter-
mediate levels of the continuum are characterized by different degrees
of occurrence and melting of the various features. It appears, however,
that it is extremely difficult to draw an implicational scale that will be
characterized by a regular acquisition of dialectal features along the
continuum scale. In fact, each speaker tends to have its own way of mix-
ing the various features, some focusing more on phonological features,
others on lexicon or morphological features.
I myself, insisted on the fact that the evolution of Juba Arabic was far
from linear, and was not automatically leading to a process of decreoliza-
tion. Different trends of change and restructuration were simultaneously
recorded in a city like Juba and different influences were operating on
the daily language; one leading towards a rapprochement to Khartoum
Arabic, the other toward what I have called a process of vernaculariza-
tion (Miller 1987).
speakers conscious that they are mixing different features and variables
in their speech? Do the speakers and auditors have the same perception
than an outsider linguist?
dealing with personal status cases involving at least one Bari participant.
The President of Kator B court was a Bari (Stephen, a retired police-
man), assisted by two or three Bari elders. The language of communica-
tion was mainly Juba Arabic, Bari and a few English.
The localization and specialization of each court influenced the
language use. In Juba, the Garawiyya court was far more exposed to
the influence of NSA than the Kator B court. In the Garawiyya, only 4
speakers, not resident in Juba, spoke in their native vernaculars, while
35 speakers spoke only in Arabic (with 16 speaking a more mesolectal
variety and five speaking NSA). In Kator, 10 speakers spoke mainly in
Bari against 24 in Arabic (with none speaking NSA and 14 more or less
mesolectal):
The above figure classifies each speaker according to the use of one
dominant language (English, NSA, JA and Non Arabic Vernaculars). In
fact, the delimitation between each language was not that clear-cut and
there were many cases of language mixing, as will be evident in the Cor-
pus presented in 5. Appendices, the texts: 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3.
The samples presented in the Appendix are taken from three cases, con-
sidered to be representative of three types of speaker. The participants
involved in Case 1, belong to the important Nilotic Dinka-speaking
group, a non-local Juba ethnic group. Not well-educated, they speak
Juba-Arabic as a second language. In Case 2, the participants belong to
a small ethnic group from Western Southern Sudan (Bay from Bahr al
Ghazal Region), are educated, work in the police or the army, and speak
a level of Arabic very much influenced by NSA and WSA (Western
language use in juba local courts 611
Sudanic Arabic). In Case 3, speakers are all Bari Juba citizens and speak
Bari or a vernacularized Juba Arabic, very much influenced by Bari
features.
In both courts, the procedure was rather similar. The case starts with
an oath (on the Bible, the Qurn, or a spear according to the partici-
pants religion),see (s.9) in Case 1 and (s.14) in Case 2. Then the plain-
tiff tells his/her story; after some questions, the judge summarizes the
story and asks the defendant to present his/her own version. Additional
questions follow; sometimes, additional testimonies are required. After
listening to all parties, the Court deliberates and announces its verdict.
While most cases took between 30 to 40 minutes in Juba, they could
take hours in the villages. Cases tended to be shorter in the Garawiyya
than in Kator.
The two Dinka participants (the translator and the witness) use inde-
pendent personal pronouns and invariable verbal stems like Translator
(T.) in sentence (s.3) nina m dr mi we dont want to go or sentence
language use in juba local courts 613
(s.5) ya na klem le ede I talked to him like this. The pronuncia-
tion shows the influence of the Dinka Mother Tongue, particularly con-
cerning the realization of the phonemes // /s/ and /z/ realized as [] (a
frequent pronunciation among Nilotic speakers) like in en what (JA
senu /NSA en); ol somebody (NSA zl/ JA jol), etc. Vernacular influ-
ence is also noticeable in the realization of the vowels, with a tendency
to realize /e/ like an open [] and /o/ like an open [
]: k (s.3), le (s.5),
bls (s.12), barf (s.13), nugasr (s.12), b and ka (s.16), etc.
The Dinka witness (W) realizes a number of inflected verbal forms
and affix pronouns:
(s.12) nugasr (JA ana bigeseru/NSA agaar)to limit, shorten, (s.20) axk
(JA aku btak) your brother, gutta lek (JA ana gale le-ita) I told you,
negabel (JA. ana bigabalu/NSA agbil) I meet, nesalem (JA ana biwodi
salam to/NSA asallam) I great, neddu (JA ana wodi leo/NSA nadd) I
gave him). It may be noted that 1st sg. imperfective form is n- + verb
(similar to WSA) and not a- + verb (= NSA).
The secretary (S) has a JA pronunciation: (s.1) asrin twenty (NSA
arn), asan because (NSA an), jl person (NSA zl) but izebu he
brings (JA jibu/ NSA ijib).
The Judge displays many instances of phonological variation: z/j (s.2)
win zl el-brefu jl da (with dominance of [j] cf. (s.4); x/k (s.6) axu
brother, (s.15) kemsa five, (s.17) inta bikutu you put; /s (s.4) aan/
asan because, (s.17) musu isnt it.
He keeps many invariable verbal forms: cf. (s.4) nina il we take, (s.8)
nina balasu we stop, (s.21) inta bigul sehi you say right, etc. and many
independent personal and possessive pronouns: (s.9) el-mahkma nadi
eta the Court calls you; (s.15) inta baarfo aglaK bitao you know his
behavior? (s.21) weled btak suker winu where is your small boy?
The mesolectal variables include the 2nd sg. personal pronoun inta
you (JA ita), pl. deictic del this (JA de), definite article l (JA de) and
a number of conjugated verbal forms: (s.9) twori you show, (s.21)
kizibta you lied, sarkta you stole, etc. The conjugation of verbs leads
to some cases of malapropism such as (s.9) nasaltak we ask you with
the coexistence of n- 1st pers. imperfective and -t 1st or 2nd pers. per-
fective. Another mix form is the verb gul in (s.4) bas iji wri gl he
just come to tell that (JA bas bija wori gale/ NSA iji igl or iji iworri
innu). The insertion of mesolectal features increases at the end of the
case (s.22), when the Judge is enouncing his verdict and is using a num-
ber of technical terms such as tazwir falsification, jiza faults/penalty.
614 catherine miller
Note however that the Judge always alternates basilectal and mesolectal
realizations like the alternation sarkta/ita sereG in (s.22).
(NSA saa), saba morning NSA ab), talta I came (NSA talat) but
end of (s.17) sa'a fekka the watch dropped. She conjugates almost all
verbal forms: cf. (s.15) jit, saketta, zitta, hum zdu and (s.17) gumta,
wageftu, gulta, tetfahim, netfahim, maet, etc. Object pronouns and
possessive pronouns are systematically suffixed: (s.15) garas-ni fi-sulb-i
he pinched me in my buttocks; (s.17) dagga-ni, axwn-i, masak-ni,
xam-ak, bedugg-k, etc. She uses a number of TMA auxiliaries, like
gam and ja to mark inchoative:
(s.15) ana gumta zitta katwa btay I accelerated my walk
(s.17) da tawli masakn ja garasni He immediately sized me and
start to beat me
waled de ja gam darabni bunya The boys started to beat me
strongly.
Hawa masters the morphological rules of NSA and shows very few
occurrences of malapropism or mix form. Gender and plural agreement
however remains irregular: (s.15) ana jay I came-masc., ana mya
I went-fem.; (s.17) arabiya aba yagif the car (f.) refused (masc.) to
stop (masc.), awld der iyamal mayi mukel boys (pl.) want (sg.) he-
makes with me problems/ the boys want to make me problems.
Defendant 1 (John Gabriel, s.28, s.30, s.34) starts answering both Judges
with mesolectal features:
(s.7) J2 sgol btk ? Your work D1: m el/ tleb Not
working/student
(s. 24) samtu I heard-it
(s.28) ana kunt jay min hay kmryal li-l-bT I was coming from district
Commercial to the house.
Then he alternates between few inflected verbal forms and many
invariable verbal forms as well as between affixed and independent
pronouns:
(s.30): ma blis gaadn isugg zl de / uman ft giddm/ ana ja wara/ nama
ana wosol mbil/
/he and police stay-pl they-drive person this/ they pass (sg.) in front/ I
came (inv.) behind/ when I arrive (inv.) Mobil/
He and the police officer were driving this person, they passed in front,
I was coming behind when I arrived at the Mobil Station.
(s. 38) bass darab bitoman ana ja katal /only fight of-them I came (inv.) kill
(inv.)/
I just came to stop their fight.
616 catherine miller
Defendant 2 (William Peter, s.45, s.47, s.51) realizes many inflected ver-
bal forms and affix pronouns:
(s.52) gabodni zamn gale nemi-l-nukta niuf/ min wisolta unak an
nera mukila bta dn kif
/they-size-me (3rd perf.) time say I-go (1st imp.) the post I-see (1st
imp)/from I-arrived (1st perf.) there for I-see (1st imp) problem of
John how/
They captured me when I went to the police station to see/since I
arrived there to assess the problem of John . . .
Like the Dinka witness in Case 1, William uses the WSA n- 1st sg. imper-
fect pers. pronoun instead of NSA a-. Note also the use of verb gale say
to introduce an embedded sentence (zamn gale time that).
The witness (W. the soldier) starts with a formal mesolectal level:
(s.75) ana kunta aal fi-l-jawazt, ana sken fi Muluk I was work-
ing in the passports, I lived in Muluk. But very quickly he alternates
between basilectal and mesolectal features: ana jit ja wosolu fi medresa
/ana ft/ fialan fatet.. I arrive near the school/ I passed/ of course I
passed; baadin ana jt ana gul when I arrived I say, ana gulta tayib
ya axwna matakum sakal bit fi tarka zede I said good oh my broth-
ers, dont quarrel a girl in this way (note JA negative imperative marker
matakum dont!).
He ends up speaking almost only Juba-Arabic, including at the pho-
nological level ( >s, x > k). Unlike the speakers of Case 1, his level of
Juba Arabic is more grammaticalized. It includes many verbal TMA
markers as well as embedded sentences:
(s.75bis) d tawli gum amol musakl fo mbili li raat ma aoz kaser mrat bta
arabiya zatu
He immediatly started making problems in the Mobil station until
he was almost breaking the mirror of the car
ana bija ft fi jawazt ya neselem kelem kabr li jamaa fi taakir el ana
akr line zaman
I was going to the passeport (office) in order to bring the news to
the people about the delay that I delayed before.
Compared to Case 1, Judge 1 (Ramadan) shows the same level of pho-
nological variation (s/, x/k, z/j) but uses more lexical and morphologi-
cal mesolectal features (see s.25, s.37, s.52, s.74, s.79). It may be noted
that in (s.25) when Judge1 is summarizing the testimony of the police-
language use in juba local courts 617
woman, he makes more gender agreement than she did and employs the
2nd and 3rd fem. personal pronouns inti and iya:
(s. 25) el-bint de gl iya maya The girl said (masc.) that she was going
(fem.);
inti jya min wn you (fem.) coming (fem.) from where?;
saa btao fakkat waga watch (fem.) of-him drop (fem.) fall (mas.).
But he also mixes with more basilectal JA and consistently uses the
invariable form gul say:
(s. 25) intakum gul inti ermuta sakeT you-pl say you (fem.) prostitute only
(s. 52) nker u gl woket dak kalam inti gul ma hasal klu-klu
deny and say time-that word you (f.) say not happen all-all/
He denied and said (that) at that time what you say never happened.
As in Case 1, the conjugation of verbs and auxiliaries leads to cases of
malapropism or mix forms.:
(s.52) asa nafarn de badi sumit kalamu /now person-Dual this after I-lis-
tened word-his/
now after I listened the word of these two persons (sumit vs. JA asuma
and NSA samit)
fi tarka gmo daribtu bi daraba adid /in way they-stand you-beat
with beat strong/ On the way you started to beat her strongly (gmo
vs. NSA gumtu).
Compared to Judge 1, Judge 2 (see s.66, s.70, s.76, s.78), sticks to a more
basilectal pronunciation ( > s, x > k, etc) and grammar:
(s. 66) musu barau rtan bta bay keda wonos /Neg alone language of Bay
like-this spoken/
Isnt it a specific Bay language which is spoken? (note the impersonal
structure rendered by shift of stress to the final syllable of wonosu).
Case 2 highlights the coexistence of different levels (types?) of (Juba)
Arabic and different degrees of mixing. The level of the police-lady and
the intermediate level of Judge 1 and D2 could be an indication that the
mesolectal level is indeed the prestigious urban formal level that people
speak or try to speak in formal context like the Court. This hypothesis is
however not sustained by the data from Kator B Court, which indicates
another type of urban use.
618 catherine miller
A number of words are common to both JA and Bari like mali dowry
from Arabic maal money, or kurju cultivate from Bari kuruju. Some
expressions are idiomatic translations from Bari expressions such as
(s.38) tusu bujak ~tufu buzaK spit saliva, i.e. give benediction.
language use in juba local courts 619
3. Conclusion
norm. He also never commented about the language use of the other
participants. As for Stephen, he always spoke a basilectal vernacularized
Juba Arabic and was playing between Bari and Juba Arabic. He often
made some comments about the Southern identity (ena fi januub here
in the South, kalam bta januub words/languages of the South, arabi
bitana bta januub our Southern Arabic) and once criticized a young
man talking like a Northerner.
The language use of the Judges indicate that while the Garawiyya
Court was influenced by its surrounding Arabized Malekiyya neighbor-
hood, the Kator B Court was influenced by the Bari surrounding, even
if most speakers prefer to speak Arabic rather than Bari. Two types of
urban models were present here. On the one hand, the Northern Suda-
nese Arabized urban model symbolized by the merchant community
(both Arabs and non Arabs living near-by), which still had an influence
upon part of the Southern population (old settlers as well as newcomers).
On the other hand, the East African urban model (Nairobi, Kampala)
brought back by the returnees and supported by the local Churches and
the political Southern activists. In 1984, at the breaking of the second
civil war, these two urban models were still coexisting together with
more rural traditional ways of life. Language diversity, as well as religious
and ethnic diversity, were considered natural components of the city.
How far did somebody like Hawa, the young Bay policewoman,
and Stephen, the former policeman or Gabriel consider that they were
speaking the same language (Juba-Arabic?), or that they were speaking
two different languages? This was a question that I did not ask at the
time of recording and that I cant answer. I later worked with some Bari
informants in Khartoum. They could very easily reproduce Creole/basi-
lectal Juba Arabic features, when asked to do so. For those who knew
NSA, they were perfectly able to distinguish between the two systems.
They had therefore a clear consciousness of what JA was, as a distinctive
linguistic system. I noticed, however, that when I asked some of them
(students trained in linguistics) to transcribe some of the tapes recorded
in Juba local Courts, they tended to systematically transcribe them in a
basilectal Juba Arabic phonology, without reproducing the mesolectal
variations. It was as if, for them, people from Juba were speaking one
language. I did not discuss with them the reasons of their attitudes and
I dont know if they were not aware of these variations.
The recording of natural corpora help to better grasp the natural
diversity. But it makes the linguistic analyses more complex and renders
the concept of autonomous linguistic system rather problematic. As it
language use in juba local courts 621
4. References
Heine, Bernd. 1982. The Nubi Language of Kiberia. An Arabic Creole. Berlin: Dietrich
Reimer.
Luffin, Xavier. 2005. Un crole arabe: le kinubi de Mombasa, Kenya. Muenchen: Lin-
com.
Mahmud, Ushari. 1979. Variation and Change in the Aspectual System of Juba Arabic.
Ph.D. thesis, Georgetown University.
Miller, Catherine. 1984. tude socio-linguistique du dveloppement de larabe au Sud
Soudan. Thesis, University of Sorbonne Nouvelle-Paris III.
. 1987. De la campagne la ville. volution fonctionnelle de larabe vhiculaire
en Equatoria (Sud Soudan). Bulletin du Centre dEtude des Plurilinguismes (Nice) 9.
126.
. 1989. Kelem kalam bitak: langues et tribunaux urbains en Equatoria. Matriaux
Arabes et Sudarabiques (Paris) 2. 2358.
. 1993. Restructuration morpho syntaxique en Juba-Arabic et Ki-Nubi: propos du
dbat universaux/superstrat/substrat dans les tudes croles. MAS-GELLAS Nouvelle
Srie 5. 137174.
. 2001. Grammaticalisation du verbe dire et subordination en Juba Arabic. Leons
dAfrique. Filiation, rupture et reconstitution des langues: un hommage G. Manessy,
ed. by Robert Nicola, 455482. Leuven: Peeters.
Owens, Jonathan. 1991. Nubi, Genetic Linguistics and Language Classification.
Anthropological Linguistics 33, 130.
. 1997. Arabic-based Pidgins and Creole. Contact Languages. A Wider Perspec-
tive, ed. by Sarah G. Thomason, 125172. Amsterdam-Philadelphia: John Benjamins
Publishing.
. 2001. Creole Arabic: the Orphan of all Orphans. Anthropological Studies 43,
3. 348378.
Tosco, Mauro and Jonathan Owens. 1993. Turku: A Descriptive and Comparative
Study. SUGIA 14. 177268.
Tosco, Mauro. 1995. A Pidgin Verbal System: The case of Juba Arabic. Anthropological
Linguistics 37, 4. 423459.
Versteegh, Kees. 1984. Pidginization and Creolization: the Case of Arabic. Amsterdam-
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Watson, Richard. 1984. Juba Arabic for Beginners. Juba: Summer Institute of Linguistics.
Wellens, Ineke. 2005. The Nubi Language of Uganda. An Arabic Creole in Africa. Leiden:
E.J. Brill.
Yokwe, Elisai M. 1985. The Diversity of Juba-Arabic. Studies in African Linguistics,
Supplement 9. 323328.
622 catherine miller
5. Appendices
(8) J. Tyeb / kan uwo ra ma axu bitao / ma rajel bitao / uwa birh wri nas
del / yajeb nas del / ma fi kalam dosoman / keli nasma blis lokan fi blis
Good / she should go with her brother / her husband / she goes to tell
this people / she brings this people / there will be no troubles / lets listen
to the police if there is a policeman.
[interruption] The policeman refuses to go with the woman and says:
/ you can not approve a sick man / you cannot approve it a all / because
we blis ma negder/. ./
(8bis J.) its up to us / lakin de ya ma besma min kalm tay aja zede / de fikra ana
kelem ta sakeT maales / kan keda kwayis / izakan u ma jebu nas de / jol
/ nas el beld el ja wri isem / nina balasu-l-gedya /
Its up to us / but this one does not listen to me / this was a simple
idea / no matter / if so ok / if she does not bring the people / the per-
son / people of the village who come to show the name / we will end
the case.
[the case is suspended, the woman goes outside and comes back with a
witness]
(9) J. inta bahalef harba wala bk / bibl / asma el-mahkma ndi eta aan
haja / nasaltek aja / twori kalam mosbt inta baaref / eta ma tddisu
/ mara de gl aslu inta baarfu jl de / jl de gabel keda besuf ?
You swear on the spear or on the Book? / the Bible? / Listen the Court
call you for something / we ask you something / you tell the right thing
you know / you dont hide / this woman say that you know this person /
this person did you see her before?
(10) W. jol de / ana baaref yisim bita / isem t maluk / maluk aywen
This person / I know his name / his name is Maluk / Maluk Aywen
(11) J. inta arfu da mitin
Since when do you know him?
(12) W. Ya zl taban ana bigul neya /asa jina asa al ma ksel ydi / fa wd
de ma al u bls masa alna / u wd de taban u barefu zol de taban /
lakin u mubleK / badelma ana baref zol de / ana ma mumken nugasr
gediya bita l / interruption /
O naturally I will say the truth / actually I work as a cleaner / and
the boy came to me and the police came to me / and this boy of course
he knows this person / but he is the plaintiff / since I know him (not
clear if it is the plaintiff or the defendant) I cannot shorten(?) his case
if
624 catherine miller
this person I know where does he sleep / and what does he do during the
day I dont know / I meet him on the way, I great him / and I would give
him food? / Didnt I have brothers that I all raised?
(21) J. to W. izakan ita kan kazb / inta begul sehi lama kan l-mahkma sala
/ lokan gal ana aarfa kalam btau uwa jol batl / lakin inta bet-
kelem ez-zn / l-haG / inta gul ma baaref el aja uwo baamol /
bes inta ligo fi seka bes / de mus kwayis? / tb ya mara / weled btak
suker winu
If you were a liar / you would have say true when the Court ask you / if
you had say I know hos words he is a bad man / but you speak the right /
the truth / you say you dont know what is he doing / you just meet him
on the way / isnt it fine? / Ok woman / where is your small boy?
(22) J. to D. delwokti maakama ligak bi galata galatatn / alla inta kizibta
/ inta gulta isma bitaki Deng / wa hini akwana btk igulu l de
ms isema btak / da tazwir / isem btak Maluk Aywen / de barau
jiza / jiza numro itnin / sarkta dura bta mara de / inta sarkta
dura li"ana inta gr isma bitak / lokan ita ma serG inta ma mum-
kin bitager isma btk /. . . [the story continues again and again..] /
fa keda /nina binsuf nas / daiman mujrimin ketr / nama gabod
bikr isem /. . ./ an keda kalam de nihna gul inta muznb ala-
t-tnin / fa kalam el-mahkama / inta biyemsi sita suur fi sijin /
izakan inta ma jibtu talta u taltin gine bta mara de / w jiza
btk an inta xin l-aman / inta bmsoku talata suur / kulu juma
s-sijin btak tesa sar / izakan ma dafa grs / kan dafa grus inta
tla bara min sijin
Now the Court find you with two faults / today you lied / you said
your name is Deng / and your brothers say no its not your name / this
is falsification / your name is Maluk Aywen / this alone is a fault / the
fault number two / you stole the sorghum of this woman / you stole
the sorghum because you changed your name / if you did not steal you
would not change your name / [the story continues] and like this / we
see people / many criminals always / when they are taken they change
their names / because of this we say that you are culprit for two things
/ and the decision of the Court / you go six months in jail / if you dont
bring the 33 pounds of this woman / and your fault that you are a per-
jurer / you take three months / the total of the jail is nine months / if you
dont pay the money / if you pay you will got out from the jail.
626 catherine miller
gl filn ana gibel hink / akala hsel ana f / ya al-amal min ene
ana ma rif / blis masako jl de u jl de ft / ya ja bas masakan
whed be-rejlan /. . ./
Around seven oclock / a policeman came / the girl called after the police
/ of course the police came / and brought us the all problem / I was going
home / Then the person who hit the girl / he and the police they were
driving this person to the police-station / they went in front / I was com-
ing behind / when I arrived to the Mobil station / they were still, the one
who beat the girl and the police / I found them still quarrelling / from
this when the police saw me the girl said yes I was there before / I said
of course I was there before / the quarrel happened I was there / then I
dont know what happened / the police sized the person and the person
went / then one took me by the legs /. . ./
/. . ./
(34) D1. away / badaln talta / na / blis u bt da / sillna fi nkta / amdulla
na lig waed min az ma mbil enk / baaref ns bT / na gl
kwayis / kan keda ami klem ns bt / gl na fi nkta / il-ana fi
nkta / minnak axuy de / nama nsma kede / r fi nkta enk / nama
anu axuya ja / gl ya tni f / kutt tawli jowa / u badin sab / bit
de gam j len / gl saa woddur u en / u filan ana ma uftu saa
klu klu /
Yes / we stayed three / me, the police and the girl / they took us to the
police station / Amdullah I found one I wanted in the Mobil station /
he knows the house / I said good / if its so go and tell the people of the
house that I am in the police-station / they took me in the station / from
there my brother / when he heard like this / he went to the post / when
he saw my brother coming / he said the other came / they put him inside
immediately / and then in the morning / the girl came and told us that
her watch was lost and what / and of course I did not see her watch at
all
(35) J1. tyib / lama kn wled de /el-biyamml makil maa bt de / inta
ma mait / inta ajiju / inta kan barak wela ma wald da /
Good / when there was this boy / who was doing the trouble with the
girl / you did not go / you support / you were alone or with this boy?
(36) D1. na bara
I was alone
630 catherine miller
(37) J1. inta bara / tyeb badin hinay de / lama blis gabdu weled dk
mi bi / u gamaa kal da / inta ajijtu maa el-bint-da / blis
lamma j / hl giddm el-b
lis eta amoltu makil maa bint da
You were alone / good and then / when the police captured that boy
and went with him / and the group quarrel / you supported the girl / the
police when he came / did you in front of the police make quarrel with
this girl?
(38) D1. ana ma awmol makel / bass darab bitman na ja katal
I did not make quarrels / I stopped their fight
/. . ./
(45) D2. el-zl de ombare ma biill nihna / ana gaad fi-l-bet / ya rasel wdd
da min el-mbl / wodd de maa unk / gl ya ns el-bet John gabad
/ ya ma kan nemi yisf li-l nkta
The person of yesterday did not take us / I was at home / and he sent
the boy from the Mobil station / the boy went there / he says people of
the house John has been captured/ so I had to go and see at the police
station.
/. . ./
(50) J1. nta ma fs / u gabodk mittn
You were not present / where did they capture you?
(51) D2. gabodni zamn gale nemi-l-nukta niuf / min wisolta unak an
nera mukila bta djn kif / bass waed askri gl ya lzem bikn
wahed minhum / bas ja fi hene / tni ma barja bt / u fialan jabni
fi-l-arsa / ya sab bit de maa unk / djn gal ya bit bta ombare
enay jabni fi arsa unk / /
They captured me when I went to the police station to see / when I
arrived there in order to assess the problem of John / one soldier said he
must be one of them / he came here / I didnt come back to the house /
and of course they took me in jail / and in the morning the girl came /
John said this is the girl from yesterday who brought me in jail /. . ./
(52) J1. ya bit / asa nafarn de badi sumit kalmu / da numro wahed de
nker / u gl woket dak kalam inti gul ma hasal klu-klu / gl uwa
mi liga inta kunta akal maa wahed tni / w uwo mi aan iyaziz-
kum / iyazizkum bas inta maa zl dak / el-wokT inta ndit askri
ja / w-el-askri gam sgo / sG el-waled maaki / inta mi u bardu
waratum kaman / kddam giddm henk intum wageftu kaman bit-
kelem kalmt keda / lama u masa wosolu lekum henk / bls gl xls kan
izan keda ta'ali inta kaman maa el-jamaa del / gam xala dk u alu uwa
language use in juba local courts 631
girl / these two persons after I heard their words / number one this
one denied / and said at that time, the story you tell did not happen at
all / he was going and met you quarreling with somebody else / and he
came to support you / support you against this person / when you called
the soldier came / and the soldier took the boy with you / you go and he
is behing you also / in front in front there you stopped you talked / when
he arrived near you / the police say ok if it is like this come you also with
the people / he let that one and sized him
/. . ./
(66) J2. /. . ./ keda ita indu rtn / musu barau rtan bta bay keda wonos
Do you have a language / isnt it a specific Bay language which is
spoken?
(67) D1. ana borton ndogo lakin ma fi rtan bay
I speak Ndogo but there is no language Bay
(68) J2. kulu ndgo intum trtn ndgo
You all speak Ndogo?
(69) P. ana borton ay / norton kalam enu lakin
Yes I speak / but what shall I say?
(70) J2. de bigl uman beroton enay de rutn / de bigul l / ma boroton ndgo
/ beroton bay / nina azin rfu uman sei bay aw /. . ./ :
This one says that they speak their tribal language / this one says no /
he doesnt speak Ndogo / he speaks Bay / we want to know if there are
really Bay!
(71) J1. tayyb / izakan bay / el-fakka bikun fi enu / lokn ma bay bikun fi
enu / nesma el-jarma bass
Ok / if Bay / the difference would be in what? / If not Bay what would
happen?/ we listen to the crime only!
(72) J1. hata kan abla tni bara ma tam / jol el-arfu jol amel ma ajam /
biwori gul ya de / kan gabil wela ma bay biwori / bas el muhim inta
jeb el-blis el-kn ahall al-mawdu /. . ./
Even if it is another tribe it doesnt matter / the person who knows the
person who attacked him / he shows that it is him / if from the Bay or
not he shows / the important you bring the policeman who solved the
matter!
/. . ./
632 catherine miller
(74) J1. asma / al-sakya da ixtarrat gl inta shid / lama kan hsel beinakum
maa nafarn del maskal / eta keda gul s el eta bitaarefi bi zabti / eta
jt kif / eta legt maamal enu keda / gul len / le-l-mahkma
Listen the lady (?) decided that you are the witness / when the prob-
lems happened between you and this two persons / say what you know
exactly / how did you come/ what did you find? / tell us / the Court!
(75) W. taban siytu / ana kunta saal fi kart / fi-l-jawazt / mal el-jensi-
yat / badin ana sken fi muluk / lama ana jit ja wosolu fi medresa
Komeriy
l / ana ft / taban al-bit de askri ana ma baaref / lbis
maleki / ana ma biyaref askari aw ma askri / faaln ftt / giddm
swiya / baad-ma fatt / al-bit de gum bikor bi-isma-l-blis / gal ya
blis ya blis tal agaod / fialan f gann btatna / bta al-blis / ay jol
bikrek bi-isim el-bls ma mafrd tafgo / lajem ita-ajri suf fi senu fi
senu / tekusu / fialan ana jay / ana jay legtum del itnn klu biajem
el-bit de / baadin ana jt / ana gul ya jamaa mlkum fi sen / gal
el-bit de sottemuni u ft keda / ana gulta tayib ya axwna matakum
sakal bit fi tarka / bi tarika zede / keda tosf el-jisim btna w-el jisim
bitkum wa jisim el-bit / taajem el-bit fi tarka bi-l-ll zede m sh /
wa lisa bikroko / lsa bikroko / fa ana asala-l-bit / hasala enu maak
/ gul nas del ya fat keda / ns del ajemu fi tarik / agru sulbu bitao /
u nama kelem umon setemu / fialan uman setemu /. . ./ bad-ma ana
rajo enka / ana raja / ana ja legitum lisa bisakal ala bit / nama ana
raja min mahal taban ana ft keda / baad-ma ana asma korokoro
waray b-ism el-blis / ana jire tawli ja wara w ana ja legitum l-itnin
del kullu / uman yau / fa filan kelemtum liw / ana gul ya akwnna
nina janbiyin ma mafrd neskel maa badna / hajt zede ma kwayis
/ el-muskila de best tkelwokT // el bit de je gum kelem gl ya askri
il tawasolna fi nukta //
Of course Sir / I was working in the cards / in the passports / the place
of nationalities / then I am living in Muluk / when I arrived at the Com-
mercial school / I passed / of course I dont know that the girl is a soldier
/ she wore normal clothes / I dont know if she is a soldier or not / of
course I passed / a little bit in front / after I passed / the girl started to call
by the name of the police / she said police police come in / of course
in our laws / of the police / anyone who call after the police you cant
let him / you must run see what is happening / you search / of course I
came / I came and found them both attacking the girl / I came / I said
people whats the matter / the girl said they insulted me and went / I said,
good my brothers dont quarrel a girl in this way / by this way / you see
my body and your body and the body of the girl / you attack the girl by
night like this its not correct / and they still shout / they still shout / and
language use in juba local courts 633
I asked the girl / what happened with you / she said this people passed
like this / this people attacked her on the way / they pinched her buttock
/ and when she spoke they insulted her / of course they insulted her /. . ./
when I came back / I came back / I found that they still quarrel on the
girl / when I came back from the place I went there / after I listened the
cries behind by the name of the police / I run directly back and found
them both / there they are / and I spoke to them / I told them brother
we are southerners no need to quarrel between us / things like this are
not good / the problem is small until now /. . ./ the girl spoke and said
soldier you must bring us to the police office /. . . ./
(75bis) W. ma f maal hukuma keda gerb fogo /. ./ fi arabiya gaad j /. . ./ ana
gum jire bi-wara arabiya de bi-ztu /. . ./ min ana jire henak / ana
asma baga el-bit de biga bikore / uman tni keda bidugu el-bit bi-
wara /. . ./ filan ana jere kede kede kede / ana ja gabodtu da / xalas
amdullah / fi fi mujra waga fi jua mujra /. . ./ negedem kede kede
kede likaat nina wosolu mobli /. . ./ d tawli gum amol musakl
fo mbili li-raat-ma aoz kaser mrat bta arabiya zatu / aoz amol
muskil fi jua arabiya ztu / baadu sd el-arabiya uf kede m f /
da gum maragu bara / ana bardu gum maragu /.../ tni arabiya
ja / rakebna fog le-raat wosoluna fi nokta / baad-ma wosoluna
fi nokta / ana gul jol da jere kals lakin axu da biyaref mahal de /
d nker gul m biyaref da / d maal btao barao u d barao / u ma
biyaref klu klu / ana gul kf / lajem de aku btao li"anu uman hader
al-muskel giddmi ana /. . ./ el-hamdulilay lam fatna balK /
mowdu negla askri de masi mustafa / ana biga ft fi-jawazt ya
neselem kelem kabr li jamaa fi taakir el ana akr lina zaman / ana
msi wodi kabar li-hum enay / lama fi rojyu bitay / el-hamdullay d
kamn gum wasal / ana gal ya de bs ya de bs / uman l-itnn el
ajam ala bit ya de bs /
There is no governmental place nearby /. . ./ a car came / I run after the
car /. . ./ when I run there / I heard the girl shouting / they were again
beating her from behind /. . ./ of course I run like this like this . . ./ I
captured this one / ok thanks to God / there is a sewer canal / he fall in
the sewer /. . ./ we accompany like this like this until we arrived at the
Mobil station /. . ./ this one started to make problem in the station until
he was near to break the mirror of the car / he almost make problem
inside the car / then the owner of the car see its not possible / this one
went out / I also went out /. . ./ another car came / we went in until we
arrived at the police station / after we arrived in the station / I said this
one run away but his brother must know the place / he denied he said
he doesnt know him / this one has his own place and this one also / and
634 catherine miller
he doesnt know him at all / I said how? / It must be his brother because
they attended the troubles in front of me /. . ./ Thanks to God when we
opened the case / the matter of the transport of the soldier to the hospi-
tal / I went to the passports to bring the news to the people there about
my delay before / I was going to bring the news to them there / when I
was coming back / Praise God this one also arrived / I said this is him
this is him / the two who attacked the girl, this is him /. . ./
/ story continues . . . ./
(76) J2. Tayib intakum ref nefsu kalatnin
Good do you recognize that you are faulty?
(77) D1. la la la kalm ke ana wosol dak ana baray / kalam de kadb / ana ma
jay maa jol / ana jay baray
No no this words I arrived there I was alone / these words are lie / I
didnt come with somebody / I came alone
(78) J2. ya de suhud kelem kalam bta / keda wonosu ma suhud / asalo /
ind"k sual yeslo
But the witness spoke / so discuss with the witness / ask / do you have
a question for him?
[Discussion between the defendant and the soldier /. . ./]
(79) J1. intum kalatanin / mahkama gul "annu intu aemtu bit da fi-t-terk
bidun ay munasaba / u atemtu u gul ermuta / u into garestu-ha
li-raet-ma sa"a bitwdda / tamenu xemsa u arbain gine / w indu
wahed fardeK halla wodur / tomon sabaa gine u nus / de klu bi
kuss maskel btakm maao fi-t-teriK /. . . continue /. . ./
You are faulty / the Court says that you attacked this girl on the way
without any reason / and you insulted her and said pimp / and you pinch
her until her watch got lost / its price was 45 pounds / and she had ear-
rings which got lost / their price seven pounds and half / all because of
your quarrel with her on the way/. . . ./
for the dowry he would maybe find the war / of course at that time there
were such things
(11) J. hawdis pi sanatu km (9) P. tamanya u sitin
Troubles of which years? Sixty eight
(12) J. badin ada ta awadis mitin
Then the end of the troubles when?
(13) P. tnen u sabain / badin kida pi itnin sebeyin / taban ina kaman nadi mal
/ gal mal maap / ila nina amul aja de / dgit mrisa / anina aju wodi
le uwo / gali kasara ita jibu / ana ma indu haja tani / badin uwo amulu
karama / badin dgig mrisa de nina wodi le aja de / le uwo / ma amul
lena haja tani / badi swiya yaba ja mat /anina amulu karama ta yaba
wkit maat / wa asa ukti de / ukti de mat / wokan ma wdi le ana ml
/ bes teletin jine eli kan wdi le nina
Seventy-two / then in seventy-two / we asked again for the dowry / he
said that there is no dowry / only we do this thing / beer flour / we want
to bring it to him / he said you bring it for nothing / I have nothing else /
then he made a ceremony / then this beer-flour we brought it to him / he
did not do anything else for us / later on our father died / we made a cer-
emony for our father when he died / and now my sister / my sister died /
and he did not give us the dowry / only 30 pounds that he gave us.
(14) J. mt mitin When did (s)he died?
(15) P. mat aja de fi tnin u tamanin / saar idaser
(S)he died in seventy-two / in November
(16) J. indu iyal Does (s)he have children?
P. indi iyl He has children
(17) J. kam How many?
(18) P. fi tegriban arba / waiT kan ge dowru ma rokuba / uwo ma wdi baal
pogo / ja waga fi nr / gam ja mat
Approximately four / one was walking on his knees / he did not take
care / he fall in the fire / he died
(19) J. pi talta P. pi talta ay
There is three? Yes there is three.
(20) J. talta de fi bant fogo P. fi wae bit u badin tnin yl / tnin woled
Among the three There is a girl and two
there are girls? boys/two boy.
(21) J. eli mutu de woled The one who died was a boy?
(22) P. la / bineya / wa asa itnin iyal de uwo ma biwdi baal fogo / asa itnin
de ge geni le ana
No / a girl / and now the two boys he does not take care of them / now
these two are staying with me.
language use in juba local courts 637
Jonathan Owens
CASL, University of Maryland
1. Introduction
2. Nigerian Arabic3
1
The proviso for purposes . . . leaves open the possibility that the modern glottal
(stop)-less dialects go back to original glottal-less dialects in Old Arabic (see Rabin
1951). Certainly the glottal-stop-less varieties go back to pre-diasporic Arabic, as
attested in their widespread distribution across the Arabic-speaking world, and their
attestation in Old Arabic sources. If there are proto-forms of Arabic without the glottal
stop, the thrust of the paper would need to be reorientated. A few Yemeni dialects have
a glottal stop (Behnstedt 1985, 43).
Even in classical times, there was a variety without the glottal stop that a glottal stop-
less variant which was prominent enough that in the Koranic reading tradition (qirt)
recitations are fully allowed without the phoneme (Ibn Mujahid ).
2
The value of the suffix, -t, -t, -ayt is an issue independent of the status of the glot-
tal stop.
3
Research support for this work was provided by the German Research Council
(DFG).
paradigmatic stability and final laryngeals 641
4
As in many dialects, there is no phonemic contrast between short high front and
back vowels. In this dialect, however, /i/ and /u/ must be lexically specified, as they are
unpredictable. As far as verbs go, given a lexical stem specification, the pre-formative
vowel is usually determined by vowel harmony rules: if the stem vowel is /u/, the prefix
vowel is /u/. Otherwise it is /i/.
5
Via the so-called gahawa-complex, whereby an /a/ is inserted in the sequence of
guttural C + C, in this case < *ahmar < ah mar.
642 jonathan owens
6
The /#/ is emphatic and implosive.
7
It is my impression that the deletion in this position is statistically more common
than in word initial or medial position, though I have not checked this.
paradigmatic stability and final laryngeals 643
The most obvious response for the first was heard him, the Arabic for this
being either sim-t-a heard-I-him if the final // is deleted, or simi-t-a
if it is kept, while for the second either b-isma-ann-a 3-hear-FPL-it
(if kept) or bism-ann-a (if deleted). Note that in the imperfect a final
V-initial suffix (-an FPL in the second example) replaces the final stem
vowel if the final laryngeal is deleted.
The respondents were all under 30 and most are educated. It was found
that those older than 30 had trouble concentrating on the questions, so
unfortunately age differential could not be taken into account.
A total of 16 sentences were asked. The anticipated responses were
distributed among different morphological classes of verbs, both basic
and derived verbs for example, and among different inflectional contexts,
though only subject suffixes were tested for.
Questions were asked for both perfect and imperfect verbs, as
illustrated in (4) above. Two types of suffixes can be distinguished here,
those that begin with a C (e.g. 1SG -t) and those that begin with a V
(e.g. FPL -an). In the 16 test sentences, the answers divided into forms
involving the following suffixes:
(5) Perfect
verbs with subject person suffix -t N = 58
3MPL -o N = 3
3FSG -at N = 1
Imperfect
3 MPL -u/o9 N = 5 (3FPL -an, N = 2)
total N = 16
There were 128 total responses (16 8). In all but 2 cases the responses
conformed to the anticipated answers. The two deviant answers are
ignored here, so in all there are 126 responses. The results are summa-
rized in (6). In (7) three typical responses are given.
(6) Stems appearing with:
8
This stands for any subject suffix that begins with a -t, including for example 1 sg,
sim-t I heard, 2 FSG sim-ti you F heard and 2 MPL man-tu you MPL prevented.
9
In the imperfect the MPL suffix is -u after a high stem vowel, bim-u they go from
the stem bimi, and -o after a low stem vowel, bilg-o they find, from the stem bilga,.
644 jonathan owens
is the suffix itself or the verb stem (CC-, which I suspect is the case) is
not apparent in the data since only one -at frame was used.
As with C-initial suffixes, usually before a V-initial suffix if /h are
not used, the stem is shifted to the weak-final class, e.g. ga#-o they
cut, budb-o they M slaughter. In two cases, however the stem vowel
was kept: daba-o they m slaughtered, bitba-o they M follow. Also, in
three cases where /h are not used, stress was irregularly shifted to the
penultimate syllable, bukr-u they M hate.
None of the respondents categorically used or disposed of the final
/h, even in a discrete sub-class of forms (e.g. perfect stems, excepting
the C-initial conditioning factor). Table 1 summarizes the global scores
for individuals.
Respondent 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/h kept 4 2 9 2 9 13 9 4
/h dropped 12 14 7 14 6 3 7 11
For 6 of the respondents there is textual material against which their test
scores can be compared. These texts include standard interviews as well
as less formal situations. Of the six, one has no tokens of final /h in his
text, and one has only 1. The total scores from the texts, classified into
morphological context, are given in Table 2.
The contexts are the following; in the perfect: suffix -t/n 1 SG, 2, 1PL,
MPL -o, FSG -at, in imperfect MPL -u/o, FPL -an, 3 MSG with object
suffix, AP with plural suffix. An example of each (taken from texts) is as
follows, where relevant giving one example with the final laryngeal kept,
one with it absent.
dabt I slaughtered, daboh-o they slaughtered, dab-a they M
slaughtered it F (these 2 tokens from same speaker); wagaat she fell;
simata she heard him, bism-o they M hear; tugo you M fall; bimba-an
646 jonathan owens
they F are sold; basem I hear him; tbn (AP, active participle)
following-MPL (<tbi). Note that the AP and object-suffix contexts
were not used in the test frames.
In two cases the sample in the textual material is not very representative.
The FSG -at suffix is represented only on two lexemes, one speaker with
five tokens of wagaat she fell, another with five of sim-at she heard
(etc.). Also, the FPL -an occurs only in one speakers text.
In most respects the textual and test material agree: in texts h/ are
categorically dropped before the subject suffixes beginning with -t/n,
and they are similarly nearly categorically absent in the test. In both sets
of data the stems shift to the weak-final class. Similarly, in both there is a
greater degree of variability before the MPL suffix (-u/o) in both perfect
and imperfect verbs, the ratios of kept/dropped tokens being roughly
the same. In Table 3 the percentages are calculated by dividing the total
tokens of stems where /h are kept by the total of laryngeal stems with a
MPL suffix. The token count is given before the percentage.
perfect imperfect
kept dropped % kept dropped %
test 11 12 48 14 25 64
text 7 6 55 10 5 66
The texts also indicate that before object suffixes there is a categorical
shift to the weak-final paradigm, regardless of whether or not the suffix
begins with a V or C; thus daba-hin he slaughtered them F, budb he
slaughters it M, rather than dabah-hin/budbaha.108
There is also a fair degree of agreement between the test scores of
individual speakers and their treatment of /h in natural speech. Speaker
4, for instance has the lowest percentage retention of /h in the test, and is
also lowest in the text count, while speaker 6 has the highest percentage
retention in both. Only speaker 7 has a lower percentage retention in the
text than in the test.
10
After strong verbs object suffixes are suffixed directly to the final -C, with no other
changes occurring, e.g. katab-a he wrote-it, katab-hin he wrote-them. After verbs end-
ing in a final -V the final vowel lengthens before a suffix, ligi-hin lig-hin he found
them. Before object suffixes (which were not tested in the frames like (4)) the laryngeal-
final verbs shift to the weak-final class.
paradigmatic stability and final laryngeals 647
Speaker 2 4 6 7 8
/h kept 0 4 9 6 5
deleted 1 11 2 11 8
For the present sample of speakers it can then be said that verbs with
final /h belong to a mixed paradigm: before C-initial subject suffixes
they belong to the paradigm of weak-final verbs; before V-initial subject
suffixes they are treated variably, in cases even by the same speaker,
sometimes as CVCVC stems, sometimes as CVCV, weak- final stems.
Male Female
More so than the data examined thus far, the overall scores point to a loss
of final laryngeals in pre-vocalic position, the loss being most pronounced
648 jonathan owens
11
In the texts from speakers from the present sample no mixed forms occur. In other
texts, however, they are attested.
650 jonathan owens
However, the data allows for a more nuanced description. The change
described for WSA can be broken down into two parts. On the one hand,
what may be termed a principle of paradigmatic stability, one aspect of
morphological stability, can be invoked:
(9) Principle of paradigmatic stability: do not create new paradigms
In its categoricality this statement is clearly too strong, and one can imag-
ine adding many conditions to it, but it serves present purposes. Both
the Old Arabic and the WSA data obey the principle: the loss of a final
laryngeal in both cases did not lead to the creation of a new paradigm.
Rather, the laryngeal-less forms simply collapsed, or in the case of WSA,
are still in the process of collapsing, into already-existing paradigms.
The other part is the phonological change that creates the condition
for the collapse into pre-existing paradigms. This change is one of
happenstance. In WSA, /h/ became /h/ and // became //. This type of
change is not unique among varieties of Arabic. // has moved to // in the
Tihama, /q/ appears as // in Cairene, Damascene, as well as elsewhere.
Maltese presents a complicated picture of its own. and // merged in
//, which in turn was lost, leading, as in WSA, to the merger of *//-final
verbs with weak finals.129
(10) sm-ayt I heard
tf-ayna we threw (< df)
Why the changes occurred in WSA is, frankly, not clear at this point, as
is the question, why in some dialects and/or h continue on to . One
12
In Maltese the final -a of the suffix is conditioned by the historical pharyngeal, and
hence contrasts with, say, bn-eyt I built, where the suffix goes back to the diphthong
*ay-t.
In fact, the historical phonology of Maltese remains to be worked out in detail. Not
least is the problem of a not inconsiderable dialect variability, with its potential impor-
tance for historical reconstruction (cf. Owens 2006, chapter 7 on imla in Maltese).
Mifsud (1995, 308-9) explains the final /y/ in sm-ayt etc. as a change of the historical
pharyngeal trace to /y/. This analysis is interesting in and of itself, but probably deserves
an article of its own. Briefly, while Mifsuds analysis still maintains the paradigmatic
stability principle, it is on an a priori basis more complicated than the treatment offered
here. Mifsud notes that in general verbs with historical final voiced pharyngeals merge
with weak-final verbs (e.g. nitfa we throw, like ninsa we forget). The current analy-
sis sees the merger as having occurred throughout all inflectional paradigm members,
allowing for the underlying phonetic conditioning of [a] due to the pharyngeal trace.
Mifsuds analysis would split the paradigm of voiced pharyngeal-final verbs. In the pro-
cess this creates an otherwise unattested CCay-C stem, where the /y/ represents C3 of the
root, and hence would contrast with the split paradigms-analysis offered above for WSA,
since in the present analysis laryngeal-final verbs split into two existent paradigms.
paradigmatic stability and final laryngeals 651
4. Appendix
Verbs used in test frames (given in the form of a possible answer): dbaho
they slaughtered; simt I heard; wjt I faced; karaho they hate; ga#t
I cut; garti you FSG stopped; mantu you MPL prevented; binfaan
they F are useful; budbaho they M slaughter; bisaman they F hear;
13
Moreover, in WSA emphatic sounds are fully maintained, but they are lost in
Uzbekistan Arabic.
652 jonathan owens
tuwjuhu you MPL face; bikrahu they M hate; bitbao they M follow;
bat she sold; bibu they M sell; ga#ao they M cut.
5. References
Judith Rosenhouse
Swantech Ltd., Haifa, Israel
1. Introduction
1
Several views of middle Arabic do not consider it a separate variety or a variant of
the language, for it lacks a grammatical coherence: we simultaneously find correct forms
of the literary Arabic and deviations from these forms. We even find hybrid forms that
are neither literary nor dialectal (Ayyoub, 2002. Cf. e.g., Kaye, 2002, Mejdell, 2002).
2
Diglossia is also related to bilingualism, since two language systems are dealt with
(cf. Fasold, 1984, Rosenhouse and Goral, 2004). Thus, when speakers use colloquial
Arabic lexemes in a literary Arabic context, or vice versa, they may do it either for spe-
cific functional (stylistic) purposes or as an unintentional process of code switching.
Although we do not deal with code switching in this paper, I believe that the use of liter-
ary Arabic words in a colloquial Arabic context is not to be considered code switching
or code mixing if the literary Arabic word is already integrated in colloquial Arabic and
used in it as the only accepted lexeme for that specific notion.
656 judith rosenhouse
(1) the use of foreign lexemes in literary and colloquial Arabic ( 3.1);
(2) the use of colloquial Arabic words in literary Arabic and literary
Arabic words in colloquial Arabic ( 3.2);
(3) semantic differences between cognate literary Arabic / colloquial
Arabic words ( 3.3). Section 4 concludes this essay.
2.1 Phonology
Phonological differences between literary and colloquial Arabic in Israel
and elsewhere are among the most studied and noted features in the
literature of Arabic diglossia (e.g., Altoma 1969, Blanc 1960, Meiseles
1980, Fischer and Jastrow 1980, Holes 1995, Mazraani 1997, Rosenhouse
1984, Versteegh 1997). Usually, speakers of a colloquial Arabic dialect
use the same consonants for literary Arabic speech as for colloquial
Arabic. The emphatics /s, d, t, / and the somewhat language-specific
diglossia as reflected in the vocabulary of arabic 657
3
In non-phonetic dictionaries the transcription usually hides such dialect differ-
ences. Also in our dictionary only one letter transcribes q in colloquial Arabic.
658 judith rosenhouse
hand (the latter is conspicuous in North African dialects). The wider the
differences between the traditional literary Arabic phonological system
and that of daily colloquial Arabic, the more literary Arabic articulation
errors may be found in the speech of such colloquial Arabic speakers.
This also is a typical feature of the code-mixing phenomenon. Examples
abound in any recorded colloquial or literary Arabic text (e.g., Blanc
1960), and even presidential speeches (see Mazraani 1997).
2.2 Morphology
Morphological differences between literary and colloquial Arabic (in
Israel) exist in various categories. The pronominal system exhibits well-
known differences in the free and bound pronouns in the nominal and
verbal systems. See examples in Table 2.
TABLE 2 EXAMPLES OF MORPHOLOGICAL DIFFERENCES
BETWEEN LITERARY AND COLLOQUIAL ARABIC
The suffixed object bound pronouns also differ: literary Arabic talabtuka
vs. colloquial Arabic (in Israel) talabtak I requested you, m. sg., literary
Arabic fatah ahu vs. colloquial Arabic (in Israel) fatah o he opened it, etc.
In the nominal system we note literary Arabic af al vs. ifal in several
local dialects of colloquial Arabic (in Israel), e.g., literary Arabic aswad
colloquial Arabic (in Israel) iswad black in the colors groups. Another
example is the female form of some adjectives, which in literary Arabic
are of the fal pattern whereas in colloquial Arabic they are regular,
i.e., with the t marbta, e.g. literary Arabic sakrn colloquial Arabic
(in Israel) sakrne drunk. Differences between literary and colloquial
Arabic (in Israel) also occur in plural patterns4 as the examples in
Table 3 show.
4
We refer to those lexemes where the singular is identical or at least cognate in both
literary and colloquial Arabic.
660 judith rosenhouse
In the verb system also certain verb patterns vary between literary and
colloquial Arabic (in Israel). See regular verb patterns such as literary
Arabic qadaracolloquial Arabic (in Israel) idir was able, literary
Arabic arafacolloquial Arabic (in Israel) iref knew, and their
respective non-past patterns: literary Arabic yaqdirucolloquial Arabic
(in Israel) yidar will be/is able, literary Arabic yarifucolloquial
Arabic (in Israel) yiraf will know/knows. Differences are also found in
verbs of C1//, e.g., literary Arabic yaxudu- colloquial Arabic (in Israel)
yxud/yxud/yxed will take/he takes/, C2w/y/ pattern, e.g., literary
Arabic xiftucolloquial Arabic (in Israel) xuft I was afraid, C3w/y
pattern, e.g., literary Arabic baqiyacolloquial Arabic (in Israel) baqa/
biqi he remained, literary Arabic qaraacolloquial Arabic (in Israel)
qara, qiri he read, and many more.
Differences of these kinds are well known from the literature, and in
a dictionary presenting both literary Arabic and colloquial Arabic (in
Israel) (such as Rosenhouse 2001, 2004) one at once sees the abundance
diglossia as reflected in the vocabulary of arabic 661
5
Usually, such words are not translated into any other language, though they may be
adapted to them phonologically and morphologically, as described above.
diglossia as reflected in the vocabulary of arabic 663
6
Based on the Colloquial Arabic term for this device.
664 judith rosenhouse
TABLE 6 (CONT.)
7
That colloquial Arabic borrows and uses literary Arabic items more than literary
Arabic borrows from colloquial Arabic is readily seen in any dictionary.
8
For more examples of such lexemes see Diem 1974, 4647, section 9.54, and Abd
Al-ls introduction (1971, 7) to his dictionary of Colloquial Egyptian Expressions
Whose Origins are Arabic (i.e., cognates).
666 judith rosenhouse
9
From another angle, Frayha (1955) describes his sons frustration and problems in
answering a simple question in literary Arabic. Frayha (1959) later suggested a method
for accomplishing the simplified language (although later on he stopped publicizing this
position).
diglossia as reflected in the vocabulary of arabic 667
4. Conclusion
10
Wehr (1971) gives also master of trade as one of the meanings of this word.
diglossia as reflected in the vocabulary of arabic 669
5. References
Abd al-l, Abd al-Munim Sayyid. 1971. Mujam al-alfz al-mmiyya dt al-usl
al-arabiyya. Cairo: Maktabat Nahda al-Misriyya.
Abu-Haidar, Farida. 1992. Shifting Boundaries: The effect of modern standard Arabic
on dialect convergence in Baghdad. In Broselow et al., Perspectives on Arabic
Linguistics IV, 91106.
al-Falay, Ibrh$m Salh. 1996. Izdiwjiyyat at-lua: An-nazariyya wa-t-tatbiq. Ar-Riyd
King Sad University.
Al-Hassan, S.A. 1978. Educated spoken Arabic in Egypt and the Levant: A critical
review of diglossia and related concepts. Archivum Linguisticum, 8(2):112132.
Altoma, Salah J. 1969. The Problem of Diglossia in Arabic: A comparative study of classical
and Iraqi Arabic. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Arnold, Werner, and Hartmut Bobzin, eds. 2002. Sprich doch mit deinen Knechten
Aramisch, wir verstehen es! 60 Beitrge zur Semitistik Festschrift fr Otto Jastrow zum
60. Geburtstag. Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz.
Ayyoub, Georgine. 2002. An Odyssey of Words: Evolution of the Arabic language in the
20th century. Al-Jadid Magazine 8:40 (Summer).
Badaw$, Sa$d Musta f. 1973. Mustawayt al-lua al-arabiyya al-musira f misr. Cairo:
Dr al-Marif.
Badawi, Mohamed. 1997. Probleme des Fachwortschatzes im Arabischen dargestellt
insbesondere an der Terminologie der Teleinformatik. Hildesheim: Georg Olms Verlag.
Bhatia, Tej. K., and William. C. Ritchie, eds. 2004. The Handbook of Bilingualism. New
York: Blackwell.
Blanc, Haim. 1960. Stylistic Variation in Spoken Arabic: A sample of interdialectal
educated conversation. In C.A. Ferguson, ed., Contributions to Arabic Linguistics,
81156.
. 1964. Communal Dialects in Baghdad, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University
Press.
Blau, Joshua. 1977. The Beginnings of the Arabic Diglossia. A study of the origins of
Neoarabic. Afroasiatic Linguistics 4:428.
Boucherit, Aziza. 2000. Reflexions sur le contact de langues partir du cas dAlger. In
Manwel Mifsud, ed., Proceedings of the Third International Conference AIDA, Malta,
8388.
Bousaffara-Omar, Naima. 2005. Diglossia. In Kees Versteegh et al., eds., Encyclopedia
of Arabic Language and Linguistics, vol. 1, 62937.
Broselow, Ellen, Mushira Eid, and John McCarthy, eds. 1992. Perspectives on Arabic
Linguistics IV, Papers from the Fourth Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics.
Amsterdam/Philadelphia: J. Benjamins.
Cadora, Frederic. 1979. Interdialectal Lexical Compatibility in Arabic: An analytical study
of the lexical relationships among the major Syro-Lebanese varieties. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Diem, Werner. 1974. Hochsprache und Dialekt im Arabischen: Untersuchungen zur
heutigen arabischen Zweisprachigkeit. Wiesbaden: F. Steiner.
Elgibali, Alaa, ed. 1996. Understanding Arabic: Essays in Contemporary Arabic Linguistics
in Honour of El-Said Badawi. Cairo: American University of Cairo Press.
Fasold, Ralph, W. 1984. The Sociolinguistics of Society, Cambridge: Blackwell.
Ferguson, Charles Albert. 1959. Diglossia. Word, 15: 325340.
. 1996. Epilogue: Diglossia revisited. In Alaa Elgibali, ed., Understanding Arabic: Essays
in Contemporary Arabic Linguistics in Honour of El-Said Badawi, 4967.
. (ed.). 1960. Contributions to Arabic Linguistics. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard
University Press.
, and Majid Said. 1958. Lexical variants in Arabic dialects (unpublished).
672 judith rosenhouse
Owens, Jonathan. 1998. Neighbourhood and Ancestry: Variation in the spoken Arabic of
Maiduguri, Nigeria. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
al-Qahtani, S. 2002. Arabization and the Theory of Language Planning: An Applied Study
of Terminology Arabization in Saudi Arabia. Beirut: Center for Studies of the Arabic
Union.
Ritchie, W.C., and Tej K. Bhatia,. 2004. Social and psychological factors in language
mixing. In T.K. Bhatia and W.C. Ritchie, eds. The Handbook of Bilingualism, 336352.
Rosenbaum, Gabriel M. 2000/2. Do you parler Arabi? Mixing colloquial Arabic
and European languages in Egyptian literature. Materiaux Arabes et Sudarabiques
(Nouvelle Serie), 10:1147.
. 2004. Egyptian Arabic as a written language. In A. Levin and Y. Friedmann, eds.
Studies in Honor of Moshe Piamenta, 281340.
Rosenhouse, Judith. 1984. The Arabic Bedouin Dialects: General problems and a close
analysis of North Israel Bedouin Dialects. Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz.
. 2001. Trilingual Practical Dictionary: Hebrewliterary Arabic-colloquial Arabic.
Rosh Ha-ayin: Prolog.
. 2002. Phonetic trends of colloquial Arabic dialects in Israel. In W. Arnold and H.
Bobzin, eds., Sprich doch mit deinen Knechten Aramisch, 599611.
. 2004. Trilingual Practical Dictionary: Literary Arabic-Hebrewcolloquial Arabic ,
Rosh Ha-ayin: Prolog.
. Forthcoming. The English language and its impact on Arabic in Israel. In. J.
Rosenhouse and R. Kowner, eds., Globally Speaking.
, and Mira Goral. 2004. Bilingualism in the Middle East and North Africa: A focus
on the Arabic-speaking world. In T.K. Bhatia and W.C. Ritchie, eds. The Handbook
of Bilingualism, 835868.
, and Rotem Kowner, eds. Forthcoming. Globally Speaking: Motives for Borrowing
English Loanwords in World Languages. Clevedon, UK: Multilingual Matters.
Shraybom-Shivtiel, Shlomit. 2005. The Revival of the Arabic Language as a Mission of the
National Ideology in Egypt. Jerusalem: Magnes Press (in Hebrew).
Somekh, Sasson. 1991. Genre and Language in Modern Arabic Literature. Wiesbaden:
O. Harrassowitz.
. 1993. Colloqialized fush $ in modern Arabic prose fiction. Jerusalem Studies in
Arabic and Islam, 16:17694.
Stetkevych, J. 1970. The Modern Literary Arabic Language: Lexical and stylistic devel-
opments. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Suleiman, Yaser. 2006. Arabiyya. In Kees Versteegh et al., eds. Encyclopedia of Arabic
Language and Linguistics, vol. 1, 173178.
Swadesh, Morris. 1952. Lexico-statistics dating of pre-historic ethnic contacts with
special reference to North American Indians and Eskimos. Proceedings of the
American Philosophical Society, XCVI:452463.
Taine-Cheich, Catherine. 2000. Reflexions sur le statut des emprunts dans les langues
mixtes partir du cas mauritanien. In M. Mifsud, ed. Proceedings of the Third
International Conference AIDA, 10712.
Thomason, Sara Grey. 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Washington D.C.:
Georgetown University Press.
, and Terrence Kaufman. 19881/19912. Language Contact, Creolization and Genetic
Linguistics. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Versteegh, Kees. 1984. Pidginization and Creolization: The Case of Arabic. Amsterdam-
Philadelphia: J. Benjamins.
. 1997. The Arabic Language. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.
, et al., eds. 2006. Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics. Vol. 1. Leiden:
E.J. Brill.
674 judith rosenhouse
Wehr, Hans; J. Milton Cowan, ed. 1971. A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic.
Wiesbaden: O. Harrassowitz.
Weinreich, Uriel. 1967. Languages in Contact: Problems and findings. The Hague:
Mouton.
Xarb&, A. 2002. (arakat at-tarb f l-urdunn. Amman: Ministry of Education.
Youssi, Abderrahim, Fauzia Benjelloun, Mohamed Dahbi, and Zakia Iraqui-Sinaceur,
eds. 2000. Aspects of the Dialects of Arabic Today: Proceedings of the 4th Conference
of the International Arabic Dialectology Association (AIDA), Marrakesh, April 14.
Rabat: Ampatril, 317328.
EVERYTHING YOU ALWAYS WANTED TO KNOW ABOUT
L, YIL TO SAY IN EGYPTIAN ARABIC*
Manfred Woidich
University of Amsterdam
1. Introduction
The idea of contributing to the Festschrift for our esteemed friend and
colleague Kees Versteegh with an article on the verb l, yil (gl, yigl)
to say in Egyptian Arabic dialects and its various idiomatic uses, came
to me when I was reading a draft of his lemma Serial Verbs, which he
had written for the Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics.1 In
this lemma, he reconsiders my view of items like (01) as an originally
paratactic but now grammaticalized construction in order to introduce
a pseudo-complement,2 and prefers to regard it as serialization, that is,
as a serial verb construction, albeit not without hesitation.
(01) huwwa raddi alk allak ?
huwwa radd al-k l-l-ak
he answered to-you said-to-you what
What did he answer you? LAB 118,8
Unfortunately, I do not share this view and I shall reaffirm my position
in section 4 below. Since this pseudo-complementation is not the
only case for l, yil to appear in contexts and functions that involve
grammaticalization, it seemed appropriate to give an overview of several
other cases where l, yil clearly has lost its original lexical meaning
by a process known as bleaching and acquired new meanings and
developed into a function word. After making some brief remarks on
the syntactic behaviour of l, yil as a lexical verb in section 2, several
steps and ramifications in the history of l, yil will be described in
* I should like to thank Rudolf de Jong for going through an earlier draft of this arti-
cle and giving me some valuable hints. Needless to say, any remaining errors are mine.
1
To appear as Versteegh 2007.
2
Woidich 2002, in particular pp. 183184.
676 manfred woidich
section 3 based on data collected over the last 40 years mostly from
written sources but also from some recordings of rural dialects. The
starting point of these developments apparently is the use of l, yil by
the speaker to introduce reported speech3 on discourse level4 within a
pragmatic strategy, namely introducing a direct or an indirect quote, be
it the speakers own words or the speech of somebody else, in order to
show rejection and non-acceptance of an utterance, to give reasons for
acting in a certain way, to explain intent, to make a comparison between
two things or for other reasons. The final sectionsection 5deals
with a lexical aspect and gives some examples of the use of l, yil with
vocatives and in delocutive derivations.
Here I will briefly describe a syntactical point, that is, the introduction
of direct and indirect speech. Direct or quoted speech follows l, yil
as an asyndetic sentence without a complementizer:
(02) ana mu ayllik hti )a)a
Did I not say to you, bring an ashtray? RUH 112,-1;
(03) alitlaha tali uudi maya
She said to her, sit down with me! FWQ 107,-7
(04) ns kitr bau ylu f-nafsuhum w ana mli
Many asked themselves, what business is this of mine? BAHN 122,9
A sentence reporting indirectly what was said, however, may either
be introduced by the complementizer inn (05, 06) or be connected
asyndetically (07, 08):
(05) iddakatra lu inn abak tabna wayya
The doctors said that your nerves are a little bit off HAM 95,7f
(06) l innu aynm andina llla diyyat wi bass
He said that he would sleep with us only that night LAB 16,8
(07) **a kkallim wi l aybt ba++a
Daddy called and said that he would spend the night out of the house
LAY 113,3
3
Following Gldemann et al. (2002, viii), I use the term -reported speech as a gene-
ric term for both direct and indirect speech.
4
In many languages, the verb -say constitutes a source of various pathways in gram-
maticalization that can lead to distinct types of function words, see Heine et al. (1993),
and Heine et al. (2002, 261 ff ).
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 677
Reported speech introduced by l, yil (gl, yigl) serves in various ways
and on different levels for text constitution and as a discourse device.
In narration it is commonly used for telling a story (3.1) by means of
reporting it as a dialogue. In a similar way, reasons and intentions may
be presented to the hearer in the form of reported speech (3.2), that is,
in the form of the speakers own words. Whereas the last two uses do
not exhibit any syntactic differences in comparison to the normal one
in a simple proposition (see 2), there are phrases formed with l, yil
that deviate in certain respects from the normal usage and suggest that
the items concerned areor at least have started to begrammaticalized.
So, ulti serves as a turn-giving device asking for a positive reaction
(3.3), l marks a short-cut (3.4), l serves as a marker of incredulity
(3.5), tiul as a comparison marker (3.6), baullak as a turn-
taking device (3.7), biylu as a reference to hearsay and general
knowledge (3.8).
5
Involvement of the hearer is considered one of the most important pragmatic stra-
tegies in Georgakopoulu et al. (2004, 136f).
678 manfred woidich
6
ia&amt *nm (literally the idols) is the Bri word for the Colossoi of Memnon
on the West Bank of Luxor.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 679
or the reasons they had for acting in a particular way. 7 This comment
explains either why what is described in this statement occurred (10,
11) or what the intention behind it was or is (13, 14, 15). In other cases
it tells the hearer what follows for the speaker from what is described
in the statement (12). Again, presenting the argumentation as internal
dialogue makes it more insightful to the hearer and easier to follow and
involves him directly.8 Using ult in this way is very common in standard
Egyptian Arabic, in both its spoken and its written form. If an intention
is involved, the verb is in the y-imperfect.
(10) ruti +af a idayya )awwli mdarya wii, ulti la-ykn alh afrt ismu
i/rab
I immediately lifted my hands up to protect my face. I said, it may have
got an evil spirit on it, I am afraid, whose name is i/rab [hit!] LAB
214,4 (reason)
(11) ana grt ulti yimkin miawwi ga kida walla kida min wa+a-mmi
I hurried up, I said, perhaps he has somehow saved something behind
the back of my mother HAM 28,1 (reason)
(12) laetkum )ayyibn ulti ya bitt uudi
I found you to be good people, I said, stay here, girl! RUH 30,5
(consequence)
(13) mi gayyili nm ult atmaa
I could not sleep, so I said, let me go for a walk SIB 89,3 (intention)
(14) il0ayya btizaf kamn ala irka. ulti nsibha abli ma ti+a
The water is creeping towards the company, too. I said, let us leave
before it is flooded FWQ 50,1 (intention)
(15) lammt uwayyit xaab kasri ala ittitn awli wi ult awalliha addaffa bha
I collected a little bit of broken wood and some corn cobs and said, let
me set fire to it to warm me up MHR 7,6 (intention)
(15) shows that a syndetic connection with wi and is also possible. (16,
17) provide evidence that this discourse strategy is not confined to a
quotation of the speaker himself using the 1st person but may be applied
in the same way in narratives in the 3rd person as well. While we cannot
see in (16) whether direct or indirect speech is involved, the use of a 1st
pl. verbal form in (17) signals direct speech:
7
For similar functions of self-quotation in German (i.e. reporting on decisions, rea-
soning, intention), see Golato 2002. Further development of items meaning ;saying
i.e. original quotation markers to a grammatical markers expressing causality oris
widespread in the languages of the world, see e.g. Lord 1993, 177 for se say in Twi and
for the Turkish gerundium diye saying, see Kissling 1960, 191; for Bengali bole having
said see Chisarik et al. 2003.
8
See Georgakopoulu et al. 2004, 136f.
680 manfred woidich
9
See Schwenter et al. 2005 for a case of discourse record manipulation regarding
English too.
10
This is why I prefer to call it a routine, i.e. a discourse technique to reach a certain
goal, and not a marker, which in my view would include some grammaticalization as is
the case with l say!; see 3.5.
11
There are other markers with a similar function such as ur ikkalm, ilad,
nahaytu.
682 manfred woidich
I was found not guilty and the apprentice was jailed instead of me, may
God bless him, in short, I praised God that I had come away safely DAR
71,10
(24) wi msik sikkna yiz yiui bha ba)ni. girt minnu. )r wa+ya. l inns
ah
With a knife in his hand, he wanted to rip my belly open. I ran away,
he went after me. To cut a long story short, people held him back DAR
93,8
There is no evidence for female li being used in this way, but apparently
the plural lu serves the same purpose when several persons are
addressed. So l in this case should be considered not as a marker but
as a routine:
(25) inns yadb simit fh markib mal, risyit ala baladhum wi dl gary
an yitiru. lu awwil markib itbit fi sat
The people had only just heard that a salt ship had moored in their town
when they came running in order to buy. In short, the first shipful was
sold within hours MAL 36,8
(26) aadit ah+i w ah+i w ah+. lu iblit
She stayed a month and a month and [another] month. In short, she got
pregnant MAL 39,33
Another use of l say! derives from a discourse routine, that is, self-
correction in the form of a request to the hearer to correct a piece of
informationvery often numerical informationadduced by the
speaker. As the speaker seeks confirmation from the hearer, he suggests
that he is not sure about his estimate and that this information is not
100% reliable. Within a sentence l may thus indicate an approximation,
and correspond to perhaps; like, for example like the English: the whole
affair lasted, say, 10 minutes, as can be seen from (27). l underwent
grammaticalization and is frozen as a particle, since neither the feminine
nor the plural form are possible here and it is moved into the sentence,
standing for example in front of the direct object (29) or an adverbial
expression (30). More often than not, it combines with ygi about as a
reinforcement of this approximative meaning (28, 29, 30):
(27) ilamaliyya atxudlaha talat t-iyym l a+baa
The operation will take three days, perhaps four YUN 72,9
(28) km ya Nabawiyya km?l ygi irn gin aw akta+
How many, Nabawiyya, how many?Perhaps about twenty pounds or
more RUH 137,7
(29) iggamustn ayilibulna kulli ym l ygi mt klu laban
The two buffalos will give us about 100 litres of milk a day HAM
90,4
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 683
12
For a brief discussion, see Woidich 1995, 265.
684 manfred woidich
13
Indeed, for at least some speakers/writers l seems to be no longer associated with
the verb ql in this meaning. In MRR and BAHN, for example, we find it written with
Alif Mdda as 3 whereas l as a verb preserves the original orthography and is written
with qf 39 throughout.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 685
14
For a possible role of Sudan Arabic yani in the grammaticalization of Beja miyaad
3fait de dire by language contact, see Vanhove 2004, 149.
686 manfred woidich
15
See SMB 85,4 for a similar passage.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 687
16
All my examples show indirect speech, not direct quotes, as far as this can be seen
from the reference of the pronouns. Direct quote as the original structure from which
the further development started cannot be excluded and is even probable. The lack of
examples could be seen as proof of early grammaticalization with loss of the starting
point structure. This view is corroborated by the fact that no inflected examples of l in
this sense could be found.
17
Any sentence may be split up into a kind of cleft sentence with a first part ending
with what? and the rest of the sentence as answer to this question: m wid minhum
, wxid blu mi lamaliyya, m zanna , ala aibna m aibna )aban , badi ma
allu ana +yi dort il0ayya, xa+ag ala ba++a One of them then what? He realized what
was going on, he hemmed in what? our friend, our friend of course what? After he had
told him I go to the loo, he headed out the door [Cairo: recorded text]. See Woidich
2006, 50.
688 manfred woidich
18
See Woidich 1989, 124 and 2006, 281.
19
For similar pathways of grammaticalization of say to like, as if in other langua-
ges, see Heine et al. 2003, 268.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 689
The question is how far tiul has developed in this way. It still may vary
and be inflected according to the person spoken to, that is, we can find it
as fem. tiul or pl. tiul followed by a complete sentence:
(58) mah dilwati aklitha wi labri bar/ak, ana mi fhim anhi banna aw fil
illi xtara ikkaki bi akli da? tiul illa byimilu xal)it mna
But nowadays, it takes you to the grave when you eat it. I do not
understand: which mason or bricklayer invented this sort of cake? You
could say they mix mortar! SMM 55,5
(59) wi lmg )li nzil tiul milya arr zara
And the waves went up and down, you could say like a ladies dark-blue
silk cloak DAR 141,6
(60) min sit ma simit ilxaba+ im wi hiyya nazla la)mi w buka tul ibnaha
Since she heard this awful news, she has been constantly slapping her
face and crying, as if it were her (own) son RUH 152,7
On the other hand, there are examples in the singular when we would
expect the plural, as in (61), a sentence that addresses a general public
(cf. ma-taxzun pl. Do not blame me! three lines further in the same
opening speech):
(61) w ah layym ammla tigri, tiul alla zalna minna!
And the days fly past, as ifalasthey were angry with us MAL 1,3
Whereas the facts with regard to inflection remain inconclusive,
other features suggest that tiul is on its way to be grammaticalized.
In (54, 58) above, both parts apparently still have separate intonational
contours as indicated by the authors by means of a question mark. But,
on the other hand, we see in (62, 63) below that tiul can be followed by
one argument only, not a complete sentence, which suggests that tiul
has been incorporated into the sentence and that it is used just as the
preposition zayy like. Indeed, the whole sequence has to be read here
with a single intonational contour.
690 manfred woidich
20
An example from Bri dialect in Upper Egypt: ilfurusa +a00a tgli ikle The
mare gallops like a young stallion.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 691
21
As to the exclamation of strong assertion bitl fha no question about it! you bet!
you said! adduced in Hinds et al. 1986, 722b, I could not find any example in the litera-
ture except the ones given in this entry: idirti truddi ala lmudr?bitl fha w atamtu
kamn Did you dare to answer the boss back?You bet I did! and I cursed him too!
692 manfred woidich
22
See Woidich 2002, 181ff, Woidich 2006, 401. Phrases of the same type, but used
to express the direction or a goal, are formed with +, as in kuntu btuxrugu tru fn?
where did you go out to? FWQ 62,6, see Woidich, loc.cit.
23
Hopper et al. (2003, 194196) discuss similar developments of say in Akkadian,
see as well Hopper et al. (2003, 1315) for West African languages. For a similar use
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 693
they are two verbs within the same clause, neither of which is an
auxiliary;
they belong to a single intonation contour25 and refer to a single event;
of the Turkish gerund diye saying see Kissling (1960, 190). For Bedja, see Vanhove
2004.
24
See in particular Kroeger (2004, 229).
25
For a case with no single intonation contour but two contours, see gaadit turgu
wu tanni, glit abbi a+ balad ilLayy, ina&&a m ni yiriddi alayy She started to
694 manfred woidich
they share at least one semantic argument, which is the agent in their
case;
they contain only one grammatical subject. 26
At first glance, this makes the l, yil constructions good candidates for
SVC, were it not for some other diagnostic features that exclude them
from the SVC. SVC do not contain any overt markers of subordination
or coordination. This is not true for l, yil constructions where wi
and may separate the two verbs, suggesting that what we have here is a
coordinate construction:
(80) raddi azla w allu mafhm ya ammi
azla answered and said to him, understood, Uncle! LAB 138,6 (cf.
74)
(81) wi anna w l mawawl
And he was singing Mawwls MAL 45,8 (cf. 75)
(82) af/al ana abar)am w al atta ladwiya kamn biyaddarha
I shall keep muttering: even the medicine they export as well GIL 58,8
(cf. 84 below)
(83) ultilu kulli da, raddi w alli inta-zzayy awlak? mi kuwayyis?
I told him all this, he answered and said to me: how are you? Not
good? ULA 66,2 (cf. 75)
Tense, aspect, modality, negation, etc. are normally expressed only once in
true SVC, and only occasionally are both verbs marked for these. l,
yil constructions, however, usually mark both verbs in the same way,
that is, both verbs appear in the same tense or aspect (see the examples
above), with the exception of bi- and a-prefixes: bi- may be and a- is
always omitted on yil; see (74, 76) above. For bi-, see (84):27
(84) ilbitti bitbar)am til ?
What is the girl mumbling? SIG 126,11
dance and to sing: my darling went to the country ilLayy, he will never return to me, I
hope (Ba<ariyya: MandBa).
26
This excludes, by the way, causative xalla clauses from the serial verb construc-
tions: xalltu ma/a I made him sign contains two agents/subjects.
27
Exceptional is katabu ylu ? What do they write and say? MRR 101,4 which
does not follow the above rules. It contains a sequence of a perfect and an imperfect
instead of perfect in both verbs, as in katabu lu ? What did they write and say? In
both cases, the question word what? asks for the opinion of the writers. Since the
act of writing happened in the past and the opinion expressed by this writing stays pre-
sent till the moment of asking, an imperfect yilu seems justified for this moment. The
semantic notion here overrules the syntactic one; see Woidich (2003, 131).
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 695
This is usual when two imperfects of this type are coordinated, see
Woidich (2006, 282). Even different verbal modals with more or less the
same semantic content are possible, as (85) shows, when the verbs are
coordinated by wi and:
(85) umm& h illi inta id tixa++af wi amml tilu da?
What is it then what you are raving about all the time? ABM 39,1
SVC verbs should not contain two overt NPs that refer to the same
argument; see Kroeger (2004, 230). In l, yil constructions this is
possible and both verbs may keep their original semantic and syntactical
structure, cf. (73) and (77) above and:
(86) inta bitwawi ilbinti bitullaha ?
What are you whispering to the girl? MRR 198,11
(87) amml tikallim nafsak til ?
What are you talking to yourself ? LIB 64,12
Finally, as Newmeyer (2004, 3) reports, in a coordinate structure moving
an NP of one of the verbs from its original position should be impossible
(coordinate structure constraint), but it is possible in an SVC. In the
l, yil construction, noun extraction by forming a cleft sentence is
not possible: * lli raddi alk alhlak? or * lli akkallim alu? Strangely
enough, (85) with its coordinated verbs offers such a cleft sentence
containing a moved NP, though it should be not possible in this case
according to the coordinate structure constraint adduced by Newmeyer
loc. cit.
In my view, these are enough reasons not to consider l, yil construc-
tions as SVC. Rather, I think that they developed from paratactic
entailments to intransitive verbs with a semantic component of saying
such as28 6anna to sing, yir to blame, ayya) to cry, bar)am to grumble,
daa to curse, dalla to give a nick-name, ikkallim to talk, kidib to lie,
na)a to pronounce, naa to give advice, radd to answer, rafa/ to refuse,
arrax to shout, wawi to whisper, xa++af to talk nonsense, which do
not have a syntactic slot to express the content of the performative act
and cannot quote directly. By addingbe it asyndetically or by means of
wia sentence with the locutionary verb l, yil that disposes of that
slot, the problem is solved. This coordinative structure describes one
28
The list of verbs with pseudo-complement as registered in my database. 13 of the
28 registered cases include the question l .
696 manfred woidich
fact and shows cohesion as to intonation, but not the syntactic cohesion
normally displayed in SVC. Following Seuren (1991, 196), I prefer to
interpret these l, yil constructions as pseudo-complements, especially
since l, yil is not the only type of these complements. Many verbs with
the semantic content of moving into a direction do not have a syntactic
slot for the direction of the movement. Here a pseudo-complement
with +, yir to go to fills the gap by introducing this direction, as in
mii + fn? Where did he go to?; see Woidich (2003, 181ff ) for more
details. Similar behavior is exhibited by xad, yxud to take and l, yil
to take away, which may be combined with wadda, yiwaddi to bring to
to form utterances such as anlu nwaddh fn AWL 44,6 Where shall
we bring him to?, imbri bi lll alha waddha lbt Yesterday evening
he took it home WAZ 369,-3f.
5. ql in delocutive derivations29
29
Plank (2002, 465 and 478).
30
For gy ~ gy help! see Hinds et al. 1986, 146a; for the Arabic etymology, see
Behnstedt 1997, 36.
l, yil to say in egyptian arabic 697
We quite often find this type of gl, yigl with sound-related interjections
as a direct object in Upper Egyptian Arabic, for example in Bri.31 They
mostly describe a sudden event connected with a sound, and occur
commonly in narrative style, not necessarily as intransitive expressions
as described in Plank (2002, 468).
(94 + gyil ka+a+w bha He rushed at her
(95) itgl dibb fi lar/ She toppled over
(96) ma++a wida gl dradib All of a sudden, it went knack
(97) gl daradyy He crashed down
(98) gult ijlibb I jumped up and ran away
(99) gl, igl )) to break wind
(100) glat )irri minnh It buzzed away
(101) glat inn It bubbled up (boiling water)
(102) t ittit ul)a kida w gl hub, a+ glib ilgull wu lba wu adda min
r iml
A flat piece came, he made hub and threw down the jars and the bowl
and went off without a burden (Ba<ariyya: Manda)
(103) wu badn ilga)ir gl )), gallih ma tistanna lamma allabiyya tinif
And then the train made >>, he said to it, wait untill the gallabiyya
has become dry (Ba<ariyya: Manda)
6. References
31
For the very elaborate use of these expressions in Ethio-Semitic, which goes much
further than what we know from these Upper Egyptian Arabic dialects, see Cohen et al.
(2002, 227 and 238 ff). Cf. for the Da7na Landberg (1909, 1268) gl hubs se mit
courir.
698 manfred woidich
agent, 321, 321 n. 11, 322323, 326, 326 Alep, 113, 123
n. 17, 343, 348349, 351 n. 32, aleph(s), 595, 596 n. 6, 597, 597 n. 8,
354357, 376 n. 31, 380, 392394, 599 nn. 13, 15
394 n. 83, 395, 396 n. 85 Aleppo, 232 n. 44
explicit, 391 Aleut, 294
humain, 348, 351352, 356 Alexandrie, 130
implied, 391 Al-Falay, Ibrahim S., 655, 670671
agentives, 394 al-Alf, 530
agentivit, 321, 321 n. 11, 323, 328 n. 19, Alfiyya commentaries, 3
336, 344, 350351, 359 alayta, 141 n. 32, 160
entire, 323, 349, 359 Alger, 113
neutralise, 321322, 335, 338, Algerian, 640
343344, 348 n. 29, 351, 359 Arabic, 596
non, 321, 343344, 359 Al-Hassan, 671
partielle, 321, 323, 344, 347, 349, 349 Al b. Ab Tlib, 134, 206
n. 31, 351, 359 Al H aydar, 23
pleine, 321, 344 Al Slim, 699
Aggadic material, 192 Al Tawfq al-H amad, 187
Agha & Khalidi, 190 n. 1 Al, 117
Agha, Saleh Said & Tarif Khalidi, 207 Ali, 2627, 34, 3637, 3942
agreement, 368, 370, 374, 376 n. 31, 368 Al, caliph, 31
n. 4, 377, 381, 383384, 389, 397 Ali, Mohamed M. Yunis, 44
Aguila, Antonio de, 212, 231232 alif cequin, 218
gyptisch-Arabisch, 699 alif, 123 n. 12, 127, 598
Ahaywt, 566 n. 9 mdda, 684 n. 13
dialects, 567 8skin, 218
ahl al-arabiyya, 55 all, 17
ahl al-lua, 39 al-la, 658
Ahlwardt, Wilhelm, 21, 86 n. 23, 87 a&&a, 658
n. 23, 110 allad, 6772, 7681, 81 n. 8, 82 n. 13,
Ahmad Fud Nigm, 544, 563, 699 83 n. 19, 8485, 8889, 91, 93, 103
Ahmad Muhammad Shkir, 205 n. 41 clause, 68, 7071, 82, 85, 8889,
Ahmad Muxtr Umar, 65 9597, 102
Ahmad ams ad-Dn al-H ajjj, 700 conjunction, 75, 100101
Ahmad Ysuf Najt, 64 conjunctional, 70, 75, 79
Ahmad, 364 infinitival, 79
al-Ahrm, 530 Allh, 69, 72, 89, 9192, 97, 109, 200
id, 59 allemande, 118119
air, 256, 256 n. 8, 257 nn. 1213, 261, allemands, 118, 123
262, 268, 270 allophone(s), 273
ajam, 115116 etymon, 272273, 568, 576, 657
Akkadian, 597604 alternance(s)
early, 598 vocalique(s), 315, 317, 337, 344, 345
pre-, 598 n. 28, 350, 353
lakkadien, 125 Altoma, Salah J., 656, 671
al llad, 79 am, 17, 21
al, 17, 21 amal, 1011, 124, 140 n. 30, 141142,
Al-Ani, Salman H., 247 142 n. 37, 143146, 149152,
Albany, 202 n. 33 152 n. 3, 153, 159 n. 14, 160, 164,
Alcal, Pedrode, 209 n. 1, 210214, 214 166167, 171172, 180181, 184186,
n. 9, 215217, 217 n. 15, 218220, 220 224, 228, 234235
n. 22, 221222, 224226, 231 n. 41, jarr, 10
239, 241 jazm, 10
Alegat, 565 n. 3, 566 n. 7 nasb, 10
Aleiqat, 565 n. 3, 567 n. 9 raf , 10
704 index
Gen(esis), 191, 194, 196, 198, 202 Goitein, Dov, 80, 80 nn. 4, 6, 8182, 110111
gender, 154 n. 6, 249250, 367, 368 Golato, Andrea, 684, 698
n. 4, 370374, 378, 380, 382383, 389, Goldenberg, Gideon, 7679, 111,
395, 615 153154, 163 n. 21, 173 n. 31, 174,
affixes, 611 187, 595 n. 1, 596 n. 6, 597 n. 8, 598
genealogical traditions, 192 n. 12, 600
genealogists, 203, 205 Goldziher, Ignaz, 119, 132, 208
gnitif, 130 Golius, Jacob, 211, 238
genitiuo, 214, 227 Gonzles Palencia, A., 43
genitive, 7, 10, 13, 106, 135 n. 2, 144, Gonzlez, Bernardino, 210 n. 2, 211 n. 2,
214, 216, 227228, 230, 230 n. 39 221222, 226
genitivus, 221 Gonzalez, Francisco, 212, 231, 238
Genizah, 7980 Goral, Mira, 655 n. 2, 673
genre, 513 Gottheil & Worrell, 8184, 111
Georgakopoulu, Alexandra, 677 n. 5, Goutsos, Dionysis, 300301, 310, 698
679 n. 8, 698 grammaticalized, 78
German, 81 n. 8, 9294, 98, 104, 456, grammaire(s), 113114, 118, 121, 123
465, 679 n. 7, 698 n. 12, 502 n. 4, 507
German-Arabic, 458, 462, 466468 arabe(s), 116117, 126, 130, 314, 348
gerund(s), 299, 301, 305, 476, 476 n. 2, n. 30
477479, 482, 492 arabisantes, 313, 319, 327
English, 475476, 482, 493 compar, 118
nominal, 477 gnrale, 517 n. 44
Gesenius, 320 n. 9 lhistoire de la, 114
Geva-Kleinberger, Aharon, 658, 672 grammairien, 113, 118, 122, 126
Ghassn Surr a-baylt (Ab Surr), arabes, 124125, 129, 505506
546548, 551556, 559 non-arabes, 506
Ghawnmah, M., 548, 563 grammar(s), 3, 4 n. 1, 23, 2526, 28, 31,
Ghazeli, et Hassour, 315 33, 37, 4243, 45, 62, 77, 79, 171, 209,
ghost words, 472 209 n. 1, 210, 211 n. 2, 212, 213, 215,
Giargianius, 235 217 n. 15, 218 n. 18, 219, 219 n. 19,
idir, 660 220, 223, 224, 226227, 232, 234236,
Giesbers, H., 297 n. 6, 310 239240, 370, 527528, 617
Gil, Moshe, 80, 80 nn. 4, 6, 81, 81 n. 8, of de Alcal, 219, 219 n. 19, 226, 232
82, 84, 110 Arabic, 248, 252253, 435437, 439,
Gilliot, Claude & Larcher, Pierre, 195 442, 448449
n. 11, 208 Classical, 223, 249
glide(s), 368, 437, 441, 446450 Granadan, 212
inserted, 444 of Caballero, 209 n. 1, 210, 210 n. 2,
glissement(s) 221, 222, 224 n. 31, 238
de sens, 338, 342 of Caes, 211, 221, 222
smantique(s), 321, 326, 334335, case, 369, 381, 393, 399
338341, 354358, 360362 Castilian, of Antonio de Nebrija, 215
global, 405, 410, 417, 433 dependency, 369 n. 8
glottal, 657 early, 25, 49 n. 5
catch, 571 formal, 367, 388
stop, 595 n. 3, 596, 596597, 597 n. 8, of Greek
598, 598 n. 12, 639640 nn. 12 classical, 223
final, 642 modern, 223 n. 30
goal, 380, 394395 generative, 4
God, 26, 3537, 3942, 189, 190191, of Hebrew, 209
193194, 196200, 202204, 207 Indian, 209
Godefroy-Demombynes, Maurice, 313, of Japanese, 210
314 n. 3, 363 Latin, 216, 239
index 721
Islam, 27, 39, 42, 92, 193, 196, 202, 205, izhr, 57
207, 404 zm mudf, 215
heilige Sprache des, 119 izzayy, 86
medieval, 42
religious language of, 104 Jabal Says, 127 n. 18
Islamic, 109 Jackendoff, Ray, 479, 498
conquest, 207 Jdis, 195, 202203
data al-Jaft, 562
historical, 42 Jhiliyya, 190
East, 109 al-Jhi', 13, 45, 122123, 131, 328
fundamentalists, 561 n. 19
law, 42 jhi'ien, 123
scholars, 41 Jahn, G., 136 n. 8, 147, 238
sciences, 28 Jir Ab _amd, 195
society, 42 jiz, 33 n. 4
Islamic times James, Gregory, 210, 243
pre-, 105, 109 Janah, A., 283, 287
history, 192 Japanese, 210
past, 207 scholars, 210
times, 189, 206 Jarajira, 567 n. 9
world civilization, 207 jarr, 29, 216, 225, 227, 228, 230
ism, 58, 155 Jsim, 203
al-fil, 341 Jastrow, Otto, 658, 671672, 698
fil, 177 jawb, 53
kna, 179 al-Jawhar, 3
al-maf l, 341 jaz, 59
wh id, 14, 18 al-Jazra, 194
Isml b. Ibrhm, 190, 195, 197200, 202 jazm, 59, 226228, 230231, 234
ismiyya, 149150, 157, 158 n. 13, 165, Jeremiah, 595 n. 2
165 n. 24, 177 Jerusalem, 8182, 84, 221
isoglosses, 608 Jerusalemites, 80 n. 6
Isolated Natural Subject, 28 n. 1 Jesuit, 209210
Israel, 546, 653660, 662, 667669, 673 Jesus, 190
sons of, 195 Jewish, 82 n. 14, 101, 106, 109, 296
Israeli(s), 561, 595 n. 3 Aramaic, 600601
Hebrew, 596 n. 6 Jews, 195
Israelite settlers, 197 jezme, 215 n. 11
istaqarra, 159160, 162164, 167, 180, Jibrl, 200
183185 Jhn Mahmd, 528
hypothesis, 162, 164, 167, 180, 185 jinn, 190
istidll, 34 Jordan, 543, 543 n. 1, 545548, 551,
istifhm, 4, 117 561562, 601, 661
isti lh , 192 Jordanian(s), 546, 548, 552, 554, 557,
istinf, 49 n. 5, 50 557 n. 35, 559, 560 n. 40, 560562
istiqrr, 141, 163 n. 20, 179180 society, 547
istish b al-h l, 36 tribe, 546
istit n, 31 Jos de Len, 221
iswad, 659, 664 Joseph, 190
Italian, 296, 298299, 661 Joon, Paul, 264, 288, 314, 320 n. 9, 321,
Italie, 124 n. 13 321 n. 10, 335 n. 20, 344 n. 26, 354,
itb, 48, 52, 63 364
itration, 313 Juba, 607 612, 614, 618, 620622,
itimd, 152, 152 n. 4, 153, 153 n. 5, 154, 637638
157 n. 12, 172, 179180, 184 Arabic, 607-621, 638, 692693, 698
index 727
Mahdi, 120 n. 5, 131 rule, 479, 497 n. 29, 481 n. 6, 482, 492
al-Mahdiyyah, 81, 83, 110 idiosyncratic, 481, 497, 497 n. 30,
Mahmd Bayram at-Tnis, 544 498
Mahmd Taymr, 666, 699 Maqil b. Xuwaylid, 89
Mahmud, Ushari, 607608, 621 al-maqsr 252253
Maiduguri, 640, 642, 647648, 652 Marais, William, 121 n. 9, 132, 690,
Maingueneau, Dominique, 324 n. 14, 698
326 n. 17, 331, 364 Mardin, 640
majz, 507 n. 18 marf, 59
majrr, 177, 214, 216 marker
Makkah, 200 adjective, 249
Makram & Umar, 46 n. 2, 49 n. 6, 52 n. 9 adverbial, 249
Makram, Abd al-l Slim, 65 case, 411412, 476
Malak al-Araf, 221 n. 26 idiosyncratic, 490
malaka, 3 n. 1 infinitive, 298, 299 n. 9
malapropism, 613, 615, 617 mood, 409
Malbad, 566 n. 9 non-finite, 488
Malekiyya, 620 object 249
Malkiel, Y., 294, 311 present tense, 409
Malta, 698 relative clause, 406407, 419, 412
Maltese, 296, 299, 650, 650 n. 12, 651652 stem
Maluk, 612, 622625 verb, 496
Mamluk, 89 stem VII, 488489
maml, 124, 149, 151, 168, 170, 235 verb
man, 38, 151, 157, 176 foreign, 299
l-fi l, 176 marking
l-hadt , 38 nominal, 476
l-hudt , 342 Maronite, 211, 220, 222 n. 26
l-kalm, 38 Christians, 211
n-nasb, 38 martaba structures, 171
t -t ubt, 342 Martelotti, Francesco, 226
manaw(iyya), 10, 10 n. 8, 11, 235, Martelottus, Franciscus, 226 n. 33, 234,
235 n. 49 236, 238241
mand, 1819, 22 Maruyama, Toru, 210, 243
Mandarin, 223 Marwn Qadr, 535
Manda, 680, 684, 693 n. 24, 697 Marx, Emanuel, 578
Al Manhal French-Arabic, 458, 462, Masd, 566567, 569 n. 9
466468 masculin, 123 n. 12
maniabilit, 508 masdar(s), 47, 118, 210, 355, 381 n. 50,
manire, 504 n. 8 383, 436, 475, 484487, 487 n. 18,
manner, 392, 394395, 397 488494, 494 n. 27, 495497, 497
al-manqs, 252253, 449 n. 28, 498, 513514, 532 n. 7
mana, 507 n. 18 +acc, 484485, 493
Mansouri, W., 256 n. 6, 288 Arabic, 475, 484, 487488, 498
mansb, 124 formation, 475, 486, 492, 495496
Manwel Mifsud, 698 Arabic, 493
mapping, 482 idiosyncratic, 492
idiosyncratic, 481, 481 n. 6 +li, 484, 485 n. 14, 492493
one-to-one, 481 n. 6, 497 n. 30 mmy, 492
phonological, 498 stem II, 490, 492
principle, 479, 479 n. 4, 480, 484, 493, stem III, 492, 497
495 stem III, 497 n. 30
general, 480 stem IX, 489 n. 21
lexical, 480 stem V, 490 n. 22
732 index
376 n. 33, 377381, 381 n. 50, 382, poetic(s), 43, 544545, 547548, 550
382 n. 53, 383385, 385 n. 57, n. 18, 559562, 578
386388, 391395, 397, 477, 485, 494 genres, 204
particle, 376, 376 n. 30, 384 poetical, 45, 561
prepositional, 369, 376, 376 n. 30, potique, 125, 126 n. 15,
377380, 382, 384387, 390395 poetry, 3 n. 1, 436, 448, 450, 543,
structure, 517 543 n. 1, 544, 545 nn. 34, 547,
non-, 517 n. 43 562563
verb, 376380, 386, 388, 393, 397 nn. Arabic popular, 543544
86, 88 Bedouin, 543 n. 1, 544, 560 nn. 38,
verbal, 386, 477, 482, 482 n. 7, 483, 40, 563
484 n. 13, 485, 493, 495, 497 n. 29 contemporary, 545
phraseology, 548 popular, 544, 559
Piamenta, Moshe, 6768, 112 tribal, 561
Pidgins, 128, 607, 621 Jahiliyya, 190
pidgin-crole, 128 love, 204
pidginisation-crolisation, 128 popular, 543544
Pidginization, 607, 621, 652, 699 praise, 204
pilgrimage, 199 pre-Islamic, 86, 559
Pisa, 84 political satire, 543, 559
place, 371, 373, 378 n. 40, 380, 394397 polysmie, 355, 359
of pause 249 polysemy, 255 n. 1, 367 n. 3,
plaidoirie, 504 n. 7 Pope John Paul II, 197
Plank, Frans, 696 n. 29, 697698 Portius, Simon, 223 n. 30
Plato, 547 Portugal, 219 n. 20
Platonic, 39 Portuguese, 210, 211 n. 2, 291, 294, 298,
plosives, 657 304307, 309
plural(s), 227, 374, 383, 397 n. 86, 436 American, 306
affixes, 611 Poss-ing, 478, 483, 483 n. 10
feminine, 224 n. 31 construction, 476, 483484,
form(s), 153, 660 495
nominal, 373 postdeterminer, 381, 381 nn. 5051,
patterns, 659 382
poem(s), 61, 204, 543 n. 1, 543, postmodifier, 381382, 384385
545548, 548 n. 5, 552, 554, 556, 559, pragmata, 33 n. 6
560 n. 40, 562 pragmatic, 2728, 29 n. 1, 33, 33 n. 6,
couplets, 548 n. 5 34, 42
hemistich, 548 n. 5 analysis, 36
meter, 548, 559 approach, 33
metrically, 548 n. 5 Gricean, 30
rhyme, 486 n. 16, 548 n. 5, 550 n. 18, modern, 41
559 Pragmatist, 40
scheme, 548 prceptes, 501
rhyming, 548 n. 5 predeterminer, 381382
syllables, 548 n. 5 prdicat(s), 339, 341
verse, 548 n. 5 verbaux, 339
posie, 123 n. 12, 125126 predicate(s), 7, 2829, 29 n. 1, 68, 74,
arabe ancienne, 323 135137, 141, 145, 149150, 155, 158
poet, 189, 543 n. 1, 544545, 545 n. 3, n. 13, 159, 162163, 163 n. 21,
547, 553 n. 27, 559560, 560 n. 38, 165166, 168, 171173, 173 n. 31,
561563 216, 230, 368 n 4, 376, 378, 389, 397
Bedouin, 544545, 545 nn. 2, 4, 560, 563 n. 86
Jordanian, 546 adjectival, 155156
pote(s), 117 adverbial, 150
modernes, 116 clauses, 68
index 741
sense(s), 258259, 260 n. 21, 261, 227, 232, 238240, 316, 318, 320 n. 9,
263265, 267270, 272, 274279, 329, 336 n. 22, 338, 338 n. 23, 345
281282 n. 42, 283286 n. 27, 353, 353 n. 34, 362, 368 n. 6,
abstract, 275 370 n. 13, 378 n. 40, 402, 504, 504
contradictory, 272 n. 8, 505, 505 n. 12, 523
homonymic, 263, 266, 270 sibilant(s), 262, 407, 407, n. 5, 409, 413,
static, 264 418419
sentence, 367 pronunciation, 409410, 410, n. 8,
-initial position, 154, 156, 161, 170 420
n. 29, 172, 174, 185 sifa, 54, 140, 151, 157, 169, 169 n. 26,
nominal, 368 n. 4, 376, 376 n. 31, 377, 173 n. 30, 174
384, 388389, 393, 397, 399 muabbaha, 333, 341342
medieval theory of, 150, 156 signifiant(s), 507508, 508 n. 21, 510,
meaning, 28, 38 513, 520, 521 n. 49, 522
type(s), 149150, 156158, 158 n. 13, de cas, 510
162, 164168, 173 n. 31, 176177, de lanimit, 513
179181, 183185, 185 n. 38, 376, de mode, 509
398399 du temps, 513
Arabic, 157, 185 signifi(s), 509510, 520, 521 n. 49, 522
verbal, 368 n. 4, 376, 376 n. 31, sila, 59
377378, 384, 387389, 393, 397, Silesia, Dominicus Germanus of/de, 211
399 n. 2, 221, 223, 241
separator, 249 Simon, Udo, 28, 44
Serabit el-Khadim, 565 n. 3 sina, 3, 4 n. 1
Serhane, R., 257 n. 14, 288, 289 Sinai, 543 n. 1, 545, 545 n. 4, 560 n. 38,
serial verb construction(s), 675, 692, 694 563, 565, 566 n. 7, 9, 567 n. 9, 568,
n. 26, 698 572574, 574 n. 32, 575, 575 n. 34,
SVC, 692696 577578, 586 n. 70, 587, 587 n. 79
serial verbs, 692, 698699 bedouin dialect(s), 568, 571
serialization, 675 Sinaitic, 567568
Seuren, Pieter, 696, 698 Singer, Hans-Rudolf, 100, 100 n. 29, 112
Seville, 211 n. 2, 221222 single
x Ima, 680 phrase, 164
Sezgin, Fuat, 10, 23 word, 18
Shawqi Daif, 404, 404, n. 2, 405 singular, 157, 227, 380, 383, 397 n. 86,
Sheba, 603 659 n. 4, 660
Shibl, 198 n. 22 feminine, 224 n. 31
Shiites, 193, 206 form, 153
Shth, 195 as-Srf, 44, 117, 136 n. 8, 143 n. 43,
Shraybom-Shivtiel, 655, 661, 668, 673 144 n. 48, 145, 147, 164 n. 23, 336
Shuayb, 195 n. 22
Sbawayhi, 3, 3 n. 1, 4, 4 n. 2, 56, 6 a-irbn, 37, 44
n. 3, 7, 7 n. 5, 8, 10, 1215, 15 nn. lwh, 563
1112, 1718, 18 n. 14, 19, 19 n. 15, slots, 377380, 382, 385389
20, 2123, 2528, 28 n. 1, 29, 29 n. 1, Smith-Stark, Thomas, 219, 244
30, 30 n. 3, 3133, 33 nn. 45, 3443, Sobelman and Harrell, 596
45, 52, 62, 62 n. 15, 64, 64 n. 17, 129, Sobelman, Harvey, 605
135, 135 n. 2, 136138, 138 n. 19, social differentiation, 408
139, 139 n. 25, 140141, 141 n. 3233, sociality, 398
142, 142 n. 39, 143, 143 n. 43, 144 Socin, Albert, 544, 563
nn. 4951, 145147, 149, 151152, sociolinguistics, 291, 297, 307308, 652, 648
152 n. 3, 153, 156, 156 n. 11, 158159, sociolinguistique(s), 121, 123124
159 n. 14, 160162, 162 n. 18, 167, amricaine, 129
175, 178, 180, 182, 184, 187, 216217, Soden, Wolfram von, 605
index 747
Somekh, Sasson, 665, 673 n. 6, 444, 481, 486, 486 n. 17, 487,
sonorant(s), 256 n. 6, 257, 257 n. 12, 496, 640641, 641 n. 4, 643, 643 n. 9,
269, 282 644647, 649, 650 n. 12
non-, 257 n. 12 I, 488, 492
non-voiced, 256 n. 7 II, 490492, 497
voiced, 257 n. 12 III, 490492, 492 n. 25
Soqotri, 604 n. 17 V, 491492, 497
sorrow, 397 VI, 492, 497, 497 n. 29
Souchne, 690 IV, 489
Soudan, Sud, 128 V, 488, 490492, 492 n. 24, 497 n. 29
Soukhne, 697 VI, 488, 490492, 492 n. 24, 497 n. 29
sound-related interjections, 696697 VII, 488 n. 19, 496
source, 380, 392395 VIII, 488 nn. 1920
language, 455457, 466467 X, 488
sourdit, 515 n. 31 Arabic, 489
southern Sinai, 565 n. 2, 566567, 567 base, 372373, 488, 491
n. 12, 573, 573 n. 29, 575 n. 35 causative, 262
dialects, 567, 568 n. 14 denominative, 262
southern Sinaitic dialects, 568 derived, 372373
Southern Sudan, 609610 extension, 296297, 299
Sowayan, Saad Abdallah, 544, 563 final weak, 647
Spain, 210, 211 n. 2, 220, 223 n. 28, 639 laryngeal, 646
Spanish, 210, 210 n. 2, 212, 218, perfect, 645
222223, 223 n. 30, 225, 231, 294, perfective, 486487
296, 661 quadriliteral, 497 n. 29
tradition, 212 reflexive, 262
Sparvenfeldius, Johannes Gabriel, 220, verb, 478, 488
220 n. 23 Stephen, 610, 618620, 634, 638
speakers awareness, 5, 8, 12, 17, 20, 22 Stetkevych, Jaroslav, 654, 661, 673
speech(es) Stewart, Frank Henderson, 578, 580
acts, 27 n. 53, 584 n. 67, 586 n. 70, 591 n. 89,
community(ies) 404 592 n. 90
Arabic, 403 Stockholm, 222
context(s), 403405, 410, 410, Stoic, 33, 33 n. 6
n. 8, 413, 417, 423, 432433 Stolbova, Olga V., 605
event, 249250 stop(s) 407, 409, 418419
sounds, 657 glottal, 407
spontaneous, 427 uvular, 407
style(s), 406, 410, 414415, 419420, Strngns, 222
422, 426427, 427 n. 17, 429, strategy
431432 conversational, 417
religious, 251 stylistic, 417
Spitaler, Anton, 21, 2729, 3235, 47, stress, 18 n. 14, 21, 569572, 572 n. 25,
6872, 7475, 78, 78 n. 3, 86, 9294, 576, 591 n. 87, 617
97100, 105 n. 33, 112, 596 n. 6, 605 on the penultimate syllable, 219 n. 19
Sprenger, Alos, 125 stressed, 540, 569571, 573574
stabilit strike a blow to, 255257, 259260,
formelle, 317 263266, 270, 281282, 285286
standard, 404 structuration
variety, 403 binaire, 520521
state construct, 375 structure(s)
statif, 328 complement, 369, 369 n. 7, 379380,
status (manzila), 7 393 n. 79, 395396, 398399
stem(s), 371, 395, 436, 441442, 442 verbal, 369, 378380, 393 n. 79
748 index
n. 41, 233 n. 47, 235, 235 n. 49, 239, gl, yigl, 675, 677678, 697
258260, 263, 270271, 282, 284, 292, of the heart, 378 n. 41
292 n. 2, 293297, 297 n. 7, 298304, Hebrew, 596 n. 6
304 n. 11, 305, 307309, 367, 369, 369 of hope, 378 n. 41
n. 7, 370, 370 nn. 12, 14, 371, 379, imperative, 34
391, 393394, 397, 407, 435437, incomplete, 378 n. 41
439442, 447, 449, 451452, 475 n. 1, incorporation, 294
475476, 481, 482 n. 7, 484 n. 13, 486, integration, 292293, 295, 296 n. 4,
487 n. 18, 490, 497 n. 29, 498, 532 297298, 306309
n. 5, 572, 575 n. 36, 576577, 577 intransitive, 391, 435, 482, 695
n. 40, 578 n. 42, 580 nn. 50, 53, 581 lexical, 675
n. 56, 589 n. 83, 592 n. 91, 597 n. 8, li- +, 54
612613, 616, 619, 639641, 641 n. 4, -like constituent, 152
642644, 646, 646 n. 10, 647, 650 -like element, 160
n. 12, 649, 651, 676 n. 4, 679 loan, 297, 652
-acting constituent, 156 locutive and speech-related, 693
of action, 394 modal, 371 n. 17
l, yil, 675678, 681, 692696 monotransitive, 380
of approximation, 378 n. 41 +noun dichotomy, 165
banish, 391, 395, 399 +noun type, 165
base, 371 patterns, 660
of beginning, 378 n. 41 of praise and blame, 378 n. 41
bitransitive, 380 prepositional, 63
C- final, 649 prohibitive, 34
of change, 394 pseudo-, 73
classes, 391, 396, 399 remove, 392, 395
cognitive, 178 serial, 675
conjugation, 617 stem(s), 292, 294, 297, 299, 301, 306,
construction 641, 645, 649
bilingual periphrastic, 291, 297 foreign, 292, 306
coreferential, 92 I, 407
delocutive, 698 IV, 406407, 419
embedded, 307, 309 strong, 640, 644, 646 n. 10, 649
English, 305306 Syriac, 109
of esteem, 378 n. 41 system, 660
of experience, 394 temporal, 371 n. 17
final of transformation, 394
//, 650 transitive, 391
/h, 648649 bi-, 391
// or /h/, 642, 647 mono-, 391
laryngeal-, 646 n. 10, 648649, 650 tri-, 391, 380
n. 12 triliteral, 487
pharyngeal-, 650 n. 12 Turkic, 437, 440, 442 n. 6
weak, 641 type, 369, 372, 395
finite, 97, 155, 163, 178, 183, 294, 296, weak, 369, 372, 644, 649
371372, 372 n. 19, 378, 378 n. 42, final, 252253, 640, 644, 647650,
379380, 384, 394 n. 84, 395, 491 650 n. 12, 648649
foreign, 292293, 295, 306309 verbal, 5455, 57, 72, 86 n. 23, 89,
imperfect, 228 108109, 608, 611614, 616, 640
embedded, 307 analysis, 151, 153154, 154 n. 8,
morphologically, 303304, 306 155157
transitive, 293 clause, 163
form(s), 294, 407, 409, 640 construction, 155
754 index